CHEMISTRY

Workbook Cum Question Bank with Answers

CLASS-XII (CHSE)

Writer

Dr. Uttam Kumar Biswal

Reader in Chemistry (Retd.)
B. J. B. (Autonomous) College,
Bhubaneswar

SCHEDULED CASTES & SCHEDULED TRIBES

RESEARCH & TRAINING INSTITUTE (SCSTRTI)
ST & SC DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT
BHUBANESWAR

2022
The ST & SC Development Department, Government of Odisha has introduced an innovative
education programme for the students appearing in +2 Science and Commerce examination
pursuing studies in the ST & SC Development Department Schools (EMRS & HSS) to ensure
quality education at +2 level. In this regard it is to mention that an Academic Performance
Monitoring Cell (APMC) has been set up in SCSTRTI to monitor the Training and Capacity
Building of Teachers of SSD Higher Secondary Schools and Ekalavya Model Residential
Schools (EMRS) to enhance quality education for better performance of the students
appearing +2 Science and Commerce examination.
Since March 2020 due to Covid-19 Pandemic Situation, the state government has closed all
the HSS & EMRS and online classes were going on. The CBSE & CHSE Board were unable to
conduct the offline examinations in 2020 and 2021. Since a few months, offline classes are
going on. To combat the situation, the CBSE & CHSE Boards have introduced alternate
comprehensive examination patterns such as 1st and 2nd Term End Examinations and Quarter
End Examinations etc. to be operative from 2021-22 academic session. Accordingly the
Question patterns have completely being changed by both Boards.
To face this situation, the APMC has designed Workbook-Cum-Question Bank with Answers
as per the new direction of the Boards. The best of subject experts have been roped to
formulate self-contained and self-explanatory “Workbook-Cum-Question Bank with
Answers” as per the new pattern of examinations of CHSE & CBSE Boards. They have tried to
make the material as far as activity based and solution based as feasible.
I would like to extend my sincere thanks to Prof. (Dr.) A. B. Ota, Advisor-Cum-Director and
Special Secretary, SCSTRTI. I would also like to thank Dr. S. C. Das, SLPM, APMC and the team of
subject experts for their sincere effort in bringing out the Question Bank in a very short time.
The Workbook-Cum-Question Bank with Answers will cater to the needs of students during
this pandemic situation and will be extremely useful for students of Science and Commerce of
CBSE and CHSE to face the new pattern of examination, as these are designed accordingly.

Ranjana Chopra
Principal Secretary
ST & SC Development Department
Govt. of Odisha
An innovative education programme has been initiated by setting up an Academic Performance
Monitoring Cell (APMC) in Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes Research and Training
Institute (SCSTRTI) to monitor the Training and Capacity Building of Teachers of SSD Higher
Secondary Schools and Ekalavya Model Residential Schools (EMRS) and to ensure quality
education of students studying at +2 level under the administrative control of the ST & SC
Development Department.
Due to Covid-2019 pandemic situation, all the schools under administrative control of ST & SC
Development Department are closed since March 2020. As a result different Boards were not
able to conduct offline examinations in 2020 and 2021. As an alternative, CBSE Board and CHSE
Board have made comprehensive examination patterns in the form of 1st & 2nd Term End and 3rd
Quarter End examinations respectively to be followed from 2021-22 academic session.
The present situation demands to fullfill the desire of students and designed new pattern of
questions, which will cater to the need of students to face the examinations boldly without any
fear and nervousness. The APMC under the banner of SCSTRTI has taken the initiative to
prepare Workbook-Cum-Question Bank with Answers in Physics, Chemistry, Biology (Botany
& Zoology), Mathematics, Information Technology / Computer Science, English and Odia of
Science stream and Business Mathematics and Statistics, Business Studies and Management,
Accounting, Cost Accountancy, Fundamentals of Management Accounting, Fundamentals of
Entrepreneurship, Banking & Insurance etc. of Commerce stream as per the new pattern of
questions to be adopted in both CBSE and CHSE Boards and prepared books separately.
The subject experts, who are the best in their respective subjects in the state have been roped in
for this exercise. They have given their precious time to make the new pattern of Question Bank
as activity and solution based as per the direction of both CBSE and CHSE Boards.
I hope this material will be extremely useful for the students preparing for the +2 examination
in different subject of Science and Commerce streams.

Prof. (Dr.) A. B. Ota

Advisor-Cum-Director & Special Secretary
SCSTRTI, Govt. of Odisha
 CONTENTS

Groups Type of Questions Page

A Very Short Answer Type

Questions

A1 - Multiple Choice Questions 01

A2 - Fill in the blanks 49

A3 - Very short answer questions 91

B Short Answer Type Questions 126

C Long type question 263

 CHAPTERS
Sl. No. Unit Chapter

1. I Solid State

2. II Solutions

3. III Electrochemistry

4. IV Chemical Kinetics

5. V Surface chemistry

6. VI p-Block Elements (Group 15 & Group 16)

p-Block Elements (Group 17 & Group 18)

VIII d- and f - Block Elements

IX Coordination Compounds

X Halo Alkanes and Haloarenes

XI Alcohols, Phenols and Ethers

XII Aldehydes, Ketones and Carboxylic Acids

XIII Aminies

XIV Biomolecules

XV Polymers

***
 Very Sort Answer Type Questions
Multiple Choice Questions : Group – A(1)
UNIT - I
1. The number of atoms/molecules present in one body centred cubic unit cell is:
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 4 (d) 6
2. Wax is an example of:
(a) Ionic crystal (b) Covalent crystal
(c) Molecular crystal (d) Metallic crystal
3. In a crystal, the atoms are located at the position of ....... potential energy.
(a) Zero (b) Infinite (c) Minimum (d) Maximum
4. In a solid lattice the cation has left a lattice site and is located at an interstitial position.
The lattice defect is known as:
(a) Interstitial defect (b) Valency defect
(c) Frenkel defect (d) Schottky defect
5. Ionic solids with Schottky defects contain in their structure:
(a) Equal number of cations and anion vacancies
(b) Interstitial anions and anion vacancies
(c) Cation vacancies only
(d) Cation vacancies and interstitial cations
6. Which crystal has the largest lattice energy ?
(a) KCl (b) MgO (c) LiBr (d) NaF
7. A substance Ax By crystallies in fcc lattice in which atom ‘A’ present each corner of
the cube and atom B occupy the centre of each face of the cube. The formula of the
compound is –
(a) AB3 (b) A4B3 (c) A3B (d) AB2
8. There are ________ primitive and ________ centered unit cells
(a) 6, 7 (b) 7, 7 (c) 6, 6 (d) 7, 6
9. The Bravais lattice where a = b = c,       900 is _________.
(a) cubic (b) Rhomboheded (c) Triclinic (d) none of these
10. In the orthorhombic crystal system the edge length and axial angles are ____ and
______ respectively.
(a) a  b  c ,       900 (b) a  b  c,       900
(c) a  b  c ,       900 (d) a = b = c,       900
11. A unit cell consists of a cube in which there are ‘A’ atoms at the corners and ‘B’ atoms
at the face centred and ‘A’ atoms are missing from 2-corners in each unit cell. The
formula of the compound ________.
(a) AB3 (b) A2B (c) AB4 (d) A3B4\
12. Octahedral voids are present / unit cell of ccp or fcc at
(a) at the body cube (b) at the centre of each adge
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) no. of octahedral void = no. of tetrahedral void.

[1]
13. In the ABAB - Pattern of packing (hcp) –
(a) Tetrahedral voids of second layer is covered
(b) fourth layer atom is aligned with 1st layer atom
(c) Octahedral voids of 2nd layer are covered in 3rd layer.
(d) both octahedral and tetrahedral voids are covered.
14. ABCABC ............. type predicts _____ structure.
(a) hcp (b) ccp (c) scp (d) none of these
15. The co-ordination number one dimensional close packing is
(a) 2 (b) four (c) six (d) zero
16. What type of solid is p-nitrophenol ?
(a) Ionic (b) covalent
(c) molecular (d) H-bonded molecular solid
17. Which of the following solid is considered as liquid at all temperature ?
(a) Quick lime (b) hornsilver (c) glass (d) gypsum
18. Solid ‘A’ is very hard electrical insulater in solid as well as molten state. It melts at very
high temperature. What type of solid is it ?
(a) Ionic (b) covalent (network)
(c) Molecular (d) metallic
19. The number atoms per unit cell is _____, if cubic base unit cell having one atom on each
corner and two atoms on each body diagonal.
(a) 09 (b) 06 (c) 05 (d) 08
20. The number of voids in ccp per unit cell is
(a) 08 (b) 04 (c) 12 (d) 06
21. Packing efficiency of ccp structure is ___________ .
(a) 74% (b) 68% (c) 52.4% (d) 79%
22. The type of cubic lattices to which iron crystal belongs if the cell has an edge length of
268 pm and density of the crystal is 7.86 g/cm3 (At wt of Fe = 56, NA = 6.02 1023 mol1 )
is _____
(a) fcc (b) cubic
(c) bcc (d) end central cubic
23. A compound forms hcp structure. The total number of voids per mole of it is ______.
(a) 1.806  1024 (b) 1.806  1023 (c) 6.02  10 23 (d) 1.2  1024
24. Which of the following is not a consequence of Frenkel defect ?
(a) The electrical conductivity of crystal is expected to increase.
(b) The presence of holes decreases the stability of the crystal.
(c) Due to vacant sites the density decreases.
(d) The dielectric constant in expected to increase.
25. K+Cl–(s) on treating in an atmosphere potassium vapour looks
(a) violet (b) pink (c) yellow (d) white
26. Which of the following does not occur on heating ZnO ?
(a) It turns yellow on heating & white when cold.
(b) This is a case of metal excess defect.
(c) Can function as n-type semiconductor.
(d) The crystal becomes diamagnetic on heating.

[2]
27. Choose the incorrect satement` from the following :
(a) e in anion vacancy creates F-centre (F = Farbe)
(b) In defective ZnO, the Zn2+ ions occupy certain interstitial sites.
(c) Semiconductors are produced due to impurity defect.
(d) Conductivity ionic solid can be explained by e gas model.
28. ‘K’ crystalises in bcc lattice. Hence the co-ordination number of element in the crystal
structure is :
(a) 0 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 8
29. Defective zinc oxide can be represented with formula –
(a) ZnO (b) Zn1+xO (c) ZnO1+x (d) Zn O1+y
30. Nickel oxide has formula Ni0.98 O1.00 with Ni (II) and Ni(III). The percentage of Ni2+ is
__________.
(a) 95.9 (b) 4.1 (c) 96.1 (d) None of these
31. A crystal has ionic radii ratio 0.155 to 0.225. So the co-ordination number will be
________.
(a) 3 (b) 4 (c) 6 (d) 8
32. In a face centred cubic lattice, a unit cell in shared equally by _______ no. of unit cells.
(a) 4 (b) 2 (c) 6 (d) 8
UNIT - II
33. Molality is expressed in :
(a) Grams/litre (b) Litres/moles (c) Moles/litre (d) Moles/kg.
34. The relative lowering in vapour pressure is proportional to the ratio between the number
of:
(a) solute molecules to solvent molecules
(b) solute molecules to the total number of molecules in solution
(c) solvent molecules to the total number of molecules in solution
(d) solvent molecules to the total number of ions in solution
35. At 25°C, the highest osmotic pressure is expected by 0.1 M solution of :
(a) CaCl2 (b) KCl (c) Glucose (d) Urea.
36. Which of the following salts will have the same value of van’t Hoff factor (i) as that of
K4[Fe(CN)6]:
(a) Al2(SO4)3 (b) NaCl (c) Al(NO3)3 (d) Na2SO 4
37. An elevation in b.p. of a solution of l0g of solute (molar mass = 100) in 100 g of water
is Tb . The ebullioscopic constant for water is :
(a) 10 (b) 10 Tb (c) Tb (d) Tb /10
38. Which concentration term is not affected by temperature ?
(a) Normality (b) Molality (c) Molarity (d) Formality.
39. A 5% solution of cane sugar (molar mass = 342) is isotonic with 1 % solution of a
substance X. The molar mass of X is :
(a) 171.2 (b) 68.4 (c) 34.2 (d) 136.2.
40. Which has highest boiling point under 1 atm pressure ?
(a) 0.l M NaCl (b) 0.1 M Sucrose (c) 0.l M BaCl2 (d) 0.1 M Glucose.

[3]
41. An aqueous solution freezes at -0.1860C (Kf = 1.86, Kb = 0.512). What is the elevation
in boiling point ?
(a) 0.186 (b) 0.512 (c) 0.86 (d) 0.0512.
42. For determination of the molar mass of colloids, polymers and proteins which colligative
property is used ?
(a) Diffusion pressure (b) Atmospheric pressure
(c) Osmotic pressure (d) Turgor pressure.
43. Colligative properties of the solutions are those properties which depend on :
(a) shapes of the particles (b) nature of the solvent
(c) nature of the particles only (d) number of the particles only
44. 2.5 litres of 1M NaOH solution is mixed with a 3.0 litres of 0.5 M NaOH solution.
The molarity of the resulting solution is :
(a) 0.80 M (b) 1.0 M (c) 0.73 M (d) 0.50 M.
0
45. The average osmotic pressure of benzoic acid is 7.8 bar at 37 C. What is the concentration
aqueous KCl solution that could be used in blood stream ?
(a) 0.16 mol L–1 (b) 0.32 mol L–1 (c) 0.60 mol L–1 (d) 0.45 mol L–1
46. The van’t Hoff factor for a solute that associates in solution is :
(a) zero (b) 1.0 (c) less than 1 (d) more than 1

 k f  1.86 K kg 
47. An aqueous solution freezes at –0.1860C  k  0.5120 C 
 b 
The boiling point of the solution will be _______0C.
(a) 100.186 (b) 100.512 (c) 100.86 (d) 100.512
48. For an ideal solution of two volatile liquids (1 & 2), the total vapour Ptotal is represented
as :

(a) Ptotal = x1p10 + x 2 p02 (b) Ptotal  p10   p 02  p10  x 2

(c) The total vapour pressure over the solution varies linearly with mole fraction of
one component
(d) All are correctly represented.
49. Choose the incorrect statement :
(a) The composition of the vapour phase i.e. above the solution obeys Dalton’s law.
(b) At equilibrium, vapour phase will be always rich in the component which is more
volatile
(c) When x2  0 the the vapour pressure represents p 02 .
(d) Higher the value of KH at a given pressure lower in the solubility of the gas in liquid.
50. Increasing the temperature of an aqueous solution will cause
(a) molality to decrease (b) molarity to decrease
(c) mole fraction to decrease (d) wt % to increase
51. The boiling point of equimolal aq. solution will be minimum for
(a) Benzene diazonium chloride (b) calcium nitrate
(c) silver chloride (d) glucose

[4]
52. An X molal solution of a compound in benzene has made fraction of solute equal to 0.2.
The value of X is nearly ________.
(a) 62.4 (b) 7.0 (c) 0.016 (d) 2.6
53. Molarity of liquid HCl if density is 1.17g/m is ________ .
(a) 36.5 (b) 18.25 (c) 32.05 (d) 42.10
54. The depression is freezing point, Tf is directly propertional to
(a) mole fraction of solution (b) molarity of the solution
(c) molality of the solution (d) moles of the solvent
55. Normality of 0.3 M phosphorous acid (H3PO3) is ________
(a) 0.5 (b) 0.6 (c) 0.9 (d) 0.1
56. An azeotropic solution of two liquids has boiling point lower than either of two when it
(a) shows a negative deviation from Roult’s law
(b) shows no deviation from Roult’s law
(c) shows positive deviation from Roult’s law
(d) is saturated
57. Benzoic acid undergoes dimerisation in benzene solution. The Vant’s Half factor (i) is
related to the degree of association (x) of the acid as
 x  x
(a) i = (1-x) (b) i  1 x (c) i   1   (d) 1  1  
 2  2
58. Which of the following 0.1 m aq. solution will have the lowest freezing point i.e. maximum
T f ?
(a) Aluminium sulfate (b) glucose
(c) urea (d) potassium iodide
59. The volume of water to be added to 100 c.c of 0.5 N H2SO4 to get decinormal solution
is __________ cc.
(a) 100 (b) 450 (c) 400 (d 500
60. 18 gram glucose, C6H12O6 is dissolved in 1 kg of water is a saucepan. The boiling point
of the solution is _________ K.
(a) 373.052 (b) 100.052 (c) 101 (d) 273
61. The boiling point of benzene is 353.23K. When 1.80 g of non-volatile solute was dissolved
in 90 gram benzene, the boiling point is raised to 354.11 K. The molar mass of the solute
is ______ (Kb for benzene 2.53 K kg mol–1.
(a) 57.5 (b) 56.5 (c) 5.57 (d) 157.5
62. Which of the following is not the characteristic of ideal solution ?
(a)  mix H=0 (b)  mix V=0 (c) A–A and B–B intraction  A–B
interaction
(d) cohesive intraction is same as adhesive intraction.
63. Which of the following is not an ideal solution ?
(a) n-hexane, n-heptane (b) Bromoethan and chloroethane
(c) benzene and tolune (d) Acetone and chloroform

[5]
UNIT - III
64. The mass of a substance liberated at the electrode is directly proportional to its
(a) atomic mass (b) equivalent mass
(c) molecular mass (d) none of these
65. Standard electrode potentials are :
Fe+2/Fe, E0 = –0.44; Fe+3/Fe+2, E0=0.77
Fe+2, Fe+3 and Fe block are kept together, then
(a) Fe+3 increases (b) Fe3+ decreases
(c) Fe+3 remains unchanged (d) Fe+2 decreases
66. The unit of equivalent conductivity is
(a) ohm–1 cm2 (equivalent)–1 (b) ohm cm2 (g-equivalent)
(c) ohm cm2 (d) ohm–1 m–1
67. The standard reduction potentials for Fe2+/Fe and Sn2+/Sn electrodes are –0.44 V and
–0.14 V respectively. The standard e.m.f of the cell with reaction.
Fe2+ + Sn  Fe + Sn2+ is :
(a) +0.30 V (b) –0.30V (c) +0.58 V (d) –0.58V
68. Total charge on 1 mole of a monovalent metal ion is equal to:
(a) 9.65  104 coulombs (b) 1.6  10–19 coulombs
(c) 6.2  1018 coulombs (d) none of these
69. ––— grams of chlorine can be prepared by the electrolysis of molten Sodium Chloride
with 10 amperes current passed for 10 minutes.
(a) 2.2 (b) 4.4 (c) 3.8 (d) 5
70. The unit of cell constant is —––
(a) ohm–1 cm2 (b) cm–1
(c) ohm–1 cm1– (d) ohm–1 cm2/gm equiv
71. 96500 coulomb will deposit — of metal.
(a) one electrochemical equivalent (b) one gm
(c) one gm equivalent (d) one gm molecular mass
72. Four alkali metals A, B, C, D are having respectively standard electrode potential as
–3.05, –1.66, –0.8 and –0.40 V. Which one will be more reducing ?
(a) A (b) B (c) C (d) D
–1
73. Given 1/a = 0.5 cm , R = 50 ohm, N = 1.0. The equivalent conductance of the electrolytic
cell is
(a) 10 ohm–1 cm2 gm eq–1 (b) 20 ohm–1 cm2 gm eq–1
(c) 300 ohm–1 cm2 gm eq–1 (d) 100 ohm–1 cm2 gm eq–1
74. Which of the following expression is correct ?
(a) G 0   nFE 0cell (b) G 0   nFE 0cell

(c) G 0  2.303RTnFE 0cell (d) G 0   nF log k C

[6]
75. The reduction potential values of ‘M’, ‘N’ and ‘O’ are + 2.46, – 1.13 and – 3.13V
respectively. Which of the following order is correct regarding their reducing property ?
(a) O> N > M (b) O > M > N (c) M > N > O (d) M > O > N
76. Electrolytes conduct electricity due to movement of
(a) atoms (b) ions (c) electrons (d) molecules
77. Which of the following may not be present in all galvanic cell ?
(a) electrolyte (b) anode (c) cathode (d) salt bridge
78. The metal with greater oxidation potential is
(a) stronger oxidant (b) stronger reductant
(c) easily reduced (d) can’t be predicted
79. Which of the following solutions can be stored in copper vessel ?
(a) AgNO3 (b) AuCl3 (c) ZnCl2 (d) all of these
80. Out of Cu, Ag, Zn and Mg the metal which can displace all others from their aqueous
salt solution is
(a) Cu (b) Zn (c) Ag (d) Mg
81. For a redox reaction to be spontaneous, the e.m.f. should be
(a) –ve (b) +ve
(c) zero (d) any one of these
82. Passage of 96500 coulomb of electricity liberates .......... litre of O2 at NTP during
electrolysis :
(a) 5.6 (b) 6.5 (c) 22.2 (d) 11.2
83. Which of the following statements is wrong ?
(a) Na+ has different molar cunductance at infinite dilution in NaCl and NaBr
C
(b) degree of dissociation (a) = 


(c) Kohlraush law is used to find   value for weak electrolytes

(d)    H 2SO 4   2   H       SO 42 

UNIT - IV
84. Which of the following is correct for a first order reaction ?
(a) t1/ 2  a (b) t1/ 2  a (c) t1/ 2  a 0 (d) t1/ 2  a 2
85. Following is the graph between log t1/2 and log a (a = initial concentration) for a given
reaction at 27°C. Hence order of the reaction is

(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3

[7]
86. Consider the 2A + B  Products
When concentration of B alone was doubled, the halflife did not change. When the
cone. of A alone was doubled, the rate increased by two times. The unit of the rate
constant for the reaction is
(a) mol lit–1 sec–1 (b) s–1 (c) L mol–1 s–1 (d) no unit
87. The rate of a first order reaction is 1.5  10–2 mol L–1 min–1 at 0.5 M concentration of
the reactant the halflife of the reaction is
(a) 23.1 minutes (b) 8.73 minutes (c) 7.53 minutes (d) 0.383 minutes.
88. The rate constant for the reaction 2 N 2 O5  4 NO2  O2 is 3.0  10 5 S 1 . If the rate is
2.4  10–6 mol lit s–1, then the conc. of N2O5 in (mol lit–1) is
(a) 1.4 (b) 1.2 (c) 0.04 (d) 0.8
89. In a first order reaction A  B, if k is rate constant and initial concentration of the
reactant A is 0.5 , then the halflife is
log 2 log 2 ln 2 0.693
(a) (b) (c) (d) 0.5 k
k k 0.5 k
90. Which one of the following statement for order of reaction is not correct ?
(a) Order can be determined experimentally
(b) Order of reaction is equal to the sum of the power of the concentration terms in
differential rate law
(c) It is not affected with stoichiometric coefficient of reactants
(d) Order reaction can be more than three.
91. A chemical reaction proceeds following formula k  P.Z .e  Ea / RT . Which of the following
process will increase the rate of reaction ?
(a) Lowering of Ea (b) Lowering of P
(c) Lowering of Z (d) independent of all the above factor
92. The rate at which a substance reacts depends on its
(a) atomic mass (b) equivalent mass
(c) Molecular mass (d) active mass
93. According to collision theory
(a) all collisions are sufficiently violet
(b) all collisions are responsble for product formation
(c) all collisions are effective
(d) only a fraction of collisions are effective which have enough energy to form products.
94. For the reaction A 
 B, the rate of the reaction is quadrupled when the concentration
n
of A is double, the rate of the reaction is r  k  A  , the value of ‘n’ is
(a) 1 (b) zero (c) 3 (d) 2
95. A zero order reaction is one
(a) in which the reactants do not react.
(b) in which one of the reactants is large excess
(c) Whose rate is uniform and not affected by time.
(d) whose rate inceases with time

[8]
96. In a first order reaction, the concentration of reactant decreases from 1.0 M to 0.25 M
in 20 minutes. The value of specific rate is
(a) 69.32 (b) 6.932 (c) 0.6932 (d) 0.06932
97. Which plot can give us the value of activation energy ?
1 1
(a) k versus T (b) versus T (c) log k versus (d) C versus T..
k T
98. Activation energy of a chemical reaction can be determined by
(a) changing the cncentration of reactants
(b) evaluating rate constant at standard temperature
(c) evaluating rate constants at two different temperature
(d) evaluating velosities of reaction at two different temperature
99. 2 N 2O5  g  
 4NO 2  g   O 2  g 
What is the ratio of the rate of decomposition of N2O5 to the rate of formation of NO2?

(a) 112 (b) 2:1 (c) 1:4 (d) 4:1

100. By increasing temperature by 10 K, the rate of reaction becomes double. How many
times the rate of reaction will be if the temperature is increased from 303 K to 353 K ?
(a) 4 (b) 8 (c) 16 (d) 32
101. The elementary step of the reaction 2Na + Cl2  2NaCl is found to follow a third
order Kinetics. The molecularity of the reaction is
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
102. 75% of a first order reaction was completed in 32 minutes; when was 50% of the
reaction completed ?
(a) 4 minutes (b) 8 minutes (c) 24 minutes (d) 16 minutes
103. For the hypothetical reaction, 2A  3C the reaction rate is given by
d  A  1 d A 1 d A d  A
(a) r (b) r (c) r  (d) r 
dt 2 dt 3 dt dt
dx 2 0
104. Rate expression of a chemical change is  k  A   B C 
dt
The order of the reaction is
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 1 (d) 0
105. The rate law for the single step reaction 2A + B  2C is given by
(a) rate = k[A][B] (b) rate = k[A]2[B] (c) rate = k[A][B] (d) rate = [A]2[B]0
106. What will be amount of 12853 I
(tt/2 = 25 minutes) left after 50 minutes ?

(a) one half (b) one fourth (c) one third (d) one eighth
107. Time required to decompose half the substance for nth order reaction is inversely
proportional to
(a) a 1/2 (b) an–2 (c) an–1 (d) an+1
108. T1/2 of C14 isotope is 5770 years. Time after which 80% of isotope left is
(a) 1861 years (b) 186 years (c) 2780 years (d) 278 years

[9]
109. Temperature dependant equation can be written as
Ea Ea
(a) ln k  ln A  (b) ln k  ln A 
RT RT
RT
(c) log k  log A  (d) All of the above
Ea
110. Rate of reaction depends upon
(a) temperature (b) catalyst
(c) concentration (d) all of these
111. t1/2 of first order reaction is
(a) directly proportional to initial concentration
(b) independent of initial concentration
(c) directly proportional to square of initial concentration
(d) inversely proportional to initial concentration.
112. Molecularity of a reaction is determined by
(a) stoichiometric representation of a reaction.
(b) reaction of atoms
(c) both (d) none
113. In a reaction, A   B , if concentration of A is doubled, the rate of reaction
becomes 8 times. The order of reaction is :
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 1.5
114. Acidic hydrolysis of ester is an example of
(a) 1st order reaction (b) 2nd order reaction
(c) zero order reaction (d) pseudo 1st order reaction
115. The unit of rate constant for zero order reaction is
(a) sec–1 (b) mole litr–1 sec–1
(c) mole–1 lit sec–1 (d) mole–1 lit–1 sec–1
116. A catalyst has no effect on
(a) rate of forward reaction (b) activation energy
(c) threshold energy (d) heat of reaction
Unit - V
117. Tyndall effect is observed in :
(a) Solution (b) Precipitate (c) Sol (d) Vapours
118. Which is the characteristic of a catalyst ?
(a) It changes equilibrium constant (b) It initiates a reaction
(c) It alters the rate of reaction
(d) It increases average KE of molecules
119. A liquid is found to scatter a beam of light but leaves no residue when passed through
the filter paper. The liquid can be described as :
(a) A suspension (b) Oil
(c) Colloidal sol (d) True solution

[ 10 ]
120. Cloud is an example of :
(a) Solid dispersed in gas (b) Liquid dispersed in gas
(c) Liquid dispersed in solid (d) Solid dispersed in liquid
121. In physical adsorption, gas molecules are bound on the solid surface by :
(a) Chemical forces (b) Electrostatic forces
(c) Gravitational forces (d) van der Waals forces.
122. How many layers are involved in chemical adsorption ?
(a) One (b) Two (c) Many (d) Zero.
123. In the coagulation of colloidal sol of As2S3 which has minimum coagulating value ?
(a) NaCl (b) KCl (c) BaCl2 (d) AlCl3
124. In which of the following, electrophoresis is not observed.?
(a) Suspensions (b) Emulsions (c) Sugar solution (d) Gold sol.
125. Action of catalyst depends upon :
(a) mass (b) solubility (c) particle size (d) none of these.
126. At CMC, the surface molecules :
(a) Decompose (b) Become completely soluble
(c) Associate (d) Dissociate.
127. A biological catalyst is essentially :
(a) An enzyme (b) A carbohydrate
(c) An amino acid (d) A nitrogeneous base.
128. Which of the following is used for ending charge on colloidal solution ?
(a) Electrons (b) Electrolytes
(c) Positively charged ions (d) Compounds.
129. In colloidal particles, the range of diameter is :
(a) 1 to 100 nm (b) 1 to 1000 nm
(c) 1 to 100 cm (d) 1 to 100 m.
130. Fog is an example of colloidal system of:
(a) Gas in liquid (b) Liquid in gas, (c) Solid in liquid (d) Liquid in liquid.
131. In the following, the hydrophobic colloid is :
(a) Starch (b) Gelatin (c) Gum (d) Sulphur.
132. Milk can be preserved by adding a few drops of
(a) Formic acid solution (b) Formaldehyde solution
(c) Acetic acid solution (d) Acetaldehyde solution.
133. Which of the following is the example an associated colloid ?
(a) soap (b) cellulose (c) protein (d) carbon powder
134. Which of the following is not colloid?
(a) Chlorophyll (b) Smoke (c) Milk (d) Fog
135. Fog is a colloidal system of
(a) Liquid dispersed in gas (b) Gas dispersed in liquid
(c) Solid dispersed in liquid (d) Solid dispersed in gas
136. Brownian movement is due to
(a) Temperature fluctuation within the liquid phase
(b) Attraction and repulsion between the charges on colloidal particles
(c) Impact of the molecules of the dispersion medium on colloidal particles
(d) Convention current

[ 11 ]
137. Tyndal effect in the colloidal solution is due to
(a) Scattering of light (b) Reflection of light
(c) Absorption of light
(d) Presence of electrically charged particles
138. Which is an example of Emulsion ?
(a) Jelly (b) Boot polish (c) Froth (d) Milk
139. Which of the following is not a negatively charged sol ?
(a) gold sol (b) starch sol (C) cds sol (d) haemoglobin
140. Cow milk is an example of natural emulsion, it is stabilised by
(a) Fat (b) Water (c) Casein (d) Mg2+ ion
141. Gelatine is mostly used in making ice creams in order to
(a) Prevent making of a colloid
(b) Stabilize the colloid and prevent crystallization
(c) Stabilize the mixture (d) Enrich the arome.
142. On adding a few drops of dil. HCl to freshly precipitated Fe (OH)3 a red coloured
colloidal solution is obtained. The phenomenon is known as
(a) Peptization (b) Dialysin
(c) Protective action (d) Dissolution
143. Soap form colloidal solution in water and removes grease from clothes by
(a) Coagulation (b) Emulsification
(c) Adsorption (d) Absorption
144. Lyophilic sols are
(a) Irreversible sols (b) prepared from inorganic compounds
(c) coagulated by adding electrolyte (d) self- stabilizing
145. Among the electrolytes Na2SO4, CaCl2, Al2(SO4)3 and NH4Cl the most effective
coagulating agent for Sb2S3 sol is
(a) Na2SO 4 (b) CaCl2 (c) Al2(SO4)3 (d) NH4Cl
146. Adsorption is multilayer in case of
(a) Physical adsorption (b) Chemical adsorption
(c) both physical and chemical adsorption (d) None
147. The term sorption stands for
(a) Adsorption (b) Absorption
(c) Both adsorption and absorption (d) Desorption
148. Adsorption is accompanied by
(a) Decrease in enthalpy and increase in entropy
(b) Increase in enthalpy and increase in entropy
(c) Decrease in enthalpy and decrease in entropy
(d) No change in enthalpy or entropy
149. Which of the following is not correctly matched ?
(a) Butter-Gel (b) Milk-emulsion (c) Fog-aerosol (d) Dust-solid sol
Unit - VI
150 Zone refining is used for the
(a) Concentration of an ore (b) Reduction of metal oxide
(c) Purification of metal (d) Purification of an ore
151. Which of the following processes is used for the concentration of Bauxite ?
(a) Froth floatation (b) Leaching
(c) Liquation (d) Magnetic separation

[ 12 ]
152. The earthy impurities associated with mineral used in metallurgy are called ?
(a) Slag (b) Flux (c) Gangue (d) Ore
153. In the electrorefining of copper, some gold is deposited as :
(a) Anode mud (b) Cathode mud (c) Cathode (d) Electrolyte
154. Most abundant metal on the surface of earth is :
(a) Iron (b) Aluminium (c) Calcium (d) Sodium
155. The lustre of a metal is due to
(a) its high density (b) its high polishing
(c) its chemical inertness (d) presence of free electrons
156. Which process is used for the purification of Al metal ?
(a) Hoop’s process (b) Bayer’s process
(c) Serpeak’s process (d) Hall’s process.
157. Which process represent the change,
Ti + 2I2  TiI4  Ti + 2I2
(a) Cupellation (b) van Arkel (c) Poling (d) Zone refining
158. The following equation represents a method of purification of nickel by,
320K 420K
Ni  2CO   Ni(CO) 4   Ni  4CO
Impure Pure
(a) Cupellation (b) Mond’s process
(c) van Arkel method (d) zone refining
159. Heating of pyrite ores in air to remove sulphur is known as :
(a) Calcination (b) Fluxing (c) Smelting (d) Roasting
160. Out of the following, which cannot be obtained by electrolysis of aqueous solution of
the salt ?
(a) Ag (b) Mg (c) Cu (d) Cr
161. The slag obtained during the extraction of copper pyrites is composed mainly of:
(a) Cu2S (b) FeSiO3 (c) CuSiO3 (d) SiO2
162. Which of the following is a mineral of iron ?
(a) Malachite (b) Cassiterite (c) Pyrolusite (d) Magnetite
163. The ore having two different metal atoms is
(a) haematite (b) galena (c) magnetite (d) Copperpyrite
164. In which of the following minerals, aluminium is not present ?
(a) Cryolite (b) Mica (c) Feldspar (d) Fluospar
165. In the froth floatation process for benefaction of the ores, ore particles float because
(a) they are light (b) they bear electrical charge
(c) their surface is not easily wetted by water (d) they are insoluble
166. Which of the following metal can be extracted by smelting ?
(a) Al (b) Mg (c) Fe (d) None of these
167. The most important element in the earth’s crust is
(a) Oxygen (b) Mg (c) Fe (d) Nitrogen

[ 13 ]
168. After levigation an ore is found to contain acidic impurities. Which of the following can
be used as flux during smelting operation ?
(a) CaCO 3 (b) SiO2
(c) HCl (d) both CaCO3 and SiO2
169. When lime stone is heated CO2 is given off. The metallurgical operation is
(a) Smelting (b) Reduction
(c) Calcination (d) Roasting
170. Which of the following pairs of metals is purified by van Arkel method ?
(a) Ni and Fe (b) Ga and In (c) Zr and Ti (d) Ag- and Au
171. Identify an alloy containing a non-metal as a constituent in it.
(a) Invar (b) Steel (c) Bell metal (d) Bronze
172. During electrolytic refining of copper some metals present as impurity settle as “anode
mud”. These are
(a) Sn and Ag (b) Pb and Zn (c) Ag and Au (d) Fe and Ni
173. Which of the following reaction is an example of calcination process ?
(a) 2Ag + 2HCl + (O)  2AgCl + H2O
(b) 2Zn + O2  2ZnO
(c) 2ZnS + 3O2  2ZnO + 2SO2
(d) MgCO3  MgO + CO2
174. During metallurgy roasting-calculation carried on –– furnace
(a) reverberatory (b) electric
(c) blast (d) muffle
175. The metal refined by liquation is _________
(a) tin (b) silver (c) gold (d) zinc
176. The metal fails to be purified by zone refining is
(a) Ge (b) Si (c) B (d) K
177. Metals having standard reduction potential between +0.5 to –0.5 V are usually
extracted by ––––––––––––
(a) smelting (b) calcination
(c) Aluminothermy (d) hydrometallurgy
UNIT - VII
178. The dipole moment of NF3 is less than NH3 because:
(a) F is more reactive than H
(b) NH3 forms associated molecules
(c) The resultant of the bond polarity is less
(d) The resultant of the individual polarities is opposed by the polarity of lone pair
179. The lightning in atmosphere cause the formation of:
(a) NO (b) O 3 (c) CO 2 (d) H2O 2
180. Calcium carbide when heated with nitrogen forms:
(a) Ca 2N 2 (b) Ca(CN)2 (c) CaCN 2 (d) Ca(CNO)2
181. Which hydride is most stable ?
(a) AsH3 (b) SbH3 (c) PH3 (d) NH3
182. Which is a poison ?
(a) Hg2Cl2 (b) As2O 3 (c) NaHCO3 (d) NaCl

[ 14 ]
183. Ammonia on heating with carbon dioxide under pressure gives:
(a) NH4HCO3 (b) (NH4)2CO3
(c) NH2COONH4 (d) (NH4)2CO
184. Basic oxide is:
(a) Bi2O3 (b) As2O 3 (c) P2 O 3 (d) N 2O 3
185. NaOH can absorb:
(a) N 2O 5 (b) NO (c) N 2 O (d) All of these
186. Which sulphide is insoluble in yellow ammonium sulphide ?
(a) SnS (b) As2S3 (c) Sb2S 3 (d) Bi2S3
187. Calcium phosphide is used in smoke screens because it:
(a) Burns to form soot (b) Gives PH3 which forms smoke
(c) Immediately catches fire in air (d) Is a gas which brings tears in eyes
188. Which of the following statements is not true
(a) NO2 can be prepared by heating Pb (NO3)2
(b) NO2 is red-brown gas
(c) NO2 is paramagnetic (d) NO2 readily dimerises to N2O4
189. Tailing of mercury is due to formation of
(a) mercuric oxide (b) mercurous oxide
(c) mercuric hydroxide (d) mercurous chloride
190. Which catalyst is used now-a-days in the contact process for the manufacturing of
sulphuric acid ?
(a) Nil (b) V2O 5 (c) Pt (d) Fe
191. About H2SO4 which is incorrect ?
(a) Reducing agent (b) Dehydrating agent
(c) Sulphonating agent (d) Highly viscous
192. When a lead storage battery is discharged
(a) SO2 is dissolved (b) Lead sulphate is consumed
(c) Lead is formed (d) Sulphuric acid is consumed
193. Sulphuric acid has great affinity for water because
(a) it hydrolyses the acid (b) it decomposes the acid
(c) acid forms hydrates with water (d) acid decomposes water
194. Structure of SF4 is
(a) octahedral (b) trigonal bipyramidal (See-saw-spahe)
(c) square planar (d) tetrahedral
195. Which of the following behaves as both oxidising and reducing agents ?
(a) H2SO4 (b) SO 2 (c) H2S (d) HNO3
196. Correct order of bond angle of H2O, H2S, H2Se, H2 Te is
(a) H2Te > H2Sc > H2S > H2O (b) H2O > H2S > H2Se > H2Te
(c) H2S > H2O > H2Se > H2Te (d) H2Se > H2S > H2Te > H2O
197. In which of the following all bonds are not equal ?
(a) SF4 (b) SiF4 (c) XeF4 (d) BF4–

[ 15 ]
198. When potassium ferrocyanide crystals are heated with conc. H2SO4 the gas evolved as
(a) SO 2 (b) NH3 (c) CO 2 (d) CO
199. What is wrong about H2S ?
(a) It is a covalent compound (b) It is a gas with bad smell
(c) It is a weak base in water
(d) It is strong reducing agent than H2O.
200. When natural rubber is heated with Sulphur, it is called
(a) vulcanisation (b) sulphonation (c) sulphurization (d) none of these
201. Tincture Iodine is
(a) Aqueous solution of Iodine (b) Solution of I2 in aqueous KI
(c) Alcoholic solution of I2 (d) Aqueous solution of KI
202. Which one is the strongest reducing agent ?
(a) HF (b) HCl (c) HBr (d) HI
203. The most powerful oxidising agent is
(a) Fluorine (b) Chlorine (c) Bromine (d) Iodine
204. Chlorine acts as a bleaching agent only in the presence of:
(a) dry air (b) sunlight (c) moisture (d) pure oxygen
205. Which of the following is a preparation of chlorine ?
(a) HCl acting on KMnO4 (b) HCl acting on MnO2
(c) Electrolysis of brine (d) All of these
206. Which one of the following reacts with chlorine to form phosgene ?
(a) SO 2 (b) CO 2 (c) NO (d) CO
207. Euchlorine is:
(a) a mixture of Cl2 and ClO2 (b) a chloride of europium
(c) a mixture of Cl2 and ClO7
(d) obtained by heating perchlorate and conc.HCl
208. Which of the following is a life saving mixture ?
(a) Mixture of Helium and Oxygen (b) Mixture of Neon and Oxygen
(c) Mixture of Neon and Nitrogen (d) Mixture of Argon and Oxygen
209. Which noble gas is most soluble in water ?
(a) He (b) Ar (c) Ne (d) Xe
210. The preparation of _____ compound by Bartlett confirms Xe can form compound.
(a) XeF2 (b) XeO3 (c) O2Pt F6 (d) Xe Pt F6
211. Which type of hybridization is involved in the structure of XeF2 ?
(a) sp2d2 (b) sp2d3 (c) sp3d (d) sp2
212. Which cannot be formed ?
(a) He2+ (b) He+ (c) He (d) He2
213. Which one of the following noble gases is the most abundant in atmosphere ?
(a) Kr (b) Ar (c) Ne (d) He
214. A rare gas that was dected in the sun before it was discovered on earth is
(a) helium (b) Neon (c) Krypton (d) Xenon
215. Which one of the following noble gases does not exist in atmosphere and is obtained
on radioactive disintegration ?
(a) Rn (b) Kr (c) Ne (d) Ar

[ 16 ]
216. Helium is added to the oxygen supply used by deep-sea divers because:
(a) it is less soluble in blood than nitrogen at high pressures.
(b) it is lighter than nitrogen.
(c) it is readily miscible with oxygen. (d) it is less poisonous than nitrogen.
217. The coloured discharge tubes for advertisement mainly contain:
(a) Xenon (b) Helium (c) Neon (d) Argon
218. Shape of XeOF4 is
(a) octahedral (b) square pyramidal (c) pyramidal (d) T-shaped
219. Bond angle in XeO3 is
(a) 107° (b) 119° (c) 92° (d) 103°
220. Among the following, the species having square planar geometry for the central atom
are :
(i) XeF4 (ii) SF4 (iii) [NiCl4]2– (iv) [PdCl4]2–
(a) (i) and (iv) (b) (i) and (ii) (c) (ii) and (iii) (d) (iii) and (iv)
221. The reddish brown colour ags formed when nitric oxide is oxidised by air is
(a) N 2O 5 (b) N 2O 4 (c) NO 2 (d) N 2O 3
222. Among trihalides of nitrogen, which are is the least basic
(a) NF3 (b) NCl3 (c) NBr3 (d) NI3
223. Which of the following oxides is the most acidic /
(a) N 2O 5 (b) P2 O 5 (c) As2O 5 (d) Sb2O 5
224. The number of hydrogen atoms attached to ‘P’ in hypo phosphorus acid (Phosphinic
acid) and its basicity are
(a) Zero, one (b) two, one (c) one, two (d) three, one
225. Which substance of the following has he highest proton affinity ?
(a) PH3 (b) H2O (c) H2S (d) NH3
226. The element which forms oxides in all oxidation states +I to +V is
(a) N (b) P (c) As (d) Sb
227. Which of teh following oxides of nitrogen is solid ?
(a) NO 2 (b) N 2 O (c) N 2O 3 (d) N 2O 5
228. A gas dissolved in FeSO4 solution giving brown ring. The gas is
(a) N 2O 3 (b) NO 2 (c) N 2 O (d) NO
229. The bond angle of PPP in P4 has
(a) 900 (b) 600 (c) 1200 (d) 750
230. Lead reacts with cold dilute HNO3, gives
(a) NH4NO 3 (b) N 2 O (c) NO (d) NO 2
231. Ortho phosphoric acid has the formula
(a) H3PO4 (b) HPO3 (c) H3PO2 (d) H3PO3
232. The order of thermal stability of the following compounds:
H2S, H2Se, H2 Te, H2O
(a) H2O > H2S > H2Se > H2Te (b) H2S > H2Se > H2Te > H2O
(c) H2S < H2Se < H2Te < H2O (d) H2O < H2S < H2Sw < H2Te

[ 17 ]
233. Sulphuric acid is a covalent molecule having hexavalent sulphur atom. Its structure is
(a) planar (b) Tetrahedral (c) octahedral (d) Trigonal
234. H2SO4 is a dibasic acid but the ionisation constants show
1  1
(a) K a2 K a2 (b) K a1  K a2 (c) K a2  K a1 (d) K a1  K a2
235. The maximum covalency of sulphur is
(a) 2 (b) 4 (c) 8 (d) 6
236. Which of the following halides is most acidic in aqueous medion ?
(a) PCl3 (b) SbCl3 (c) BiCl3 (d) CCl4
237. Among the acids of phosphorous H3PO4, H3PO2, H3PO3 , the basicity is
(a) H3PO2 > H3PO3 > H3PO4 (b) H3PO4 > H3PO3 > H3PO2
(c) H3PO3 > H3PO2 > H3PO4 (d) H3PO3 > H3PO4 > H3PO4
238. Water is oxidised to oxygen by
(a) ClO2 (b) KMnO4 (c) H2O 2 (d) Fluorine
239. Which of the following oxides of nitrogen is thermally most stable ?
(a) N 2 O (b) N 2O 5 (c) NO (d) N 2O 3

240. The gases produced in the reaction Pb(NO3)2  
 and  NH 4  NO3   are
respectively.
(a) N2O, NO (b) N2O, NO2 (c) NO, NO2 (d) NO2, N2O
241. Ozone is a powerful oxidising agent due to
(a) paramengetic nature (b) diamagaetic nature
(c) presence of nascent oxygen (d) none of these
242. When conc H2SO4 is heated with copper turnings gives
(a) SO 3 (b) SO 2 (c) HSO 3 (d) none of these
243. The bond angle of SO2 is
(a) 119.50 (b) 109.50 (c) 1250C (d) 900
244. In the test of SO2 with acidified K2Cr2O7 is green due to
(a) dichromate changes to cromate (b) formation of Cr2(SO4)3
(c) formation of K2SO4 (d) none of these
245. The brown ring in nitrate test is the formation of
(a) penta aqua nitrosonium iron (I) sulfate (b) [Fe(H2O)5 SO4] NO
(c) FeSO4. NO (d) none of these
246. Dioxygen is gas but sulphur is solid. This is due to
(a) Oxygen forms p  p multiple bond
(b) Sulphuri forms p  p multiple bond
(c) Sulphur has weak vander waals force. (d) S-S bond is weaker.
247. The depletion of O3 by CFC’s because of
(a) F free radicals (b) Cl free radicals
(c) formation of F2 molecule (d) none of these
248. The compounds of fluorine with oxygen is called
(a) fluorides of oxygen (b) oxides of fluorine
(c) oxofluro compounds (d) none of the above

[ 18 ]
249. Nitric oxide (NO) when released in air becomes
(a) Green (b) yellow (c) orange (d) brown
250. N2 is less reactive because
(a) it is inert gas (b) it is gas at room temperature
(c) it has high bond dissociation energy (d) N–N bond in weak
251 Correct order of electron affinities of halogeous is
(a) F > Cl > Br > I (b) I > Br > Cl > F
(c) Cl > F > I > Br (d) Cl > F > Br > I
252. Iodine readily dissolves in potassium iodide solution giving
(a) I– (b) KI– (c) KI2– (d) KI 3
253. The acid used for etching glass is _
(a) H2SO4 (b) HF (c) HNO3 (d) K2CrO 4
254. When chlorine is passed through concentrated solution of KOH, the compound
formed is
(a) KClO4 (b) KClO3 (c) KClO2 (d) KClO
255. The correct order of thermal stability of hydrogen - halides (H–X) is
(a) HI > HCl < KF > HBr (b) HCl < HF >HBr < HI
(c) HF > HCl > HBr > HI (d) HI > HBr > HCl > HF
256. The strongest reducing agent among the following is
(a) F– (b) Cl– (c) Br– (d) I–
257. Iodine is formed when KI reacts with a solution of
(a) CuSO4 (b) (NH4)2SO4 (c) ZnSO4 (d) FeSO4
258. Th inert gases producing maximum number of compounds are
(a) He and Ne (b) Ar and Ne (c) Kr and Ne (d) Kr and Xe
259. Which following statement is incorrect
(a) He(g) is used for inflating aeroplane tyre
(b) The lowest boiling point of He is due to presence of weak vander Waals force.
(c) XeOF2 is almost T-shaped (d) Xe can also compound with Cl2
260. Most acidic oxide among the following is
(a) Cl2O 5 (b) Cl2O (c) Cl2O 3 (d) Cl2O 7
261. SO2 acts as temporary bleaching agent but Cl2 acts as permanent bleaching agent, because?
(a) Cl2 bleaches due to reduction but SO2 due to oxidation.
(b) Cl2 bleaches due to oxidation but SO2 due to reduction.
(c) Both of the anove (d) None of the above
262. The weakest acid among the following is
(a) HI (b) HBr (c) HCl (d) HF
263. The gas not adsorbed by coconut charcoal is
(a) He (b) Ne (c) Ar (d) Kr
264. In which of the following compounds all bonds are not identical ?
(a) SiF4 (b) SF4 (c) XeF4 (d) BF4
265. If the valence shell electronic configuration for an element is ns2sp5, this element will
belong to the group of
(a) alkali metals (b) inert` metals (c) noble gases (d) halogens.
266. Oxidation of NH3 by cupric oxide yields–
(a) N 2 (b) NO (c) Cu(NO3)2 (d) Cu2O

[ 19 ]
UNIT - VIII
267. Essential constituent of an amalgam is:
(a) Fe (b) An alkali metal (c) Silver (d) Mercury
268. The chloride that turns black on addition of NH4OH is:
(a) AgCl (b) PbCl2 (c) Hg2Cl2 (d) Both (b) and (c)
269. Chemical name of corrosive sublimate is:
(a) Mercurous chloride (b) Zinc chloride
(c) Mercuric chloride (d) Aluminium chloride
270. In Nessler’s reagent, the ion present is:
(a) Hg+ (b) Hg2+ (c) HgI 22  (d) HgI 24 
271. Calomel is:
(a) Hg2Cl2 and Hg (b) HgCl2 (c) Hg + HgCl2 (d) Hg2Cl2
272. Cinnabar is an ore of:
(a) Lead (b) Zinc (c) Silver (d) Mercury
273. Calamine is:
(a) ZnSO4 (b) ZnCO3 (c) ZnO (d) CaCO 3
274. Sulphide ore of zinc is concentrated by:
(a) Froth Floatation process (b) Electromagnetic process
(c) Gravity process (d) Distillation
275. Zn cannot displace the following ions from their aqueous solutions:
(a) Ag+ (b) Cu2+ (c) Fe2+ (d) Na+
276. A metal gives two chlorides ‘A’ and ‘B’. ‘A’ gives black precipitate with NH4OH and
‘B’ gives white. With KI ‘B’ gives a red precipitate soluble in excess of KI. ‘A’ and
‘B’ are respectively:
(a) HgCl2 and Hg2Cl2 (b) Hg2Cl2 and HgCl2
(c) HgCl2 and ZnCl2 (d) ZnCl2 and HgCl2
277. An element which is highly toxic for plants and animals is ?
(a) Au (b) Mn (c) Hg (d) Ca
278. Zinc oxide is:
(a) A basic oxide (b) An acidic oxide
(c) A neutral oxide (d) An amphoteric oxide
279. Which is known as Philosopher’s wool ?
(a) HgO (b) CdO (c) BaO (d) ZnO
280. Chemical name of vermilion is:
(a) Mercuric sulphide (b) Mercurous sulphide
(c) Zinc sulphide (d) Cadmium sulphide
281. The pair of metals which dissolves in NaOH(aq) is:
(a) Al, Cu (b) Zn, Cd (c) Pb, Sn (d) Zn, Al
282. Which one of the following ions is the most stable in aqueous solution ?
(a) Mn3+ (b) Cr3+ (c) V3+ (d) Ti3+

[ 20 ]
283. The highest oxidation state is achieved by which of the following
(a) (n – 1)d8ns2 (b) (n–1)d5ns2 (c) (n–1)d3ns2 (d) (n–1)d5ns1
284. KI and CuSO4 solution when mixed give
(a) CuI2 + K2SO4 (b) Cu2I2 + K2SO4
(c) K2SO4 + Cu2I2 + I2 (d) K2SO4 + CuI2+I2
285. Passivity of iron is due to the formation of thin film of its:
(a) Oxide (b) Carbonate (c) Nitride (d) Hydroxide
286. Mn belongs to:
(a) s-block (b) p-block (c) d-block (d) f-block
287. K3[Co(NO2)6] is:
(a) Fischer’s salt (b) Thenard’s blue
(c) Rinman’s green (d) Blue vitriol
288. The term ‘fools gold’ is used for a mineral which shines like gold. It is:
(a) Iron pyrite (FeS2) (b) Cpper glance
(c) Cinnabar (d) Cadmium sulphide
289. Which match is incorrect ?
(a) Ammonia soda process—manufacture of potassium carbonate
(b) Bessemer’s process—manufacture of steel
(c) Halls process – Aluminium
(d) Dow’s process—manufacture of phenol
290. Wood’s metal is an alloy of:
(a) Pb (b) Zn (c) Fe (d) Sn
291. Which of the following has the highest percentage of carbon ?
(a) Stainless steel (b) Pig iron (c) Solder (d) German silver
292. Other forms of iron can be produced from:
(a) Cast iron (b) Wrought iron (c) Pig iron (d) Steel
293. Which of the following does not show variable valency ?
(a) Sc (b) Cu (c) V (d) Hg
294. Mercury forms amalgams with all except:
(a) Al (b) Zn (c) Ni (d) Fe
295. Lithopone, a white pigment, consists of:
(a) Al2O3 and CaCO3 (b) BaS and PbSO4
(c) ZnS and BaSO4 (d) PbS and MgO
296. Zinc white is a better white pigment than lead white because it:
(a) Has more covering power than lead white
(b) Is not blackened by the action of H2S
(c) Is soluble in water
(d) Becomes yellow when heated
297. The pair of metals which fails to dissolve in NaOH(aq) is :
(a) Al, Be (b) Zn, Cd (c) Zn, Sn (d) Zn, Al

[ 21 ]
298. The formula of the zinc complex with ammonia is
(a) [Zn(NH3)2]Cl (b) (NH4)2ZnO2
(c) [Zn(NH3)4]Cl2 (d) [Zn(NH3)6Cl2
299. A transition element X has a configuration [Ar] 3d4 in its +3 oxidation state. Its atomic
number is:
(a) 25 (b) 26 (c) 22 (d) 19
300. d-block elements form coloured ions because
(a) they absorb some energy for d-transition
(b) they absorb some energy for p-transition
(c) they absorb some energy for d-d transition
(d) they do not absorb any energy
301. The characteristics of transition metals to form the complex ion is
(a) having d-subshell unpaired electrons
(b) having paired d-subshell electrons
(c) providing appropriate empty d-orbitals
(d) having small charge / size ratio
302. Which of the following properties shows that iron is a transition element.
(a) it forms double salts (b) it forms stable complexes
(c) it decomposes steam at high temperature (d) it rusts on moist` air.
303. Which of the following elements involves gradual filling of 5-f level
(a) transition metal (b) Lanthanoids (c) coinage metals (d) Actinoids
304. The general electronic configuration of transition elements is
(a) ns2nd1-10 (b) (n–1)d1–10 ns0-2 (c) (n–1)d1–10 ns2 (d) ns0–2 (n–1)d10
305. Which of the ions will give colourless aqueous solution ?
(a) Cu2+ (b) Cu+ (c) Ni2+ (d) Fe2+
306. Which of the following belongs to the actinide series of elements ?
(a) Dy (b) U (c) Yb (d) Ta
307. Which of the following compounds will not give positive chromyl chlorids test.

(a) HgCl2 (b) ZnCl2 (c) CuCl2 (d) C6 H 5 N H 3 Cl

308. Which metal in the first transition series exhibit + oxidation state most frequently.
(a) Zn (b) Sc (c) Cu (d) Cd
309. Which of the following oxides of Mn is amphoteric in nature MnO, MnO2, Mn2O3,
Mn2\O7
(a) MnO (b) MnO2 (c) Mn2O3 (d) Mn2O7
310 Which of the following form on alloy ?
(a) Zn + Pb (b) Fe + Hg (c) Fe + C (d) Pt + Hg
311. The highest magnetic moment is in the transition metal having
(a) 3d2 (b) 3d7 (c) 3d5 (d) d 9

[ 22 ]
312. A transition metal exist in its highest oxidation state. It is expected to behave as
(a) a chelating agent
(b) a central metal in a co-ordination compound
(c) an oxidising agent (d) a reducing agent

313. K 4  Fe  CN  6  is used for the detection of

(a) Cu2+ (b) Cu+ (c) Fe3+ (d) Ni2+
314. The most common oxidation state of lanthanoids is
(a) +4 (b) +6 (c) +2 (d) +3
315. Which of the following metals is used in incandescent lamps ?
(a) cromium (b) Tungsten (c) Zirconium (d) molyvdemum
316. The disproportionate reaction combination of the following is
(i) 3MnO 24   4H   2 MnO 4  MnO 2  2H 2 O

(ii) MnO 4  8H   5e  
 Mn 2   4H 2 O
(iii) 2Cu   Cu 2  Cu

(iv) 2 K Mn O 4  K 2 Mn O 4  Mn O 2  O 2
(a) (i) and (ii) (b) (ii) and (iii) (c) (i) and (iii) (d) (iii) and (iv)
317. Ni2+ gives coloured salts due to
(a) complete d-orbitals (b) incompletely filled d-orbitals
(c) presence of p-orbitals (d) presence of f-orbitals
UNIT - IX
318. [Cr(NH3)6]3+ ion is :
(a) Paramagnetic (b) Diamagnetic (c) Square planar (d) None
2 2
319. Among  Ni  CN  4   NiCl4  and [Ni(CO)4] :

(a) [Ni(CN)4]2– is square planar and NiCl24  and Ni(CO)4 are tetrahedral

(b) NiCl24  is square planar and NiCN 24  and Ni(CO)4 are tetrahedral

(c) Ni(CO)4 is square planar and NiCN 24  and  NiCl 4 2 are tetrahedral
(d) None
320. EAN of Cr in [Cr(NH3)6]Cl3 is:
(a) 32 (b) 33 (c) 34 (d) 35
321. Exchange of co-ordination group by a water molecule in complex molecule results in:
(a) lonisation isomerism (b) Hydration isomerism
(c) co-ordination isomerism (d) Geometrical isomerism
322. EDTA is a ......... ligand:
(a) Monodentate (b) Hexadentate (c) Bidentate (d) Tridentate

[ 23 ]
323. The oxidation state of Ni in nickel carbonyl is:
(a) Zero (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3
324. The primary and secondary valency of cobalt in hexacyanido cobaltate (III) is
(a) 3, 6 (b) 6, 3 (c) 2, 6 (d) none of these
325. The correct formula of Zeise’s ssalt is
(a) PtCl3, C2H6]–K+ (b) [PtCl2, (C2H2)2–K+
(c) K+[PtCl3. C2H4]– (d) [PtCl3, C6H6]–K+
326. [Co (NH3)3 Br] SO4 and [Co (NH3)3 SO4] Br are related as
(a) Linkage isomers (b) lonisation isomers
(c) Co-ordination isomers (d) none of these
327. Which of the following complex or the complex ion will show geometrical isomerism ?
(a) [Pt(NH3)2Cl2] (b) [Pt(NH3)Cl5]–
(c) [Pt (NH3)5Cl]3+ (d) [Co(NH3)6]Cl2
328. Fac - Mer isomerism is associated with which of the following general formula ?
(a) M(AA)2 (b) M(AA)3 (c) MABCD (d) MA3B3
329. What is the coordination number of metal in [Co(en)2Cl2]+ ?
(a) 4 (b) 5 (c) 6 (d) 3
330. The oxidation state of Fe in brown ring complex [Fe(H2O)5NO]SO4 is
(a) +1 (b) +2 (c) +3 (d) +4
331. All ligands are:
(a) Lewis acid (b) Lewis base (c) Neutral (d) None
332. The hybridisation of Fe in K4[Fe(CN)6] complex is:
(a) d2sp2 (b) d2sp3 (c) dsp2 (d) sp3
333. The charge on cobalt in [Co(CN)6]3– is :
(a) –6 (b) +3 (c) –3 (d) +6
334. Complex forming tendency increases with:
(a) Increase in size of cation (b) Decrease in size of cation
(c) Increase in size of anion (d) None
335. The number of unpair e (s) in hexafluoridocobaltate (III) ion is ______.
(a) 4 (b) 3 (c) 3 (d) 1
336. EAN of Fe in K4[Fe(CN)6] is:
(a) 38 (b) 37 (c) 36 (d) 35
3+
337. [Cr(H2O)6] ion has d-electrons equal to:
(a) 2 (b) 3 (c) 4 (d) 5
338. In SCN ligand if N is attached to central atom, the name of ligand is:
(a) Thiocyanato-N (b) Cyanato-N (c) Thiocyanato-S (d) Cyanato-S

[ 24 ]
 
339. Addition of KI to Hgl2 forms complex K2[HgI4] which in contact with NH4  Aq  gives

(a) Red colour (b) Blue colour

(c) Violet colour (d) Brown
340 . ‘en’ stands for ethylene diamine which is __________.
(a) Monodentate (b) Hexadentate (c) Bidentate (d) Tridentate
341. The complex [Co(NH3)5Br]SO4 will give ____ moles of ions per mole of salt.
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 0
342. Complexes with bidentate ligands are called :
(a) Ligands (b) Chelates (c) Complexes (d) None
343. The oxidation number and co-ordination number of Ni in nickel carbonyl is :
(a) 0, 4 (b) 1, 0 (c) 2, 0 (d) 0, 6
344. The tendency of the transition metals to form complexes is not explained by :
(a) Small size of the metal ion (b) Large ionic or nuclear charge
(c) Low basicity of metal ions (d) Non-availability of d-orbitals
345. The number of ions formed on dissolving one mole of Mohr’s salt is :
(a) 4 (b) 5 (c) 3 (d) 6
346. Nickel (II) tetracyanide complex has ...... geometry with _____ hybridisation.
(a) Linear, sp2 (b) Tetrahedral, sp3
(c) Square planar, dsp2 (d) squareplaner, sp3
347. In which of the following complexes the nickel metal is in highest oxidation state:
(a) Ni(CO)4 (b) K2[NiF6] (c) [Ni(NH3)6](BF4)2 (d) K4[Ni(CN)6]
348. The IUPAC name of [CoCl(NO2)(en2)]Cl is:
(a) Chloronitrobis (ethylene diamine) cobaltic (in) chloride
(b) Chloronitrobis (ethylene diamine) cobalt (II) chloride
(c) Chlorobis (ethane-1, 2-diamine) nitro cobalt (III) chloride
(d) Bis (ethane-1,2-diamine) chloronitrocobalt (III) chloride
349. According to postulates of Werner’s theory of co-ordination compounds :
(a) primary valency is ionisable (b) secondary valence is ionisable
(c) primany and secondary valencies are non- ionisable
(d) only primary valency is non-ionisable
350. Which of the following is not an outer orbital complex ?
4
(a)  Co  CN  6  (b)  CoF6 3
2 3
(c)  Ni  NH 3 6  (d)  Fe  H 2 O  6 

[ 25 ]
UNIT - X
351. The hydrogen atom in chloroform is:
(a) Acidic (b) Basic (c) Neutral (d) None
352. Solvent used in dry cleaning of clothes is:
(a) Alcohol (b) Acetone
(c) Carbon tetrachloride (d) Freon
353. In Wurtz reaction of alkyl halides with sodium, the reactivity order of these halides is:
(a) RI > RBr > RCl (b) RCl > RBr > Rl
(c) RBr >RI > RCl (d) None
354. Ethyl bromide and isopropyl chloride can be distinguished by:
(a) Alcoholic AgNO3 (b) Comparing their colours
(c) Burning the compound on spatula (d) Aqueous KOH solution
355. Which alkyl halide is preferentially hydrolysed by S N1 mechanism:
(a) CH3Cl (b) CH3CH2Cl (c) CH3CH2CH2Cl (d) (CH3)3C.Cl
356. The alkyl group of Grignard reagent acts as:
(a) Free radical (b) Carbonium ion (c) Carbanion (d) None
357. Grignard reagent is prepared by the reaction between:
(a) Zinc and alkyl halide (b) Magnesium and alkyl halide
(c) Magnesium and alkane
(d) Magnesium and aromatic hydrocarbon
358. Which compound is used in cooling:
(a) CHCl3 (b) CCl4 (c) CF4 (d) CCl2F2
359. Reaction of chloroform with alcoholic KOH in presence of a primary aromatic amine
is called:
(a) Hydrolysis (b) Reduction
(c) Wurtz reaction (d) Carbylamine reaction
360. Grignard reagent shows addition on:
(a) > C = O (b) –C  N (c) > C = S (d) All
361. Non-sticking frying pans are coated with:
(a) Ethylene (b) Styrene
(c) Tetrafluoro ethylene (Teflon) (d) Chlorofluoro methane
362. Which reagent is useful in increasing the carbon chain of an alkyi halide:
(a) HCN (b) KCN (c) NH4CN (d) AgCN
363. Which product is obtained when bleaching powder is distilled with acetone:
(a) CCl4 (b) CHCl3 (c) CH2Cl2 (d) CH3Cl
364. The compound that will not give iodoform on treatment with alkaline iodine is:
(a) Acetone (b) Ethanol
(c) Diethyl ketone (d) Isopropyl alcohol
365. Ethyl alcohol gives ethyl chloride on treatment with:
(a) NaCl (b) SOCl2 (c) Cl2 (d) KCl

[ 26 ]
366. The reaction,
Acetone
RCl  NaI  R  I  NaCl is known as:
(a) Wurtz’s reaction (b) Fittig reaction
(c) Frankland’s reaction (d) Finkelstein’s reaction
367. Carbon tetrachloride on treatment with Fe/H2O gives:
(a) Chloromethane (b) Methane
(c) Chloroform (d) Methylene chloride
368. Vicinal and geminal dihalides can be distinguished by:
(a) KOH (aq.) (b) KOH (alc.) (c) Zn dust (d) None
369. Victor Grignard was awarded Nobel Prize for making useful compounds by joining
organic compounds to:
(a) Fe (b) Mg (c) Proteins (d) Na
370. CO2 on reaction with C2H5MgBr and H2O gives:
(a) Ethane (b) Propionic acid (c) Acetic acid (d) None
371. Which one is liquid at room temperature:
(a) CH3Cl (b) C2H5Cl (c) CH3Br (d) C2H5Br
372. A compound A of formula C3H6Cl2 on reaction with alkali can give B of formula C3H6O
or C of formula C3H4. B on oxidation gave a compound of the formula C3H6O2. C with
dilute H2SO4 containing Hg2+ ion gave D of formula C3H6O, which with bromine and
alkali gave the sodium salt of C2H4O2. Then A is:
(a) CH3CH2CHCl2 (b) CH3CCl2CH3
(c) CH2ClCH2CH2Cl (d) CH3CHClCH2Cl
373. Anhydrous HCl gas, on passing through ethyl alcohol, in presence of anhy. ZnCl2 gives:
(a) Ethane (b) Ethyl chloride (c) Ethene (d) CC 4
374. A mixture of two organic compounds was treated with sodium metal in ether solution
Isobutane was obtained as a product. The two chlorine compounds are:
(a) Methyl chloride and propyi chloride (b) Methyl chloride and ethyl chloride
(c) Isopropyl chloride and methyl chloride
(d) Isopropyl chloride and ethyl chloride
375. The reactivities of methyl chloride (A) propyl chloride (B) and chlorobenzene (C) are
in the order :
(a) A > B > C (c) C > B > A (c) A < C > B (d) B > A > C
376. The order of reactivity of following alcohols with halogen acids is
(A) CH3 CH2 CH2 – OH

H 3C
\
(B) CH 3CH 2 CH  OH (C) CH 3CH 2  C  OH
| /
CH 3 H 3C

(a) A > B > C (b) C > B > A(c) B >A> C (d) A >C > B

[ 27 ]
377. Which of the following alcohols will yield the corresponding alkyl chloride on reaction
with concentrated HCl at room temperature ?
(a) CH3 – CH2 –OH (b) CH 3  CH 2  CH  CH 3   OH

(c) CH 3  CH 2  CH   CH 3 3 CH 2OH (d) CH 3  CH 2  C  CH3  2  OH

378. Identity the compound Y in the following reaction.
+ -
NH2 N2 Cl
NaNO  HCl
2 Cu 2 Cl2

273 278k  Y  N2

Cl
Cl Cl
(a) (b) (c) (d)

Cl Cl
379. Toluene reacts with a halogen in presence of iron (III) chloride giving ortho and para
halo compound. The reaction is
(a) Electrophilic elimination reaction (b) Electrophilic substitution reaction
(c) free radical addition reaction (d) Nucleophilic substution reaction.
380. Which of the following is halogen exchange reaction ?
(a) RX  NaI 
 R  I  NaX

(b) C=C + HX 
 CC
| |
X X
ZnCl
(c) R – OH + HX   R – X + H2O

CH3 CH3 CH3

Fe
(d) + X2 
 dark
+
X X
381. Which reagent will you use for the following reaction ?
 CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2  Cl + C2 H 5  CH  CH 3
CH3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 3 
|
Cl
(a) Cl2 / UV light (b) NaCl + H2SO4
(c) Cl2 gas in dark
(d) Cl2 gas in the presence of iron in dark
382. Arrange the following compounds in the increasing order of their densities.
Cl Cl Br

(A) (B) (C) (D)

Cl Cl
(a) A < B < C < D (b) D < C < B < A
(c) A < C < D < B (d) B < D < C < A

[ 28 ]
383. Arrange the following compounds in increasing order of their boiling points
CH 3
(A) CH – CH2 – Br (B) CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2–Br
CH 3
(C) (CH3)3C–Br
(a) B < A < C (b) C <A< B (c) A < B < C (d) C < B < A

384. In which of the following molecules carbon atom marked with asterisk is assymetric ?
H D H H
* * * *
C C C C
(A) (B) (C) (D) H
I Cl I Cl HO CH3 CH3
Br Br C 2H5 C2H5
(a) all of these (b) A, B, C only (c) A, B, D only (d) A and D only
385. Which of the following is an example of vic-dihalide
(a) Dichloromethane (b) 1, 2–dichloroethane
(c) ethylidene chloride (d) Alkyl chloride
386. The position of – Br in the compound in CH3–CH = CH C(Br) (CH3)2 can _______.
(a) Allyl (b) Aryl (c) vinyl (d) Secondary
387. Chlorobenzene is formed by reaction of chlorine with benzene in the presence of
AlCl3 which of the following species attacks the benzene ring in this reaction ?
(a) Cl– (b) Cl+ (c) AlCl3 (d) [AlCl4]–
388. Whch of the following alkyl halide witll undergo SN1 reaction most readily ?
(a)  CH3 3 C  F (b)  CH3 3 C  Cl
(c)  CH3 3 C  Br (d)  CH3 3 C  I
389. What is ‘A’ in the following reaction ?
CH2-CH = CH2

+ HCl A

CH2-CH = CH2 CH2 CH2 CH 2 Cl

Cl
(a) (b)

Cl
CH2 CH CH3 CH CH2 CH2
Cl
(c) (d)

390. A primary alkyl halide would prefer to undergo _________.

(a) SN1 reaction (b) SN2 reaction
(c)  -Elimination (d) Racemisation

[ 29 ]
UNIT - XI
391. A suitable combination of reagents leading to the preparation of tert. butyl methyl
ether in Williamson’s synthesis is :

CH 3 CH 3
| |
(a) CH3I and CH3  C  ONa (b) CH3ONa and CH 3  C  OH
| |
CH 3 CH 3

CH3
|
(c) CH 3  C  I and CH3ONa (d) None of the above
|
CH3
392. An alcohol on oxidation is found to give CH3COOH and CH3CH2COOH finally. The
alcohol is
(a) CH3CH2CH2OH (b) (CH3)2C(OH)CH2CH3
(c) CH3(CH2)2CH2OH (d) CH3CH(OH)CH2CH2CH3
393. Primary, secondary and tertiary alcohols can be distinguished by employing :
(a) Oxidation (b) Victor Meyer’s test
(c) Lucas test (d) All of these
394. Compound A reacts with PCl5 to give B which on treatment with KCN followed by
hydrolysis forms propanoic acid as the product. What is A ?
(a) Ethane (b) Propane
(c) Ethyl chloride (d) Ethyl alcohol
395. Ethanol is soluble in water due to :
(a) Ethyl group (b) Hydrogen bonding
(c) Its neutral, nature (d) Dissociation in water
396. Alcohols are isomeric with
(a) Acids (b) Ethers (c) Esters (d) Aldehydes
397. Reaction of t-butyl bromide with sodium methoxide produces:
(a) Isobutane (b) Isobutylene
(c) Sodium t-butoxide (d) t-butyl methyl ether
398. Dehydration of ethanol gives:
(a) Acetic acid (b) Ethane (c) Ethylene (d) Acetylene
399. Which alcohol is most acidic:
(a) Methanol (b) Ethanol
(c) Isopropyi alcohol (d) t-butyl alcohol
400. Methylated spirit is:
(a) Methanol containing some pyridine (b) Ethanol containing some methanol
(c) Pure methanol (d) 95% methanol
401. The end product (C) of the following sequence is:

KCN (adc.) H 2O LiAlH 4
CH 3 Br   (A)  (B) 
Ether
C
(a) CH3CHO (b) CH3CH2OH (c) CH3COCH3 (d) CH4

[ 30 ]
402. When isopropyl alcohol vapours are passed over heated copper it gives:
(a) Acetone (b) Ethyl alcohol
(c) Methyl alcohol (d) Acetaldehyde
403. 2 mole of ethanol are burnt. The amount of CO2 obtained will be:
(a) 132 g (b) 44 g (c) 176 g (d) 88 g
404. The product formed in the following reaction
Heat
C6H5 – O – CH3 + HI   are :
(a) C6H5OH and CH3I (b) C6H5I and CH3OH
(c) C6H5CH3 and HOI (d) C6H6 and CH3OI
405. In the reduction,
R – CHO + H2 
 RCH2OH the catalyst used is:
(a) Ni (b) Pd (c) Pt (d) Any of these
406. Reaction of CH2 CH2 with RMgX followed with hydrolysis produces:
O
(a) RCHOHR (b) RCH2CH2OH (c) RCHOHCH3 (d) RCH =CHOH
407. An isomer of ethanol is:
(a) methanol (b) diethyl ether (c) dimethyl ether (d) acetone
408. Which of the following is a primary alcohol?
(a) Butan-2-ol (b) Propan-2-ol
(c) Butan-1-ol (d) 4,5-dimethyl hexan-4-ol
409. The general molecular formula of homologous series of alkanols is :
(a) CnH2n+2O (b) CnH2nO2 (c) CnH2nO (d) CnH 2n–2O
410. Benzyl amine reacts with nitrous acid to form
(a) azobenzene (b) benzene
(c) benzyl alcohol (d) phenol
411. Strength of acidity is in the order :

OH OH OH
OH NO2

CH3 NO2 NO2

(I) (II) (III) (IV)

(a) II > I > III > IV (b) III > IV > I > II
(c) I > IV > III > III (d) IV > III > I > II
412. Phenol reacts with Br2 in CS2 to give :
(a) o-bromo phenol (b) m-bromo phenol
(c) o-and p-bromo phenol (d) 2, 4, 6-tri bromo phenol

[ 31 ]
 OH +
O Na
413. + CHCl3  NaOH 

CHO
The electrophile involved in the above reaction is
(a) dichloro methyl cation  C HCl 2  (b) dichloro carbene (: CCl2)

(c) trichloromethyl anion  C  Cl3  (d) formylcation (C+HO)

414. Phenol can be distinguished from ethanol by the following reagents except :
(a) sodium (b) NaOH+ I2 (c) Neutral FeCl3 (d) Br2 / H2O
415. When ethanol is heated with HI and red phosphorus it gives -
(a) Ethyl iodide (b) Ethane (c) Ethylene (d) Ether
416. The IUPAC name of the compound given below is
CH 3  CH  CH 2  CH 2  CH  CH 3
| |
Cl OH
(a) 2-chloro-5-hydroxy hexane (b) 2-hydroxy-5-chloro hexane
(c) 5-chloro hexan-2-ol (d) 2-chloro hexan-5-01
CH 3
|
417. IUPAC name of CH 3  CH  OCH 3 is
(a) 1-methoxy - 1- methyl ethane (b) 2-methoxy - 2- methyl ethane
(c) 2-methoxy propane (d) isopropyl methyl ether
418. The process of converting alkyl halides to alcohols involves
(a) addition reaction (b) substitution reaction
(c) dehydro halogenation reaction (d) rearrangement reaction
419. Monochlorination of toluene in sunlight followed by hydrolysis with aq-NaOH gives
(a) 0-cresol (b) m-cresol
(c) 2, 1-dihydroxy toluene (d) Benzyl alcohol
420. Phenyl magnesium bromide reacts with methanol to give
(a) a mixture of anisole and Mg(OH) Br
(b) a mixture of benzene and Mg(OMe) Br
(c) a mixture of toluene and Mg(OH) Br
(d) a mixture of phenol and Mg(OH) Br
421. What is the order of reactivity of alcohols in the following reaction?
ZnCl 2
ROH + HCl   RCl  H 2 O
(a) lo > 20 > 30 (b) 1° < 2° > 3° (c) 3° > 2° > 1° (d) 3° > 1° > 2°
422. During dehydration of alcohols to alkenes by heating with cone. H2SO4, the initial step
is
(a) formation of an ester (b) protonation of alcohol molecule
(c) formation of carbocation (d) elimination of water

[ 32 ]
423. CH3CH2OH can be converted to CH3OH, step -I involves following Hofmann’s
bromamide reaction
(a) catalytic hydrogenation
(b) By treatment with LiAl H4
(c) treatment with pyridinium chlorochromate
(d) treatment with acidified K2Cr2O7
424. The most suitable reagent for the conversion of RCH 2 OH 
 RCHO is
(a) PCC (Pyridinium chloro chromate) (b) KMnO4
(c) K2Cr 2O 7 (d) CrO3
425. The red coloured compound formed during Victor - Meyer’s test for ethanol is

(a) CH 3  C  NO 2 Na  (b) CH3  C  NO 2

|| ||
NOH NO  Na 

(c) CH3 CH  NOH (d) CH3 CH 2 NH OH

426. Which of the following is most a acidic ?
(a) Benzyl alcohol (b) Cyclohexanol (c) Phenol (d) m-chlorophenol
427. Which one of the following is not expected to undergo iodoform reaction ?
(a) Propan-2-ol (b) Ethanol
(c) Diphenyl methanol (d) Butan-2-ol
428. Among following four compounds
(i) phenol (ii) p-methyl phenol
(iii) meta-nitro phenol (iv) p-nitro phenol
The acidity order in
(a) iv > iii > i > ii (b) iii > iv > i > ii (c) i > iv > iii > ii (d) ii > i > iii > iv
429. Phenol, when it first reacts with conc. H2SO4 and then with cone. HNO3 gives
(a) nitrobenzene (b) 2, 4, 6 - trinitro benzene
(c) picric acid (d) p-nitrophenol
430. The major product obtained on interaction of phenol with NaOH and CO2 is
[ Kolbe - Schmitt reaction]
(a) Salicyaldehyde (b) Salicylic acid (c) phthalic acid (d) benzoic acid
Red P  HI
431. In the following reaction C2 H5OC2 H5  4H   2X  H 2 O ', X ' is
(a) ethane (b) ethylene (c) butane (d) propane
432. o-nitrophenol is less soluble in water than m- and p-nitrophenol because
(a) o-nitrophenol shows intramolecular H-bonding
(b) o-nitrophenol shows intermolecular H-bonding
(c) o-nitrophenol is more volatile than m-&p-isomers
(d) melting point of o-nitrophenol is less than those of m- and p-nitrophenol
433. Which of the following compounds can be used as antifreeze in automobile radiators ?
(a) Methyl alcohol (b) Ethane-1, 2-diol (c) Nitrophenol (d) Ethyl alcohol
434. Acid catalysed hydration of propene except ethane leads to the formation of
(a) primary alcohol (b) propan-2-ol
(c) mixture of primary and secondary alcohol propane
(d) mixture of secondary and tertiary alcohol propan-1-ol

[ 33 ]
UNIT - XII
435. Reagent used for the oxidation of allyl alcohol to acrolein is
(a) KMnO4 (b) H2O 2 (c) Active MnO2 (d) OsO4
436. Formic acid and acetic acid can be distinguished by
(a) Baeyer’s reagent (b) NaHCO3
(c) Tollen’s reagent (d) Collin’s reagent
437. Which of the following compounds does not have a carboxyl group ?
(a) Benzoic acid (b) Palmitic acid
(c) Picric acid (d) Oleic acid
KCN dil. NaOH
438. The end –product in the sequence of reaction R  X   A  
 B is
(a) an alkane (b) a carboxylic
(c) sodium alkanoate (d) saponification
439. Monocarboxylic acids show functional isomerism with
(a) esters (b) alcohols (c) ethers (d) aldehydes
440. Electrolysis of potassium salt of maleic acid to ethyne is known as
(a) Wurtz’s reaction (b) Clemmensen’s reduction
(c) Kolbe’s reaction (d) Sabatier senderen’s reactions
441. HVZ reaction is used to prepare
(a) aldehyde (b) ketones (c) primary amine (d) bromo acids
442. Acetamide is
(a) amphoteric (b) acidic (c) basic (d) neutral
443. Ammonium formate on heating gives
(a) formamide (b) ammonium acetate
(c) formic acid (d) acetamide
444. The general formulae of aldehyde and ketone is
(a) CnH2n+2O (b) CnH 2nO (c) CnH 2n–2O (d) CnH 2nO 2
445. In Rosenmund reduction the catalyst used Pd-BaSO4 to prepare
(a) RCHO (b) RCOR (c) RCH2OH (d) none of these
446. A mixture of formaldehyde and benzaldehyde in presence of NaOH gives
(a) benzyl accohol and sodium formate (b) sodium benzoate and methyl alcohol
(c) sodium benzoate and sodium formate (d) benzyl alcohol and methyl alcohol.
447. The function of conc. H2SO4 in esterification process is
(a) catalyst (b) dehydrating agent
(c) hydrolysing agent (d) none of these
448. Which of the following do you consider to be suitable for obtaining acetone ?
(a) Heating CH3CH2CH2OH with acidic Na2Cr2O7
OH
|
(b) Passing CH3 CHCH 3 over heated copper

(c) Oxidation of CH3CH2CH3 with concentrated HNO3

(d) Heating CH3CH = CH2 with dilute H2SO4

[ 34 ]
449. Acetone reacts with HCN to form a cyanohydrin. It is an example of
(a) Electrophilic addition reaction (b) Electrophilic substitution reaction
(c) Nucleophilic addition reaction (d) Nucleophilic substitution reaction
450. Which of the following reagents will react readily with both aldehydes and ketones ?
(a) Grignard reagent (b) Fehling’s reagent
(c) Tollen’s reagent (d) Schiff’s reagent
451. Acetone undergoes reduction with hydrazine is the presence of NaOH to form
propane. This reaction is known as
(a) Clemmensen reduction (b) Wolf-Kishner reduction
(c) Rosenmund reduction (d) Reformatsky reduction
452. Which of the following is oxidised to the corresponding carbonyl compound ?
(a) propan-2-ol (b) o-nitrophenol
(c) phenol (d) 2-methyl -propan-2-ol.
453. The IUPAC name of CH3COCH (CH3)2 is
(a) 3-methylbutan-2-one (b) Isopropyl methyl ketone
(c) 2-methyl-3-butanone (d) 4-methyl isopropyl ketone
454. Which of the following molecule yields acetone on ozonolysis ?
(a) 3-methyl-l-butene (b) Cyclopentane
(c) 2-methyl but-l-ene (d) 2-methyl but-2-ene.
455. In the following sequence of reactions
P  I2 Mg HCHO H 2O
CH 3  CH 2  OH   A 
ether
 B   C   D the compound D is
(a) n-propyl alcohol (b) propanal
(b) butanal (d) n-butyl alcohol
456. Which of the following gives sodium propanoate on iodoform test ?
(a) Acetone (b) Acetaldehyde (c) butanone (d) acetophenone
457. Among the following compounds, which will react with acetone to give a product
containing C  N?
(a) C6H5NH2 (b) (CH3)3N
(c) C6H5NHC6H5 (d) C6H5NHNH2
458. Aldehydes and ketones can be reduced to alkanes by
(a) Clemmensen’s reduction (b) Wolff-Kishner reduction
(c) Meerwein- Pondorf Verly reduction (d) Bouveault Blank reductions
459. Identify the final product (Z) in the following sequence of reactions

H 3O H 2SO 4
Me 2 CO  HCN  X   Y  
Z
(a) (CH3)2 C(OH) COOH (b) CH2 = C (CH3)COOH
(c) HOCH2 CH (CH3)COOH (d) CH3CH=CH–COOH
460. Which of the following gives Cannizzarro’s reaction ?
(a) Acetone (b) Acetic acid (c) formaldehyde (d) Acetal dehyde

[ 35 ]
461. Which one of the following will not react with ammoniacal AgNO3 solution ?
(a) Acetylene (b) Acetone (c) Acetaldehyde (d) formic acid
462. Cannizzarro’s reaction is not given by —
(a) formaldehyde (b) acetaldehyde
(c) trichloroacetal dehyde (d) benzal dehyde.
463. Aldehydes reacts with hydroxylamine to produce —
(a) oxime (b) alcohol
(c) hydrazone (d) Phenyl hydrazone
464. Which of the following on treatment with 50% aqueous NaOH undergoes
disproportionation ?
(a) C6H5CHO (b) CH3–CH2–CH2CHO
(c) CH3–COCH3 (d) C6H6CH2–CHO
HgSO4
465. Propyne 
H 2SO4
 A, the compound A is
(a) Propanal (b) Propane (c) Propene (d) propanone
466. The reagent used for the separation of acetal dehyde and acetophenone is
(a) NaHSO3 (b) C6H5NHNH2 (c) NH2OH (d) NaOH/I2
467. Acetic acid on heating in presence MnO gives
(a) CH3COCH3 (b) CO 2
(c) H2O (d) mixture of all these
468. Among HCHO, CH3CHO, and C6H5CHO which will under go aldol type condensation.
(a) HCHO (b) CH3CHO (c) CH3COCH3 (d) (b) and C
469. Rosenmund’s reduction fails to give ______
(a) Formaldehyde (b) acetone (c) acetaldehyde (d) (a) & (b)
470. Which of the following compounds will under go self aldol .condensation with cold dil.
NaOH ?
(a) HCHO (b) CH3COCH3
(c) CH3CHO (d) (a) and (b)
H 2O
471. In the reaction CH 2O + CH 3MgI 
 A   B  Mg  OH  I . What are
A and B?
(a) CH3OMgI + CH3OH
(b) CH3–CH2– OMgI + C2H5O – C2H5
(c) CH3–CH2–OMgI + CH3–CH2–OH (d) CH3-CH2I + CH3CH2–OH
472 . Which of the following gives an aldehyde on dry distillation ?
(a) Calcium formate + Calcium acetate
(b) Calcium acetate + Calcium benzoate
(c) Calcium acetate (d) Calcium benzoate
CHO
AlCl3
473. + ? 
HCl


Identify the reactiant -

(a) H 2 O (b) HCHO (c) CO (d) CH3CHO
474. Pentan-3-ol on reaction with aluminium tertiary butoxide in the presence of acetone
gives
(a) 3- pentanal (b) 2-pentanal (c) pentan-3-one (d) 2-pentanone

[ 36 ]
475. Silver mirror test is given by which one of the following compounds ?
(a) Acetaldehyde (b) Acetone
(c) formaldehyde, ethylmethyl ketone (d) boenzophenone
476. Trichloroacetaldehyde was subjected to Cannizzaro’s reaction. The mixture of the
products contains sodium trichloroacetate and another compound. The other compound
is
(a) 2,2,2- trichloro ethanol (b) trichloro methanol
(c) 2,2,2- trichloro propanol (d) chloroform
LiAlH 4 Cu dilute
477. CH 3COOH  X Y  Z
3000 C NaOH

In the above reaction Z is

(a) butanol (b) aldol (c) ketol (d) acetal
478. An organic compound of molecular formula C3H6O did not give a silver mirror with
Tollen’s reagent but gave an oxime with hydroxyl amine, it may be
(a) CH3  CO  CH 3 (b) C 2 H 5  CHO
(c) CH 2  CH  CH 2  OH (d) CH 3  O  CH  CH 2
CHO
(i) Con.NaOH
479. 
(ii) H 2 O

CHO
CHO COOH COOH CH2OH
(a) (b) (c) (d)
CHO COOH OH CHO
O
C CH3
LiAlH 4
480. The product formed in the reaction   is

OH
CH2 CH3 CH CH3
(a) (b)

CH3
(c) (d) None of these

481. CH 3  CH 2  COOH
Re d P / Cl 2 Cl 2 / P alc.
     A  
KOH
  B is
(a) CH3CH2–COCl (b) CH3CH2–CHO
(c)
CH  C  COOH (d) Cl  CH 2  CH 2  COOH
482. When CH2 =CH– COOH is reduced with LiAlH4, the compound obtained will be.
(a) CH3–CH2 – CHO (b) CH3–CH2–COOH
(c) CH2 = CH–CH2OH (d) CH3–CH2–COOH

[ 37 ]
483. The general formula CnH2nO2 could be for open chain
(a) dialdehydes (b) diketones
(c) Alkenediol (d) diols
–
484. In H–COO the two C–O bonds are found to be equal of length. What is the reason
for this ?
(a) the anion is obtained by the removal of a proton from the acid molecule.
(b) the electronic orbitals of carbon atom are hybridised.
(c) the C=O bond is weaker than C—O bond.
(d) the anion H–COO– has two resonating structures.
485. The intermediate formed during the reaction of R–CONH2 with Br2 and KOH are :
(a) RCONHBr and RNCO (b) R–NHCOBr and RNCO
(c) RNHBr and RCONHBr (d) R–CONH2
486. The-OH group of an alcohol or-COOH group of a carboxylic acid can be replaced
by using :
(a) HOCl (b) Cl2 (c) HCl (d) PCl5
487. The correct order of increasing acid strength of the compounds.
(A) CH3COOH (B) CH3O CH2-COOH
M
(C) CF3COOH (D) M e  CHCOOH
e

(a) B < D < A < C (b) D < A < C < B

(c) D < A < B < C (d) A < D < C < B
488. Consider the acidity of the following carboxylic acids
(i) PhCOOH (ii) o–NO2 C6H4–COOH
(iii) p-nitro C6H4COOH (iv) m-nitro C6H4COOH
Which of the following order is correct.
(a) i > ii > iii > iv (b) ii > iv > iii > i (c) ii > iv > i > iii (d) ii > iii > iv > i
489. In a set of reaction acetic acid yields a product (c)
C6 H6 C2 H 5 MgBr
CH 3COOH  PCl5  A 
AlCl3
 B ether
(C) then the product C is
(a) CH3CH (OH) C2H5 (b) CH3COC6H5
CH 3
(c) CH3CH (OH) C6H5 (d)
CH 3
 C  OH   C H6 5

490. Which ofthe following compounds will form silver mirror with [Ag(NH3)2]OH ?
(a) HCOOH (b) CH3COOH (c) CH3COCH3 (d) CH3OH
491. The end product ‘Z’ in the set of reactions is
NH 3  P2 O5
CH 3COOH   X   Y  Z
(a) CH4 (b) CH3OH (c) CH3CN (d) CH3NC
492. Identify the correct order of boiling point of the following compounds.
(i) CH3CH2CH2CH2–OH (ii) CH3–(CH2)2–CHO
(iii) CH3CH2CH2–COOH
(a) i > ii > iii (b) iii > i > ii (c) iii > ii >i (d) none of these
493. Ethylacetate reacts with sodium/alcohol gives
(a) ethanol (b) methanol (c) but-2-ol (d) butan-1-ol

[ 38 ]
494. Which reaction is suitable for the preparation of  -chloro acetic acid ?
(a) HVZ reaction (b) Nef reaction
(c) Stephen’s reaction (d) Eerkin Condensation
495. Further oxidation of which compound is not possible ?
(a) CH3–COOH (b) CH3–COCH
(c) CH3CHO (d) CH3–CH2–OH
496. The acid which contains an aldehyde group is
(a) acetic acid (b) formic acid
(c) benzoic acid (d) Propionic acid.
497. The reagent which does not give acid chloride on treating with a carboxylic acid is
(a) PCl5 (b) Cl2 (c) SOCl2 (d) PCl3
UNIT - XIII
498. Primary amine is not given by
(a) reduction of amides (b) reduction of nitroalkanes
(c) reduction of alkyl cyanides (d) reduction of isonitriles
499. Primary and secondary amines are distinguished by
(a) Br2 (b) NH3

(c)  Ag  NH 3 2  (d) CHCl3/KOH
500. Which amine gives on alcohol with nitrous acid ?
(a) C2H5 – NH2 (b) (C2H5)2 NH (c) (C2H5)3N (d) none of these
501. The reactive species during nitration of benzene is:
(a) NO 2+ (b) NO 2 – (c) N 2O 4 (d) HNO3
502. Chloropicrin is obtained by the reaction of
(a) steam on CCl4 (b) nitric acid on chlorobenzene
(c) chlorine on picric acid (d) nitric acid on chloroform
503. Acetanalide on nitration followed by alkaline hydrolysis gives
(a) o-nitro acetanilide (b) p-nitro aniline
(c) m-nitro aniline (d) 2,4,6 trinitroaniline
504. Nitration is easy in case of
(a) toluene (b) nitrobenzene (c) chlorobenzene (d) sulpho benzene
505. Among the following weakest base is:
(a) C6H6CH2NH2 (b) C6H6CH2NHCH3
(c) O2N–CH2NH2 (d) CH3NHCHO
506. Reduction of nitroalkane in neutral medium is made with
(a) H2/Ni (b) LiA/H4 (c) Zn/NH4Cl (d) NaBH4
507. Reaction of acetamide with bromine water and KOH gives:
(a) CH3COOH (b) CH3CH2NH2
(c) CH3COONH4 (d) CH3NH2
508. Which of the following amines cannot be acytylated using acetyl chloride ?
(a) Methylamine (b) Dimethylamine (c) Trimethylamine (d) Ethylamine

[ 39 ]
509. The colour of the product obtained by reacting 2° nitroalkane with HNO2 is:
(a) white (b) blue (c) red (d) yellow
510. Hinsberg’s reagent is:
(a) benzene sulphonyl chloride (b) benzene sulphonic acid
(c) phenyl isocyanide (d) benzene sulphonamide
511. Glucose and fructose are :
(a) optical isomers (b) functional isomers
(c) chain isomers (d) position isomers
512. Which of the following has higher boiling point ?
(a) CH3OH (b) CH3–CH2OH
(c) CH3CH2NH2 (d) CH2=CH–NH2
513. Bromination aniline in aq medium gives _____
(a) 2-bromo aniline (b) 2, 4 dibromo benzene
(c) 2, 4, 6 tribromo benzenamine (d) none of these
514. Which of is not confirmed by dye test ?
(a) naphthol (b) naphthaline (c) phenol (d) aniline
515. For eliminating –NH2 group from benzene ring the reagent(s) necessary _____
(a) NaNO2 + HCl (b) H3PO2 (c) a & b (d) ethylalcohol
516. Towards SE reaction the most reactive is ______.
(a) nitrobenzene (b) aniline
(c) aniline hydrochloride (d) N-acetylaniline
517. Which of the following is most basic ?
(a) Benzylamine (b) Aniline (c) Acetanilide (d) p-nitroaniline
518. When ethyl amine is treated with CH3MgBr, the product is :
(a) CH3CH3 (b) CH4
(c) CH3CH2CH3 (d) CH3CH2CH2CH3
519. When Aniline is heated with Conc.H2SO4 at 455-475K, it forms :
(a) Aniline hydrogen sulphate (b) m-Aminobenzene sulphonic acid
(c) Benzene sulphonic acid (d) Sulphonailic acid
520. Which of the following compound will give dye test?
(a) Aniline (b) Methyl amine
(c) Diphenyl amine (d) Ethyl amine
521. Which of the fallowings does not react with Hinsberg’s reagent ?
(a) C2H5NH2 (b) (C2H5)2 NH (c) (C2H5)3N (d) CH3NH2
522. The reagent used for separation of acetaldehyde and acetophenone as
(a) NaHSO3 (b) C6H5NHNH2 (c) NH2OH (d) I2 + NaOH
523. Aniline is prepared in presence of Sn/Conc HCl from
(a) benzene (b) nitrobenzene (c) dinitrobenzene (d) none of these
524. Gabriel’s synthesis is used mostly for the preparation of aliphatic _____.
(a) l0 amine (b) 1° alcohol (c) 3° amin (d) 3° alcohol
525. Which of the following is the strongest base in aqueous solution ?
(a) Trimethyl amine (b) Dimethyl amine (c) Methyl amine (d) Aniline
526. Libermann nitroso reaction is for detection of ––
(a) Secondary amine (b) aniline
(c) CH3NH2 (d) 2-nitropropane

[ 40 ]
Unit - XV
527. Terylene is
(a) Polyamide (b) Polyster (c) Polystyrene (d) Polyacrylonitrile
528. Caprolactum polymerises to give
(a) Nylon-6 (b) Buna-S (c) Glypta (d) Teflon
529. Which of the following is a copolymer ?
(a) Buna-S (b) PAN (c) Polythene (d) PTFE
530. Rayon is a
(a) natural polymer (b) semi-synthetic polymer
(c) synthetic polymer (d) none of these
531. Which of the following is not a thermoplastic ?
(a) Polythene (b) Bakehte (c) Nylon 6,6 (d) Teflon
532. Which is not a condensation polymer ?
(a) nylon-6,6 (b) glyptal
(c) dacron (d) poly tetra fluoro ethene
533. Natural rubber is a polymer of
(a) butadiene (b) ethylene (c) isoprene (d) neoprene
534. Which of the following is a bio- degradable polymer ?
(a) cellulose (b) polythene (c) PVC (d) Nylon-6
535. Terylene is a condensation polymer of, ethylene glycol and
(a) benzoic acid (b) phthalic acid
(c) salicylic acid (d) terephthalic acid
536. Vulcanisation of rubber is carried out by adding
(a) sulphur (b) carbon (c) ozone (d) phosphorus
537. Which is not a biopolymer ?
(a) starch (b) protein (c) orlon (d) nucleic acid
538. Catalyst used in olefin polymerisation
(a) Zeigler -Natta catalyst (b) Wilkinson catalyst
(c) Raney nickel (d) Resin
539. Which of the following fibres are made of polyamides ?
(a) Dacron (b) Orlon (c) Nylon (d) Rayon
540. HDP is an example of _____ polymer.
(a) Linear chain (b) branched chain (c) crossed chain (d) coupling
541. Neoprene is a polymer of
(a) chloroprene (b) chloroquine (c) propylene (d) isoprene
542. Natural rubber is a polymer of
(a) cis-isoprene (b) neoprene (c) chloroprene (d) trans-isoprene
543. Which of the following is not an example of addition polymer ?
(a) Polystyrene (b) Polyethylene (c) Polypropylene (d) Terylene

[ 41 ]
544. Which one is a protein fibre ?
(a) Rayon (b) Polyester (c) Silk (d) Cotton
545. Orlon is a polymer of
(a) Styrene (b) Vinyl chloride
(c) Acrylonitrile (d) Butadine and adipic acid
546. Nylon - 66 is obtained from
(a) Hexamethylenediamine and adipic acid (b) Phenol and formaldehyde
(c) Propylene and adipic acid (d) Adipic acid and phthalic acid
547. Bakelite is obtained by
(a) Substitution Reaction (b) Condensation Reaction
(c) Addition Reaction (d) Elimination Reaction
548. Caprolactum can be obtained from:
(a) Benzaldehyde (b) Cyclohexane (c) Benzophenone (d) Adipicacid
549. A polymer of prop-2-ene nitrile is called:
(a) Saran (b) Orlon (c) Dacron (d) Tetron
550. Peptide bond is a key feature in:
(a) Polysaccharide (b) Proteins (c) Nucleotide (d) Vitamins
551. Synthetic human hair wigs are made from a Co-/ polymer of vinyl chloride and acrylonitrile
and is called:
(a) PVC (b) Polyacrylonitrile (c) Cellulose (d) Dynel
552. The widely used PVC is a polymerised product of:
(a) CH2 = CH2 (b) CH2 = CCl2
(c) CH2ClCH2Cl (d) CH2 = CHCl
553. Which of the following is a step growth polymer:
(a) Bakelite (b) Polyethylene (c) Teflon (d) PVC
554. Which of the following is incorrect about polymer ?
(a) thermosetting polymers are hard and brittle
(b) Chlorophyl has molecular formula C55H72O5 N4Mg
(c) Polymers have molecularmass in the order 103–107 u
(d) Teflon is also known as PMMA
555. The catalyst used in the manufacture of polythene by Zeigler method is:
(a) Titanium tetrachloride and triphenyl aluminium
(b) Titanium tetrachloride and triethyl aluminium
(c) Titanium dioxide (d) Titanium isoperoxide
556. Thermoplastics are:
(a) Linear polymers (b) Soften or melt on heating
(c) Molten polymer can be moulded in desired shape
(d) All
557. Which are true for elastomers:
(a) These are synthetic polymers possessing elasticity
(b) These possess very weak intermolecular forces of attractions between polymer
chains
(c) Vulcanised rubber is an example of elastomer (d) All of these

[ 42 ]
558. Which of the following is not a biodegradable polymer ?
(a) PHBV (b) Nylone-2-nylon-6 (c) pectins (d) Teflon
Unit - XVI
559. Which of the following is antihistamine ?
(a) Ranitidine (b) Lansoprazole (c) Terfenadine (d) Luminal
560. Which of the following is a tranquilizer a drug to treat mental disease
(a) Naproxen (b) Tetracyclin
(c) chloropheniramine (d) Equanil
561. Which is used as pain killer ?
(a) Antibiotic (b) Analgesic (c) Antipyretic (d) Antioxidants
562. Structurally biodegradable detergents should contain
(a) normal alkyl chain (b) branched alkyl chain
(c) phenyl sidechain (d) cyclohexyl side chain
563. Which of the following is/are neurologically active drugs ?
(a) Antibiotic (b) Analgesic (c) Antipyretic (d) Antioxidants
564. The oxidant used as antiseptic is
(a) KMnO4 (b) KBrO3 (c) CrO3 (d) KNO 3
565. Which of the following is a antihistamine drug?
(a) Ciprofloxacin (b) Chloroquine
(c) Chloromophenicol (d) Chloropheniramine maleate
566. A drug that is antipyretic as well as analgesic is
(a) Chloroquin (b) Penicillin (c) paracetamol
(d) Chloropromazine hydrochloride
567. Antiseptics and disinfectants generally contain.
(a) Acetamide group (b) Chlorophenolic group
(c) Ether function (d) Nitrogroup
568. Morphine is
(a) Antiseptic (b) Antibiotics (c) Analgesic (d) Antimalaria
569. Novalgin is a common name of
(a) Analgesic (b) Antibiotic (c) Antipyretic (d) Antimalaria
570. The following compound is
O
C - O - CH3

CO2H
(a) An anti-inflemmatory compound (b) Analgesic
(c) Hypnotic (d) Antiseptic
571. Which of the following is an anionic detergent ?
(a) CH3(CH2)16 CH2OSO3Na (b) CH3(CH2)16 N+(CH3)3Cl–
(c) C6H 5SO 3Na (d) none of these

[ 43 ]
572. Medicine which is an antibiotic is
(a) ampicilin (b) aspirin (c) calmpose (d) chloroquine
573. A detergent is :
(a) drug (b) catalyst
(c) surface active agent (d) soap
574. Metal lauryl sulphate acts as:
(a) Soap (b) Disinfectant (c) Antiseptic (d) Detergent
575. Digestion of fat in intestine is aided by:
(a) Diffusion (b) Protection (c) Peptization (d) Emulsification
576. Hydrogenation of oils involves:
(a) Saturation of unsturated fatty acids . (b) Reaction with oxygen
(c) Conversion into fatty acids
(d) Driving of the impurities in oil by hydrogen gas
577. Which of the following is molecular disease ?
(a) Allergy (b) Cancer
(c) German measeles (d) Sickel-cell-anaemia
578. Salol can be used as:
(a) Antiseptic (b) Antipyretic (c) Analgesic (d) None of these
579. The drug which is effective in curing malaria, is:
(a) Quinine (b) Aspirin (c) Analgin (d) Equanil
580. A substance which can act both as antiseptic and disinfectant is:
(a) Aspirin (b) Chloroxylenol (c) Bithional (d) Phenol
581. The first viral disease detected in human being was:
(a) Cold (b) Influenza (c) Small pox (d) Yellow fever
582. Heroin is a derivative of:
(a) Cocaine (b) Morphine. (c) Caffeine (d) Nicotine
583. Phenacetin is used as:
(a) Antipyretic (b) Antiseptic (c) Antimalarial (d) Analgesic
584. Detergents are usually made from products obtained by cracking of petroleum like:
(a) Chloroalkanes (b) Sulphur compounds of benzene
(c) H2S (d) Polyethylene derivatives
585. An antibiotic contains nitro group attached to aromatic nucleus. It is:
(a) Penicillin (b) Streptomycin
(c) Tetracycline (d) Chloramphenicol
586. Various phenol derivatives, tincture of iodine (2- 3% I in water/alcohol) and some dyes
like methylene blue are:
(a) Antiseptics (b) Disinfectants (c) Analgesics (d) Antipyretics


[ 44 ]
 SELF ASSIGNMENT
Blacken the appropriate circle with blue pen : Time - 15 mins.
1. Quartz is type of solid.
(a) Amorphous (b) covalent
(c) Molecular (d) ionic
–
2. In NaCl structure, Cl ions occupy –
(a) corners of the Cube (b) edge centre of the cube
(c) on the centre of the faces (d) both (b) and (c)
3. Emf of a cell in terms of reduction potential of its left and right hand electrode is ––––.
(a) E  E left  E right (b) E  E left  E right
(c) E  E right  E left (d) E    E right  E left 
4. What is the number of coulombs required for conversion of one mole of MnO4 to one
mole of Mn2+ ?
(a) 1 F (b) 3 F (c) 5 F (d) 7 F
5. The proces of getting fresh water from sea water in known as
(a) osmosis (b) fitration
(c) reverse osmosis (d) Sedimentation
6. Of the following 0.1 gram mole of aqueous solution, which will exhibit the largest
depression in freezing point ?
(a) KCl (b) C6H12O6 (c) Al2(SO4)3 (d) K2SO4
7. What flows in internal & external circuit of a Galvanic cell respectively ?
(a) ions, electrons (b) electronly only
(c) electrons, ions (d) ions only
8. The standard emf of cell involving one electron charge is found to be 0.591 at 250C. The
equilibrium constant of the reaction is ________.
(a) 1.0  101 (b) 1.0  105 (c) 1.0  1010 (d) 1.0  1030
9. The molal elevation constant of water is _____. If 0.1m aqueous solution of a nonvolatile,
non-electrolyte substance boils at 100.0520C
(a) 0.52 0C/molal (b) 5.2 0C/molal
(c) 0.052 0C/molal (d) None of these
10. What will be the pH of aqueous 0.1 M solution of sodium chloride in an electrolytic cell
during electrolysis between graphite electrode ?
(a) pH = 01 (b) pH > 7 (c) pH < 7 (d) pH = 7
11. A negatively charged suspension of clay in water will need to coagulate with minimum of
______.
(a) Aluminium chloride (b) potassium sulfate
(c) sodium hydroxide (d) hydrochloride acid
12. Rate of physiosorption increases with ––
(a) decrease in temperature (c) increase in temperature
(c) decreases in surface area (d) decrease in pressure
13. At high concentration of soap in water, soap behaves as
(a) molecular colloid (b) associated colloid
(c) macromolecular colloids (d) lyophilic colloid
14. Which of the following is not a colloid ?
(a) Chlorophyll (b) smoke (c) milk (d) fog
15. Which of the following factor(s) affect the rate of chemical reaction ?
(a) The nature of the reactant (b) The concentration of the reactant
(c) Temperature (d) all of these

[ 45 ]
 Chemistry - A1
Answers
1. b 2. c 3. c 4. c 5. a 6. b
7. a 8. b 9. a 10. a 11. c 12. c
13. a 14. b 15. a 16. d 17. c 18. b
19. a 20. c 21. a 22. c 23. a 24. c
25. b 26. d 27. d 28. d 29. b 30. a
31. a 32. c 33. d 34. b 35. a 36. b
37. c 38. b 39. b 40. c 41. d 42. c
43. d 44. c 45. b 46. c 47. d 48. d
49. c 50. b 51. d 52. d 53. c 54. c
55. b 56. c 57. c 58. a 59. c 60. a
61. a 62. c 63. d 64. b 65. b 66. a
67. b 68. a 69. a 70. b 71. c 72. a
73. a 74. a 75. a 76. b 77. d 78. b
79. c 80. d 81. b 82. a 83. a 84. c
85. a 86. c 87. a 88. d 89. c 90. d
91. a 92. d 93. d 94. d 95. c 96. d
97. c 98. c 99. b 100. d 101. c 102. d
103. b 104. b 105. b 106. b 107. c 108. a
109. a 110. d 111. b 112. a 113. c 114. d
115. b 116. d 117. c 118. c 119. c 120. b
121. d 122. a 123. d 124. c 125. c 126. a
127. a 128. b 129. b 130. b 131. d 132. b
133. a 134. a 135. a 136. c 137. a 138. d
139. d 140. c 141. b 142. a 143. b 144. d
145. c 146. a 147. c 148. c 149. d 150. c
151. b 152. c 153. a 154. b 155. d 156. a
157. b 158. b 159. d 160. b 161. b 162. d
163. d 164. d 165. c 166. c 167. a 168. a
169. c 170. c 171. b 172. c 173. d 174. a
175. a 176. d 177. a 178. d 179. a 180. c
181. d 182. b 183. c 184. a 185. a 186. d
187. b 188. c 189. b 190. b 191. a 192. d
193. c 194. b 195. b 196. b 197. a 198. b

[ 46 ]
199. c 200. a 201. c 202. d 203. a 204. c
205. d 206. d 207. a 208. a 209. d 210. c
211. c 212. d 213. b 214. a 215. a 216. a
217. c 218. b 219. d 220. a 221. c 222. a
223. a 224. b 225. d 226. a 227. d 228. d
229. b 230. c 231. a 232. a 233. b 234. c
235. d 236. a 237. b 238. d 239. c 240. d
241. c 242. b 243. a 244. b 245. a 246. a
247. b 248. a 249. d 250. c 251. d 252. d
253. b 254. b 255. c 256. d 257. a 258. d
259. d 260. d 261. b 262. d 263. a 264. b
265. d 266. a 267. d 268. c 269. c 270. d
271. a 272. d 273. b 274. a 275. d 276. b
277. c 278. d 279. d 280. a 281. d 282. b
283. b 284. c 285. a 286. c 287. a 288. a
289. a 290. b 291. b 292. c 293. a 294. d
295. c 296. b 297. b 298. c 299. a 300. c
301. c 302. b 303. d 304. b 305. b 306. b
307. a 308. c 309. b 310. c 311. c 312. c
313. c 314. d 315. b 316. c 317. b 318. a
319. a 320. b 321. b 322. b 323. a 324. a
325. c 326. b 327. a 328. d 329. c 330. a
331. b 332. b 333. b 334. b 335. a 336. c
337. b 338. a 339. d 340. c 341. b 342. b
343. a 344. d 345. b 346. c 347. b 348. c
349. a 350. a 351. a 352. c 353. a 354. a
355. d 356. c 357. b 358. d 359. d 360. d
361. c 362. b 363. b 364. c 365. b 366. d
367. c 368. a 369. b 370. b 371. d 372. a
373. b 374. c 375. a 376. b 377. d 378. a
379. b 380. a 381. a 382. a 383. b 384. b
385. b 386. a 387. b 388. d 389. c 390. b
391. a 392. d 393. d 394. d 395. b 396. b
397. b 398. c 399. a 400. b 401. b 402. a
403. c 404. a 405. d 406. b 407. c 408. c

[ 47 ]
409. a 410. c 411. b 412. c 413. b 414. a
415. a 416. c 417. c 418. b 419. d 420. b
421. c 422. b 423. d 424. a 425. b 426. d
427. c 428. a 429. c 430. b 431. a 432. a
433. b 434. b 435. c 436. c 437. c 438. c
439. a 440. c 441. d 442. a 443. a 444. b
445. a 446. a 447. a 448. b 449. c 450. b
451. b 452. a 453. a 454. d 455. a 456. c
457. d 458. a 459. b 460. c 461. b 462. b
463. a 464. a 465. d 466. a 467. d 468. d
469. d 470. b 471. c 472. a 473. c 474. c
475. a 476. a 477. b 478. a 479. d 480. b
481. c 482. c 483. c 484. d 485. a 486. d
487. c 488. b 489. d 490. a 491. c 492. b
493. a 494. a 495. a 496. b 497. b 498. d
499. d 500. a 501. a 502. d 503. b 504. a
505. c 506. c 507. d 508. c 509. b 510. a
511. a 512. b 513. c 514. b 515. c 516. b
517. a 518. b 519. d 520. a 521. c 522. a
523. b 524. a 525. b 526. a 527. b 528. a
529. a 530. b 531. b 532. d 533. c 534. a
535. d 536. a 537. c 538. a 539. c 540. a
541. a 542. a 543. d 544. c 545. c 546. a
547. b 548. b 549. b 550. b 551. d 552. d
553. a 554. d 555. b 556. d 557. d 558. d
559. a 560. d 561. b 562. a 563. b 564. a
565. d 566. c 567. b 568. c 569. a 570. b
571. a 572. a 573. c 574. d 575. d 576. a
577. b 578. a 579. a 580. d 581. d 582. b
583. a 584. b 585. d 586. a


[ 48 ]
 Group - A(2)
Very Short Answer type questions.
Fill in the blanks :
Unit - I
1. In ZnS crystal, Zn2+ ions occupy –––––––.
2. Na2O crystal shows ––––––– structure.
3. Rock salt type structure has ––––––– coordination.
4. In most cubic close-packed lattices, –––––––% of space is filled.
5. Two types of voids are ––––––– and –––––––.
6. The point defect in a crystal that does not change the density of a solid is –––––––.
7. Graphite is ______ bonded type of solid.
8. In NaCl crystal, ––––––– ions occupy all the octahedral sites.
9. Co-ordination numbers of Cs+ and Cl– in CsCl crystal are in the ratio –––––––.
10. In NaCl crystal, Na+ ion is surrounded by ––––––– Cl– ions.
11. The number of nearest neighbours with which a given sphere is in contact is called ––––
–––––––.
12. Face-centred cubic unit cell has ––––––– atoms.
13. Glass is a example of ––––––– solid.
14. Caesium chloride has ––––––– structure.
15. The co-ordination number of octahedral void is _______.
16. F-centres are formed in Na+ Cl–1 due to migration of _______ ion towards the
surface.
17. An atom in hexagonal close packing (hcp) structure has ______ octahedral and
______ tetrahedral void.
18. Ionic solids never conduct electricity in _______ state due to imobility of ______.
19. If ‘r’ is the radius, the edge length of face centred unit cell is _______.
20. In fcc lattice, a unit cell is shared equally by _______ number of unit cells.
21. In CsCl lattice each Cs+ is surrouneded by _________ member of Cl– ions.
22. In CaF2, the C.Ns of Ca2+ and F– ions are ______ and _______ . respectively.
23. CsCl has bcc lattice. On heating at about 760 K it transforms into ______.
24. Empty space in bcc lattice is _________%.
25. In cubic arrangement of ‘N’ spheres, the number of tetrahedral and number of
octahedral voids are respectively __________.
26. Number of unit cells in 168.5 gram of CsCl crystal is nearly (Mol. mass of CsCl = 168.5
g / mole) ______.
27. Number of unit cells in 1 mole of NaCl crystal is nearly ________.
28. Co-ordination number of ZnS crystal is ________ .
29. In a crystal arrangement ‘X’ atoms are placed at corners and ‘Y’ atoms at body centres.
Then the formula of the compound is ________.

[ 49 ]
30. In a crystal arrangement, ‘X’ atoms are placed at corners and body centres. ‘Y’
atoms are placed at edge centres. The formula of the compound is _______.
31. The compound possessing both Schottky and Frenkel defect is _______.
32. Number of Na+ occupy as 2nd nearest neighbour to the locations of Na+ in the structure
of NaCl is ______.
33. In hcp, ABAB ------------ type of arrangement takes place. So in bcc the arrangement
is ______. While in ccp it is ________.
Unit - II
34. With the increase of temperature, the vapour pressure of a liquid ———.
35. With increase of altitude, the boiling point of water ––––––– .
36. Solutions having same osmotic pressure are called ––––––– .
37. On adding a solute, boiling point of solution –––––––.
38. For ideal solution H mix  0 , but  Smix is ______.
39. Density of 2.05 M solution of acetic acid in water is 1.02 g.ml. The molality of the
solution is ______ .
40. Phenol dimerises in benzene having van’t Hoff factor 0.54. The degree of association is
_________.
41. The molal elevation constant of water 0.51 the boiling point 0.1m aqueous NaCl solution
is __________.
42. Between sodium chloride and magnesium chloride _________ has lower vapour
pressure.
43. Camphor is often used in determination of molecular mass because it hass bery high
_________ value.
44. 20 gram of non-volatile solute is added to 500 gram solvent. Freezing point of solvent =
5.480C and that of solution = 0.750C. Kf = 11.9 molecular mass of the solute is
__________ .
45. When an egg is placed in concentrated solution of sodium chloride, it shrinks due to
_________.
46. The molarity of pure water is ________.
47. 5.85 g of NaCl is dissolved in 90 g of water. The mole fraction of the solute is ________.
48. For urea solution (1 M), the value of van’t factor (i) is ________.
49. Alloys are _______ type of homogeneous solution.
50. The unit of cryoscopic constant is _________.
51. The depression in f. p. is directly proportional to _________.
52. The property of solution which depends on quantity of solute particles is called ________.
53. Higher is KH value ________ is the solubility at a given temperature.
54. The value of H mixing is ________ for a liquid - liquid solution of benzene and toluene.
55. A–B interaction is greater than A–A and B–B interaction. The process of solution of, A
in B is ______ solution with _____ deviation.

[ 50 ]
56. Nomality of 0.3 M phosphoric acid is ________ N.
57. Normality  equivalent is __________.
58. A 5% solution of cane sugar (molar mass = 342 g/mol) is isotonic with 1% of a substance
X. Mol mass of X is ______.
59. If ‘  ’ is the degree of dissociation of Na2SO4, the van’t Hoff factor (i) will be _______.
60. Hydrostatic pressure set up due to osmosis is called _______.
61. Pressure required to prevent osmosis and the process is ________.
62. Benzoic acid present as _______ is non-polar solvent.
Unit - III
63. EMF of the cell when the cell reaction attains equilibrium is ________ . Where G is
also equal to _________.
64. pH value of aqueous solution of NaCl after electrolysis is ___________ .
65. For strong electrolytes degree of ionisation is ______________ .
66. On electrolysis of dilute sulphuric acid using Pt-electrode the product obtained at anode
is ________.
67. The salt, that liberates hydrogen (g) at cathode and anode are ________ and ______
respectively.
68. Graphite is a conductor but ___________ another crystalline allotrope is insulator.
69. The most durable metal plating on iron to protect against corrosion is generally
____________.
70. If 0.5 amp. current is passed through acidified AgNO3(Aq) for 100 minutes the mass of
silver deposited on cathode is ____________.
71. Equivalent conductance of NaCl, HCl and CH3 COONa at infinite dilution are 126.45,
126.16 and 91 ohm–1 cm2 respectively. 0 CH3COOH would be ___________.
72. Between Al and Zn _____________ is a better reducing agent.
73. A piece of copper wire is immersed in a solution of AgNO3(Aq). The colour of the
solution turns ____________.
74. ______ amp. / sec is necessary to produce O2(g) at 1 ml / sec.

75. The resistance of N 10 solution is found to be 2.5  103 ohms. The equivalent
conductance of the solution kept in a cell with cell constant 1.25 cm–1 is ______ .
76. _____________ are responsible for electrolytic conduction.
77. _____________ are responsible for metallic conduction.
78. Temperature increases ___________ of metallic conduction.
79. Amount of substance liberated by the passage of one coulomb of electricity through an
electrolyte is called _____________.
80. At ____________ electrode in a cell, oxidation takes place & at ____________
reduction takes place.
81. In electrochemical cell ________ energy is converted to ________ energy.
82. EMF of a standard hydrogen electrode is ___________.

[ 51 ]
83. In a Galvanic cell the difference of reduction potential of cathode and anode is called
___________.
84. Electrochemical equivalent of two metals are in the ratio of their ____________.
85. E.C.E  _________ = chemical equivalent.
86. The unit of molar conductance is ___________.
87. The unit of specific conductance is ___________.
88. Cell constant  __________ = specific conductance.
89. In Daniell cell copper vessel serves as ___________.
90. Resistance implied by one cm3 of a substance is called ____________ and reciprocal
of this is called ______________.
91. Charge on one mole of carbonate ion is _____________ .
92. Electrovalent compounds are regarded as ___________ in respect of conductance of
electricity.
93. Electroplated silver spoon acts as ________ in a cell during formation.
94. Standard cell potential of Daniell cell is _______.
95. In an electrolytic cell one litre of 1M aqueous soluiton of MnO4– is reduced to 0.1 M
MnO 24  on passage _________ quantity of electricity..
96. 48250 C of electricity was required to deposit all the copper present in 0.5 L of CuSO4
solution using inert electrodes. Assuming no change in volume the molarity of the solution
is _______ .
[ 2 F need to convert Cu 2   Cu ]
Unit - IV
97. For a first order reaction, the t0.5 is equal to ––––––––––– .
98. Photochemical reaction between hydrogen and chlorine is –––––––––– order
reaction.
99. Arrhenius equation is given by –––––––––– .
100. Unit of rate constant for first order reaction is ––––––––––– .
101. Alkali hydrolysis of ester is a ––––––––––– order reaction having molecularity ––––
––– .
102. Molecularity cannot be greater than ––––––––––– .
103. The 1st order reaction having molecularity greater than one is called –––––––––––.
104. The unit of the rate constant for the second order reaction is _____________.
105. The specific rate of a first order reaction depends on ____________.
106. For an endothermic reaction where H represents enthalpy of reaction is kJ/mol, the
minimum value fo energy of activation (Ea) will be _____________.
107. The hydrolysis of ethyl acetate in acidic medium is __________ order reaction.
1
108. A graph is plotted between ln k and for a first order reaction. The slope of the plot
T
expressed as ___________.

[ 52 ]
109. Ionic reactions are ______ in nature in respect of their kinetics.

110. t1 for zero order reaction is proportional to _________ .

2

111. The value of order of reaction maximises to _____________.

112. If ‘a’ is the initial concentration of a substance according to zero order kinetic and rate
constant is k. The time for the reaction to go completion is ________.
113. The rate for the single step reaction, 2A  B  2C is given as rate = ________ .

114. The rate law of the reaction, 2A  B   2C is represented as, rate = k[A]2[B]. If ‘A’’
is taken large in excess, the order of the reaction is __________.
dx 2 0
115. Rate expression of a chemical change is  k  A   B  C  , the order of the reaction
dt
is _______.
116. The difference of threshold energy (Eth) and average energy of reactants, (ER) is
_________.
117. The half life period of a reaction is 100 minutes. In 400 minutes the initial concentration
of 2-gram will become _________.
118. Rate is proportional to the square of the concentration. So the order of the reaction is
_______.
119. Unit of rate of reaction is ___________.
1
120. It t 0.5  (a = initial concentration), then the order of reaction is ___________.
a2
Pt
121. The reaction, 2NO 2 

 2N 2  O 2 is of _______ order..

122. Decomposition of H 2 O 2 is __________ order reaction.

123. For a given reaction, k  mol /  / sec the order of reaction is _________.
124. Order and molecularity of of hydrolysis of ester is __________ & _________
respectively ?
125. The slope of concentration of reactant vs time graph gives __________.
126. The number of species taking part is a single step of reaction is called ___________ of
the reaction.
127. Molecularity cann’t be greater than ___________.
128. If rate vs molar concentration of the reaction is linear passing through origin, it is ______
order reaction.
129. Temperature co-efficient of a reaction is ___________.
130. If the energy released by the activated complex in forming the products is more than the
activation energy absorbed by the reactants the reaction is _________ in nature.
131. The catalyst used in the decomposition KClO3 forming oxygen is __________.
132. The positive catalyst _________ the activation energy.

[ 53 ]
133. The reaction rate is found to depend upon two concentration terms. The order of reaction
is ________.
134. Decomposition of ammonia on tungsten surface is a reaction of _______ order.

d  NH 3 
135. For the reaction N 2  3H 2 
 2NH 3 , if  2 104 mol L1 S1 the value of
dt
d  N2 
 is ____________ .
dt
Unit - V
136. Ferric hydroxide sol has –––––––––– charge.
137. The zig-zag motion of colloidal particles is called ––––––– .
138. The scattering of light on the surface of colloidal particle is ––––––– .
139. The colloidal system of liquid dispersed solid is called ––––––– .
140. Milk is an example of ––––––– type emulsion.
141. In arsenic sulfide colloide the particles are __________ charged.
142. The conversion of precipitate to colloidal solution is called ___________.
143. The process of settling of colloidal solution is called __________.
144. Sky looks blue due to ____________.
145. The migration of positively charged colloidal particles under the influence electric field
towards cathode is called ___________ .
146. A colloidal system where solid particles are dispersed in gas is called _________.
147. Colloidal solution is homogeneous like sugar solution. T/F.
148. The extent coagulation by different substance can be known from its ________ value.
149. Liquid-Liquid colloidal system is termed as __________.
150. Bodylotion is _________ type of emulsion.
151. A colloidal solution consists of two phases namely _________ & __________.
152. The term used where both absorption and adsorption take place is ___________.
153. Extent of physical adsorption increases with ___________ of temperature.
154. Reverse of adsorption is called ___________.
155. Absorption is a __________ phenomenon while adsorption is ____________.
156. S8 is an example of _________ colloid.
157. (a) NH3(g) is ________ by water.
(b) Silica gel _________ water vapour.
158. Lyophilic colloids are ________ stable than Lyophobic colloids.
159. Coconut charcoal is used to separate noble gases except _________(g).
160. Activated harcoal in a powerful adsorbent as it contains microscopic crystalline variety
of ______ with large surface area.

161. The entropy value  S _________ during adsorption.

[ 54 ]
162. H value in the process of adsorption is ___________.
163. Between NH3 and N2 _________ is a good adsorbate.
164. Absorption proceeds at uniform rate. T/F ____
165. The decomposition of H2O2 is retarded in the presence of __________.
166. Oxidation of chloroform to phosgene is retarded by __________.
167. Efficiency of catalyst can be increased by certain substance called __________.
168. In Haber’s process catalytic activity of iron is enhanced by _________.
169. In the stomach the enzyme _______ converts protein to  -amino acid.
170. The enzyme activity is increased by certain substance called ________.
171. Enzyme amylase becomes more active in presence of __________.
172. At CMC the negatively charged ––COO– (head) remain _____ of the sphere.
173. The non-polar alkyl part (tail) of the soap is ________ while the polar (– COO–) part is
_______ in nature.
174. Pore size of the filter paper is __________ than the size of the colloidal particle.
175. Haemoglobin in Blood is an example of _______ colloid. (The anticoagulate heparin is
–vely charged.)
176. An emulsion of oil and water can be stabilised by certain substances called __________.
177. The stabilsing power of Lyophilic sol is expressed in terms of __________.
178. The cleansing action of soap is linked with its tendency to act as _________ between
oil & water.
179. Associated colloids are called __________.
NO g 
180. 2SO 2  g   O 2  g    . Here NO(g) acts as _______ catalyst.
Unit - VI
181. Soluble metal oxide provide _________ ions in aqueous medium the solution is called
_________.
182. Non-metallic oxide in aqueous solution gives _________ ion.
183. Sodium oxide is a basic oxide but zinc oxide is __________.
184. The most electronegative non-metal is __________.
185. Dolomite is an ore of __________ and __________.
186. The sulphide ore of Cu is known as ___________.
187. Calamine is an ore of ____________.
188. ZnS and PbS can be separated during froth flotation process using ___________ as
depressant.
189. Wolfram from SnO2 is separated by ___________.
190. NaOH acts as ___________ agent during concentration of bauxite.
191. Silver glance is leached by ____________.
192. Impurities + flux is called ____________.
193. Acidic impurity such as sand (SiO2) is removed on treating with _______.

[ 55 ]
194. The acidic impurity, P2O5 is removed by __________ forming the fusible slag
__________.
195. The gas liberated on roasting of zinc blende is ________.
196. Roasting is carried on in __________ furnace.
197. The process of heating the concentrated ore in absence of air at a temperature below
its m.p is called __________.
198. The process of reduction during metallurgy is called ________.
199. Chalocopyrites contain metals, ____________ and ____________.
200. In the blast furnase ____________ reduces Fe2 O3 to Fe.
201. Blast furrace is charged with roasted ore along with _______ and ________.
202. The tapped out iron from the furnace is called ____________.
203. During electrolytic refining, the impure copper is choosen as __________in the cell.
204. Copper obtained by electrolytic refining __________% pure.
205. Calcination helps to remove _________ & _______.
206. During the refining Zr __________ is formed which on thermal decomposition gives
pure metal.
207. The impurity in a mineral is called __________.
208. Froth floatation process is used for the metallurgy of __________ ore.
209. A non-metal which shines like a metal and conducts electricity is __________.
210. The art of extracting metals from their ores is called __________.
211. Th process of removal of gangue or matrix from are is called __________.
212. Coke used during smelting of iron acts as fuel as well as __________ agent.
213. Reduction of metal oxide by aluminium metals is called __________.
214. The most abundant metal in the earth-crust is __________.
215. In the electrorefining of copper, some gold is obtained in __________.
216. Zinc blende and iron pyrites` are sulfides. T/F __________.
217. Density of slag is always ________ than that of molten metal.
218. The metal purified by distillation is ___________.
Unit - VII
219. ‘S’ in H2SO4 undergoes ______ hybridization.
220. Among hydrides of group 15 ________ has the lowest boiling point.
221. Among halogens _____ has only one oxidation state.
222. Bromine gas turns starch-iodide paper ____ due to liberation _______.
223. The halogen that most readily reduced __________.
224. XeF2 is AB2L3 type, so its shape is ________.
225. The gas used in inflating aeroplane tyres is _________.
226. Sea divers use a mixture He and O2 for artificial respiration. On coming to the surface
they feel painful sensation called ______.

[ 56 ]
227. The basicity of H3PO3 is _____ while H3PO4 is tribasic.
228. XeF6 on partial hydrolysis produces ______.
(on hydrolysis o.s. does not change)
229. The basic stength of hydrides of group-15 decreases in the order ______.
230. The equivalent mass of H3PO4 in the reaction:
 NaH 2 PO 4  H 2 O is ________.
NaOH  H 3 PO 4 
231. When chlorine reacs with cold and dil solution of NaOH, it forms _________.
232. SO2 reacts with Cl2 in presence of sunlight produces ______.
233. Oxygen and Ozone are ______ of each other.
234. Among hhalogens _______ has the lowest bond dissociation enthalpy.
235. On thermal decomposition of ammonium dichromate or Bariumazide _____ gas is
liberated.
236. With alkali metal NH3 liberates _____ gas.
237. Ammonia gives brown precipitate with Nessler’s reagent due to formation of _______.
238. In the aquaregia conc Nitric acid and conc. Hydrochloric acid present in the ratio ______.
239. The outer valence shell configuration of group 15 is ________.
240. The neutral oxide of nitrogen is _________.
241. Conc. HNO3 oxidises ‘P’ to __________.

242. Shape of NH3 is _________ while shape of NH 4 is ______.
243. Anhydride of HNO2 is __________.
244. In fuming sulfuric and the fumes are nothing but ________.
245. The O–O bond lengths is Ozone are identical. So Ozone exhibit in _______ form.
246. Sulfur molecule is reresented as _______.
247. Bleaching action of SO2 due to ________.
248. O3 reacts with KI solution to produce ________.
249. SO2 reacts with H2S where it reacts as ______ agent.
Unit - VIII
250. d- block elements are called transition elements where f- block elements are ______.
251. In the f-block of element ______ and ______ orbitals are in the process of filling.
252. The outer most shells configuration of f-block elements is _______.
253. The total number of elements can be accomodated in d-block in periodic table is ______.
254. _________ is the first and _______ is the last transition metal in periodic table with
atomic number _____ and ________.
255. German silver is an alloy of ______ _____ and ______.
256. The % ____ metal is more in german silver.
257. The correct order of arrangement of m.p. of metals present in group is ________.
258. _____ group in periodic table contains maximum number of elements.

[ 57 ]
259. Cr3+ has _______ number of electrons in t2g level.
260. The complementary colour of violet is ________.
261. Inner transition metal compounds are ____ type of compounds not following common
rule of valency.
262. Mn3O4 is a mixed oxide of ______ and _____ .
263. Acidic oxides of Cr is ______ & anhydride of _______.
264. The magnetic moment of Mn2+ is _________ BM.
265. The ns electron of transition metal responsible for metallic bonding while (n–1)d orbital
cause ______ bonding.
266. Among Ti, V, Cr and Mn _______ has / lower m.p.
267. The metals showing highest oxidation state of +8 are ______ with oxygen.
268. Co3+ present in vitamin ________.
269. The number of unpair e s in Mn 2   Z  25 is ________.
270. Brass is an alloy of –––– and copper.
271. The transition metal/ion form maximum number of complexes is _______.
272. TiCl3 used as _____ catalyst in the production of polyethene.
273. The number of water molecules in Mohr’s salt is _______
0
274. In the first row (3d-block) of trasition metal ______ has positive E M 2 |M value.
275. Betweens p and d-block of elements ______ block elements are better reducing agent.
276. Between CuI2 and Cu2I2 ______ is more stable.
277. The transition elements present in first triad is ________.
278. The decrease in ionic radius of Lanthanides from La3+ to Lu3+ is called ______.
279. Among the hydroxides of Lanthanoides _______ is more basic.
280. Between Actinoid contraction and Lanthanoid contraction is ______ greater.
Unit - IX
281. IUPAC name of [Co (en)3]2 (SO4)3 is –––––––.
282. Carnallite is a ———––– salt.
283. Oxidation state of Ni in [Ni (CN)4]2– is ––—–––—.
284. Denticity of EDTA is –––––––––.
285. IUPAC name of [Fe (CO)5] is –––––––.
286. [Co(NH 3 ) 5 Br]SO 4 and [Co(NH 3 ) 5 SO 4 ] Br are ––––– isomers while
[Co(NH3)5NO2]Cl2 and [Co(NH3)5ONO]Cl2 are —— isomers.
287. Stable complex is formed if EAN is equal to the —–––.
288. Chemical formulae of nitropentaminecobalt (III) chloride is ––––—.
289. According to Werner types of valencies present for metals in complexes are — and ––
–––––—.

[ 58 ]
290. The coordination number of cobalt in [Co (en)2Cl2] is —––––.

291. CN is called _______ ligand while  CH 2  2  NH 2  2 is called a chelating ligand.

2
292. Between Ni  CO  4 and  Fe  H 2 O  6  ______ is more paramagnetic.

4
293.  Mn  CN 6  is an _________ orbital complex.

294. Argentite  Ag 2S dissolves in KCN forming a complex. The IUPAC name of it is
_________.
295. The co-ordination number and O.N. of iron is potassium ferrocyanide are ______ and
_______ respectively.

296. The IUPAC name of K 2  Ni  CN 4  is ________.

297. The number of moles of AgCl formed on adding excess AgNO3 to hexaamineplatium
(IV) chloride is __________.
298. The aqueous solution of chloro complex of diammine platinum (IV) is an electrolyte.
T/F __________.
2 2
299. Between  Mn  en  2  and  Ni  en  2  _______ more stable.

300. The formula of tetraammine dichlorido chromium (III) chloride is _________.

301. Complexes where more than one kind of ligand / donor group is known as ________
complex.
Unit - X
302. Ethyliodide reacts with sodium ethoxide to produce ________________.
303. When alkyl halide is treated with alcoholic KOH, the compound formed is _______.
304. Between 1-chlorobutane and 2-chlorobutane ____________ is optically active.
305. RX + KOH  ROH + KX is example of __________ reaction.
306. The reagent required to convert CH3I to CH4 is ___________.
307. For a given alcohol the order of reactivity with halogen hydraacid is __________.
308. The non polar compound is __________ (CH3Cl, CH3Cl2, CCl4, CHCl3)

309.  CH3 3 CCl is named as __________.

310. Methylene chloride is also named as ___________.
311. Ethylene chloride on action with alcoholic KOH gives ___________.
312. The compound used as refrigerant is ___________.

Cl

313. The IUPAC name of is _______.

Br
314. The structure of 2–(4–chlorophenyl) buta-1, 3-diene is __________.

[ 59 ]
 NaNO2 HBF4
315. Aniline 
HCl,50 C
 A   B. The product ‘B’ is _____________.

316. Between o-dichlorobenzene and p-dichlorobenzene ___________ has higher m.p.

317. Chlorobenzene on treatment with sodium in dry ether gives diphenyl. The name of the
reaction is _____________.

Cl
N(CH3)2 NO2 NO2
O2N NO2
318.
Cl Cl NO2 NO2
Cl
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
The order of reaction towards SN is __________.
Na / ether
319. C6 H 5  CH 2  Cl  CH 3Cl   . Name of the reaction is __________.
Na / dryether
320. C6 H 5 Cl  CH 3 Cl  C6 H5  CH 3 and this is an example of ________
reaction.
321. Bromination of ethyl benzene in presence of sunlight preferentialy yield __________.
(1-Bromo-1-phenyl ethane ethane).
322. Ethyl bromide with excess of ammonia gives ___________.
323. HBr adds to propene in presence of peroxide is called ____________ effect & the
product formed is __________.
324. CH 3  CH 2  OH  PCl3 
 CH 3  CH 2Cl  __________.

325. CH 3  CH 2  OH  PCl5 
 CH 3  CH 2 Cl  __________ + __________.
326. The reagent(s) used in Wurtz reaction is ______________.
327. HBr is added to propene to give _________ as per ___________ rule.
328. The metal used in the preparation of Grignard’s reagent is _________.
329. 3-Bromo-2,2-dimethylbutane heated with alc. KOH to give _________.
330. Preparation of chlorobenzene from C6H5N2Cl with Cu and HCl is called _________
reaction.
331. Silver acetate with bromine gives ______ and _____ the reaction is called ______ .
332. Hydrogen atom in chloroform is ________ in nature. (acidic / alkaline / neutral)
333. Solvent used in dry cleaning of clothes is _________.
334. The ease of alkyl halides undergoes Wurtz reaction is _________.
335. Ethyl bromide and isopropyl chloride can be distinguished by ________.
336. The alkyl bromide better hydrolysed by SN-1 mechanism is ________.
337. Grigrard’s reagent is prepared by refluxing alkyl halide with _______ in _______ median.
338. Grignard’s reagents with acetone is an example of ________ reaction.
339. The reagent that on action with alkyl halide increases the C-atom in chain is _________.

[ 60 ]
340. The product formed when bleaching powder is distilled with acetone is ________.
341. Diethylketone responds iodoform test. T/F _______.
acetone
342. RCl + NaI   RI + NaCl is known as _______.
343. Vicinal and gem-dihalide can be distinguished by ______.
344. C2H5MgBr on carboxylation gives ________.
345. Isopropylbromide with sodium tertiary butoxide gives ___________.
346. Sodium tetriary butoxide with CH3Br gives ________.
347. t-butyl bromide with sodium methoxide gives ____________ as major product.
348. (CH3)3CCl on Wurtz reaction gives __________ (IUPAC name).
349. An optically active compound must have atleast one ___________C atom.
SnCl 2  HCl
350. R CN   RCHO, It is an example of _______ reaction.
351. Alkyhalide with AgCN gives __________.
352. Alkyl isocyanide on reduction with LiAlH4 gives ________, which is a _______ amine.
353. In SN2 reaction the rate of reaction depends on concentration of substrate and
_________.
354. The dipolemoments of chloromethanes follow in the order : __________.
355. Chlorobenzene on Friedel Crafts alkylalation gives _________ as major product.
Unit - XI
356. Alcohols and ethers are ____________ isomers.
357. The isomer of ethanol is __________.
358. Butan-1ol and Butan-2-ol are _______ isomers.
359. The number of structural isomers with formula C4H9OH is ___________.
360. Alkan-1-ol is classified as ________.
361. Ethyl alcohol heated with conc. H2SO4 to give ___________.
PCl5 alc.KOH
362. CH3–CH2–CH2OH   A   B.
363. ____________ alcohol reacts with Lucas reagent fastest at room temperature.
364. Primary and secondary alcohol on action of reduced Cu at 3000C give ________
respectively.
365. ___________ alcohol on heating with copper at 3000C gives alkene.
366. Dehydrogenation of butan-2-ol gives ___________, while dehydration gives _________.
367. ___________ gives methyl ethyl ketone on oxidation.
368. Propan-2-ol is obtained on reduction of ___________.
369. Maltase converts ______ to glucose.
370. __________ converts glucose to, ethylalcohol.
371. A low boiling alcohol failed to give the Lucas test, but give iodoform test. The alcohol is
_________.
372. A compound ‘X’ having molecular formula, C4H10O when oxidised produces an acid,
C4H8 O2. The compound X is __________.

[ 61 ]
373. An organic compound ‘X’ (C3 H8O) on treatment with acidified K2 Cr2 O7 gives ‘Y’
which responds iodoform test. The compound X is ________.
374. Between HCHO and CH3CHO _______ does not respond to iodoform test.
375. The IUPAC name of carbinol is _________.
376. In CH3CH2OH, the bond that undegoes heterolytic cleavage most readily is
__________.
377. 1-chlorobutane on reaction with alcoholic KOH gives __________.
378. Ethylalcohol is miscible in water because it forms __________.
379. Ethanol has higher boiling point than that of dimethyl ether. T/F
380. Secondary alcohol on oxidation gives ________.
381. Phenol on reduction with zinc dust gives _________.
382. Formylayion of Phenol is __________ reaction.
383. Phenol reacts with ________ to give o– and p– nitrophenols.
384. Phenol with CrO2Cl2 gives __________.
385. Phenol with nitrous acid (HONO) gives ________.
386. Phenol is acidic but fails to gives effervescene with ___________.
387. Phenol is named as __________ acid.
388. Phenol undergoes electrophilic substitution at ___________ positron.
389. The general formula of alkenol is _________.
390. Ethyl iodide with dry silver oxide gives __________.
391. _________ widely used as a solvent for preparation of Grignard’s reagent.
392. Phenetole with HI gives ___________ and ____________ .
393. Between phenol an cresol ___________ is more acidic.
394. (CH3)3COCH3 on hydroiodination gives ____________ and ____________.
395. Anisole when treated with HI at 373 K, gives __________ and __________.
Unit - 12
396. Aqueous solution of formaldehyde is called _______ .
397. The formation of cyanohydrin from a ketone is an example of ––––—.
398. Aldehydes are obtained by the catalytic dehydrogenation of —––––.
399. Aldehydes and Ketones are collectively known as —––– compound.
400. Acetaldehyde + conc. H2SO4 polymerises to –––––––
401. Rosenmond’s reduction ––––— and ––––— used as catalyst.
402. At room temp., formaldehyde is a –––––—.
403. ––––— being an aldehyde, does not react with Fehling’s solution.
404. Formaldehyde with NH3 forms –––––––––
405. Test that distinguishes between pentan-2-one and pentan-3-one is ________.
406. Between acetal dehyde and acetone ______ is more reactive.
407. –––— distinguishes between acetaldehyde and acetone.

[ 62 ]
408. Reduction of Ag+ ions, provided by Tollen’s reagent to silver metal is known as –––––
test.
409. Aldehydes restore the — colour of Schiff’s reagent.
410. Calcium acetate when heated with calcium formate forms –––––—.
411. 2HCHO+ NaOH  HCOONa + —–––.
This reaction is called _______.
412. When acetaldehyde reacts with hydroxylamine –––— is formed.
413. When calcium acetate is heated dry 400°C it forms –––––.
414. Ammoniacal solution of silver nitrate is known as –––––––– .
415. The precipitate formed when aldehyde reacts with Fehling’s solution is —––––.
416. CH3COOH + PCl3  3 CH3COCl + ––––––.
417. ––––– is the strongest of all aliphatic monocarboxylic acid.
418. Vinegar is —–––– solution of acetic acid.
419. ––––— is the only aliphatic carboxylic acid which acts as a reducing agent
420. When acetic acid is treated with P2O5–––— results.
421. IUPAC name of CH3CH = CHCOOH is –––—.
422. General formulae of aliphatic monocarboxylic acid is –––––—.
423. Acetyl chloride on being treated with ______ gives acetone.
424. Sodium acetate is subjected to electrolysis to produce —–– at anode.
425. When sodium formate is heated upto 390°C, the product is ––––—.
426 . When sodium salt of formic acid reacts with sodalime –––— gas is evolved.
427. Dehydration of an amide with P2O5 gives –––––.
428. _____ sigma and ___ Pi bonds are present in formaldehyde molecule.
429. Fehling’s solution is a mixture of— and —.
430. When an acid is reduced with LiAlH4 —––– is formed.
431. To produce an ester, an acid reacted upon ________ reagent.
432. Acetyl chloride on heating with ________ gives acetic anhydride.
433. Acid chlorides react with ________ to form as ester.
434. Acetamide reacts with bromine in presence of ______ to produce methylamine.
435. Acid chloride on reduction with LiAlH4 gives __________.
436. Calcium salt of ______ acid fails to form ketone.
Unit - XIII
437. The general formule of alkanamine is ___________.
438. Tetra-alkyl ammonium salt is called is __________.
439. The structure of N-methyl benznenamine is ___________.
440. The IUPAC name of Triemthyl amine is ___________.
441. Benzamide with alkaline bromine gives ___________.

[ 63 ]
442. The reagent used in Hofmann bromamide reaction is ___________.
443. Chloramine with C2H5MgBr is ___________.
444. Isocyanate (RNCO) on hydrolysis gives ___________. .
445. Mono-carboxylic acid with hydrazoic acid acid is called ___________ reaction.
446. ___________ is formed by Schmidt reaction.
447. ___________ is prepared by Gabriel phthalimide reaction.
448. Between ClNH2 and CH3NH2 ___________ is more basic.
449. Freshly prepared aniline is colourless but on exposure it becomes ________.
450. Reduction nitrile and isonitrile gives _________ and ______ amine respectively.
451. NItro methane on heating with Sn and HCl gives ___________.
Sn / HCl NaNO2  s 
452. 2-nitro propane  A 
dil HCl
 B . Compound ‘B’ is ________.

453. The number of isomeric amines given by C3 H9N is ___________.

454. Lower amines are soluble in water due to formation of ___________.
455. Primary amine with nitrous acid gives ___________.
456. A primary amine can be distinguished from 20 and 30 amines by ________ reaction.
457. The reagent that reacts with nitromethane to form methyl hydroxylamine is ___________.
458. Chloroform with nitric acid gives ___________.
459. The reagent required for diazotisation is ___________.
460. Diazotisation can be carried out on cold at___________.
461. Between C6H5CH2 NH2 and (NO2) CH2NH2 _______ is a weaker base.
462. The gas liberated on treatment 10-amine with nitrous acid is ________.
463. Ethylamine with alkaline chloroform gives _________.
464. Hinsberg reagent is ___________.
465. Silver chloirde is soluble in methyl amine due to formation of ___________.
466. The compound which on reaction with nitrous acid at low temperature produces an oily
compound is ___________.
467. Tertiaryamine, (CH3)3N with nitrous acid on heating gives ___________.
468. ___________ is used for dehairing hides.
469. Formation of benzene diazonium chloride from aniline is called ___________.
470. Benzene diazonium chloride with KI formes ___________.
471. Benzene diazonium chloride boiled with water to give ___________.
472. C6 H 5 NH 2  H 2 PO 2  H 2 O 
 __________.
473. Arene diazonium fluoroborate on heating gives __________.
474. Benzene diazonium chloride with ethanol gives benzene. This a process of ________
where ethanol acts as ________ agent.
475. The gas liberated on heating acetamide with NaOH is ___________.

[ 64 ]
476. The amine used for dehairing hides is ___________.
477. Quarternary ammonium salt is used in the product of ___________.
Unit - XV
478. Amino acids are building block of _______.
479. Monomers of terylene is _______ and _______ .
480. Orlon is a polymer of _______ .
481. The polymer used for making non stick utensils is _______.
482. Teflon is a type of _______ .
483. _______ is natural elastomer.
484. Polymerisation of ethene is _______ .
485. Natural rubber is a polymer of _______ .
486 . Radio and TV bodies are made up of _______ .
487. The name saran is given to copolymers obtained by the copolymerisation of _______
with _______ .
488. Nylon-6,6 is Co-polymer of ________ & _______.
489. Polymerisation of two or more different monomers gives _______ .
490. Nylon - 6, 10 is a copolymer of _______ and _______ .
491. Glyptal or alkyl resin is a coplymer of _______ and _______ .
492. Terelyne is nothing but a group of ___________ .
493. PCTFE is obtained from __________ .
494. The monomer of Nylon-6 is __________.
495. Condensation of phenol with formaldehyde produces a compound called _______ .
496. The growth condensation polymer is called _______ .
497. Polythene is an example of _______ .
498. Bakelite is _____ plastic.
499. Buna - S rubber is also known as _______ .
500. Nylon, Decron, Glyptal are _______ .
501. Polythene, PVC are _______ .
502. Polymer made up of identical repeat units are known as _______ .
503. Carbohydrates and proteins are _______ polymer.
504. Neoprene is a polymer of _______ .
505. Hexamethylenediamine is used in the manufacture of _______ .
506. Formula of Melamine is _________ .
507. Electrical insulators are made up of _______ .
508. Bakelite is — polymer.
509. Neoprene is used as ______.
510. Automobile tyres or shoe sole are made up of ______.

[ 65 ]
511. Buna-N rubber is a co-polymer of ______ and ______.
512. The IUPAC name of monomer of orlon is _______.
Unit - XVI
513. Phenol is used as both antiseptic as well as _______.
514. _______ act as both an analgesic and antipyretic.
515. Nature of morphine is _______ .
516. A mixture of chloroxylenol and terpineol gives _______ properties of dettol.
517. Streptomycin is used to _______ .
518. Pencillin has a _______ spectrum.
519. Tetracycline and chloroamphenicols are _______ .
520. Medicines against harmful micro organisms are called _______ .
521. Ampicillin acts as _______ .
522. Chemicals which prevent the growth of micro organisims are called _______ .
523. Acetyl salicylic acid is known as _______ .
524. The oil from which soaps are prepared, belongs to a class of compound known as
_______ .
525. Paracetamol is used as _______ .
526. Mercurochrome is an example of _______ .
527. Dettol is a mixture of _______ and _______ in a suitable solvent.
528. Oils and fats are _______ of higher carboxylic acids.
529. Aspirin and Analgin are (narcotic/non-narcotic) drug _______ .
530. Tincture iodine is _______ drugs.
531. Crocin or Phenacetin is _______ .
532. Novalgin is an — drug.
533. Terphenadine is a common ________.
534. Medicine used to prevent allergy is ________.
535. Boric acid used as mild _________.
536. To reduce the acid secretion in stomach wall the medicine generally prescribed is _____.


[ 66 ]
 Chemistry
Answers - Group - A(2)
1. tetrahedral void 2. antifluorite 3. 6:6
4. 74% 5. octahedral voids, tetrahedral voids
6. frenkel defect 7. Covalently 8. Na+\
9. 8:8 10 six 11. co-ordination number
12. 4 (four) 13. amorphous 14. bcc
–
15. six 16. Cl 17. one, two
18. solid, ions 19. 2 2.r 20. six
21. eight 22. 8, 4 23. fcc & NaCl structure
24. 32 25. 2N, N 26. 6.023  1023
27. 1.5  1023 (4 molecules/Unit cube) 28. 4 : 4
29. XY 30. XY3 31. AgBr
32. 12 33. ABAB..........., ABCAB...........
34. increases 35. decreases 36. isotonic solutions
37. elevates (increases) 38. not zero 39. 2.28 m
40. 0.92 41. 100.102 cC 42. MgCl2
43. Kf 44. 76.4 g/mol 45. osmosis
46. 55.56 m 47. 0.02 48. one
–1
49. solid-solid 50. K.Kg mol 51. molality of solution
52. Colligative property 53. less 54. zero
55. Non-ideal, negative 56. 0.9 N 57. g/L (strength)
58. 68.49 g/mol 59. 1 + 2  60. osmotic pressure
61. Reverse Osmosis 62. dimer 63. Zero, nFE
64. > 7 65. one 66. O2 (g)
67. NaCl, NaH 68. diamond 69. Zinc
70. 3.3575 g 71. 90.71 ohm–1cm2/gm eqv.
72. Al 73. colourless 74. 17.23 amp/sec
–1 2 –1
75. 0.5 ohm cm eqv 76. ions 77. electrons
78. resistance 79. ECE (Z) 80. anode, cathode
81. Chemical, electrical 82. zero
 W1 Z1 E1 
83. Cell potential 84. Chemical equivalent   
W2 Z2 E2 
 

85.  E  96500  Z  , E  Z.F 86. ohm–1 cm2 mol–1 87. ohm1 cm 1

88. Conductance 89. Cathode (+)
90. specific resistance, sp.conductance
91. 2  1.6 1019 C/ ion i.e. 2F / mole 92. electrode
93. cathode 94. 1.1 volts 95. 0.1 F

[ 67 ]
96. 0.5 M 97. 0.693 /K 98. zero
99. k=Ae–Ea/RT 100. sec–1 101. second, 2
102. three 103. pseudo-unimolecular 104. litre mol–1 sec–1
105. temperature 106. H  Ea 107. first
108. –Ea/R 109. instantaneous 110. initial conc. (a)
111. three 112. a/k

1 d  A  d  B 1 d C 
113.    114. first
2 dt dt 2 dt
115. three 116. Ea(activation energy)
4
1 1
117. 2     118. two 119. mol l–1 sec–1
2 8
120. three 121. zero 122. first
dc
123. zero 124. one, two 125. (rate of reaction)
dt
126. molecularity 127. three 128. first
129. 2 or 3 130. exothermic 131. MnO2
132. lowers 133. second 134. zero
d  N2  1 d  NH 3 
135.    1.0  104 mol 1 sec 1
dt 2 dt
136. Positive 137. Brownian movement 138. Tyndal effect
139. gel 140. o/w 141. –vely
142. peptisation 143. coagulation 144. scattering light
145. aenosol (of solid) 146. electrophoresis / cataphoresis
147. F 148. Flocculation 149. emulsion
150. w/o 151. despersed phase & dispersion medium
152. sorption 153. decrease 154. desorption
155. bulk, surface 156. multimolecular 157. absorbed, adsorbs
158. more 159. Helium 160. graphite
161. decreases 162. negative 163. NH3
164. T 165. glycerol/H3PO4 166. ethanol
167. promotor 168. Mo 169. Tripsin
+
170. Co-enzyme 171. Na 172. outward
173. hydrophobic, hydrophilic 174. bigger 175. positive
176. emulifier 177. gold number 178. emulsifier
179. micelle 180. homogeneous
181. OH– alkaline 182. H+ 183. amphoteric
184. F 185. Ca, Mg 186. Copper pyrite/glance
187. Zn(ZnCO3) 188. NaCN 189. Magnetic separation
190. Leaching 191. NaCN 192. Slag

[ 68 ]
193. CaO (lime) 194. Ca, Ca3(PO4)2 195. SO 2
196. reverberatory 197. roasting 198. smelting
199. Fe, Cu 200. CO 201. limestone and coke
202. pig iron 203. anode 204. 99.9%
205. moisture, volatile impurities 206. ZrI4 207. gangue
208. sulfide 209. graphite 210. Metallurgy
211. concentration 212. reducing 213. aluminothermy
214. aluminium 215. anode mud 216. T
217. less 218. mercury
3
219. sp 220. PH3 221. Fluorine
222. blue, iodine 223. fluorine 224. linear
225. Helium 226. bends 227. 2(dibasic)
228. XeOF2 + HF 229. NH3>PH3 > AsH3 > SbH3 > BiH3
98
230. 231. NaCl +NClO 232. SO2Cl2
1
233. allotrope 234. I–I 235. N2(g)
236. H2(g) 237. iodide of Millon’s base, H2N – Hg –O–HgI
238. 1:3 239. ns2 np3 (n=2 to 7) 240. N 2 O
241. H3PO4 242. pyramidal, tetrahedral 243. N 2O 3
244. SO 3 245. resonating 246. S 8
247. reduction 248. iodine 249. oxidising agent
250. inner transition elements 251. 4f & 5f 252. n–2f(0-14) (n–1)d0(or)1ns2
253. forty 254. Sc, Cn (21–112) 255. Cu, Ni, Zn
256. Copper (60%) 257. increasing from top to bottom
258. 3rd group (32) elements 259. three 260. yellow
261. non-stoichiometric (interstitial) 262. Mn(II)O, Mn(III)O,
263. CrO3 (H2CrO4) 264. 35  5.92 265. covalent
266. Mn 267. Ru, Os (OsO4), 268. B12
269. five (3d5) 270. Zn 271. Co(II) or Co(III )
272. Zeigler-Natta 273. six 274. Cu2+|Cu
275. s 276. Cu 2 I 2  2Cu 2   4I   Cu 2 I 2  I 2 
277. Fe, Co, Ni 278. Lanthanide 279. La(OH)3
280. Actinoid
281. Trisethylenediaminecobalt(III) sulfate 282. double
283. +2 284. six 285. pentacarbonyliron (0)
286. ionisation, linkage 287. atomic no. of nextnoble gas
288.  Co  NH3 5 NO 2  Cl2 289. primary, secondary
2
290. six 291. ambidentate 292.  Fe  H 2 O 6 

[ 69 ]
293. inner 294. K Ag  CN 2  , Potassiumdicyanido argentate (I)
295. 6, 2 296. Potassium tetracyanido nickelate (II)
0
297.  Pt  NH 3 6  Cl4 
4 Ag NO
3
 4 AgCl 298.  Pt  NH 3 2 Cl4  , F
2
299.  Ni  en 2  300.  Cr  NH3 4 Cl2  Cl 301. heteroleptic
Unit–X
302. diethylether 303. alkene 304. 2-chlorobutane
305. SN 306. Zn-Cu couple + ethanol
307. HI > HBr >HCl > HF 308. CCl4
309. 2-chloro-2-methyl propane
310. dichloromethane 311. acetylene CH  CH
312. freon 313. 3-bromo-1-chloro cyclohexene
314. H2C = C - CH = CH2 315. fluorobenzene

Cl
316. p-dichlorobenzene 317. Fittig reaction 318. (iv) > (iii) > (ii) > (i)
319. Wurtz reaction 320. C6H5-CH3 (Wurtz-Fittig reaction), 1-bromopropane
321. 1-Bromo-1-phenyl ethane 322. CH3  CH 2  NH 2
323. Kharasch, 1-bromopropane 324. H3PO3
325. POCl3 + HCl 326. Na–dryther
327. 2-Bromopropane, Markownikoff’s 328. Mg
329. 2,3– dimethyl but -2- ene 330. Sandmeyer’s
331. CH3Br+CO2, Hunsdiecker reaction. 332. acidic
333. CCl4 334. RI > RBr > RCl 335. alc. AgNO3
336.  CH 3 3 C  Br 337. Mg, dryether 338. AdN
339. KCN 340. Chloroform 341. F
342. Finkelstein 343. KOH(aq) 344. propanoic acid
345. propene 346. CH3–O–C(CH3)3 347. 2-methyl propene
348. 2, 2, 3, 3-tetramethyl butane 349. chiral / asymmetric
350. Stephen’s reaction 351. RNC
0
352. N-methyl (alkanamine, (2 ) 353. reagent (nucleophile)
354. CH3Cl > CH2Cl2 > CHCl3 > CCl4 355. p -chlorotoluene
356. functional 357. methoxy methane 358. position
359. Seven 360. primary alcohol 361. ethene
362. propene 363. 30-alcohol 364. aldehyde and ketone
365. Tertiary
366. butanone, butene 367. Buton-2-ol 368. propanone

[ 70 ]
369. maltose 370. zymase 371. ethylalcohol
372. Butan-1-ol 373. CH3CH(OH)CH3 374. HCHO
375. methanol 376. –O–H
377. But-2-ene (20 carbocation > 10) 378. H-bonding
379. True (T) 380. ketone 381. benzene
382. Reimer-Tiemann 383. dil.HNO3 384. p-benzoquinone
385. p-nitro phenol 386. NaHCO3(Aq) 387. Carbolic
388. o–/p– 389. CnH 2nO 390. diethyl ether
391. diethylether 392. phenol & C2H5I 393. phenol
394. (CH3)3CI, CH3OH 395. C6H5OH, CH3I
396. formalin (40% Aq) 397. AdN 398. 10-alcohol
399. carbonyl 400. paraldehyde, (CH3CHO)3
401. Pd-BaSO4 402. gas 403. benzaldehyde
404. urotropine, (CH2)6N4 405. iodoform test (I2+KOH)
406. acetaldehyde 407. Tollen’s reagent 408. silver minor
409. pink (p-rosalin hydrochloride decolarised by SO2)
410. acetaldehyde 411. CH3OH (Cannizzaro’s reaction)
412. acetaldehyde-oxime 413. acetone 414. Tollen’s reagent
415. Cuprous oxide (red) 416. H3PO4 417. Formic and (HCOOH)
418. 5-8% acetic acid by vol 419. HCOOH  O  CO 2  H 2O 
420. acetic anhydride 421. But-2-enoic acid 422. CnH 2nO 2
423. (CH3)2Cd 424. ethane 425. Sod. oxalate + H2
426. Hydrogengas   Na 2CO3  427. RCN (alkane nitrile) 428. three, one
429. CuSO4 (aq)+ Rochelle salt
430. R CH2OH (10-alcohol) 431. alcohol
432. Sod. acetate 433. an alcohol 434. KOH
435. primary alcohol 436. formic acid
437. RNH2, CnH2n+3N 438. quarternary ammoniumsalt
NH-CH3
439. 440. N, N–dimethyl methanamine

441. C6H5NH2 (aniline) 442. Br2 + KOH

 C2 H 5 NH 2  Mg  Br  Cl
443. ClNH 2  C2 H 5MgBr 

OH
444. RNCO  H 2 O   RNH 2  CO 2
(Curtius reaction)
H 2SO 4
445. RCOOH  HN 3  
 RNH 2  N 2  CO 2 (Schmidt reaction)
446. Primary amine 447. aliphatic 10-amine 448. CH3NH2(+ I effect)
449. blackish brown (atmospheric oxidation) 450. 10 and 20

[ 71 ]
451. methanamine 452. CH3–CH(OH)CH3
453. Four. CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 NH 2 , CH 3  CH   NH 2  CH3 ,CH3  CH 2 NH  CH3 ,  CH 3 3 N 
454. inter molecular H-bonding 455. 10-alcohol
456. Crabylamine 457. Zn+NH4Cl
458. Cl3CH+HONO2 
 Cl3CH-NO2 (Chloropicrin)
459. NaNO2(s)+di/HCl (at 50C) 460. 0-50C
461. NO2-CH2-NH2 (–I effect) 462. N2(g) 463. Carbylamine

464. C6H5SO2Cl 465.  Ag  CH 3 NH 2  2  Cl

 CH3 
|
466. 2 amine, C6H5NH-CH3+HONO  C 6H 5  N  N  O  H 2O 
0 
 
 
 
(Yellow)


HNO2
467.  CH3  N  
  CH3 3 N HNO2    CH 3  2 N  NO  CH 3OH
3

(nitrosoamine)
468. CH3NH2, C2H5NH2 469. diazotisation 470. C6H5I

471. phenol 472. C6 H 5 N 2 Cl  H 3 PO 2  H 2 O 

 C 6 H 6  H 3 PO3  HCl  N 2
(Benzene)
473. C6H5F+N2+BF3 474. deamination reducing
475. ammonia 476. CH3NH2 477. Surfactant (detergent)
478. Protein 479. ethylene glycol & Terephthalic acid
480. acrylonitrile 481. Teflon 482. addition polymer
483. natural rubber 484. polythene
485. isoprene (cis-1, 4-polyiosprene)
486. polystyrene or styron
487. vinyl chloride (CH2 = CHCl) & vinyldene chloride, CH2 = CCl2
488. NH2(CH2)6–NH2 and adipic acid 489. co-polymer

490. H 2 N  CH 2 6  NH 2  Sebacoylchloride
491. ethylene glycol & phthalic acid
492. (poly) ester (condensation type)
Cl F
493. C=C (C2F3Cl) 494. caprolactum
F F
495. bakelite 496. step growth polymerisation
497. thermoplastic polymer 498. thermosetting plastic

[ 72 ]
499. co-polymer of butadiene & styrene 500. co-polymer
501. homopolymer 502. homopolymer 503. natural polymers
504. 2-chlorobuta-1, 3-diene (Chloroprene) 505. Nylon 66
NH2 N NH2
506. N N
507. bakelite 508. Condensation
NH2
509. rubber 510. Buna-S
511. butadiene and acrylonitrile 512. propenenitrile
513. disinfectant 514. Aspirin 515. analgesic or hypnotic
516. antiseptic 517. cure diseases caused by gram +ve, –ve bacteria.
518. narrow 519. broad spectrum antibiotic
520. broad spectrum antibiotic 521. antibiotic 522. antiseptic
523. aspirin 524. ester 525. antipyretic
526. antiseptic 527. Terpenol and chloroxylenol
528. triglycerides 529. non-narcotic 530. antiseptic
531. antipyretic 532. analgesic 533. antihistamine
534. cetrizine 535. antiseptic 536. ranitidine


[ 73 ]
 Very Short Answer type Questions
(One mark each) :
Group - A(3)

Answer the following :

Unit - I
1. Arrange simple cubic, body centred cubic and face centred cubic lattice in increasing
order of the fraction of the occupied space.
2. What is the C.N. of octahedral void ?
3. What is C.N. of tetrahedral void ?
4. What make alkali metal halides sometimes coloured which are otherwise colourless ?
5. What are the structures of NaCl and CsCl ?
6. In which defect the crystal loses its density ?
7. What is packing effeciency of simple cubic crystal ?
8. What is F– centre ?
9. ZnS shows Frenkel defect - explain.
10. What are the number of Cl– ions present around Na+ ?
11. What is co-ordination number ?
12. What type of forces operate in molecular solid ?
13. Write two characteristic properties of molecular solid.
14. Ionic solid behaves as an insulator - explain.
15. What is meant by point defect in crystal ?
16. Mention the type of interaction / bond present in following :
ice, diethyl ether (s) NaCl, Silicon carbide
17. How many lattice point are there in one unit cell of each of the following lattice ?
(i) Fcc (ii) bcc
18. What are the possible variation in orthorhombic crystal system ?
19. Identify the primitive unit cells in crystals.
20. Name the lattice where edges and angles are identical.
21. What types of solid are electrical conductors, malleable and ductile ?
22. What are Bravais lattices ?
23. Why is glass considered as a super cooled liquid ?
24. Name a covalent solid that conducts electricity.
25. Choose the amorphous solids from among the following ?
Polytrethene, benzoic-acid, coke, copper, cellophane, potassium nitrate, teflon.
26. Amorphous solids are isotropic - explain.
27. What happens when crystalline solids are heated ?
28. Provide two examples molecular solids.

[ 74 ]
Unit - II
29. Mention the important use of reverse osmosis (RO)
30. Provide two examples of ideal solutions.
31. Is solution of chlroform and acetone an ideal solution ?
32. What is Charles - van’Hoff law ?
33. What happens to acetic acid in benzene and water (solvents) ?
34. Define molefraction ?
35. Identify the concentration terms independent of temperature.
36. What is the mole fraction of 1 molal aqueous solution ?
37. The vapour pressure is reduced to 80%. What is relative lowering of vapour pressure ?
38. How does the solubility of gas in liquid change with temperature ?
39. What happens to the b.p. if vapour pressure is reduced ?
40. At what % ethanol - water forms a minimum boiling azeotrope. Mention the b.p. of the
azeotrope.
41. Arrange the aqueous solutions in order of increasing boiling point : 0.01 m urea, 0.01 m
sodium chloride, 0.01 m sugar, 0.01m potassium sulfate.
42. How does osmotic pressure change with temperature and concentration ?
43. Name a compound which has the same i value with potassium ferrocyanide.
44. Write down the units of molarity, molality, normality, strength and mole fraction.
45. Camphor is prefered as solvent for measuring the molecular mass of naphthalene by-
Rust method. Why ?
46. Distinguish between b.p. and normal boiling point of a liquid.
47. Why does sea water boil at higher temperature ?
48. 2 gram each of two solutes A and B (molecular mass of A > B) are dissolved separately
for 50 gram each of water. Which will show higher boiling point ?
49. Provide an example of maximum boiling azeotrope.

50. How is colligative property  Tb  related to molar mass of solute ?

51. Mention T/F
(i) K H is directly proportional to solubility of gas is a solvent.
(ii) Osmosis takes place from hypotonic solution to hypertonic solution.
Unit - III
52. What is electrochemical equivalent ?
53. Can nickel spatula be used to stire a solution of CuSO4 ?
0 0
[ Given E Ni 2 Ni  0.25V; E Cu2 Cu  0.34V
54. What is relationship between Gibbs free energy change and cell potential ?
55. In the electrolysis a solution containing H+ and Cu2+ion, at cathode H2(g) is liberated. Is
the statement correct ?
56. Notation of SHE.

[ 75 ]
57. Name the electrode whcih has oxidation and reduction potential identical.
58. Write down the unit of specific conductance / equivalent conductance / molar conductance.
59. Provide the direction of movement of e in galvanic cell.
60. What is unit of emf ?
61. What is an electrochemical cell ?
62. What is charge on the proton (H+) ?
63. Provide two examples in each case of strong electrolytes and weak electrolytes.
64. Write down the cell notation of Daniell cell.
65. Find out the standard emf. of Daniell cell.
66.  Cu  NO3 2  2Ag . Represent the cell.
Cu  2Ag NO3 
67. Identify the salt used in salt bridge.
68. Write down the equation relating  and concentration.
69. What will be the cell constant of a conductivity cell if specific conductance and conductance
of a solution are of equal vaue ?
70. Writedown the coulombs of change required for the reduction of (i) 1 mole Al3+ to Al
(ii) 0.1 mole Cu2+ to Cu (iii) 6.023  1022 MnO4 ions to Mn2+.
71. How much electricity required to liberate 11.2 L of oxygen at NTP from water ?
72. Identify two metals that decolorises copper sulfate solution (Blue).
73. What is the relationship between standard reduction potential and equilibrium constant?
74. What is the standard potential of Cu-AgNO3 cell ?
75. What do you mean by a weak electrolyte ?
76. Define degree of ionisation ?
77. What is electrode potential ?
78. What is an electrolyte ?
W1 E1 Z2
79.  
W2 E 2 Z1 . Is it a correct expression ?
80. What is cell constant ?
81. Suggest some metals that are extracted electrolytically.
82. If a current of 0.5 amp flows through a metallic wire for 2. hours then how many e  s 
flow through the wire ?
83. What is the basis on which anode on cathode is identified in a chemical cell ?
Unit - IV/
0
84.  B, rate = k  A  H 2O  . What is the molecularity and
For a reaction A  H 2 O 
order of reaction.
85. What is an elementary reaction ?

86. When ln k is plotted against 1 T , the slope was found to be 10.7  103 K. What is the
activation energy?

[ 76 ]
 k2
87. What is the value of log k , if the temperature of a reaction changes from T1 to T2 ?
1

88. How will rate of reactions change when [A], is doubled for
(i) zero order reaction
(ii) second order reaction ?
89. Calculate the order reaction having the rate expression,
1 1
rate = k  A 2
 B 2
90. The complex reaction as a whole has no molecularity. T/F __________.
91. Provide one example of first order reaction, unimolecular reaction.
92. Give one example of zero order reaction.
93. What is an activated complex ?
94. The half life period of a first order reaction is 60 min. Calculate the time required for
completion of 90% of the reaction.
95. 99% of the reaction.
96. 99.9% of the reaction.
97. A reaction is found to be zero order. Will its molecularity be zero ?
98. Can reaction have negative activation energy ?
99. What do you mean by rate determining step ?
100. Calculate the value of rate constant of a first order reaction having half life period 10
minutes.
101. Define activation energy.
102. Define Half life period of a reaction.
103. Define collision frequency.
104. What is a pseudo first order reaction ?
105. Write down the average rate expression for 2N 2O5  g  
 4NO 2  g   O 2  g  .
106. The conversion of molecules X  Y follows second order kinetics. If concentration of
X tripled how it will affect rate of formation of Y.
107. What is value of temperature co-efficient of a reaction ?

108. What is value of k at extremely high temperature     ? Is it feasible ?

3
109. The rate law for a reaction is, rate = k  A  B 2 . Is the reaction an elementary one ?
Unit - V
110. What is adsorption ?
111. Define molar heat of adsorption.
112. What is the binding force in physisorption ?
113. What is name of the process of removing an adsorbed substance from the surface of
adsorbent ?
114. Why animal charcoal is used for purification of sugar ?

[ 77 ]
115. Why colloids can not be filtered by ordinary filter paper ?
116. Compare is the size of colloidal and crystalloid particles ?
117. Give an example of emulsion.
118. Why does colloidal solution coagulate on addition of electrolyte ?
119. What is the sign of heat of adsorption ?
120. Why alum is used for clearing muddy water ?
121. How does extent of adsorption change with temperature, pressure ?
122. What do you mean by positive and negative adsorption ?
123. Catalysts are adsorbents ______ is it so ?
124. What is flocculation value ?
125. Calculate the flocculation value of KCl if 5ml of 1M solution is added to 100 ml of
arsenic sulfide sol so as to bring complete coagulation.
126. How can you know that milk is an o/w emulsion ?
127. Colloids are heterogeneous in nature, give reason.
128. What is a colloidal solution ?
129. Why does smoke from a fire often with a blue tinge ?
130. What will happen if equimolar solutions of positively and negatively charged solutions
be mixed ?
131. What is collodion ?
132. What is dispersion medium in gel ?
133. For coagulation of 500 ml of arsenic sulfide (–ve sol), 2 ml of 1 M NaCl is required.
What is the flocculation value of NaCl ________.
134. Name the enzyme to prepare ethanol from glucose.
135. Why i s it necessary to remove CO during synthesis of NH3 by Haber’s process.
Unit - VI
136. Name two metals isolated by electrometallurgy ?
137. Identify two minerals having more than one metal.
138. Which is the cheapest reducing agent used in Metallurgy ?
139. Write a method for refining of copper / Al.
140. Write down the composition of brass, bronze.
141. What is germen silver ?
142. Name any two alloys of steel.
143. Write the formulae of zincblende, greenvitriol.
144. What happens when calamine is calcined ?
145. What is flux ?
146. Provide two examples of acidic flux.
147. All minerals are ores. T/F
148. What is slagging ?

[ 78 ]
149. What is auto-reduction ?
150. Name the important ores of Fe/Al/Cu.
151. Explain the term ‘Levigation’.
152. Which type of metals are concentrated by liquation method ?
153. Magnetite is an ore magnesium. T/F
154. Manganin is an alloy of copper used in electrical apparatus. It contains lowest percentage
of maganese. Rewrite with correction if any.
155. What do you mean by matte ?
156. What type of ore generally roasted ?
157. What is pyrometallurgy / electrometallurgy / hydrometallurgy ?
158. Why is copper matte put in silica lined convertor ?
159. How is ‘cast’ iron different from ‘pig’ iron ?
160. Arrange in order of increasing stability : MgO, ZnO, FeO, Cu2O
Unit - VII
161. What happens of the bond angles of hydrides of group 15/16?
162. Compare the acidic nature of oxides of nitrogen family.
163. Arrange the hydrides of group-15 in order of increasing nature as reducing agent.
164. Arrange the noble gases in the increasing order of their abundance.
165. Write down two uses of XeF2.
166. What are the products formed when nitrous acid undergoes disproportionation?
167. Which oxide of nitrogen used as rocket fuel?
168. What is carbogen? What is Its use?
169. Arrange the fallowing in-order of increasing acid strength HCIO4, HClO2, HClO3, HClO.
170. NO is paramagnetic in gaseous state but diamagnelic in liquid and solid stale.
171. H3PO2 in monobasic while H3PO3 in dibasic: Justify.
172. Show that Na2O2 is a peroxide,
173. Draw the structure of pyrosulfuric and pyrophosphoric acid.
174. What happens to following test tubes containing (i) cane sugar (ii) Sodium bromide (iii)
Copper turnings (iv) sulfur powder (v) Potaslum chlonde, on heating with cone. H2SO4?
175. NF3 and PF3 are not hydrolysed. Give reason.
176. Which are the anhydrides of HNO3 and H3PO4?
177. Balance the following.

 Ca  NO3 2 +H 2 O+NO
Cu+HNO3 
178. What happens when NH4Cl reacts with quick lime?
179. How can you get nitric acid from potassium nitrate?
180. Which catalyst in used in the manufacture of NH3 by Haber’s process?
181. What happens when NH4NO3 is strongly heated?

[ 79 ]
182. What substance is used to dry NH3?
183. Why is P2O5 not used to dry NH3?
184. Name the catatyst used in Ostwalds process to manufacture HNO3.
185. Write the reaction of the thermal decomposition of NaN3 azide.
186. Name the types of salt formed on neutralization of H3PO4 by NaOH.
187. What happens when H3PO4 is heated?
188. How do you account for the reducing behaviour of H3PO2 on the basis of its structure.
189. Which of the following does not react with oxygen directly? Zn. Ti. Pt, Fe
190. Name the compound, formed when Al2O3 reacts with (i) acid (ii) alkali
191. Draw the resonance hybrid of ozone and mention the bond angle and bond length.
192. Is S2 molecule paramagnetic in nature?
193. Write down the equation of SO2 with Fe3+.
194. Mention three areas in which H2SO4 plays an important role.
195. Identify two reagents to liberate chlorine from HCl.
196. Name the poisonous gases which can be prepared from chlorine.
197. How gases Cl2(g), SO2(g) getting dried?
198. Write an equation where SO2 acts as oxidizing agent.
199. What is the basicity of sulfuretted hydrogen/ hydrosulfuric acid?
200. What happens when paper soaked in lead acetate solution is shown in H2S(g)?
201. Name. two allotropic modifications of sulfur.
202. Write the electronic configuration of second element of group-16
203. Which oxide of group-16 is amphoteric in nature?
204. HP is less volatile than HCl. why?
205. Arrange the halogen hydrides in the order of bond length.
206. Which of halogen form H-bonding?
207. Which halogen shows only one O.N. in its compounds.
Unit - VIII
208. Write down the electronic configuration of Cr3+ and Cu2+.
209. Which elements of transition series don’t almost resemble the rest of the members in
their characteristics ?
210. Why copper corrodes in moist air producing green layer on its surface ?
211. What are the colours of Fe2+ (Aq) and Fe3+ (aq.) ?
212. Name the trivalent lanthanoid of maximum size.
213. Which substance is prepared from Kipp’s waste ?
214. Identify a property to justify the presence of Zn in d-block.
215. What are actinoids ?
216. Write two alloys of steel.
217. Which are the purest and impure form of iron ?

[ 80 ]
218. Name the furrance to get blister copper.
219. What is the gas present in blister copper ?
220. What is the molecular formula of feric chloride in anhydrous state ?
221. Why transition elements are hard ?
222. Which is the lightest transition metal ?
223. Write the formula of rouge ?
224. What is annealing ?
225. Name the three groups d-block where horizontal similarity dominates.
226. Identify the low cost catalyst during hydrogenation of oil (unsaturated) to fat (saturated).
227. What is the most common oxidation state of Lanthanoids ?
228. Write down the oxidation states exhibited by Mn(Z=25).
229. Name the elements with which metal / element can have highest (positive) O.S.
230. Predict which of the following ions are coloured & write their d-electrons.
Cu 2  , Zn 2  , Sc3 , Ni 2

231. Mercures ion is written as Hg 22 instead of Hg+.

232. Why large number of oxidation states exhibited by actinoids than corresponding
lanthanoids ?
233. Transition metal exists in its highest oxidation state better behaves as an oxidising
agent. Give reason.
234. Why Fe3+ is most common ?
235. What is the maximum O.S. of actinoid ?
236. Why CuCl is colourless while CuCl2 is blue. Is it so ?
237. Why the properties of 3rd transition series are very similar to 2nd transition series ?
238. La(OH)3 is more basic than Lu(OH)3 ?
239. Arrange MnO 4 , Cr2 O 72  , VO 2 in order of increasing oxidising power..
Unit - IX
240. What does ‘en’ represent in Co-ordination chemistry. How many co-ordination sites
does it have ?
241. Give the chemical formula of potassium hexacyanido ferrate (II).
242. What does EDTA stand for ? Write its structure.
243. Calculate the number of unpair electrons in the following complexes.
3 3 3
i)  Cr  NH 3 6  , ii)  CoF6  iii)  Fe  CN  6 
244. Provide the IUPAC names of the above ions.
245. Why are tetrahedral comlexes high spin ?

246. What is the name of  Co  NH 3 5  NO 2    NO 3  2 .

[ 81 ]
 2
247. Write the hybridisation and shape of  Ni F4 

248. A CuSO4 solution is mixed with  NH 4  2 SO 4 in the ratio 1 : 4, does not give test test
for Cu2+. Explain.
249. On the basis of CFT, write the d4 configuration  0  P .
3
250. Which of the following is more stable ? & name it  Co  NH 3 6  and  Co  en 3  .

3
251. Write the shape and magnetic behaviour of  Co  NH 3 6  .

252. Between CO, CN– which forms more stable complex ?

253. Show the magnetic behaviour of hexafluoridocobaltate (III)
2
254.  Ni  H 2 O  2  OX  2  is an outer orbital complex, is it so ?

4 2
255.  Fe  CN  6  and  Fe  H 2 O  6  are of different colour is solution.

256. What are ambident ligands ?

257. What is denticity ?
258. What are different ‘d’-orbitals ?
259. What is spectrochemical series ?
260. EDTA used as water softening agent. explain.
261. Gold is extracted from its ore on treating it KCN. Give reason.
262. Why sulfide ore is leached with NaCN ?
263. What is the shape of hexacyanido ferrate (II) ion ?
264. What is valency of Ru in K2 [Ru(OH)4Cl2] ?
3
265. What is the C.N and O.N. central metal ion in  Fe  C 2 O 4 3  .
Unit - X
266. Which will react faster in SN-2 reaction in respect of KOH (aq).
(i) CH3Br, CH3I
(ii) (CH3)3CCl, CH3Cl
(iii) CH3–CH2–CH2Br, C6H5–CH2Br
(iv) CH2 = CH–CH2Br, CH3–CH2–CH2 Br
(v) CH2 = CH Br, CH3–CH2–Br
(vi) Chlorobenzene and chlorocyclohexane
267. In the following pairs of halogen compounds, which compound undergoes faster SN–1
reaction ?
Cl
|
(i)  CH 3 CCl, C2H5CH  C2 H5 ,

[ 82 ]
 (ii) , Cl
Cl
(iii) C6H5Cl, C6H5CH2Cl,

(iv) C6 H5 Cl,  C6 H5 2 CH  Br
(v) CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 Cl, CH 2  CH  CH 2 Cl
268. Draw the structural isomers of the compound C4H9Br Name and classify as 10, 20 or 30.
269. Provide the structures of the following :
(i) 1-Bromo-4-sec. butyl-2-methyl benzene
(ii) 1, 4-dibromobut-2-ene
270. Complete the reactions with appropriate product (s).
(i) CH 3  CH 2 OH  KI  H 3 PO 4 

  red p
(ii) CH 3  CH(OH)  CH 3  Br2   
271. Name the product when Cl2(g) is passed under U.V. light inside
(i) n-butane and isobutane

(ii)  CH3 2 CH  CH 2  CH3

Na / alcohol AgCN KCN Na / alcohol
272. B   A   CH 3  CH 2 Br   A1   B1
Identify the compounds A, B and A1, B1.
273. What are (i) Swart’s reaction ?
(ii) Finkelstein reaction ?
274. Arrange the following compounds in order of increasing boiling points.
(i) Bromomethane, bromoform, chloromethane, dibromomethane
(ii) 1-chloropropane, isopropyl chloride, 1-chlorobutane
275. Predict the isomers of bromobutane and arrange in order of increasing reactivity towards
SN–1 reaction.
276. In the following pairs of halogen compounds which would respond faster to react with
KOH(aq).

(i) CH2Cl and Cl

(ii) I and Cl

(iii)  CH3 3 CCl and CH2Cl

277. Identify the reagent(s) for the following conversion.

(i) CH 3  CH  CH 2 
 CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 Br

[ 83 ]
 (ii) CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 Br 
 CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 NC

(iii) CH 3  CH 2  Br 
 CH 3  CH 2  NO 2 
 CH 3  CH 2  NH 2

(iv) C6 H 5  Cl 
 C 6 H5 CN 
 C6 H 5CHO

(v) CH 3  CH 2 Br 
 But  1  yne
278. What type of isomerism is shown by 1,2 dibromo ethene ? Between these two which
has higher m.p. and higher b.p.
279. Between 1-bromobutane and 2-bromobutane which one is optically active ?
280. Hydrocarbons molecular formula C5H12 and C5H10 give a single monochloro compound
in bright sunlight. Name tthese.

dryether H2O
281. Br + Mg  A  

282. Name the alkenes that would be formed by dehydrohalogenation of the following in
presence of sodium ethoxide & ethanol.
(i) 1-Bromo-1- methyl cyclo hexane
(ii) 2-chloro-2-methyl butane
283. Write the structure of the major product of the following :
alc.
(i)  CH3 3 C  Br KOH
  KOH aq
(ii) CH 3  CHBr  CH 3  
CH3
(iii) CH 3  CH 2  Br  KCN   CH 2OH  Aq 

(iv) C6 H 5O Na  C2 H 5 Cl 


CH 3
(v) CH 3  CH  C + HBr 

CH 3

284. Name the product, if following alkyl halides undergoing Wurtz reaction :
(i) isobutyl bromide
(ii) isopropyl bromide
(iii) sec.butyl bromide
(iv) chlorocyclopropane
285. What is  . elimination ?
286. State Saytzeff rule.
Unit - XI
287. Name the isomers of the alcohols with moelcular formula C4H10O.
288. Identify the first member of the optically active monohydric alcohol.

[ 84 ]
289. Write the structures of major product expected from
(i) mono nitration and dinitration of 3-methyl phenol.
(ii) mononitration of phenyl ethanoate.
290. Give the structure of the products you would expect when butan-1-ol,
2-methylbutan-2-ol treated with
i) HCl-ZnCl2 ii) SOCl2 (Equation only)
291. Predict the major product of acid catalysed dehydration of
i) 1-methyl cyclohexanol ii) butan-1-ol
292. Draw the resonating structures of p-nitrophenoxide.
293. Arrange the following in order of their acids strength. propan-1-ol, 2, 4, 6–
tritritrophenol, 3-nitrophenol, 3, 5-di nitrophenol, 4-methyl phenol.
294. Arrange the following sets of compounds in order of their increasing boiling point.
i) Pentan-1-ol, butan-1-ol, butan-2-ol, ethanol, propan-1-ol, methanol
ii) n-butane, ethoxyethane, 3-methylbutan-1-ol, pentan-1-ol.
295. Write down the Grignard’s reagent to prepare following 10-alcohol.
CH2OH
i) ii) iso-butyl alcohol iii) ethyl alcohol

296. Write the structures of the products of the following reactions :


H 3O
i) CH 3  CH  CH 2  

O
NaBH 4
ii) CH 2  C  O  CH3  
||
O
O
CH 2  CO  OCH3 
LiAlH 4

iii)

NaBH 4
iv) CH 3  CH 2  CH  CHO  
|
CH3

297. Provide the IUPAC name of the product formed on

i) Catalytic reduction of butanone
ii) Propanol on dehydration
iii) reaction of propane one with CH3MgBr following by hydrolysis
298. Write the reactions of Willimson’s synthesis of 2-ethoxy-3-methylpentane
299. How can you prepare 1-methoxy-4-nitrobenzene from :
(i) sodium-4-nitrophenoxide. (ii) 4-bromonitrobenzene)

[ 85 ]
300. Predict the products :
i) CH3–CH2–CH2–O–CH3 + HBr 
HNO3
ii) C6 H 5  O C 2 H 5 
H 2SO 4

HBr
iii) C6 H 6  O  C 2 H 5   
HI
iv) (CH3)C–O–C2H5  
KI  H 3PO4
v) C6 H 5 CH 2  O  C 6 H 5  
301. Arrange the following in order of increasing acid strength :
o-nitrophenol, m-nitrophenol, p-nitrophenol
302. Find the order of reactivity of HX to cleave the C–O bond is ether.
303. Name the reagent (s) used in the following reactions :
i) 10 alcohol to corboxylic acid.
ii) 10 alcohol to aldehyde
iii) Bromination phenol to 2, 4, 6 tribromo phenol.
iv) benzylalcohol to benzoic acid. v) Ethylalcohol to diethylether
vi) Butan-2-one to butan-2-ol
vii) CH 3  CH  CH  CHO to CH3  CH  CH  CH 2 OH

viii) CH 3  CH  CH  CHO to CH 3CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 OH

ix) CH 3  CH  CH 2  CHO to CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 3

CH2Br CH2OH
(x) to

304. Mention equation to show acidic nature of phenol.

305. Provide equation of the following reactions :
(i) Oxidation of propan-1-ol with alk. KMnO4.
(ii) Bromine in CS2 with phenol
(iii) Phenol with dil HNO3
(iv) Treating phenol with alkaline chloroform and CCl4 separately.
306. Arrange the cresols in order of Ka value.
307. Arrange the order of ease of esterification of alcohols with a given acid.308.
Name the alcohol failing to give VictorMeyer’s state.
Unit - XII s
309. What happens when ethyl benzene is treated with chromyl chloride in CCl4 medium ?
310. What type of reaction is carried out by carbonyl compounds ?
311. Write down the physical state of aldehyde & ketone.
312. What is RDX ?

[ 86 ]
313. Benzophenone fails to react with NaHSO3. F/T _____
314. Name the following :

CHO O CHO
| ||
CH 3  CH  CH 2  C  CH 3 ,

CH3

315. Give the functional isomers of propanone.

316. Write down the structural formula of 1-Bromo-2-methyl pentan-3-one.
317. What is Tollen’s reagent / Fehling solutin / Brady’s reagent.
318. Aldehyde reacts with hydroxyl amine gives :
(a) Oxime (b) hydrazone
(c) phenyl hydrozone (d) Ketal
319. Arrange the following compounds in inceasing order of their boiling points :
ethylalcohol, dimethylether, acetaldehyde, CH3 – CH3
320. Which aldehyde can undergo iodoform test ?
321. Why HCHO does not undergo aldol condensation ?
322. Name the aldehydes undergoing Cannizzaro’s reaction.

323. Arrange HCHO, CH3 CHO and CH3 COCH3 in order of inceasing reactivity towards
HCN.
324. Write down the IUPAC name of first member of mono and dicarboxylic acid.
325. What happens ethanitrile undergoes acidic hydrolysis ?
326. Prepare acetamide from acetic acid ?
327. Name the Grignard’s reagent from which benzoic acid is prepared.
328. How is benzoylchloride prepared ?
329. Arrange the following in order of inceasing acidic strength :
(i) HCOOH, ClCH2 COOH, CH3COOH
(ii) CH3COOH, (CH3)2CHCOOH, (CH3)3C–OOH
(iii) ClCH2 COOH, Cl2CHCOOH, Cl3C COOH
(iv) ClCH2 COOH, CH3CH2 COOH, ClCH2CH2COOH, (CH3)2CH–COOH,
CH3COOH
330. Which bond is cleared in the formation of
(i) RCOCl (b) RCOONa (c) RCOOR (d) RCONH2
331. Arrange the following in order of increasing b.p.
(i) C3H 8 (b) C2H5OH (c) CH3CHO (d) CH3COOH
332. Between benzoicacid and acetic acid which one is more soluble in water.
333. Arrange the following increasing order of acidic strength i.e. liberating CO2 from NaHCO3
(aq.). HCOOH, benzoic acid, CH3COOH, Cl3C COOH.

[ 87 ]
334. Name the reagent what converts CH3–CH=CH–COOH to CH3–CH = CH – CH2OH.
335. Write down the structural formula of
(i) pyrovic acid (b) succinic acid
336. Arrange in increasing order of acidic strength :
(i) isomers of nitrobenzoic acid
(ii) Toluic acids.
(iii) Haloacetic acids.
(iv) HCOOH CH3COOH, C2H5COOH, C3H7COOH.
(v) Hydroxy benzoic acid.
337. What is oil of bitter almonds ?
Unit - XIII
338. What is Balz-Schiemann reaction ?
339. Identify the reagents to prepare nitrogenzene from benzenediazonium chloride.
340. Coupling takes place at p-position, if it’s occupied substitution occurs at o-position?
341. Write the medium when coupling occurs with phenol and aniline respectively.
342. How can you prepare iodobenzene from benzene diazonium chloride (BDC) ?
343. Arrange the following :
(i) Increasing order of b.p:
C2H5OH, (CH3)2NH, C2H5NH2
(ii) Inceasing order solubility in water :

C6 H 5 NH 2 ,  C2 H5 2 NH, C2 H 5 NH 2
344. Prepare benzoic and from aniline.
345. Name the product formed on oxidation of aniline with chromic acid.
346. What is the product formed when benzamide is treated with LiAlH4?
347. What are the products formed on (i) sulfonation and (ii) nitration of aniline ?
348. How can you obtain ethylamine from ethyl isocyanide.
349. How to distinguish CH3CN (Cyanide) from CH3NC isocyamide on reduction ?
350. Tertiary butylamine can’t be heated with NH3, is it true ?
351. Arrange the following in increasing order of SE.

C6 H 5CH 3 , C6 H 5  N  CH 3  2 , C6 H 5  N  CH 3 
3

352. Name the reagents to prepare isocyanide from aniline.

353. Prepare aniline from benzoic acid.
354. What is Gattermann’s reaction ?
355. Why nitroalkanes are used as explosives ?
356. Arrange in order of their basic strength :
C2H5NH2, C6H5NH2, NH3, C6H5 CH2NH2 (C2H5)2NH

[ 88 ]
357. Identify the missing reagent(s):
NO2 NH2 NH-COCH3
* *
   

Unit - XV
358. What is macromolecule ?
359. Provide one example in each case of
i) Linear chain polymer.
ii) Brached chain polymer
iii) Crossed chian polymer.
(Classified on the basis of structure)
360. Arrange in order of inceasing inter molecular forces :
i) polythene, Nylon - 66, Buna-S
ii) Neoprene, polyvinyl chloride, Nylon-6
361. What is difference between Buna-N and Buna-S ?
362. Write two uses of Buna-N-rubber.
363. Mention the monomer of Nylon-2-nylon-6.

 
 H  CO  a homopolymer ?
364. Is   NH C
| 
 R n
365. Name a common initiator during free radical polymerisation.
366. Classify the polymers in respect of intramolecular force of attraction.
367. Name the monomers in the following polymers –

 O 
 || 
  NH   CH 2 6  NH  CO   CH 2 4  C  
 
 
368. Provide one example in case of
chain growth (addition), step growth (condensation) polymerisation.
369. What is PMMA ?
370. Name a substance which inhibits free radical polymeisation.
371. What is mode of free radical polymerisation in alkene ?
372. What are PAN, PTFE, PCTFE, PHBV ?
373. Why should one always use purest monmer in free radical polymerisation ?
374. Show that CCl4 acts as chain transfer agent during polymerisation of styrene.
375. What do you mean by HDP and LDP ?

[ 89 ]
376. What is used in making non-breakable plastic crockery.
Unit - XVI
377. Write the name of (two) antibiotics, analgesic, antiseptic, antipyretic.
378. Name an antacid which prevents the formation of acid in the stomach.
379. What type of medicine chloromphenicol is?
380. Name a substance which can be used as antiseptic as well as disinfectant ?
381. What is tincture of iodine ? What for it is used ?
382. Give an example of cationic detergent and anionic detergent.
383. What do you mean by biodegradable detergent ?
384. What do you mean by antimicrobial drugs ?
385. Which class of drugs is used in sleeping pills ?
386. What for medicine is used ?
387. What is a soft soap ?
388. What class of drug is ranitidine ?
389. To which class of drug barbiturates belong ?
390. What is the important use of equanil in pharmacy ?
391. What is salvarsan ?
392. Why is bithional added to soaps ?
393. Label the hydrophlic and hydrophobic parts in the following :
 
 
CH 3   CH 2 10  CH 2  OSO3 Na , CH 3   CH 2 15 N  CH 3 3 Br
394. Fillers are added to soap and detergents. Explain.



[ 90 ]
 Answers
Group - A(3)
Very Short Questions (1 mark each)
Unit - I
1. Simple cubic 52.4% < bcc (68%) < FCC (74%).
2. The coordination number of octahedral void is six.
3. The coordination number of tetrahedral void is four.
4. This is due to metal excess defect forming F–centres i.e, e being trapped in anion
vacancy.
5. NaCl. fcc, CsCl - bcc.
6. Schottky defect / vacancy defect.
7. Packing efficiency of simple cubic crystal is 52.4%.
8. F = Farben Zenter meaning colour. This contains unpair e , on exposure to white light
the crystal provides / emits different colour. e.g. KCl looks violet (lilac).
9. rZn 2+ < rS2- , due to smaller size of the cation it occupies the interstital space. Vacancy at
cation site (Zn2+) occurs.
10. Six Cl–1 octahedrally surround Na+ and vice versa.
11. The number of nearest neighbours of a particle is called its co-ordination number.
e.g. in one dimensional closed packed arrangement, the co-ordination number is two,
square close packing in two dimensional the C.N is four, hexagonal closed packing in
two dimension the C.N. is six, hcp in three dimension C.N. is 12.
12. Molecular solids are of three types.
i) Non polar molecular solids where non-polar molecules are held by weak dispersion
forces or London forces e.g. I2 (s).
ii) Polar molecular solid - Here the molecules are polar covalent and held by dipole
- dipole force. e.g. SO2 (s), NH3(s)
iii) H - bonded molecular solid: Here the covalent molecules are much polar with
Hydrogen atom bonded to F or O or N, the highly electro negative atoms. Such
bond i.e. H-atom of one molecule with highly electro negative atom (F/O/N) of
the same or different molecule is called hydrogen bond. e.g. Ice.
[ or ]
The operating forces among the molecules of molecular solid are London / vander Waals
forces, dipole-dipole forces (H - bonding).
13. Characteristics of molecular solids :
i) These are soft solids
ii) Non-conductor of electricity. e.g. I2, H2O (s)
14. In ionic solids the constituting ions are tightly held by strong interionic force of attraction.
Due to immobility ions in solid crystalline state, it fails to conduct electricity, however in
solution and in molten state these conduct electricity as the ions moves freely.
15. Point defect in Crystal . Point defects are the irregulatities or deviation from ideal
arrangement around a point or an atom in a crystalline substance.
Types : (i) Stochiometric defect
(ii) Impurity defect
(iii) non stoichiometric defect

[ 91 ]
16. Ice – H – bonding, diethylether- London force
NaCl - Ionic interaction, Silicon carbide - covalent bond.
17. FCC - 4 (ii) 2
18. Orthorhombic, a  b  c,       900
These are of primitive, bodycentred, face centred and end centred. (four posible unit
cells)
19. There are seven primitive unit cells among crystals :
Cubic, tetragonal, orthorhombic, hexagonal, rhombohedral (or) trigonal, mono-clinic,
triclinic.
20. Cubic (Primitive, body centred, face centred)
21. metallic solids.
22. There fourteen types of Bravais lattices out of seven crystal system. These are :
Cubic . (Primitive, body cenred, face centred) = 3
Tetragonal (Primitive, body centred) = 2
Orthorhombic (Primitive, body centred, face = 4
centred, end centred)
Hexagonal - Primitive = 1
Rhombohedral - Primitive = 1
Monoclinic - Primitive and end centered = 2
Triclinic - Primitive = 1
23. Glass is called super cooled liquid because glass is an amorphous solid with tendency to
flow slowly. It does not form a crystalline solid structure as particles in solids do not
move but here it moves in supercooling in the process of chilling a liquid below its f.p.
without becoming solid. It is an intermediate between solid and liquid.
24. Graphite.
25. Amorphous solids : Polythene, coke, cellophane, teflon.
26. It is because there is no long range order in the arrangement in amorphous solids. The
constituents are randomly arranged i.e., irregular along all directions. Therefore, thevalue
of any physical property would be same along any direction.
27. On heating the crystal dislocation of constituents takes place leading to crystal defect.
This affects the change phisical properties of crystal, such as conductivity, colour. e.g.
ZnO on heating becomes yellow in colour.
28. Examples of molecular solid. Iodine, Dry ice.
Unit - II
29. The principle of RO is widely used in the process of desalination of sea water ie. to get
drinking water from sea-water.
30. Ideal solutions : Benzene + Toluene, n-hexane + n-heptane
31. Non-ideal. (with negative deviation) solute - solvent intraction is greater than solute-
solute and solvent - solvent intraction. This is due to H-bonding.
CH 3
Cl3CH ....O= C
CH 3

[ 92 ]
32. For solutions of fixed concentration, the osmitic pressure (  ) is directly proportional to
absolute temperature of the solution

1 T1
ie.   T,   T ,  / atm
2 2
T/K

33. Acetic acid is aqueous medium behaves as a weak electrolyte  i  1 , but in benzene it

dimerises  i  1 .

 CH 3COO   aq.  H   aq 

CH 3COOH  aq  

  CH 3COOH 
CH 3COOH  Benzene   2

O HO
i.e. CH3 – C C-CH3
O-H O
no.of moles of one component
34. Mole fraction = Total number of moles

nA
XA  ,
n A  n B Binary solution having nA moles of A and nB moles of B.
It has no unit and indepent of temperature as it involves mass of solute and solvent.
35. Mole fraction, molality and mass %
36. 1 m aqueous solution contains one mole of solute in 1 kg of solvent
 1000  1
  55.56 mole  . mole fraction =  0.0177 .
 18  1  55.56
0 0
p 0  p p  0.8p  0.2
37. Relative lowering of v.p  =
p0 p0
38. Solubility of gas decreases with rise of temperature.
39. Less is vapour pressure of a liquid greater is its boiling point e.g. B.P (water) > B.P.
(alcohol)
40. 95.4% ethanol (positive deviation). BP = 351.15 K
41. 0.01 m urea = 0.01 m sugar < 0.01 m NaCl < 0.01m pot.sulfate
42.   CRT i.e.  c and   T

43. K 4  Fe  CN 6  Aq., Al2  SO 4 3 Aq .

5 moles 5 moles
44. Molarity - moles/L, molality - moles / kg. of solvant
normality – No. of gram equivalent / L (of solution)
Strength – gram / litre
mole fraction. It is a number (with no unit)

[ 93 ]
45. Camphor has a large Kf value (39.80) and therefore causes large depression in m.p.
with very small amount of solute (naphthalene).
46. The b.p. is a temperature at which v.p. of the liquid becomes equal to surrounding
pressure, but normal b.p. is the temperature at which vapour pressure is 1 atm. pressure.
47. Sea water has lower vapour due to dissolved solute like NaCl, MgCl2 etc and hence
shows higher boiling point.

1. atm
(v.p)
ter
Wa ate
r
W
Se
a T2  T1  b.p of water 
T1 T2
Temperature

1
48. TB  . B has higher boiling point than A.
M
49. 20.2 % HCl + 79.8% water
W 1000
TB  K b m  K b . 
50. M W(solvant) i.e. TB is inversely related to ‘M’.
51. (i) F (ii) T
Unit - III
52. It is the mass of substance discharged at an electrode on passage of one coulomb of
charge through an electrolyte. Unit of z = gram / coulomb.
2
53. No, the redox reaction, Ni(s) + Cu2+(aq)  Ni  aq   Cu  s  is feasible.

54. G 0  nFE 0

55. No. It is a wrong statement. E 0Cu 2 |Cu  E 0  1 .
H | H2
2

1
56. Pt, H 2  g 1atm. | H  1M  at 298 K  , it acts as anode
2
1
H1M  | H 2 1atm, 298  K, Pt if acts as cathode ESHE0
 0.0 volt.
2
57. SHE
58. specific conductance, ohm– cm–1
Equivalent conductance, Ohm–1 cm2 gram eqvt–1.
Molar conductance, Ohm–1 cm2 mol–1.
59. e– flows from LHE (Anode) to RHE (cathode).
60. Volt. EMF is the number of joules of energy given by the source divided by each coloumb
to enable a unit electric charge to move across the circuit. (Joul/coulomb).
61. It is a device where chemical energy is converted to electrical energy i.e. G  nFE

[ 94 ]
62. Charge proton = charge on electron = 1.6  109 C .
63. Strong electrolytes – acid (HClaq), Base (NaOH aq), Salt (NaCl aq.)
Weak electrolyte - acid (CH3COOH), base (NH4OH) in aq. solution.
64. Zn | Zn 2 (Aq) Cu 2  (Aq) | Cu .

65. 0.34   0.76   1.1V

66. Cu Cu 2  Aq  Ag   aq  Ag

67. Cl1or NO 3 of K+ or NH 4 which have similar ionic mobility in solution.

68.  m   m0   A  B m0  C , A and B are Debye - Huckel constants.

= 0m  b c
69. Specific conductance = cell constant  conductance
In this case cell constant = 1.0 cm–1.
70. (i) 3F (ii) 0.2 F (iii) 6.023  1022  0.1mole, 0.5 F

(1 mole MnO4 need 5F to become Mn2+)

71. 11.2 L at NTP = 0.5 mol = 16 gram oxygen  2F
72. Mg, Zn
73. G 0  RT ln K  nF E 0

nFE 0 nFE 0
ln K   log K 
RT 2.303RT
0
K  e n FE / RT .

74. Cu Cu 2  Aq  Ag   Aq  Ag

E 0cell  E 0Ag  / Ag   E 0Cu 2 |Cu  0.80V  0.34V  0.46V

75. A weak electrolyte is a solution in which a small fraction of dissolved solute exists as
ions. There lies an equilibrium between unionised part of molecules and ionised part
(ions).
 NH 4  Aq   OH   Aq 
e.g. NH 4 OH  aq  
76.  , the fraction of the molecule that ionised per mole of electrolyte. '  ' is less for weak
electrolytes.
77. The tendency of an electrode to gain or to lose electrons.
0
e.g. E 0 2 (oxidation potential) = – E Zn 2 n (reduction potential)
Zn Zn  Aq 

78. Electrolyte is a substance that can conduct electrocity either in molten state or in solution
where ions are mobile.

[ 95 ]
 W1 E1 Z1
79. Not. W  E  Z (Faraday’s second law of electrolysis)
2 2 2


80. Cell constant = ,  = length between two electrodes
a
a = area of cross section of electrode plate.
81. Highly electro- positive metals like Na, K, Mg, Ca, Al etc can be extracted electrolytically
on cathodic reduction from their respective electrolyte.
e.g. Na metal from molten NaCl.
82. No. of coulombs = 0.5 amp  7200 sec
96500C  6.023  1023 e  s   1mole of e  s 

6.023  1023
3600 C =  3600  0.225  1023  2.25 10 22 e  s 
96500
83. Anode (oxidation) i.e. the electrode with lower potential
cathode (reduction i.e. the electrode with higher electrode potential.
In concentration cell, the cell potential is due to difference in conc. of the solution
e.g. Zn | Zn 2 (C1 ) || Zn 2  C2  | Zn, C 2  C1
Unit - IV
84. Bimolecular, first ordere
85. Single step reactionl
Ea
86. Slope =   10.7  103
2.303R
E a  2.303  8.314  10.7  103  204.87
k2 Ea T T
87. log  . 2 1
k1 2.303R T1.T2
88. (i) For zero order reaction no change in ratel
(ii) The rate becomes 4-times.
89. First order reaction.
90. T
1
91. N 2O5 
 N 2O 4  O 2
2
Pt
92. Catalytic decomposition of NH3, 2NH 3 g  

 N 2 g   3H 2 g 
h
H 2 g   Cl2 g    2HCl g 
93. The reacting species getting activation energy forms an unstable intermediate called
activated complex which readily gives rise to products.
0.693 0.693 2.303 100 2.303  60
94. k   log i.e. t   199.4 min.
t1 60 t 10 0.693
2

0.693 2.303 100 2.303  2

95. k  log 
60 t 1 t
[ 96 ]
 60  2  2.303
Now, t   298.8 min.
0.693
0.693 2.303 100
96. k  log
60 t 0.1
2.303  3  60
t  598.2 min.
0.693
97. No
98. R  A e  Ea / RT . If Ea is negative,

x2
= Ae  Ea / RT Expansion of e x  1  x  where x  Ea
2! RT

 Ea 
= A. 1   Neglecting higher powers of x.
 RT 
It shows k > A which is impossible.
Hence Ea cann’t be negative.
99. For a multistep reaction the slowest step is choosen as rate determining step. The rate of
this step is the rate of the reaction.
0.693 0.693
100. k    0.0693min 1  6.93 10 2 min 1
t1 10 min
2

101. Ea, is the excess energy required by the reactants to form the activated complex i.e. to
surpass the potential barrier leading to product.
E th  E r  E a i.e. E a  E th  E r
Eth = threshold energy i.e. energy possessed by the peak of barrier / activated complex.
102. Half life period  t 0.5  . It is the time required to halve the initial concentration of the
?
reactant, [A]0
1
Relationship with [A] : t 0.5  n 1 where n = order of reaction.
 A 0
103. The number of collisions per second per unit volume of the reaction mixture is known as
collision frequency (Z).
104. The reaction where order of reaction is one but molecularity is two is called pseudo first
order reaction.

H
e.g. CH 3COOC 2 H 5  H 2 O   CH 3COOH  C 2 H 5OH
1
rate of reaction = k  CH 3COOC 2 H 5   H 2O 0
Due to excess of reactant, H2O the rate is independent of [H2O] i.e. it is zero order with
respect to water.
1 d  N 2 O5  1 d  O2 
105.     NO 2  
2 dt 4 dt
 N 2O5   PN O 2 5
i.e. partial pressure of N2O5(g).

[ 97 ]
 2
106. Rate = k  x  . The rate will increase by 9 times.
107. Temperature co-efficient (n) is the ratio of rate constants at (T+10] K and T( K).
Rate constant at  T+10  K i.e. 308k
= Rate constant of  T  298 K say 
For most of the reaction 2  n  3 .
108. At T  , K  Ae  Ea / RT  A .
Rate constant is equal to collision frequency i.e. every collision results into a chemical
reaction which can’t be true. At T   , ‘k’ is not feasible. No.
109. It is a fractional order reaction. In an elementary process order equals to its molecularities
and must have integral values. No.
Unit - V
110. The phenomenon of higher concentration of molecular species (gas/liquid) on the surface
of solid than in the bulk is known as adsorption. It is a surface phenomenon e.g. water
vapour adheres to the surface of silica gel.
111. It is the amount of heat evolved when 1 mole of gas/liquid (adsorbate) adsorbed on the
surface of solid (adsorbent) i.e. ads.H  negative
112. In physical adsorption the adsobent and adsorbate are held by weak van-der Waals
force.
113. Desorption (increasing temperature / decreasing pressure)
114. Animal charcoal is very good adsorbent, it removes the colouring matter (impurities)
from the sugar making it colourless by surface action.
115. Colloid particle size 1 nm (103 pm) – 1000 nm while pore size of filter paper is bigger
than this & hence can pass through the pores of filter paper completely.
116. Colloid particle size 1 nm (103 pm) ––– 1000 nm (=106 pm). Crystalloid < 103 pm
(1 nm)
117. Milk (o/w), cold cream (w/o).
118. Colloid particles are either positively or negatively charged. When electrolyte is added,
the cation part neuralises the –vely charged colloid. Once changes are lost Brownian
movement ceases & particle settled / coagulated ?
e.g.potash alum is used in the settling tank during water treatment.
119. ads. H  negative i.e. the adsorption process is exothermic, to make it spontaneous.
120. The turbid water contain fine colloidal clay particles which are –vely charged i.e. it’s a
negative sol. when treated with alum (K2 SO4. Al2(SO4)3.24H2O), Al3+ cations neutralise
the charge present in dispersed phase. The stability of colloidal solution (turbid water)
fails & coagulation of clay particles takes place having clear water (dispersion medium)
x
121. Extent of adsorption = i.e. mass of adsorbate (x) per gram of an adsorbent (m). In
m
x
case of physical adsorption, increase of temperature decreases the value while
m
x
increase of pressure inceases the value.
m

[ 98 ]
 x 1

m
p n  n  whole number 
x
For chemisorption increases with rise of temperature initially..
m
122. Positive adsorption : If the concentration of adsorbate is more on the surface as compared
to its concentration in the bulk phase then it’s a called positive adsorption.
Negative adsorption : If the concentration of the adsorbate is less than its concentration
in the bulk, then it is called negative adsorption. e.g. dilute solution of KCl is shaken with
blood charcoal.
123. Catalyst (heterogeneous) taken in finely powered form with greater surface area to
which large number of adsorbate molecules (reactants) adhere to.
124. It is the millimoles of an electrolyte that must be added to 1L of a colloidal solution for
complete coagulation. Smaller is the flocculation value (FV) greater is the coagulating
power.
125. 5 ml of 1m KCl  5 millimoles
100 ml of sol need 5 millimoles
1000 ml (1 L) sol need 50 millimoles = FV of KCl
126. Dilution test : Milk is diluted even with small volume of water i.e. the dispersion medium
of milk must be water. Thus, it’s an o/w emulsion.
127. Colloidal solution consists of two phases : dispersion medium, dispersion phase e.g.
milk power (phase) is dispersed in water (medium). As it consists of two phases it’s
heterogeneous in nature.
128. It is a heterogeneous solution which contains particles of size 1–1000 nm. e.g. milk.
129. The smoke is colloidal in nature. When viewed at angle to the source of light it appears
blue on account of Tyndall effect.
130. Coagulation takes place because the-sols will mutually neutralise their charges.
131. It is colloidal solution of cellulose nitrate in ethylalcohol.
132. Solid (liquid dispersed in solid)
133. 4 ml of 1M NaCl necessary to cogulate 1 L of arsenic sulfide. The amount in mili moles
of NaCl = 4  1 = 4 milimoles. Flocculation value of NaCl = 4.
134. Zymase.
135. CO acts a poison for the catalyst. Finely divided iron reduces the catalytic activity &
hence the production of NH3.
Unit - VI
136. Na, Mg
137. Dolomite : Ca CO3.MgCO3
138. Carbon (Coke)
139. Electrolytic refining
140. Brass Cu (90%) + Zn(10%); Bronze Cu(90%) Sn(10%)
141. German silver Cu(60%), Ni (15%), Zn(25%)

[ 99 ]
142. Silicon steel : Fe (85%), Si (15%) : Ferrosilicon
Chrome steel : Fe (33%), Cr (67%) : Ferrochrome
143. Zinc blende (ZnS), Green vitriol. (CuSO4.5H2O)

Caleination
144. Calamine : ZnCO3(s)  
 ZnO (s)  CO 2 
145. Flux is a substance added at the time of smelting to remove the impurity from the concen-
trated ore. If impurity is basic, acidic flux is added & vice versa.
Basic impurity + Acidic flux = slag
CaO s   SiO 2  s  
 Ca SiO3  s 
146. Acidic flux : SiO2, P2O5
147. F
148. Slagging is a process where the impurities are removed from the concentrated ore during
smelting. It is lighter than molten metal. It is removed first.
 slag .
Impurity  flux 
149. Here reducing agent is not added from outside, in furnace it’s itself formed.
Example. Bassemerisation : Copper sulfide is partially oxidised to cuprous oxide which
reacts with remaining copper sulfide to form Cu and SO2.
2Cu 2S  3O 2 
 2 Cu 2 O  2SO 2

Cu 2S  2 Cu 2 O 
 6 Cu SO 2  g 

Blister Copper
150. Fe- Haematile (Fe2O3)
Al - Bauxite (Al2O3 - 2H2O)
Cu - Copper pyrites (Cu Fe S2)
151. Levigation : It is gravity separation method to concentrate heavy oxides ores of lead, tin,
iron etc. The lighter gangue particles are washed away.
152. Liquation : The metallurgical process (refining) involves heating the ore until the metal
with a lower melting point is separated from the ore with higher melting point. It is carried
out in sloping hearth of a furnance. For example. Pb, Sn, Sb, Bi and Hg.
153. F (Magnetite is an ore of iron)
154. Manganin (Cu-86%, Mn 12%, Ni 2%) is an alloy of copper containing lowest percent-
age of Ni.
155. Matte : During smelting of roasted ore of copper with coke and silica in blast furnace
ferrous sulfide changes to FeO which with SiO2(flux) removed as FeSiO3 (slag).
Part of FeS melts with Cuprous sulfide at high tempera-
ture giving rise to matte containing 50% copper. (Matte = Copper + FeS + Cu2S)
156. Sulfide ore
157.  Pyo-metallurgy : The process of converting a metal oxide into metallic form upon
strong heating with a suitable reducing agent is known as pyometalurgy. e.g. iron
 Electro meallurgy : The process of cathodic reduction molten salt of highly reac-
tive (electro positive) is called electrometallurgy. e.g. electrolysis of molten NaCl
to extract sodium.

[ 100 ]
  Hydrometallurgy : The process of converting the impure metal present in an ore
into suitable complex & then recovering the pure metal from the complex by
treating with a more electropositive metal,a stronger reducing agent is known as
hydrometallurgy.
NaCN Zn
Silver   Na  Ag  CN  2    Ag
158. Copper matte contains Cu2O and Fe O(impurity). In the Bessemer converter, silica
present as lining acts as a flux which combines with FeO to form iron silicate as slag :
FeO + SiO2 
 FeSiO3.
159. They differ by their C-content. Carbon content in pig iron is nearly 4% while in cast iron
it’s 3%.
160. Cu2O < FeO < ZnO < MgO (More negative is the value of  f G 0 more is the stability
and better as a reducing metal)
Unit - VII
161. Group-15 Bond angle decreases from NH3 to BiH3.
Group - 16 H2O to H2Te with decrease of electronegativity.
162. Pentoxides are more acidic than trioxide, the acidic character decreases, from top to
bottom with decrease of electronegativity. More is the electronegativity more is the elec-
tron accepting tendency electron acceptors are acids (Lewis).
N 2 O 5  P2 O 5  As 2 O 5  Sb 2 O 5  Bi 2 O 5

N 2 O5  N 2 O3 etc.
163. Reducing nature increases form NH3 to BiH3 with decrease M-H bond strength and
increase of M-H bond length.
NH 3  PH3  AsH 3  SbH3  BiH3

 Bi  3  H 
BiH 3 
Reducing nature depends on ease of release of ‘H’
Ar  Ne  He  Kr  Xe  Rn(traces)
164.
(93.4 ppm) (0.09 ppm)

165. Uses of XeF2 (i) Fluorinating agent (ii) Xe can be prepared XeF2 +H2 
 Xe+2HF
166. It undergoes oxidation to HNO3 and reduced to NO (nitric oxide)
3 5 2
3H N O 2 
 H N O3  2 N O  H 2O
167. Dinitrogen tetroxide (N2O4) is used as rocket fuel.
168. Carbogen is a mixture of oxygen and carbondioxide. It is given to the pneumonia patients
and patients of carbon monoxide poisoning for artificial respiration.
169. HClO < HClO2 < HClO3 .< HClO4. Then HClO 4  H   ClO 4 (Conjugate base
more stable) the stability of conjugate base. ClO   ClO 2  ClO 3  ClO 4 .ClO 4 is
maximum stable because -ve charge dispersed by four electronegative oxygen atoms.

[ 101 ]
 Thus HClO4 has maximum H+ losing tendency i.e. HClO4 is strongest acid and HClO is
least acidic.
7 5 3 1
Thus, H C lO 4  H C lO 3  H C lO 2  H C lO
Higher is the positive O.S. greater is the acidic nature (more electron accepting ten-
dency).
170 .‘NO’ has odd number of electrons (7+8=15) are due to presence of unpair e in
antibonding orbital, it’s paramagnetic in gaseous state. However, in liquid and solid states,
the unpaired e–(s) are involved in the formation of loose dimer. In the absence of any
unpair e-. It is diamagnetic in nature:
171. No. of polar -O-H group determines the proton donating tendency and acidic nature

(One polar-OH group) (Two polar-OH group)

172. Na 2 O 2  2H 2 O  2NaOH  H 2 O 2 On hydrolysis peroxide is formed, hence Na2O2 is
peroxide further O.N. of peroxide, O22  where oxygen has –1 O.S.
173. Pyrosulfuric acid : H2S2O7, Pyrophosphoric acid (diphosphoric acid H4P2O7)

174. (i) Charring of sugar takes place due to dehydration. Only sugar charcoal is left behind.
conc.H 2SO4
C12 H 22 O11  12C  11H 2 O

(ii) Brown gas evolves due to formation of Br2 (on oxidation of Brr
Here sulfuric acid acts as oxidizing agent.
SO 24   4H   2e   SO 2  2H 2O

2B r  Br2  2e 
(iii) When copper turning are heated with conc. H2SO4, colourless SO2 evolves on
reduction of SO 24  .

SO 24   4H   2e  
 SO 2  2H 2 O

Cu  Cu 2  2e 
(iv) Yellow powder of sulfur (S8) disappears liberating a colourless with pungent smelling
gas (SO2)
 4H   SO 24   2e  
 SO 2  2H 2 O   16 e 

[ 102 ]
 16H 2 O  S8  8SO2  32H   32e 
32H   16SO 24   S8 
 24SO 2  16H 2O
(v) Colourless HCl(g) evolves out.
KCl  H 2SO 4 
 KHSO 4  HCl 

175. Nitrogen does not have ‘d’ obital can’t co-ordinate with H 2 O : molecule. In case PF3,
P-F bond is stronger than P–O bond. Hence ‘P’ of PF3 fails to interact with ‘O’ of H2O.
 H2O
176. 2HNO 3   N 2 O5 (Anhydride of HNO3)
3H 2 O
2H 3 PO 4   P2 O5 (anhydride of H3PO4)

 3Cu  NO3  2  4H 2O  2NO

177. 3Cu  8HNO3 

5 2
 H 2 O  2 N O2  3  O 
2H N O3 
 Cu  NO3  2  H 2 O 
3   Cu  O  2HNO3 

(a)  4H   NO3  3e   NO  2H 2 O   2

 Cu   Cu 2   2e   3
8H   2NO3  3Cu 
 3Cu 2  2NO  4H 2 O

i.e.  3Cu  NO3  2  2NO  4H 2O

8 HNO3  3Cu 
178. NH4Cl(s) on heating with quick lime NH3(g), is liberated. Lab. Method:
2NH 4 Cl  CaO  2NH 3   CaCl 2  H 2O
179. When potassium nitrate in treated with cone. H2SO4, nitric acid is formed.
KNO3  H 2SO 4  KHSO 4  HNO3

180. N 2(g)  3H 2(g) 

 2NH3(g) catalyst: Finely divided iron, in presence of promoter-Mo
181. When NH4NO3 is strongly heated nitrousoxide is formed
NH 4 NO3(s) 
 N 2O(g)  2H 2O
(laughing gas)
182. Drying agent for NH3(g) is quicklime (CaO)
183. P2O5 is an acid anhydride which reacts with NH3 (base) to form ammonium
phosphate salt.
P2 O5  3H 2 O  2H 3 PO 4

3NH 3  H3PO 4   NH 4 3 PO4   2

P2O5  6 NH 3  3H 2O  2  NH 4 3 PO 4
184. In the Ostwatd procaine to synthesize HNO3, Pt-Catalyst is used to oxidize ammonia.

[ 103 ]
 5 Pt
2NH3  O 2 
500K, a bar
 2NO  3H 2 O
2
3
2NO  O 2  H 2 O   2HNO3
2
185. Thermal decomposition of sodium azide gives dinitrogen.

2NaN 3   2Na  3N 2 
186. On partial and complete neutralization, three types of salts are formed.
H3PO 4  NaOH 
 NaH 2 PO 4  H 2O
1:1 acid salt

H3PO 4  2NaOH 
 Na 2 HPO 4  2H 2O
1: 2 acid salt

H3 PO 4  3NaOH 
 Na 3PO 4  2H 2 O
normalsalt
187. On heat ing H 3 PO 4 , phosphoric acid and phosphine are formed
4H 3 PO3  3H 3 PO 4  PH 3
188. H3PO2 (hypophosphorous acid) is a mono basic acid with one-OH group bonded to
‘P’with O.N.+1.
Structure:

Here, there are two P-H bonds. Due to greater bond length it can release ‘H’. The
compound that can give ‘H’ is a reducing agent.
Further +1 O.N. can increase to +5 i.e. it is oxidized. The substance getting oxidized is
a reducing gent.
189. Pt does not react with Oxygen directly.
190. Al2 O3  6HCl  2AlCl3  3H 2 O
(Base) (acid)
3
(a)  2  Al  H 2O 6   6Cl  aq 
Al2 O3 s   6HCl  9H 2O 
aq

Al2 O 3  s   6NaOH  3H 2 O  l  
 2Na 3  Al  OH 6  aq.
Sodium hexhaydroxido aluminate (III)
This is the reason way Al2O3 is an amphoteric oxide.
191. Bond angle = 117°, Bond length = identical, 128 pm.

192. In vapour state sulfur partly exists as S2 molecule which has two unpaired electrons n

[ 104 ]
 the antibonding * orbital, like O2 & hence exhibit paramagnetism.
194. SO2 in a reducing agent. If reducing Fe3+ to Fe2+ ions
 SO 42   4H   2e 
SO2  2H 2 O 
2Fe3  2e   2Fe 2 
SO 2  2H 2 O  2Fe3 
 SO 42   4H   2Fe2 

194. (i) Oxidizing agent: H 2SO 4  H 2O  SO2  O 

conc.
(ii) Dehydrating agent: Charring sugar C12 H 22 O11 
H 2SO 4
11H 2 O  12C 

(iii) Sulphonating agent:

195. (i) MnO2 + 4HCl 

 MnCl2 + 2H2O + Cl2
(ii) 2KMnO 4  16HCl 
 2KCl  2MnCl 2  8H 2O  5Cl 2
[8H   MnO 4  5e  
 Mn 2   4H 2 O]  2
[2Cl 
 Cl2  2e  ]  5
 C active
196. Phosgene : CO  Cl 2   COCl2

Mustard gas: S8  4Cl2   4S2 Cl2 (l)
CH 2  CH 2  S2 Cl 2 
 Cl  CH 2  CH 2  S  CH 2  CH 2Cl  S
Cl 2(g) 
197. SO   dried on passing through conc. H2SO4.
2(g) 

198. SO 2  2Mg 
 2MgO  S . It liberates Iodine from HI
4HI  SO 2 
 2H 2 O  2I 2  S
 S  2  O
SO 2 

 2HI  O 
 H 2 O  I 2   2

199. H2S is a dibasic acid, forming hydrogen sulfide  HS  and sulfide (S2–).
200. The strip turns black due to formation of PbS.
 CH3COO 2 Pb  H2S 
 PbS  2CH 3COOH
201. Allotropic forms of sulfur
(i) Rhombic sulfur    sulfur  ,S8 .

(ii) Monochlinic sulfur    Sulfur  ,S8 .

202. 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p4  S
203. TeO2 + 2NaOH  Na2TeO3 + H2O (sodium tellurite)

[ 105 ]
 2TeO2 + 2HCl  Tee2O3Cl2 + H2O
204. Due to high electronegativety value of F (4.1). it forms short H-bonding i.e. HF molecules
are much associated, less volatile i.e. with greater inter molecular force of attraction.
205. H–F < HCl < HBr < HI
206. F(Due to smaller size and high electronegativity)
207. F (1s2 2s2 2p5) having –1, oxidation number only due to high electronegativety
value (4.1).
Unit - VIII
208. 24 Cr 1s 2 2s 2 2p6 3s3 3p6 3d5 4s1 , Cr 3  Ne 2s2 3p6 3d3

29 Cu 1s 2 2s 2 2p6 3s 2 3p6 3d10 4s1 , Cu 2   Ne 3s 2 3p6 3d 9

209. Zn, Cd, Hg due to presence 18 e s in their penultimate shell along with ns2 electrons in
nth shell.
210. In the presence of moist air, a layer of basic copper carbonate (green) is formed on the
surface and gets corroded.
 CuCO3.Cu  OH  2
2Cu  O 2  H 2 O  CO 2 

211. Fe2  (Aq)green, Fe3  Aq  yellow..

212. La3+
213. green vitriol, FeSO4.7H2O (on crystallisation)
214. General configuration of d-block is (n–1)d1–10 ns0–2
and 30Zn = 3s2 3p6 3d10 4s2
215. Actinoids are f-block, inner transition elements with general electronic configuration
(n–2) s2 p6 d10 f 1–14 (n–1) s2p6d0(or)1 ns2
216. Low alloys and high alloys of steel, depending on % of alloying elements (1 – 50%).
e.g. Ferro – silicon, Ferro – vanadium (low alloys)
217. Wrought (pure iron), pig iron (impure form)
218. Reverberatory furance.
219. SO 2
220. (FeCl3)2 in vapour phase. Normally as FeCl3. 6H2O
221. Transition metals have more number of unpaired e (s) in their valenceshell for which
they are able to from strong metallic bond. The strength of bond is responsible for its
hardness.
222. Sc
223. Fe 2O 3
224. Metal is heated to higher temperature and then cooled slowly, by such process the
metal becomes soft.
225. Triad elements group 8 , 9 , 10
Irontriad Fe Co Ni
Pd-triad Ru Rh Pd
Pt. triad Os Ir Pt
226. Nickel
227. +3

[ 106 ]
228. Mn 2  MnO,  ,  3  Mn 2 O3   4  MnO 2  ,  7  Mn 2 O7 
229. Os, e.g. OsO4 (+8) and IrO4
230. Cu 2  3d9  , Ni2   3d 8 

231. Hg+  5d10 6s1  , due to dimagnetic behaviour of mercurous compounds it’s written as
Hg 22  indicating absence of spin free electron.
232. Leser energy differs between 5f and 6d orbitals than between 4f and 5d orbitals in
lanthanides. 5f orbital extend further from nucleus than 4f orbital. Its O.S. varies from
+3 to +6 (5f, 6d, 7s levels having comparable energy).
233. Metals with highest oxidation can reduce to lower O.S. & Metals undergoing easy
reduction can use as better oxidising agent.
234. Fe3+ (3d5), due to half filled d-orbitals it’s is most stable ion (with stable electronic
configuration). Further its can easily be hydrolysed with greater  hyd H   ve  .
235. +7 (Np and Pu)
236. Cu  3d10 4s1  Cu   3d10  , no unpair e & hence colourless

Cu 2  3d9  with unpair e looks blue in aq. solution.

237. Due to lanthaxide contraction transition elements of 2nd and 3rd have comparable
atomic / ionic size & following almost identical chemical properties.
238. r La 3  r Lu 3 due to lanthamide contraction. Thus, La(OH)3 is more ionic than
Lu  OH 3 i.e. La(OH)3 is more basic (alkaline).

239. MnO4  Cr2O72  VO2 (reduced states are more stable)

Unit - IX
   
240. en  N H 2  CH 2  CH 2  N H 2 , ethane-1, 2-diamine
a bidentate chelating ligand with two donor sites, to form co-ordinate covalent
bond with metal or metal ion.
241. K 4  Fe  CN 6 

OOC H 2C CH 2 COO 
242. N  CH 2  CH 2  N Ethylene diamine tetraacetate
OOC  CH 2 CH 2  COO
(EDTA)4– ion.
It is a hexaentate ligand.
243. Cr 3  3d 3  , Co3  3d 6  , Fe3  3d 5 
n=3 n=4 n = 5 (n = no. of unpair e )
244. Hexaammine chromium (III) ion
Hexafluorido cobaltate (III) ion, Hexacyanidoferrate (III)) ion
4
245.  t   0 , conequently, the orbital splitting energies are not sufficiently large for forcing
9
pairing and, therefore, low spin configuration are rarely observed.
246. Pentaammine nitrocoalt (III) nitrate

[ 107 ]
247. Ni(II),      
3d 8 4s 4p
  
sp hybridisation
3

Outer orbital complex (high spin complex)

Shape. Tetrahedral.
248.Here the complex formed is  Cu  NH3 4  SO 4 i.e. presence of tetraamminecopper (II)
ion instead of Cu2+.
249.  0  P , weak field giving high spin complex. i.e d 4  t 32g .e1g (paramagnetic)
3
250. Co  en 3  is more stable as it’s chelated
Tris - (ethane-1, 2-diamine) cobalt (III)
251. Co(III), 3d6 ,     
3d 4s 4p

           (NH3)
d 2 sp3
Inner orbital complex, octahedral, diamagnetic.

252. CO (carbonyl) forms more stable complex (due to synergic bonding  &  )
253. Co3  3d 6  , F is a weaker ligand outer orbital complex, sp3d2- hybridisation.

    


sp3d2- hybridisation
n = no. of unp[air e (s) = 4 (Paramagnetic)
 eff  n  n  2  B.M

= 24 BM = 2 6 BM

254. Ni (II) d8     
3d 4s 4p 4d


sp3d2

(Outer orbital complex)

255. Fe (II)). 3d6 CFSE inpresence of stronger ligand (  CN   ,  0  P

d 6  t 2g 6 (Low spin complex), diamagnetic

In presence of  H 2 O   0  P, high spin complex occurs.

[ 108 ]
 d 6  t 2g 4 eg 2 (Paramagnetic)

 0  CN     0  H 2 O 
Due difference in absorption causes difference frequency, the complementary emitting
frequency differs imparting different colour. Emitting frequency ( CN  ) complex is less
than that in (H2O) complex. Former one is yellow while other one is violet.
Violet color has higher frequency than yellow.
256. Ambident ligand species has more than one donor site e.g. CN  , SCN 
257. Denticity of a ligand is the number of donor groups in a single molecule / ion that bind to
central atom / ion in a coordination complex.
   
e.g. : NH3 monodentate, N H 2  CH 2  CH 2  N bidentate

258. There are five degenerate d-orbitals, dxy, dyz, dzx, d x  y and d z on the basis of their
2 2 2

orientations.
259. The ligands may be arranged in increasing order of the field strength produced by them
in a series known as spectrochemical series.
I   Br   SCN  Cl ........H 2 O  NCS  edt 4 a  NH 3  en  CN  CO
260. Hard water contains Ca 2  , Mg 2 & never gives good lather with soap. Water can be
softened with EDTA that form Ca and Mg chelating complex.
261. Gold dissolves in KCN in presence of oxygen (surrounding air) and water forming a
complex :
 4K  Au  CN 2   4KOH
4 Au  8KCN  O 2  2H 2 O 
Pot. dicyanidoaurate (I)
This solution is treated with Zn (more electro +ve) to displace less electropositive, Au
from its solution.
2K  Au  CN 2   Zn 
 2Au  K 2  Zn  CN 4 
262. Sulfide ore gets soluble in NaCN in the process of leaching forming a soluble complex.
 2Na Ag  CN 2   Na 2S
Ag 2S  4NaCN 
Sodiumdicyanidoargentate (I)
4
263.  Fe  CN 6 

Fe (II), 3d6 4s0     

3d 4s 4p

          
   ..   CN 
d2sp3
Shape : Octahedral
Magnetic property : diamagnetic

[ 109 ]
 4 2
264. K 22  Ru 4  OH 4 Cl22  , C.N. of Ru=six
 
O.N. of Ru = Four (tetravalent)
6 3
265.  Fe3  C2 O 4 3  C.N of Fe3+ = six
O.N. = +3 (three)
Unit - X
266. (i) CH3I (ii) CH3Cl
(iii) CH3–CH2–CH2Br (iv) CH3–CH2–CH2 Br
(v) CH3–CH2–Br (vi) Chlorocyclohexane

267. (i)  CH 3 CCl (30) (ii) (20)

Cl
(iii) C6H5CH2Cl (10) (iv)  C6 H5 2 CH  Br
(v) CH2 = CH – CH2Cl
268. CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 Br 10  1–Bromobutane

CH 3  CH  CH 2 Br (10) 1-Bromo-2-methyl propane

|
CH 3

CH 3  CH  CH 2  CH 3 (20) 2-Bromobutane
|
Br

CH3
|
CH 3  C  CH 3 (30) 2-Bromo-2-methyl propane
|
Br

Br
CH3 H H
269. (i) (ii) Br  CH 2 C  C CH 2 Br

CH3-CH-CH2-CH3

270. (i) CH 3  CH 2 OH  KI  H 3 PO 4 
 CH 3CH 2I  KH 2 PO 4  H 2O

(ii)  3  CH3CH  CH3  + H3PO3

3  CH 3  CH  CH 3  + 3 Br2 + 2P 
 |   | 
 OH   Br 
   
271. (i) CH3  CH2  CH2  CH2Cl, 1-chlorobutane (10)
CH 3  CH  CH 2  CH 3 , 2–chlorobutane (Major product)
|
Cl

[ 110 ]
 Isobutane : Cl2 / h
CH3  CH  CH3   CH 3  CH  CH 2 Cl (10) +
| |
CH3 CH 3

Cl
|
(30) CH3  C CH3 (Major product)
|
CH 3
2-chloro-2-methyl propane
AgCN
272. CH3  CH 2 Br   CH 3  CH 2  NC(A)
4(H)  Na / alc.
CH 3CH 2 NHCH 3 (B)
N-methylethanamine
KCN Na / alc.
CH 3  CH 2 Br   CH 3  CH 2  CN 
4 H 
 CH 3  CH 2 CH 2 NH 2
propanenitrile (A1) propanamine (B1)
273. (i) Synthesis of alkyl fluoride by heating an alkyl chloride or bromide in presence
of metallic fluoride such as AgF, Hg2F2, CoF2 or SbF3. This reaction is called
Swarts reaction.
CH 3  Br  AgF   CH 3 F  AgBr 
(ii) Finkelstein reaction (Preparation of alkyl iodide)
When alkyl chloride on bromide is treated with sodium iodide in presence dry
acetone alkyl iodide is formed.
dryacetone
RX  NaI   RI  Na
(X  Cl or Br)
274. (i) Chloromethane < bromomethane < dibromomethane < bromoform
(ii) isopropylchloride < 1-chloropropane < 1-chlorobutane
275. The isomers :
CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 Br (10)
CH 3  CH  CH 2 Br (10)
|
CH 3

CH 3  CH  CH 2  CH 3 (20)
|
Br

CH 3
|
CH 3  C  Br
| (30)
CH 3
Reactivity : 30 > 20 > (CH3)2CH–CH2 Br (10) > CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 Br

276. (i) CH2-Cl (ii) I (iii) CH2-Cl

[ 111 ]
277. (i) HBr in presence of benzoylperoxide (Kharasch effect)
(ii) AgCN
(iii) AgNO2, Sn-HCl / 
(iv) CuCN / KCN, SnCl2 + HCl (Stephen’s reaction)
(v) HC  C Na

H H H Br
278. C=C , C=C
Br Br Br C
cis, trans-1, 2- dibromoithene
Trans-isomer is much more symmetrical and fit tightly in the crystal lattice, orderly arranged
and has higher m.p. CiS - isomer has higher b.p. due to higher polarity experiencing
greater dipole-dipole force.
H
|
*
279. CH 3  C  CH 2  CH3 , 2–Bromobutane, containing chiral C.atom.
|
Br

CH 3
|
280. CH3  C  CH 2 Br (1-Bromo-2, 2–dimethyl propane)
|
CH 3
The hydrocarbon is 2, 2–methyl propane (C5H12)

 C5 H10  . Cyclopentane 

Cl 2 Cl (Chlorocyclopentane)

281. Br + Mg 
dry ether Mg Br 
H 2O

CH3 CH3

282. (i) Br 
C2 H 5 O


Cl
| 
(ii) CH 3  C  CH 2  CH3 
C2 H 5 O
 CH 3  C  CH  CH3
| |
CH3 CH3

CH 3 CH 2
| ||
alc. KOH
283. (i) CH 3  C  Br   CH 3  C
| |
CH 3 CH 3
KOH (aq)
(ii) CH 3  CHBr  CH 3   CH 3  CH  CH 3
|
OH

[ 112 ]
 KCN
(iii) CH 3  CH 2  Br 
alc.(Aq)
CH 3  CH 2  CN

(iv) C6 H 5 ONa  C2 H 5 Cl 
 C 6 H 5OC 2 H 5 (Phenetole)
( Phenoxide a weaker base fails to eliminate)
The reaction where ether is formed from 10-haloalkane is known as Williamson’s
synthesis.
Br
CH 3 |
(v) CH3  CH  C  CH 3  CH 2 – C  CH 3
+ HBr 
CH 3 |
CH3

H H
| |
Na dryether
284. (i) CH 3  C  CH 2Br  
 CH 3  C  CH 2  CH 2  CH  CH 3
| | |
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3

2, 5–dimethyl hexane
CH 3
Na dryether
(ii) CH 2 Br  
 CH 3  CH  CH  CH3
CH 3 | |
CH 3 CH 3

2, 3–dimethyl butane.
Cl
|
(iii) CH3 CH  CH 2  CH 3 Na / dryether
 CH 3  CH  CH 2  CH 3

|
CH 3  CH  CH 2 CH 3
3, 4-dimethyl hexane
Na / dryether
(iv) Cl  
Cyclopropyl cyclopropane
285. H-present at the  -position of haloalkane takes part in elimination forming more
substituted alkene.
alcoholic
CH 3  CH  CH 2  CH 3 
KOH
 CH 2  CH  CH 2  CH3
| But  1  ene
Br

CH 3  CH  CH  CH3
But  2  ene ( majorproduct)
286. Zaitsev (Saytzeff) rule
In dehydrohalogenation / dehydration reactions the more substituted alkene (Less H.
at C=C ) is prefered.
Unit - XI
287. CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2OH (10) Butan-1-ol
CH 3  CH  CH 3   CH 2 OH (10) 2-methyl propan-1-ol

[ 113 ]
 CH 3  CH 2  CH  OH (20) Butan-2-ol
|
CH3

CH 3
|
CH3  C  OH (30) 2-Methyl propan-2-ol
|
CH 3

CH 3
|
*
288. H  C  OH Butan-2-Ol
|
C 2 H5

OH OH OH OH
NO2 NO2
Nitration dinitration
289. (i)   +  
CH3 CH 3 CH3 CH3
NO2 NO2

O O
||  ||
(ii) CH 3  C  O N O2
  CH 3  C  O NO 2
ZnCl2  Anhy.
290. CH3  CH2  CH2  CH2  OH  HCl  CH3  CH2  CH2  CH2  Cl  H2O
CH3  CH2  CH2  CH2OH  SOCl2 
CH3  CH2  CH2  CH2Cl  SO2(g)  HCl (g)

CH3 CH3
| |
CH3  CH 2  C  CH 3  HCl 
 CH3  CH 2  C  CH 3  H 2 O
| |
OH Cl

CH 3 CH3
| |
 CH3  CH 2  C  CH3  SO2(g)  HCl  g 
CH3  CH 2  C  CH3  SOCl2 
| |
OH Cl

OH

H
291.  
1-Methylcyclohexene

 
H hydrideshift
CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 OH 
 H2 O
 CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  C H 2  
(10 )


CH  CH 2  C H  CH 3 
major deprotonation
 CH 5  CH  CH  CH3
(20 ) But  2  ene(major product)

[ 114 ]
 O O O O

292.
+N +N N+ N+
O O O O O O O O
293. Propan-1-ol < 4-methylphenol < 3-nitrophenol < 3, 5-dinitrophenol < 2, 4, 6 -
trinitrophenol.
294. (i) Methanol < ethanol < propan-1-ol < butan-2-ol < butan-2-ol < pentan-1-ol
(ii) n-butane < ethoxyethane < 3-methylbutan-1-ol < pentan-1-ol

295. (i) HCHO + MgBr  CH2OH

(ii) HCHO + (CH3)2CH MgBr 

 CH 3  CH  CH 2 OH
|
CH3

(iii) H  CHO  CH 3 MgBr 

 CH 3CH 2OH
OH

296. (i) CH 3  CH  OH  .CH 3 (ii) CH 2  COOCH3

OH
(iii) CH 2  CH 2 OH + CH3OH [ Na BH4 fails to reduce ester, –COOH

but LiAlH4 can.]

(iv) CH 3  CH 2  CH  CH 2 OH
|
CH3
H 2 / Ni
297. (i) CH3  CO  CH 2  CH3  
 CH3  CH  OH   CH 2  CH3
Butan-2-ol
conc.H 2SO 4
(ii) CH3  CH 2  CH 2 OH  CH 3  CH  CH 2 , propene


CH 3 CH 3

 | |
H 2 O/ H 
(iii) CH3  C  O  C H 3  MgBr  
 CH 3  C  OMgBr 
 CH3  C  OH
 Mg(OH)Br
| | |
CH3 CH 3 CH 3
2-methylpropan-2-ol

OH ONa
| |
Na
298. CH 3  CH  CH  CH 2  CH 3   CH 3  CH  OH  CH 2  CH3
| |
CH 3 CH 3

[ 115 ]
 OC 2 H5
|
C2 H 5 I
  CH 3  CH  CH  CH 2  CH 3
|
CH 3

299. (i) Nucleophilic attack of 4-nitrophenoxide on methyl bromide gives the desired
product.

(ii)


300. (i) CH3  CH 2  CH 2  O  CH 3  HBr   CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  OH  CH 3Br

OC2H5
OC2H5 OC2H5

N O2 NO2
(ii)   +
NO2
HBr
(iii) C6 H 5  O  C 2 H5    C6 H 5  OH  C 2 H 5 Br

(iv)  CH3 3 CI  C2 H5I OH are the products.

(v) C6 H 6 CH 2 I  C6 H 5OH

[ 116 ]
301. p-nitrophenol > o-nitrophenol > m-nitrophenol
302. HI > HBr > HCl > HF
303. (i) acidified / alkaline KMnO4 (or) acidified K2Cr2O7
(ii) Pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC) in CH2Cl2
(iii) aqueous bromine
(iv) Acidified (or) alkaline KMnO4
(v) Conc. H2SO4 at 413 K
(vi) H2/Ni,  or Na BH4
(vii) NaBH4
(viii) LiAlH4
(ix) HI / red P (x) Aq. NaOH /  (SN-2 reaction)
1
304. C6 H 5 OH  Na  s  
 C 6 H 5 ONa  H 2  (Proton displacement)
2
(acid)
C6 H 5OH  NaOH  aq  
 C6 H5ONa  H 2O (Salt formation)

305. (i) 2KMnO4  2KOH 

 2K 2 MnO 4  H 2 O  O
CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 OH  2[O] 
 CH 3  CH 2  COOH  H 2 O

OH OH OH

CS2 Br
(ii) + Br2  + (major)

Br

OH
OH OH
NO2
dil HNO3
(iii)   +
NO2

OH ONa OH
CHO  CHO
NaOH
(iv) 
CHCl3 , 343K
 H3 O
 

(salicylaldehyde),

OH + OH
O Na COOH
COOH
NaOH H 2O
and 

CCl 4 
 Salicylic acid.
(Reimer Tiemann reaction)

306. Phenol > m - cresol > p-cresol  o– cretol

pKa = 10.0, 10.1 10.17 10.316

[ 117 ]
307. The reactivity of alcohols in esterification follows in the order :
CH 3OH  CH 3  CH 2OH   CH3  2 CHOH   CH 3 3  OH 

[It follows in the order of increasing acidic strength.]

308. 30-alcohol e.g. (CH3)3C (OH)
Unit - XII
309. Aetophenone is formed with some part of C6 H 5  CH 2  CHO
(It forms benzoic acid with alkaline KMnO4)

310. AdN eg. > C = O + CN  > CO

|
Nucleophile CN

In > C = 0, C– is short of e– density due to presence of more electronegativity of ‘O’.

311. First member of the aldehyde, HCHO is a gas at room temperatuare. The rest numbers
of both aliphitic and aromatic are either colourless liquid or solid depending on alkyl or
aryl group size. Incease of size increases vander Walls force changing the physical state.
First member of ketone (acetone) is liquid at room temperature.
312. RDX. Research developed explosive (or) Royal demolition high explosive.
N

CHCHO  4NH 3 

6H 2 O
 CH2 / i.e. (CH2)6N4

hexamethylene tetramine (Urotropine)

NO2
N
NH 4 NO3 / HNO3
  Niration
CH 3  CO  CO  CH 3

N N
NO 2 NO2
313. (T) two C6H5 groups due to their bulky size hinder the nucleophilic nucleophilic
i.e. SO 3 H attack.

CHO
CHO O
| ||
314. CH3  CH  CH 2  C  CH3 , 4-methylcyclohexane carbaldehyde
2-methyl-4-oxopentanal
CH3

315. C3 H 6 O : Functional isomers

CH3CH2CHO, CH3COCH3
OH
Cyclopropanol. propanal Propanone

[ 118 ]
 O
CH2 CH CH3 CH 2  C  CH 3 Prop-1-en-2-ol, etc.
|
OH
1, 2, – epoxypropane , CH 2 = CH – OCH3 Methoxyethene
CH 3 O
| ||
316. BrCH 2  CH  C  CH 2  CH 3
317. Tollen’s reagent, ammoniacal AgNO3, [Ag(NH3)2] (OH)
Fehling solution. alkaline CuSO4 solution i.e.
(A) CuSO4 solution
(B) Sodium potassium tartarate (Aq)
Brady’s reagent : 2, 4-dinitro phenyl hydrazine.
NO2
O2N NH - NH2


H
318. (a) Oxime: R  C  O  H 2 N OH   R  C  N  OH
| |
H H
(aldoxime)

H
(b) hydrazone :  C  O  H 2 N NH 2 
 H 2O
  C  N  NH 2
hydrazine – hydrazone

(c) C6 H 5  NH  NH 2  O  C H


 C6 H 5  NH  N  C
Phenylhydrazine
– phenyl hydrazone
R1 R1 OR
(d) Ketal C = O + 2 ROH 
 C + H2O
R2 R2 OR
319. CH 3  CH3  CH3  OCH 3  CH3 CHO  C 2 H 5OH
O
|| I2 NaOH
320. CH3  C  H   CI3 CHO   CHI3
ethanal
O
||
321. H  C  H does not have   C atom / no   C -H-atom.
322. HCHO, C6H5CHO, Cl3CCHO (chloral)
323. CH3COCH3 < CH3CHO < HCHO (crowding effect)
324. H COOH – Methanoic acid
COOH
| – Ethanedioic acid
COOH

[ 119 ]
325. Carboxyl acid is formed

RCN  2H 2 O  H

RCO O H  N H 4

NH3 
326. CH 3COOH   CH3 COONH 4 
 H2O
 CH 3CONH 2
327. Phenylmagnesium bromide.

OMgBr
O  C  O  C 6 H 5 MgBr 
O  C H2O
  C6 H 5 COOH
 Mg  OH Br
C6 H 5
328. Benzoic acid with PCl5 / SOCl2 gives benzoyl chloride.
C6 H 5COOH  PCl 5 
 C6 H 5 COCl  POCl3  HCl
C6 H 5 COOH  SOCl 2 
 C 6H 5COCl  SO 2   HCl 
329. (i) CH 3COOH  HCOOH  ClCH 2 COOH
(ii)  CH3 3 C COOH   CH3 2 CHCOOH  CH3OOH
[ +I effect decreases acidic strength]
(iii) Cl CH2COOH < Cl2CH COOH < CCl3 COOH
[–I effect increases acidic strength]
(iv)  CH3 2 CHCOOH  CH3CH 2COOH  CH3COOH  ClCH 2  CH 2
 COOH  ClCH 2 COOH

330. (i) RCO OH (ii) RCOO H (iii) RCO OH (iv) RCO OH

331. C3 H8  CH3 CHO  C 2 H 5 OH  CH 3COOH

332. CH 3COOH is more soluble in water than benzoic acid.
333. CH 3COOH  C6 H 5 COOH  HCOOH  Cl3 C COOH
334. Na BH4
335. CH3 CO COOH , HOOC  CH 2  CH 2  COOH
Pyrovic acid Succinic acid.
336. (i) o-nitrobenzoic acid > p-nitrobenzoicd > m-nitrobenzoicacid > benzoic acid
(ii) o-Toluic and > Benzoic acid > m-Toluic acid > p-toluic acid.
(iii) o-chlorobenzoic acid > m-chlorobenzoic acid > p-chlorobenzoic acid > benzoic
acid
(iv) HCOOH > CH3COOH > C2H5 COOH > C3H7COOH
(v) o-hydroxy benzoic acid > m-hydroxy benzoic acid >
benzoic acid > p-hydroxy benzoic acid.
337. oil of bitter almond : C6H5–CHO (Benzaldehdye)

Unit – XIII
338. Balz - Schiemann reaction.

HBF4
Ar N 2 Cl   Ar N 2  BF5  
 BF3  N 2
 Ar F

[ 120 ]
339. HBF4 and NaNO2 – Cu powder.
HBF4 NaNO2
Ar N 2 Cl   Ar N 2 BF4 
Cu power
 Ar  NO 2   BF3  N 2 


OH
340. N2Cl + OH 
P H  9 10 
 N=N OH
Electron delocalisation is favourable in making the compound more stable.
(Conjugated system).
341. With phenol is alkaline medium (pH, 9–10) with (10 and 20) aromatic amine in weakly
acidic medium (pH, 4-5) to form azodye. Hydrogen atom of amine group
 NH 1  or  NH  R  2  is replaced.
2
0 0


H
N = N – Cl + H2N   N=N–NH

N=N –NH2
p-aminoazobenzene
342. C6 H 5 N 2 Cl  KI 
 C 6 H 5 I  N 2  KCl
343. (i)  CH3  2 NH  C2 H 5 NH 2  C2 H 5OH ; (ii) C6H5 NH2   C2 H5 2 NH  C2H5 NH 2

NaNO 2  HCl Cu CN H3 O
344. C6 H 5 NH 2   C6 H 5 N 2 Cl   C 6 H 5CN   C6 H 5COOH
00 C 

H 2 CrO 4
345. C6 H 5 NH 2  O O (benzoquinone)

346. C6 H 5 CH 2 NH 2  Benzylamine 
NH2 + NH2
NH3-HSO4
4 
H SO conc. 
347. (i) Sulfolation - 
2
  

SO3H
( Sulfanilic acid)

NH2 NH2 NH2 NH2

OH
HNO3  H3SO 4
(ii) Nitration 
288K
 + +
NO 2
NO2
(minor product)
m-nitro(47%) aniline is obtained due to protonation of –NH2 and becomes m-

directing as N H 3 is a deactivating group.

H
348. CH3CH2NC+2H2O   CH3 – CH2 – NH2 + HCOOH

[ 121 ]
 LiAlH 4
349. CH 3CH2CN   CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 NH 2 (10 amine)
4H
CH 3CH 2 NC   CH 5CH 2 NH  CH 3  2 0 amine 
isocyanide
(Then 10 and 20 amines to be distinguished by carbylamine text.
CH 3 CH 2
| ||
NH3
350. CH3  C  Br 
 Base   CH 3  C  CH 3 + NH4Br
|
CH3

351. C6 H 5 N  CH3   C6 H 5CH 3  C 6H 5 N  CH3 
3 2

352. alkaline chloroform.

warm
C6 H 5 NH 2  3KOH  CHCl 3   C6 H 5 NC  3KCl  3H 2O
unpleasant smell.
i) NH 3 Br2 / KOH
353. C6 H 5 COOH ii) 
 C6 H 5CONH 2   C6 H 5 NH 2
Hoffmann degradation
Copper powder
354. C6 H 5 N 2Cl 
 HCl/ 
 C6 H 5  Cl  N 2
355. Due to release of large volume of gases like N2 H2 and CO2.
356. (C2H5)2NH > C2H5NH2 > C6H5CH2NH2 > NH3 > C6H5NH2

NO2 NH2
NH-COCH3
Sn / HCl  CH CO  O
357.   
3 2

Unit - XV
358. Macromolecule : It may or may not contain monomer units e.g. chlorophyll
(C55H72O5N4Mg) is a macromolecule but not a polymer, as it does not contain monomer.
Thus all polymers are macromoelcules while all macromolecules may not be polymers.
359. Linear chain polymer. PVC
Branched chain polymer: starch
Crossed chain polymer : Bakelite
360. i) Buna S < polythene < Nylon - 66
ii) Neoprene < PVC < Nylon - 6
361. Buna -N : Co-polymer of butadiene and acrylonitrile
Buna - S : Copolymer of butadiene and styrene
362. Uses of Buna-N i) Making oil seals as this is resistant to lubricating oil, organic solvents
ii) For lining in tanks, making conveyor belt.
363. Monomers Nylon-2-nylon-6 (biodegradable polyemer)
glycine (H2N–CH2–COOH) and amino caproic acid NH 2   CH 2 5 COOH .

364. It is a homopolymer of H 2 N  CH  COOH (monomer)

|
R

[ 122 ]
 O O
|| ||
365. Benzoyl peroxide C6 H5  C  O O  C  C6 H5 .
(Phenyl radical, chain initiator)
366. Elastomers < Plastic < Fibers
Buna S, Neoprene Polythene (Nylon-6, Nylon 6, 6)
367. H 2 N   CH 2 6  NH 2 (hexamethylene diamine)

HOOC   CH 2  4  COOH (Adipic acid)

 CN 
 | 
368. Chain growth (addition polymer)  CH  CH   Polyacrylonitrile (PAN)
 2 n
Step growth (condensation polymer)
Loss of molecules taking place on condensation of monomers

e.g. polyester, HO  CH 2  CH 2  OH  HOOC –COOH

Terephthalic acid
369. PMMA (Polymethyl methacrylate) (Dacron/terylene)
monomer : methyl methacrylate : CH 2  C  COOCH 3
|
CH 3

 CH 3 
 | 

  CH 2  C  
 | 
 COOCH3  n

(Addition polymer)
370. Inhibitor of free radical polymerisation :
Reagents such as hydro quinone and nitrosoamine
371.  C 6 H5   CO 2
Chain initiation C6 H 5 CO  O 
( I )

Chain propagation. I  CH 2  CH 2 
 I  CH 2  CH 2  
CH 2  CH 2



I  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 .........  I  CH 2  CH 2 n CH 2  C H 2

 
Chain Termination. 2  I   CH 2  CH 2 n  CH 2  C H 2 
 
 I  CH 2  CH 2 n CH 2  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2  n I
372. PAN polyacrylonitrile (Orlon)
PT FE polytetra fluoroethene (Teflon)
Cl F
PCTFE polychlorotri fluoroethylene C=C
F F

[ 123 ]
 PVC polyvinylchloride.
PHBV Poly  hydroxybutyrate - Co-  -hydroxy valerate)
373. The pressure of any other molecule (impurity) during free radical polymerisation can
act as chain initiator or inhibitor which will interfere normal polymerisation reaction.
374. CCl4 as chain transfer agent : The mode of polymerisation in presence of CCl4 during
he polymerisation of styrene.
H
 |
––––– CH 2  CH  CCl4  –––– CH 2  C  Cl   CCl3

| |
C 6 H5 C6 H 5

 Cl3 C  CH 2   CH
Styrene
CCl3  CH 2  CH   
| |
C 6 H5 C6 H 5

 H H 
Cl3C  CH 2  CH   | | 
|   C  C  
 | | 
C6 H 5  
 H C H
6 5 n

This inhibit polymerisation forming lower average mol. mass polymer.

Phenols, quinone, amines etc. promote inhibition.
375.  HDP (High density polythene) e.g. polymerisation of ethylene is presence of Zeigler
Natta catalyst at high temperature and pressure (6–7 atoms) where closely packed
linear chains are formed. Therefore called high density polymer.
 LDP (low density polythene)
temp. 1000 to 2000 atom
n  CH2  CH2    CH2  CH2  n
Polyethene
It consists of branched chain molecules preventing quite close packing and density
becomes low with low tensile strength
376. Melamine - formaldehyde polymer (very hard and tough)

Unit - XVI
377. Antibiotic : pencillin, Tetacyclin Analgesic : Aspirin, paracetamol, morphine.
Antiseptic : Mercurochrome, Tinctureiodine Antipyretic : Aspirin, paracetamol
Tranquiliser : Equanil, meprobamate. Antimicrobial : antibacterial antifungal, antiviral
Antacid : Mg(OH)2, Al(OH)3 Antihistamine : Ranitidine, Terfenadine
378. Ranitidine
379. Broad spectrum antibiotic.
380. 0.2% phenol as antiseptic, 1% aq. solutions disinfectant
381. 2.3% solution iodine in water and alcohol. Used as antiseptic onwards
382. Cationic detergent : cetyltrimethyl ammonium bromide

CH3  CH 2 15  N  CH 3 3  Br 

[ 124 ]
 Anionic detergent : Sodium dodecylbenzene sulfonate.

CH3 (CH2)11 SO3 Na  (ABS-detergent)

383. Biodegradable detergent : (Unbranched chain can easily be bio-degraded).

Sodium laurylsulfate. CH 3  CH 2 10  CH 2  O  SO 3 Na  (Linear alkylsulfate)

384. Antimicrobial : The drug which are used to cure diseases caused by bacteria, fungi and
viruses are called antimicrobal. eg. Erythromycin, tetracyclin, chloramphenecol.
385. Tranquilizer.
386. It is used in diagnosis, prevention & treatment of diseases.
387. Potassium salt of long chain fatty acids like oleic, palmitic and stearic acid.
388. Antacid, antihistamine
389. Tranquilizer
390. Tranquilizer to releive depression, hypertension.
391. It is an antimicrobial agent to treat disease called Syphills (Arsenic present – As – As
– in its composition)
392. Bithional acts as an antiseptic agent.
CH3
| CH 3
393. CH 3  CH 2 10  CH 2 OSO 3 Na  CH3   CH 2 15  N Br
 CH 3
(nonpolar)hydrophobic hydrophilic (polar) Hydrophobic hydrophilic
394. Fillers are added to laundry soaps : Fillers are added to change the properties of soap
in order to make them more useful.
e.g. Sodium rosinate, sodium silicate, borax and sodium carbonate are added to laundry
soaps to increase their lather forming ability.



[ 125 ]
 Group - B
Short Answer type (2/3 mark each) :
Answer the following :
Unit - I
1. Crystalline solids are anisotropic in nature. What does this statement mean ?
2. What is radius ratio ?
3. Why does the window glasses of the old buildings look milky ?
4. Gold (atomic radius = 0.144 nm) crystallizes in a face centred unit cell. What is the
length of a side of the cell ?
5. Why is Frenkel defect not found in pure alkali metal halides ? Explain.
6. Zinc oxide is white but it turns yellow on heating. Explain.
7. Why does presence of excess of lithium makes Li crystals pink ?
8. What are the important consequences of Schottky and Frenkel defects in crystals ?
9. What change occurs when AgCl is doped with CdCl2? Explain.
10. Give important differences between crystalline and amorphous solids.
11. Give the points of differences between Schottky defect and Frenkel defect ?
12. Determine the atomic mass of an unknown metal if you are given the mass, density and
dimension of the unit cell of its crystal.
13. Discuss what are unit cells.
14. What is the formula of a compound in which the element ‘Y’ forms CCP lattice and
atoms of ‘X’ occupy 13 of the tetrahedral voids ?
15. The compound CuCl (formula mass = 99 gram / mol has FCC structure like ZnS. Its
density is 3.4 gram/cm3. What is the volume of unit cell ?  N A = 6.023×1023 mol -1 

16. An element with density 10 gram / cm3 forms a cubic cell with edge length 3  10-8 cm .
What is the nature of cubic unit cell if atomic mass of the element is 81 g/mol ?
17. Gold (atomic radius = 0.144 nm) crystallises in face centred unit cell. What is the edge
length ?
18. Why is Frankel defect not occurred in pure alkali metal halide ?
19. Why does presence of excess of Lithium makes LiCl crystal pink ?
20. What are the important consequences of Schottky and Frenkel defect in crystals ?
21. Examine the featues of the defective crystal :

x y x y x
y y x y
x y x x
y x y x y

Answer the following :

i) Is it a stoichiometric defect ?

[ 126 ]
 ii) What is name of such defect ?
iii) Name two compounds showing such defect.
iv) How does this defect affect the density of the crystal ?
22. What type of defect when a solid is heated ? Which physical property is affected by it ?
23. Why is non-stoichiometric sodium chloride yellow ?
24. What do you mean by interstitial voids ? Discuss the different types of voids.
25. Compare the characteristics of ionic and metallic crystals.
26. Discuss Rock salt (NaCl) type structure.
27. An element crysallices in a strucure having fcc unit cell of an edge 200 pm. Calculate the
density if 400 gram of this element contains 48  1023 atoms.
UNIT - II
28. How is equivalent mass of K2 Cr2O7 related to molar mass in acidic medium ?
29. What is vapour pressure ?
30. Identity any two factors affecting vapour pressure.
31. What is standard solution ?
32. Why ether has lower b.p than alcohol ?
33. What is the effect of pressure on the b.p. of the liquid ?
34. Identity two factors affecting solubility of solid in liquid.
35. What is the relationship between depression in freezing point of a solution and molecular
mass solute ?
36. Why is CCl4 immiscible in water ?
37. When does a liquid start boiling ?
38. Why is vapour pressure of solution is lower than that of pure solvent ?
39. What is the molality of 10% (wt.) urea solution ?
40. Show that total vapour pressure for a solution of volatile liquids is linearly related with
molefraction of the solute.
41. Vapour pressure of chloroform and dichloromethane at 298 K are 200 mm Hg and 415
mm Hg respectively calculate the vapour pressure of the solution prepared by mixing
25.5 g of CHCl3 and 40 gram of CH2Cl2 at 298 K.
42. Express the composition of the vapour phase in molefraction in the above solution.
43. Between CHCl3 and CH2Cl2 which one is more volatile.
44. A solution of acetone and chloroform causes negative deviation. What type of azeotrope
does it constitute?
45. 18 gram of glucose (180 gram / mol) dissolved is 1 kg of water. At what temperature
will water boil at 1.013 bar ? (Kb for water is 0.52 K kg mol–1.)
46. 1.0 gram of a non-volatile solute in 50 g. of benzene lowered the freezing point of
benzene by 0.40 K. Kf for benzene is 5.12 K. kg mol–1. Find the molar mass of solute.
47. What is reverse osmosis ?

[ 127 ]
48. Vapour pressure of pure water at 298 K is 23.8 mm Hg 50 g of urea (mol-mass 60 g/
mole) is dissolved in 850 g of water. Calculate the vapour pressure of water for this
solution and its relative lowering.
49. 200 cc. of an equeous solution of a protein contains 1.26 g. of protein. The osmotic
pressure of such a solution at 300 K is found to be 2.57  10 3 bar. Calculate the molar
mass of the protein.
50. Calculate the pressure in pascals exerted by a solution prepared by dissolving 1.0 gram
of polymer of molar mass 185000 in 450 ml of water at 370C.
51. Mention any two applications of Henry’s law.
52. H2S, a toxic gas with rotten egg like smell is used for qualitative analysis. If the solubility
of H2S in water at STP is 0.195m. Calculate Henry’s law constant.
53. Justify that relative lowering in vapour pressure is a colligative properly.
54. What type of deviation from an ideal solution will be shown by solution of cyclohexane
and ethanol ?
55. (i) The freezing point of water is reduced on adding solute to it.
(ii) Show that depression of freezing point, Tf is a colligative property..
56. Why is sometimes abnormal molecular mass of the substance observed by using
collogative properties of the solution ?
57. Discuss the significance of KH.
58. Henry’s law constant for CO2 in water is 1.67  108 Pa at 298 K. Calculate the quantity
of CO2 in 500 ml of soda-water when packed under 2.5 atm pressure of CO2 at that
temperature.
59. Define the following terms :
(i) ideal solution (ii) Azeotrope (iii) Osmotic pressure
60. Why salt is sprinkled on road during winter in cold region ?
61. Match the following :
(a) Solubility of gas (i) Non-ideal solution
(b) Liquid - Liquid solution (ii) Henry’s law
(c) Positive deviation (iii) Raoult’s law
(d) Desali nation (iv) Heterogeneous
(v) Reverse osmosis
62. The vapour pressure of an aqueous solution of glucose is 750 mm of mercury at 1000C.
Calculate the molality and mole fraction of solute.
UNIT - III
63. What is the difference between electrochemical and electrolytic cell ?
64. Relate cell potential with electrode potential with example.
65. How does electro-chemical series predict the feasibility of redox reaction ?
66. What is the function of a salt bridge ?
67. Design a cell without use of salt bridge.
68. What is the relation between standard EMF and equilibrium constant.

[ 128 ]
69. Write down Nernst equation for-
(i) Fe3 C1   2e 
 Fe

(ii) Zn  2Ag   C1  
 Zn 2  C2   2Ag
(Zn–AgNO3 – Cell)
70. The molar conductance of a solution of AlCl3 is found to 130 Ohm-1 cm2 mol–1 at 298
K. Calculate the equivalent conductance.
71. Distiguish between strong electrolytes & weak electrolytes.
72. Define specific conductance, equivalent cnductance and molar conductance.
73. Predict the electrolytic product of
(i) fused NaCl
(ii) NaCl (Aq)
(iii) CuSO 4  Aq  taking Pt. electrodes

(iv) CuSO 4  Aq  taking copper electrodes.

(v) AgNO3 taking Ag electrodes
(vi) AgNO3 taking Pt-electrodes
(vii) Acidulated water taking Pt-electrode.
74. What is the difference between chemical equivalent and electrochemical equivalent ?
Explain taking silver example.
75. Explain i) Blue colour of copper sulfate solution is discharged by dipping iron rod in it.
ii) The pH of aqueous of NaCl increases on electrolysis.
76. (i) How much electricity is required in Faraday for oxidation of mole (i) H2O2 to O2?
(ii) 1 mole of FeO to Fe2O3
77. (i) Silvre nitrate solution can not be stored in a copper vessel.
(ii) Zinc sulphate solution can be stored in Cu-vessel. ______ explain.
78. What is difference between electrode potential and cell potential ?
79. What is electroplating ?
80. What are main difference between emf of cell and potential difference ?
81. Write down the notations representing cathode, anode and galvanic cell.
82. What are reference electrodes ? What is the electrode potential ?
83. Calculate the time required for a current of 2 amp. to decompose one gram mole of
water
84. Write down Nerst equation. How is it useful ?
85. What is a dry cell ?
86. Calculate the Zn-Zn2+ electrode in which  Zn 2    0.001M, E Zn 2 |Zn  0.76V.

87. Specific conductance of a 0.1 N solution of electrolyte is 2.4  102 ohm 1 cm 1 .

Calculate its equivalent conductance.
88. An electronic current is passed through two solutions (a) AgNO3 (b) solution of 10
gram of blue vitrol 500 ml water using Pt. electrode separately. After 30 minutes it was
found that 1.307 gram Ag was deposited. What is the concentration of Cu2+ after
electrolysis ?

[ 129 ]
89. A current of 1.7 amp. is passed thrpugh 300 ml of 0.16 M ZnSO4 solution for 230
seconds with current efficiency of 90%. Find the concentration of divalent zinc in solution.

90. E N 2 | Ni  0.236. If this electrode is coupled with hydrogen electrode, the emf of cell
i

becomes zero. Calculate pH the acid used in the electrode.

91. Calculate the quantity of elecricity needed to quantitatively decolourise the blue colour
of copper sulfate 100 ml 0.01M solution.

92. E 0values for Fe3  3e   Fe and Fe 2  2e   Fe are –0.036 V and -0.44 V

respectively. Calculate the G 0 value for the reaction. Fe  2Fe3  3Fe 2  .
93. Calculate the cell potential of –

Fe  s  Fe 2   0.001M  H  1M  H 2 1atm  , Pt E 0cell  0.44 V.

94. Calculate the log Kc of the reaction –

 Cl 2  Ni 2   2H 2 O at 298 K if E 0Cell is 0.320 V.

NiO 2  2Cl  4H  

95. The resistance of conductivity cell containing 0.001 M KCl solution at 298 K is 1500
ohm. What is the cell constant if conductivity of 0.001 M KCl solution is 0.146 10 3
ohm–1 cm–1 ? Calculate its molar conductance.
0
96. How would you determine E Mg 2 |M ?

97. The conductivity of 0.001028 M acetic acid is 4.95  10 5 Scm 1 . Calculate the Ka
value if  0m  390.5SCm 2 mole1 .
98. Predict the products on electrolysis of dil H2SO4 taking Pt-electrodes.
99. What happens to the pH value of copper sulfate solution on electrolysis ?
100. Calculate the standard cell potential of Zn-AgNO3 cell.
101. Show that copper has +ve value of electrode potential while zinc has negative.
102. What current strength (amp./ sec) in amp. will be required to liberate 10g of iodine from
KI (Aq).
(Atomic mass of iodine = 127)
(or) Calculate the current strength required to deposit 10 gram of zinc in 2 hours.
103. Three electrolytic cells A, B, C containing solution ZnSO4, AgNO3 and CuSO4
respectively are connected in series. A steady current of 1.5 ampere was passed
through than until 1.45 gram of silver deposited at cathode of cell B. How long the
current flow ? What mass of Cu and Zn were deposited.
104. Resistance of a conductivity cell filled with 0.1M KCl solution is 100 ohm. If the resistance
of the same cell when filled with 0.02M KCl solution is 520 ohm. Calculate the conductivity
and molar conductivity of 0.02M KCl solution. (The conductivity of 0.1 M KCl solution
is 1.29 ohm–1 m–1.
105. Discuss construction SHE and its application.

[ 130 ]
UNIT - IV
106. Half life period of a substance is 20 days. After 30 days what percentage of the substance
will be left ?
107. Identify the factors that affect rate of reaction.
108. What is threshold energy ? How is it related to Ea ?
109. The rate of reaction increases four times when the temperature changes from 300 K to
320 K. Calculate the activation energy assuming that the activation energy is independent
of temperature.
3
110. Show that the time required for th of the reaction to occur is two times that required
4
for half of the reaction.
111. Explain the effect of temperature on the rate constant of a reaction.
112. In a first order reaction, if it takes 15 minutes for 20% of original matter to react. Calculate
the rate constant and the time in which 10% of the original matter remain unreacted.
113. Half-life of a 1st order reaction is independent of initial concentration, Justify.
114. A reaction, i.e. of first order with respect to reactant ‘A’ has a rate constant 6 min–1. If
we start with [A] = 0.5 mol L–1, when would [A] reach the value of 0.05 mol L–1 ?
 4B  C is gas phase occurs in a closed vessel. The
115. A chemical reaction 2A 
concentration of B is found increased by 5  103 mol / L in 10 seconds. Calculate the
rate of disappearance of A.
116. Classify the reactions in respect of rate of reaction.
117. How does catalyst affect the rate of reaction ?
118. Catalysts affect the kinetics (k) but not the equilibrium costant (K).
119. What do you mean by effective collisions?
120. What are instantaneous and average rate of a reaction ?
121. The following data were obtained during the first order thermal decomposition of N2O5(g)
at constant volume :
2N 2O5  g  
 2N 2O 4  g   O 2  g 
No of observation Time/s Total pressure / (atm)
1 0 0.5
2 100 0.512
Calculate the rate constant.
122. A first order is 20% complete in 10 minutes. Calculate the specific rate constant of the
reaction & the time taken for completion of 75% of it.
123. A first order reaction takes 69.3 minutes for 50% completion. How much time will be
needed for 80% completion ?
124. Starting with different initial amounts of acetone, the half life periods for the decomposition
of acetone at 875 K were found to be as follows :
a (mm in Hg) 98 192 230 296
t1 (sec) 86 84 85 86
2

What is the order of reaction ? Give reason.

[ 131 ]
125. Draw the following plots for zero order reaction.
(a) Plots of concentration vs time.
(b) Plot of rate vs concentration
(c) Plots of half-lives vs concentration.
126. Why hydrolysis of ethylacetate with NaOH is of second order while with HCl, it’s of
first order ?
127. The following data were obtained for the reaction,

2A  2B 
 Products.
Expt Concentration Initial rate
mol Litre-1 min–1
[A] [B]
I 0.01 0.01 0.005
II 0.02 0.01 0.020
III 0.02 0.03 0.060
Determine the order of reaction and write rate law equation for the reaction.
128. Distinguish between rate of reaction and specific reaction rate.
129. What is order of reaction ?
130. For first order reaction, show that [R] = [R]0 e–kt.

131. A first order reaction takes 40 minutes for 80% decomposition. Calculate its t 1 2 value.

132. Explain (i) Fuels don’t burn by themselves even in plenty of oxygen of air.
(ii) Large fraction of molecules has energy more than Eth, yet the reaction is
very slow.
133. The rate of decomposition of NH3 on Pt surface is of zero order. What are rate of
production of N2 and H2 if k  2.5  104 M / sec. .
UNIT - V
134. What is the cause of Tyndal effect ?
135. Why are colloidal particles charged ?
136. What is electrophoresis ?
137. Classify solutions on the basis of particle size.
138. What are lyophilic colloids ? Provide its characteristics ?
139. Name the factors that goveren adsorption of gas on solid.
140. What is detergent ? How does it work ?
141. How does colloidal solution differ from true solution ?
142. Why are colligative properties almost negligible in case of colloidal solution ?
143. Delta is formed when river meets sea – give reason.

[ 132 ]
144. Distinguish between homogeneous and heterogeneous catalysts.
145. What is meant by selectivity of a catalyst ?
146. State and explain Hardy - Schulze rule.
147. Colloid is a state of matter. explain.
148. What are catalysts ? Discuss its characteristics.
149. Explain the adsorption theory of heterogeneous catalysis.
150. Adsorption is always exothermic in nature. Explain.
151. Layer of fat on pans can be removed by adding boiling washing soda solution, give
reason.
152. Oozing of blood can be clotted by ferric hydroxide, why ?
153. The sol formed by adding AgNO3 (Aq) to excess of potassium iodide solution is –vely
charged while same produced by the reverse manner has positive charge. – Explain.
154. Why do colloidal solutions differ in colours ?
155. How can you prepare a sol of ferric hydroxide ?
156. What happens H2S (g) is passed through an aqueous solution of SO2 (g).
157. Identify the phase and medium in the following :
(i) smoke (ii) fog (iii) cheese (iv) milk (v) cream (vi) soaplather
158. Why does physisorption decrease with rise in temperature ?
159. What are characteristics of lyophobic sols ?
160. Write down the differences between multimolecular and macromolecular colloids.
161. What are charateristics of associated colloids ?
162. What are enzyme catalyst ? Provide two examples of enzyme catalysts ?
163. Match the following :
Sec A (process) Sec. B (catalyst)
i) Haber’s process (a) V2 O5 (s)
ii) Ostwald process (b) CuCl2 at 773 K
iii) Contact process (c) Pt- at 573 K
iv) Deacon’s process to manufacture (d) Finely divided Ni
chlorine.
v) Bosch process to manufacture H2 (e) Finely divided Fe-Mo(promoter)
from water gas
vi) Hydrogenation of oil to ghee (f) ferric oxide – Cr2O3 (promoter)
UNIT - VI
164. What is the difference between :
(i) an ore and a mineral
(ii) an alloy and amalgam
(iii) slag and flux
(iv) roasting and smelting

[ 133 ]
165. Match the following :
metal Its ore
(i) Sodium (a) limonite
(ii) Magnesium (b) Cryolite
(iii) Aluminium (c) Gypsom
(iv) iron (d) Rock salt
(e) Epsom
166. Name of the metal Refining process involved
(i) Mercury (a) Hall and Heroult electrolytic
process
(ii) Nickel (b) van Arkel process
(iii) Titanium (c) Liquation
(iv) Aluminium (d) Mond’s process
167. Name some ores which can be concentrated by magnetic separation method.
168. Discuss leaching during extraction of Aluminium.
169. Aluminothermy does not occur at room temperature. why ?
170. What is the role of depressant in froth floatation process ?
171. Copper can be extracted by hydrometallurgy but not zinc. Explain.
172. Why is extraction of copper from its sulfide ore difficult than that from its oxide
through reduction ?
173. Name the elements commonly present in anode mud during electrorefining of copper.
Why are they so present ?
174. Write down the reactions taking place in different zones of blast furnace.
175. What is the role of cryolite in the metallurgy of ‘Al’?
176. Discuss the refining of Ge / Ga.
177. How does Nickel get purified ?
178. How is leaching carried out in case of low grade copper ores ?
179. (a) Why do metals like Ag, Hg, Zn & Pb mostly occur as sulfide rather than oxide ?
(b) Meta sufides occur mainly in rocks but metal halides mostly is lakes and seas.
180. What happens to the ore during (i) calcination (ii) roasting ?
181. What is the function of lime stone during extraction of iron ?
UNIT - VII
Explain:
182. BiCl3 exists but not BiCl5
183. P can show covalency of five but nitrogen can’t.
184. Pt dissolves in aquaregia
185. Nitrogen is a gas but ‘P’ is solid.
186. Nitrogen is diatomic while ‘P’ is polyatomic.
187. Nitrogen differs from other elements of the group.

[ 134 ]
188. Bond angle of Pl3 > PBr3 > PCl3
189. Bond angle of hydrides follows in the order NH3 > PH3 > AsH3 > SbH3 > B iH3
190. Basic character of NH3> PH3 > AsH3
191. Boiling point of hydrids of group 15 follows in the order NH3 > BiH3 > SbH3 > AsH3
> PH3
192. Manufacture of NH3 by Haber’s process follow Lechatelier’s Principle.
193. With pure HNO3 (cone.) iron becomes passive.
194. All N-O bonds in NO–3 are identical.
195. H2SO4, CaCl2, P2O5 fail to dry NH3
196. Tailing of mercury takes place with Ozone.
197. Conc. Sulfuric acid is a viscous liquid.
198. NaCl with conc. H2SO4 gives hydrogen chloride gas, but NaBr and Nal fails to give
HBr and HI.
199. Halides are colourless but halogens are coloured.
200. HF is a liquid but other hydrogenhalides are gases.
201. The reducing nature of HX, increases from HF to HI, so also acidic nature.
202. Orthophosporic acid in tribasic while phosphorous acid is dibasic.
203. HNO3 acts as oxidant but HNO2 both as oxidant and reductant.
204. Ammonium nitrite never gives sublimate on dry test tube heating.
205. PF3 does not get hydrolysed.
206. NF3 is less polar than NH3.
207. SO2 turns lime water milky and on excess milkiness disappears.
208. O2 in a gas but sulfur is a solid.
209. Oxygen acts as reducing agent when acts with fluorine.
210. Oxygen differs form other elements of the group.
211. H2O is a liquid but H2S is a gas.
212. H2O2 decolorizes KMnO4 but not Ozone.
213. Oxides of nitrogen responsible of Ozone layer depletion.
214. F2 in a stronger oxidizing agent than Cl2
215. Bleaching by ‘Cl2’ is permanent while by SO2 in temporary.
216. Interhalogens are more reactive than halogen itself.
217. BrF3 is slightly bent T-shape.
218. Noble gases have very low b.p. and m.p.
219. Group-18 elements are called areogens to noble gases.
220. Water is not added to cone. H2SO4 for.dilution but reverse may be followed.
221. SO3(g) acts as oxidizing agent but SO2 acts as both oxidant and reductant.
222. Formatioin of O2 PtF6 give idea of formation of xenon compounds.
223. (a) Anhydrous HCl(g) in bad conductor but aq. HCl is a good conductor of electricity.
(b) Iodine is more solubie is Kl solution, than in water.

[ 135 ]
224. Fluorine differs from other halogens of group 17.
UNIT - VIII
225. A transition metal exhibits highest oxidation state in oxides and fluorides. Explain why.
226. Write some characteristics of transition elements.
227. The chemistry of the actionoid elements is not so smooth as that of the lanthanoids.
Justify this statement by giving some examples from the oxidation state of these elements.
228. Explain why transition elements generally form coloured compounds ?
229. Transition metals and their compounds are generally found to be good catalysts.
230. Complete the following chemical equations :
(i) Cr2 O 7 2   Fe 2  H  


(ii) 2CrO 4 2   2H  


(iii) MnO 4  H   Fe2  


231. Of the d4 species, Cr2+ is strongly reducing while Mn(III) is strongly oxidising. Explain.
232. Explain : i) transition elements form complexes.
ii) Most of the transition metal ions are attracted into magnetic field.
233. Scandium forms no coloured ions yet is regarded as a transition metal. Why ?
234. Why oxoanion of metal exhibit highest oxidation state ?
235. Zinc is not regarded as a transition metal. Is it so ?
236. Account for the following :
(i) The transition elements exhibit high enthalpy of atomisation.
(ii) Cu(I) is not known in aqueous solution.
237. Silver atom has completely filled d-orbitals (4d10) in ground state. How can you say that
it’s a transition element ?

238. E 0Cu 2 Cu is +positive. Account for it.

239. Calculate the spin only magnetic moment, meff C 20  , Fe3+.

240. Copper exhibits as C2u  aq  in solution. Why ?

241. Mn exhibits highest O.S. of +7.
242. What is meant by disproportion ? Examplify with Cr(V) and Mn(VI) in aqueous solution.
243. Lowest oxide of transition metal is basic while higher one is acidic. Is it si ?
244. Name the elements of 3d–transition series with their electronic configuration. Show
their stability in different O.S.
245. Why CuSO4 is paramagnetic (Coloured) while ZnSO4 is diamagnetic (colourless).

UNIT - IX

246. What are complex compounds ? Explain the terms central metal ion, complexion, ligands
co-ordination number.
247. Write the postulates of Werner’s co-ordination co-ordination theory.
3 3
248. Describe the bonding is  Fe  H 2 O  2  and  Fe  CN  6  in terms of VBT..

[ 136 ]
249. Discuss the structure of following complexes on the basis of CFT.
3 4
(i)  Co  H 2 O 6  (ii)  Fe  CN  6 
250. The formula Co(NH3)Cl CO3 could represent a comlple that gives curdy white precipitate
with AgNO3(aq). Write the structureal formula and name it. Is it an electrolyte ?
251. A comlex with composition Cr(NH3)4 Cl2 Br provides pale yellow precipitate with
AgNO3(aq) which dissolve in conc. NH3 forming another complex. Name both the
complexes. Find out hybridisation Cr in its complex and  eff value.

252. Show that  Ni  CO 4  dimagnetic with respect to VBT and CFT. Is it tetrahedral ?
2 2
253.  Ni  CO  4  and  NiCl4  differ in their shape and magnetic property. Justify..
4 3
254. Show that  Fe  CN  6  and  Fe  H 2 O  6  are of different colours is aqueous
solutions. Name there complex ions.
2
255. A solution of  Ni  CN  4  is colourless but  Ni  H 2 O  6  2+ is green. Give reason.

256. What is CFSE ? How does the magnitude of 0 decide the actual configuration of d-
orbitals ?
257. What is spectrochemical series ? Explain high spin and low spin complexes with respect
to this.
258. What will be the correct order for the wavelenths of absorption in visible region for
following :
4 2 2
 Ni  NO 2 6  ,  Ni  NH3 6  ,  Ni  H 2 O 6  .
259. Write the formula of the following :
(a) Tetramine diaqua cobalt (III) sulfate.
(b) Tris (ethane-1, 2-diammine) chromium (III) phosphate
(c) Potassium hexacyanidoplatinate (IV)
(d) Sodium trioxalatoferrate (III)
UNIT - X
B(a). Account for the following :
1. Dipolemoment of chlorobenzene is lower than that of chlorocyclohexane.
2. Chlorobenzene is less reactive than chlorocyclohexane.
3. Alkylhalide though polar fails dissolve in water.
4. Grignard’s reagent should be prepared under anhydrous condition.
5. HBr with propene forms 2-bromopropane.
6. Propene with HBr in presence of benzoyl peroxide forms 1-bromopropane.
7. HCl and HI fails to undergo peroxide effect.
8. Iiodination of alkane is carried out in presence of oxidants.
9. Alkyl halide with KCN (aq) gives alkyl cyanide.

[ 137 ]
10. Alkyl halide with AgCN gives alkyl isocyanide.
11. –CN and –NO2 groups are ambident nucleophile..
12. Alkyl halide with KNO2 gives alkyl nitrite while with AgNO2 forms
nitrocompound.
13. Arylhalide can’t be produced from phenol like alkyl halide from alcohol.
14. The reactivity of alcohols to give alkyl halide follows in the order 3 0 > 20 > 10
15. Alcohol in presence of acidfied (H2SO4) NaBr gives alkyl bromide, but KI fails
to give alkyliodide.
16. 20 and 30 alcohol are are normally not used to prepare haloalkane.
17. Alcohol with KI in presence of phosphoric acid (95%) gives alkyl iodide.
18. Cyanide is an ambident nucleophile.
19. Finkelstein reaction takes place in presence of dry acetone.
20. 1-Bromobutane on isomerisation gives lower boiling compounds.
21. Tertiary alkyl halides proceed through SN–1 but not via SN–2.
22. 2-Bromopropane with sodium ethoxide prefers substitution to elimination.
(Williamson’s synthesis)
23. The ease of hyrolysis of chlorobenzene depends on presence electron with
drawing –NO2 group.
24. (a) Friedel -Crafts reaction takes place in presence AlCl3 (Anhyd.)
(b) RS– is a weaker base and a stronger nucleophile.
25. Chlorobenzene on nitriation gives p-nitro chloro benzene
26. m-Nitrochlorobenzene does not hydrolyse easily.
27. A mixture of HNO3 and H2SO4 acts as nitrating agent.
28. Chlorobenzene undergoes Friedel-Craft’s reaction.
29. Neopentylalcohol with HBr gives tertpentyl bromide.
30.  C6 H5 2 CHCl easily gets hydrolysed in comparison to C6H5CH2Cl.
31. Alkyl chloride with KOH (aq) produces alcohol but with alcoholic KOH
produces alkene.
32. Hexachloro benzene and benzene hexachloride are two different compounds.
33. Alkyl halide with ammonia does not yield pure amine.
34. (a) n-Propyl chloride is less reactive than allylchloride towards hydrolysis.
(b) Vinyl chloride is less reactive than ethyl chloride.
35. Lower halide when treated with sodium gives higher alkane.
36. An alkyl halide can be utilised for syntehsis of desired aliphatic compound.
37. CH3Cl is polar but CCl4 is non-polar.
38. Melting points of dichloro benzene follow in the order
p – > o– > m–, p– isomer has less b.p.
39. C–X bond length alkyl and aryl differs.
40. Preparation of phenol from chlorobenzene [ Dow’s process] needs high
temperature and pressure.
41. Iodination of benzene carried out in pressence of oxidant like HNO3, HIO3

[ 138 ]
 42. Toluene on alkyl (methyl) substitution gives different intermediates in organic
synthesis.
43. SN–1 reactions differ from SN–2 reaction.
44. Hydrolysis RX is rapid with catalytic amount of KI.
45. Alkyl chloride is better used as industrial solvent.
46. SOCl2 is prefered to HCl to prepare alkylhalide from alcohol.
47. Iodoform gives precipitate with AgNO3 while chloroform does not
B(b). Word problem :
(i) An organic compound with molecular formula C8H9 Br with KOH (aq) forms
another compound C8H10O, but with alc. KOH gives a monomer, name the
polymer out of it. Provide the functional isomers of C8H10O of which one turns
blue litmus red.
(ii) An alkyl bromide with mol. mass 123 gives two isomers which on treatment with
alc. KOH gives alkene with same number of C. Name the compounds of isomer
on treatment with KCN and then on reduction with alc. Na.
(iii) RMgBr (A) on reaction with water gives a gas (B) which occupies 1.4L/gram at
NTP. What is the product when R–Br react with benzene in persence of anhydrous
AlCl3? Identify the name of the last reaction.
(iv) n-butane is produced by monobromination of ethane by Wurtz reaction calculate
the volume of ethane required at NTP to produce 55 gram of n-butane.
(v) Primary alkyl halide C4H9Br (A) reacts with alc. KOH to give a compounds (B)
which reacts with HBr to give (C), an isomer of (A). When (A) was reacted with
Na gave a compound (D), C8H18 different from the compound formed from n-
butyl bromide on Wurtz reaction. Write the compounds in each steps.
B(c). Name reactions
(i) Balz Schiemann reaction (ii) Gattermann’s reaction
(iii) Sandmeyer reaction (iv) Wurtz reaction
(v) Fitttig reaction (vi) Wurtz Fittig reaction
(vii) Friedel Craft’s reaction (viii) Finkelstein reaction
(ix) Hunsdiecker reaction (x) Swarts reaction
(xi) Frankland reaction (xii) Corey-House reaction
(xiv) Hofmann ammonolysis reaction.
B(d). What happens when
(i) HBr adds to propene in absence and presence of organic peroxide ?
(ii) Ethyl alcohol is treated with PCl3 or PCl5 ?
(iii) Ethylalcohol is heated with I2 in presence of red phosphorus
(iv) Alkyl halide undergoes reduction ?
(v) Ethyl chloride is treated with silver salt of acetic acid ?
(vi) Ethyl bromide is treated with dry silver oxide ?
(vii) Ethyl iodide is treated with aqueous silver oxide ?
(viii) Ethyl iodide is treated with KCN / Ag CN ?
(ix) Ethyl bromide is treated with KNO2 / AgNO2 ?

[ 139 ]
 (x) Ethyl alcohol reacts with iodine in presence of caustic alkali ?
(xi) Chlorobenzene is nitrated ?
(xii) Chloribenzene is ammoniated ?
(xiii) Chlorobenzene is sulphonated ?
(xiv) Chlorobenzene is methylated and then oxidised ?
(xv) Benzene is treated with chlorine in presence of U.V. light.
B(e). Conversions / How can you prepare :
COOH

(i) from

(ii) But-1-yne from ethanol

(iii) 1-Nitropropane from propene
(iv) Benzylalcohol from benzene
(v) But-2-ene from But-1-ene
(vi) Biphenyl from benzene
(vii) 2-Bromopropane from 1-Bromo propane
(viii) 4-bromonitrobenzene from benzene
(ix) 2-phenylethanoic acid from benzylalcohol
(x) Propenenitrile from ethanol
(xi) Propanoic acid from ethanol
(xii) Propanamine from ethyl chloride.
(xiii) 1-Iodobutane from but-1-ene
(xiv) Chlorobenzene from nitrobenzene
(xv) p-nitrophenol from chloro benzene
(xvi) Isobutyl bromide from Tert-butyl bromide.
(xvii) N-methyl methanamine from methyl bromide
(xviii) Ethanal from methyl bromide
(xix) Benzamide from bromobenzene
(xx) Cumene from chlorobenzene
(xxi) Propan-1-ol from 2-chloropropane
(xxii) Iodoform from isopropylalcohol
(xxiii) But-2-yne from ethylbromide.
UNIT - XI
B(a). Word Problems :
1. An organic compound with molecular mass 46 when heated with alkaline iodine
forms a yellowmass (A) which gives a hightly inflamable gas (B) on treatment with
silver powder. The gas on passing through dil H2SO4 in presence of HgSO4 form
another compound (C) which on reduction regains the original compound. Identify
the compound A to C and provide the reactions involved.

[ 140 ]
 2. An alcohol (A) is prepared from ethene on acidic hydrolysis. It is heated with PI3
to give another compound (B). B with AgNO2 gives C. ‘C’ with nitrous acid (NaNO2
+ HCl) forms another typical compound ‘D’ which gives blood red colour on being
treated with sodium hydroxide. Identify compounds A to D with equation in each
step.
3. A neutral compound (A) on treatment with Lucas reagent produces another
compound (B). ‘B’ with (alcoholic) KOH yields compound (C), that decolorises
bromine water. The compound (C) on reductive ozonolysis gives methanol only.
Identify compounds A, B and C.
4. An organic compound A with molecular formula C6H6O whch turns bule litmu red
but foils to give efferrvescence with sodium bicarbonate solution. The compound is
allowed to react with CO2 is alkaline medium at 400 K and 4 to 7 atom.pressusre
to form a sodium salt which on hydrolysis gives an acid. The acid on esterification
with methyl alcohol forms a compound which is a constituent of iodex.
5. A compound, C4H10O (A) is found to be soluble in sulfuric acid. A fails to react
with metallic sodium or KMnO4 solution. When A is refluxed HI a single alkyl
iodide ‘B’ is formed. Predict the product if ‘B’ undergoes Wurtz reaction. and
inflamable gas (C)
6. An organic compound, (A) = C2H6O, a compound (B). The original compound
with conc. H2SO4 at 413 K gives another compound (D) (C4H10O) which on
hydroiodination at 373 K gives E, E with B also gives the same compound, D
B(b). Account for the following :
1. Butan-1-ol on heating with conc. H2SO4 gives but-2-ene.
2. 3, 3- dimethyl but an-2-ol on elimination gives 2, 3-dimethy but -2-ene.
3. Excess of ethanol on acidic dehydration at 413 K gives ether.
4. 10, 20 and 30 alcohols can be distinguished by Victor Meyer’s test.
5. Methanol and ethanol can be distinguished by iodoform test.
6. Ease of esterfication follows is the order 10 > 20 > 30.
7. Solubility of alcohols decreases on moving down the homologus series.
8. Among the isomeric alcohols the boiling points follow in the order 10 > 20 > 30.
9. Acidic hydration of propene gives propan-2-ol.
10. o-nitrophenol is steam volatile while p-nitrophenol is not.
11. Phenol has higher b.p. than toluene.
12. Phenol is less souble in warter than alcohol.
13. Phenol is acidic while alcohol is neutral.
14. p-nitrophenol is more acidic than o-nitrophenol than m-nitrophenol.
15. Alcohol and phenol can be distinguish by neutral FeCl3.
16. Phenol with Br2 (Aq.) form tribromophenol but in presence of CCl4 / CS2 it gives p-
bromophenol.
17. Phenol with alkaline chloroform gives o-salicyaldehyde.
18. Phenol is a colourless substance but turns pink on exposure.
19. Propanol has higher b.p. than butane.
20. o-nitrophenol is more acidic than o-methoxy phenol.

[ 141 ]
21. Phenol undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction.
22. 3-Methylbutan-2-ol with HBr gives 2-bromo-2-methyl butane.
23. Alcohol can act both acid and base.
24. Hydration of 3-phenyl but-1-ene gives 2-phenyl butan-2-ol.
25. n-butyl alcohol decolorises dil KMnO4 but t-butyl alcohol doesnot.
26. At room temperature t-butyl alcohol gives white turbidity with Lucas reagent.
27. Ethyl alcohol is a liquid but its isomer dimethyl ether is a gas.
28. p-nitrophenol is a stronger acid but p-cresol is a weaker acid.
29. 2, 4-dinitrophenol is soluble in sodium carbonate solution.
30. Phenol fails to react with HCl and PCl3 to form chlorobenzene.
31. Dehydration of alcohol to alkene is carried out is presence of H2SO4 but not with HCl
or HNO3.
32. Phenol is acidic but cyclohexanol is neutral.
33. Phenol is easily attacked by electrophile than chloro benzene.
34. CF3 – CH2OH is more acidic than CH3–CH2OH.
35. Methanol is more polar than phenol.
36. Alcohol is more easily protonated than phenol.
37. Phenol is acidic but fails to react with NaHCO3 (Aq.).
38. Sodium metal can be used to remove moisture from diethylether but not from ethylalcohol.
39. Ethanol is not dried over calcium chloride.
40. Phenol with alkaline CCl4 gives salicylic acid.
B(c). Name reactions :
i. Bouveault-Blanc reduction
ii. Hydroboration-oxidation
iii. Oxymercuration demercuration
iv. Lucas test
v. Dow’s process
vi. Schotten Baumann reaction
vii. reimer–Tiemann reaction
viii. Williamson synthesis.
ix. Zeisel’s method of estimation
x. Kolbe’s reaction
xi. Coupling reaction
xii. Fries rearrangement.
xiii. Libermann’s test
xiv. Gattermann’s reaction (Formylation reaction)
B(d). Answer the following:
1. How can you distinguish alcohols from phenols ?
2. Predict the stronger acid from the following pairs :
i) Phenol and o– cresol
ii) p-Nitrophenol and m-nitrophenol

[ 142 ]
 iii) Phenol and cyclohexanol
3. Provide a distinguishing test for alcohol.
4. How does ether differ from alcohol ?
5. What is pyroligneous acid ?
6. How can you prepare ethyl alcohol from starchy materials ?
7. In zeisel’s method for determination of –OCH3 group, a sample of 2.68 gram of a
compound (A) gave 14.08 gram of AgI. If the molecular mass of A is 134, the number
of –OCH3 grops in the compound (A).
8. How to get acetaldehyde from ethylalcohol ?
9. Discuss the methods of preparation of ethylacetate from ethylalcohol.
10. There are three unlabelled bottles containing methylalcohol, ethylalcohol and dimethylether.
How will identify each of them ?
11. Ethylalcohol (A) react with conc. H2SO4 at different temperatures to give product (B),
(C) and (D).

1700 B
1000 C
A  conc. H 2SO 4 
 C
Excess of A
1400 C D

Name the compounds B,C and D.

12. Mention a sensitive test of alcohols.
13. What happens when diethylether reacts with
(i) dil H2SO4 (ii) conc. H2SO4 (iii) Acetylating reagent (iv) chlorine
14. Write the names of reagents for the preparation of following ether by Willianson’s
synthesis.
(i) Ethoxyethane (ii) ethoxybnzene (iii) Methoxyethane (iv) 1.property propane
15. Write the equation for (1) nitration of anisole (ii) bromination of anisole.
16. Identify the products formed on heating each of the following with HI.
(i) 1-methoxy-2-methyl butane (ii) 2-methyl-2-propoxybutane
(iii) Benzyl phenyl ether (Phenyl phenoxymethane)
(iv) 1-methoxy propane
(v) Tert butyl ethylther
(vi) Ethoxybenzene
(vii) Diphenyl ether
(viii) Benzylethylether
(ix) Benzylmethyl ether
(x) Benzyl tert. butyl ether
17. What happens phenetole is treated with a mixture (1:1) of conc. HNO3 and conc. H2SO4?
18. Why can ethers be cleaved preferentially by hot conc. HI and HBr not by conc. HCl ?
19. How can you prepare picric acid from phenol?
20. Name the reagent (s) used in the following reactions :

[ 143 ]
 i) Oxidation of 10 alcohol to carboxylic acid
ii) Oxidation of 10 alcohol to aldehyde
iii) Bromination of phenol to 3, 4, 6 – tribromophenol
iv) Phenol to p-bromophenol
v) Benzyl alcohol to benzoic acid
vi) Butanone to Butan-2-ol
B(e). Identify the missing compounds / reagent (s) in the following steps of reactions:

PCl5 KCN H 3O Soda  lim e
1. CH 3  CH 2 OH   *   * 
 *  
*
*  O NH 3  Na / alcohol NaNO 2  HCl
2. C2H 5OH   CH 3CHO  *   *   *   *  *

O2 
H3 O
3. *
HC  CH  
CH 2  CH  CH3

Anhy.AlCl3
 * 
1300 C
 *   *+*


Sn / HCl NaNO 2  HCl H O Zinc dust
4. *  * 
 * 
warm
 * 
3

*

CH2OH
(i ) CH3 MgBr KmnO4
5. PCC
  * 
(ii) H3O 
 * 
H
Br2 / KOH
 *   *+*

alkaline Soda lime Br2 / CS2

6. * (A) 
CCl 4
 *(B) 
 * (A)   *(C) + *(D)
NaNH 2 C2 H 5 I H2 
7. CH  CH 1:1
 *   * 
LindLar 's
 * 
B2 H 6 / H 2 O2 / OH
*
Catalyst

SO3Na
NaOH CO2 Soda lime
8. 
fuse
 * 
HCl
 * 
*

CH 3Cl Cl2 / h KCN (al) H 3O 

9. C6 H 6 
Anhy.AlCl3
 * 1:1
 *   * 
*
B(f). Conversions :
(i) CH3 OH to CH3–CH2 OH
(ii) CH3–CH2OH to CH3OH
(iii) Propan-2-ol to ter-butyl alcohol
(iv) propan-1-ol to propan-2-ol
(v) Propene to 2-hydroxy-2-methyl propanc acid
(vi) Benzene to m-nitro benzoic acid.
(vii) Benzene to p-nitrophenol
(viii) p-Nitrophenol to phenol
(ix) CH3–CH2OH to lactic acid
(x) CH3 – CH2OH to acetone
(xi) Prepene to phenol
(xii) benzene to metanitrophenol

[ 144 ]
UNIT - XII
B(a) Account for the following:
1. Aldehydes and ketones have almost same properties.
2. Carboxylic acids have higher boiling point compared to alcohols comparable to mlecular
mass
3. Acetic acid is weaker than formic acid.
4. Chloroacetic is stronger than acetic acid.
5. Nitrobenzoic acid stronger than acetic acid.
6. Benzoic acid stronger than p-Toluic acid.
7. Acetic acid is stronger than ethylalcohol.
8. Carboxylic acid is stronger than phenol.
9. I n acid catalysed reaction and acts as a base.
10. Sodium acetate with soda-lime gives alkane.
11. silver acetate on hunsdiecker reaction gives CH3Br.
12. Formic acid is reducing in nature
13. Formic acid can be distinguished from acetic acid.
14. Carboxylic acid do not give characteristic reaction of >C=O group.
15 –COOH group in benzoic acid is meta directing.

SELF ASSIGNMENT : [Full Marks - 20]

a. Benzaldehyde responds silver mirror test but fails to respond test with Fehling solution.
b. Carbonyl compounds are more polar than alcohol (–OH)
c. Dialkyl cadmium is used Grignard reagent.
d. Hydrazones of aldehdyes and keton/es are not in acidic medium.
(pH maintained).
e. HX addes to C = C . but not to C = O.

f. Pure HCN fails to react with C = O, better addes to in a alkaline reduction.

g. Ketones are less reactive han aldehyde towards AdN.
h. Distinguish between acetaldehyde and acetone.
i. How can you prepare aceticacid from ethene.
j. Prepare crotonaldehyde from ethylalcohol.

B(b) Name Reactions :

1. Rosenmund reduction.
2. Etard reaction.
3. Stephen’s reduction.
4. Gatterman-Koch reaction
5. Friedel Craft’s reaction
6. Aldol condensation
7. Popoff’s rule.
8. Cannizzaro’s reaction

[ 145 ]
9. Clemenson’s reduction
10. Wolff-Kishner reduction
B(c) How can you distinguish between
1. >C = C< and >C=O
2. acetaldehyde and ethylalcohol
3. acetaldehyde and acetone
4. formaldehyde and acetaldehyde
5. acetaldehyde and benzaldehyde
6. formic acid and acitic acid
B(d) Conversions :
1. Acetic acid to malonic acid
2. HCOOH to CH3COOH
3. CH3COOH to HCOOH
4. CH3COOH to glycine
5. Ethanoic acid to propanoic acid
6. Acetylene to benzophenone
7. HCHO to CH3COOH
8. HCHO to CH3CHO
9. CH3CHO to HCHO
10. CH3CHO to acetone
B(e) Complete the missing links :
2
dil H 2SO4
(i) CH  CH  H 2
CH3 MgBr
  A  
H O
Cr2 O7
  B H
 C 
g 3

I2 / NaOH CH 3 I
(ii) CH 3COCH 3  
Ag
 A 

  B 
Sodamide
 C  
excess
  D

H O
(iii) HCN
 CH3 2 CO    A  

  B 
3 H SO

 2 4

Ag2 O PCl5 H2 C 2 H 5 MgBr

(iv) CH 3CHO 

  A     B 
Pd  BaSO 4
  C   H 3O 
 D
 KOH alc
 alc   C  
Br2 KOH dilH2 H 2SO4
(v) CH3CH 2  CH 2 Br   A   B  Hg 2
D
LiAlH 4 Conc.H 2SO 4 HI Na / dryether
(vi) CH 3COOH   A 
1400 C
B 

 C  D

UNIT - XIII
B(a) Answer the following :
1. Write carbylamine reaction.
2. Write Hofmann bromamide reaction.
3. Illustrate the Sandmeyer reaction with example.
4. What happens when
(i) Nitroethane is treated with LiAIH4 ?
(ii) Diazonium chloride reacts with phenol in basic medium ?
5. What is vapour phase nitration ?

[ 146 ]
6. Aromatic amines are weaker bases than aliphatic amines. Why ?
7. How will you remove – NH2, – OH and – COOH group from benzene ring ? Give
Example.
8. Complete the following reaction.
Heat
C6H5NH2 + H2SO4  
9. Give one chemical test to distinguish between methyl amine and dimethyl amine.
10. (a) Predict the order of basicity of the following compounds in gaseous phase.

 CH3 3 N,  CH3 2 NH, CH3 NH 2 , NH3

(b) Why CH3NH2 is less basic than ethyl amine in gaseous phase ?
11. What happens when alkyl isocyanate is treated with KOH (aq) ?
12. How will you distinguish between (CH3)2NH and (CH3)3N ?
13. Ethyl amine is soluble in water where as aniline is not. Give reason.
14. Give a chemical test to distinguish between ethyl amine and aniline.
15. Methyl amine with aq. FeCl3 gives reddish brown precipitated. Why ?
16. How will you distinguish 10 and 20 amine by Liebermann’s nitroso amine reaction ?
17. How will you convert aniline to phenol ?
B(b). Write the missing compounds (A, B, C, D)

NaCN OH KOH  Br2
(i) CH 3  CH 2 I   A 
partialhydrolysis
 B  C

CuCN H3 O NH 3
(ii) C6 H 5 N 2 Cl   A   B 

C
KCN LiAlH 4 HNO2
(iii) CH 3CH 2Br   A   B 
00 C
C

Fe / HCl NaNO 2  HCl H3 O
(iv) C6 H 5 NO 2   A 
00 C
 B 

C
Sn / HCl HNO 2 C6 H 5 OH
(v) C 6 H 5 NO 2  
A  
273K
 B  C

B(c). Accomplish the following conversions

(i) Ethanol to methanamine
(ii) hexanenitrile to pentan-1-amine
(iii) ethanamine to methanamine
(iv) methanamine to ethanamine
(v) nitromethane to dimethyl amine
(vi) propanoic acid to ethanoic acid
(vii) Nitrobenzene to benzoic acid
(viii) Benzene to m-bromophenol
B(d). Name reactions :
(i) Carbylamine reaction
(ii) Diazotisation
[ 147 ]
 (iii) Hofmann’s bromamide reaction
(iv) Coupling reaction
(v) Ammonolysis
(vi) Acetylation
(vii) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis
UNIT - XV
1. How is bakelite made and what is its major use ? Why it is called thermosetting polymer?
2. How are polymers classified on the basis of forces operating between their molecules ?
3. Distinguish between chain growth polymerisation and step growth polymerisation.’;”??
4. Distinguish between homopolymer and copolymer.
5. Differentiate between addition polymerization and condensation polymerization.
6. How is dacron prepared ?
7. What are natural and synthetic polymers ? Give two examples of each.
8. What are homopolymers and co-polymers? Give example.
9. Will you prefered to polymerise acrylonitrile under anionic or cationic condition? Explain.
10. What are elastomers ? Write the equation referring preparation of Buna-S.
UNIT - XVI
1. Name the action of (i) Aspirin (ii) Pencillin (iii) Phenacetin (iv) Morphin (v) Analgin (vi)
Luminal (vii) Seconal (viii) Streptomycin on human body.
2. How synthetic detergents are better than soap ?
3. Explain the cleansing action of soaps.
4. Both antacids and anti-allergic drugs are antihistamines but they cannot replace each
other. Explain why ?
5. Why are detergents non-biodegradable while soaps are biodegradable ?
6. Match the following :
A B
(a) Ofloxacin (i) Antiseptic
(b) furacine (ii) Bactericidal
(c) Chlorine (iii) Tranquilizer
(d) Veronal (iv) Disinfectant
(e) Sodium lauryl sulfate (v) Laundry soap
(f) Sodium rosinate (vi) detergent
7. What are side effect of drugs ?
8. Explain the following with examples : Analgesics, Antipyretic.
9. What is the structure of chloramphenicol ? What is its use for curing diseases ?
10. What are soaps and detergents ? How do they differ ?
11. How do antiseptic differ from disinfectants ? How does an antibiotic differ from these
two ?
12. What is meant by the term ‘broad spectrum antibiotic’? Explain.
13. Indicate the difference between bathing soap and washing soap.
14. What are side effects of aspirin ?


[ 148 ]
 GROUP - B
ANSWERS
(Short Answer type (2/3) mark each :
Answer the following :
Unit - I
1. This means that crystalline solids have different physical properties such as electrical
resistance or refractive index in different directions. This is because of different arrange-
ment of particles in three dimensions.
2. Radius ratio : It is the ratio of radius of cation to that of anion in ionic solids.
r
This ratio is fixed for a given co-ordination number. Radius ratio = r . The radius ratio


gives a clue about the structure of ionic crystal. Let us keep cation size fixed arrange
different anions around it. If anion of bigger size it can be surrounded by six anion
r
(C.N. = 6), but if of smaller anion it can be touched with 8 anions i.e. r increases


increasing the radius ratio. It has been obseved that –

r
r C.N. Structure Example
0.155 - 0.225 3 Trigonal planer B2O 3
0.225 – 0.414 4 tetrahedral ZnS, SiO 44 
0.414 - 0.732 6 Octahedral NaCl
0.732 - 1.0 8 Cubic CsCl
3. Due to heating during the day and cooling at night (i.e., annealing) over a number of
years, glass acquires some crystalline character and hence looks milky.
4. For face centred unit cell, radius of atom
a
r
2 2

or a  2 2 .r, r  0.144 nm
a  2  1.414  0.144  0.407 nm .
5. Frenkel defect is not found in pure alkali metal halides because the ions cannot get into
the interstitial sites due to their larger size.
6. When ZnO is heated it loses oxygen as :
1
Heat
ZnO   Zn 2   O 2  2e 
2
The Zn2+ ions are entrapped in the interstitial sites and electrons are entrapped in the
neighbouring interstitial sites to maintain electrical neutrality. This results in metal excess
defect. Due to the presence of electrons in the interstital void the colour is yellow.
7. In metal excess defects, such as lithium excess in LiCl, there are electrons trapped at the
anion vacancies, called F-centres. These impart colour to the crystal of LiCl. The colour
arises by the excitation of these electrons when they absorb energy from the visible light
falling on the crystal. Thus, presence of excess Li makes LiCl pink.

[ 149 ]
8. Consequences of Schottky and Frankel defects. The important consequences of Schottky
and Frankel defects in crystals are given below :
(i) Because of these defects, the electrical conductivity of the crystals increases. When
an electric field is applied, a nearby ion moves from its lattice site to occupy a
hole. This creates a new hole and another nearby ion moves into it and so on. This
process goes on and a hole moves from one end to the other end. Thus, it conducts
electricity.
(ii) Due to the presence of holes in the crystal, its density decreases.
(iii) The presence of holes also decreases the lattice energy of the crystal. Consequently,
the crystal becomes less stable.
9. CdCl2 on adding to AgCl introduces impurity defect. The addition of one Cd2+ ion will
replace two Ag+ ions to maintain electrical neutrality. One of the positions of Ag+ will be
occupied by Cd2+ ion and the other will be left as a hole. Thus, a hole is created similar
to Schottky defect.
10. The crystalline and amorphous solids differ from one another in the following respects :
Crystalline solids Amorphous solids
(i) In crystalline solids, the constituent (i) The constituents are not arranged in any
particles are arranged in a definite regular order.
regular order which extends throughout
the crystal.
(ii) They have sharp melting points. (ii) They do not have sharp melting points.
(iii) Crystalline substances are anisotropic. (iii) They are isotropic.
(iv) They undergo cleavage when cut with a (iv) They undergo irregular breakage when
knife. cut with a knife.

11. The important differences between Schottky and Frenkel defects are given below :
Schottky defect Frenkel defect
(i) It is produced because of missing (i) It is produced when some atoms or ions
atoms or ions from their normal sites. leave their normal sites and occupy
interstitial sites.
(ii) The presence of Schottky defect (ii) It does not affect the density of the
lowers the density of the crystal. crystal.
(iii) It is generally exhibited by ionic solids (iii) It is generally exhibited by ionic solids
having high coordination number and in having low coordination number and in
which cations and anions are of equal which anions are larger in size than cation
size. e.g., ZnS, AgCl.

3
12. Volume of unit cell =  a pm   a 3  10 30 cm 3  1pm  1010 cm
mass of unit cell
density of unit cell (d) = volume of unit cell

Mass of the unit cell = (No of atoms / unit cell)  mas of each atom
atomic mass, M
Mass of an atom, m  NA

[ 150 ]
 Molarr mass = M
Z.m Z.M
d  density   3

a N A .a 3

d.N A .a 3
Now, M 
Z
Z = 1 for cubic, = 2 for bcc and 4 for fcc lattices.
13. Unit cell : It is the smallest portion of a crystal lattice which, when repeated in different
directions, generate the entire lattice.
Characteristics :
i) its dimensions along the three edges, a, b & c.
The edges may or may not be mutually perpendicular.
ii) angles between the edges  (between b & c)
 - between a and c and  between a & b :
A unit cell is divided into two broad categories
(i) Primitive unit cell : Constituent particles are present only at the corner positions of
unit cell.
(ii) Centred unit cell : one / more constituent particles are present at positions other
than corners in addition to those at corners.
The centred unit cells are of three types :
(i) Body - centred unit cells : Along with corned one constituent particle at centre of
the body of the unit cell (equi distance from all faces)
(ii) Face centred unit cells - Here a unit cell contains one constituent particle present
at centre of each face besides the ones at its corners.
(iii) End - centred unit cells : Here one constituent particle is present at the centre of
any two opposite faces besides the ones present at the corners.
There are seven primitive unit cells : cubic, Tetragonal, orthoshomic, hexagonal,
rhombohedral (Trigonal) monochlic and trichlinic. Considering the centred unit
cells there are total number of 14 types of Bravais Lattices.
1
14. Since Y form CCP, therefore Y  8   1 (No of atoms)
8
1 1
X occupies of tetrahedral void X  2   2 3
3 3
No. of tetrahedral void = 2  1  2

Ratio of X and Y in the occupied = X 2 3 : Y1 for nul of the compound = X 2 Y3

15. Volume of unit cell = a3

99 gram mol1
4
density = mass of the unit cell  6.02  1023 mol1
Volume a3

[ 151 ]
 4  99 gram
Volume of the unit cell = 6.023  10 23  3.4 gram cm 3

= 19.34  1023 cm3

Z M d  a 3  NA
16. d , z
a3  NA M
3
10 g cm 3   3  108  cm 3  6.023  1023 mol 1
=
81 g / mol

27  6.023
= 2
81
 It has a bcc structure.
17. For face centred unit cell, radius of atom,
a
r ,  a  2 2 r
2 2
= 2  1.414  0.144 nm
= 0.407 nm
18. Frenkel defect is an interstitial defect. Because of larger size their accomodation in inter-
stices becomes difficult.
19. It is a metal excess defect where Li is excess in LiCl. There are e trapped at the anion
vacancies, called F-centres. The transition of these e (s) on absorbing energy from the
visible spectrum, emit pink colour.
Li  Cl  
at the
surface
 Li  Cl   e 
e occupies the site of Cl– in the lattice as a result the crystal is neutral but contain excess
of Li. Thus, it’s a non-stochiometric defect.
20. Refer. answer in Group -C
21. (i) It is a stoichiometric (vacancy ) defect.
(ii) Schottky defect
(iii) KCl, CsCl
(iv) Density of defective crystal decreases.
22. When a solid is heated, some atoms or ions may leave the crystal lattice and vacancies
are created resulting vacancy defects in the crystal. since number of atoms / ions per unit
volume decreases, the vacancy defects lead to decrease in the density.
23. Metal excess defect due to anionic vacancies.
When crystals of NaCl is heated is a vapour of sodium, the sodium atoms are deposited
on the crystal surface. The Cl– ions diffuse to the surface and combine with Na forming
NaCl. This happens due to loss of e from Na forming Na+, the released e diffuse into
the crystal and occupy the anionic sites. These unpair e in the anionic site create F–
centres / colour centres. When such crystal is exposed to white light emits yellow on
absorption in appropriate visible zone. It becomes non-stoichiometric due to excess of
Na (NaxCl). Neutrality is mainted due to presence of e in place Cl .
Na  Cl   Na  Cl   e 

[ 152 ]
24. The vacant spaces left among the incompressible lattice points or spheres in crystal
lattice are called as interstitial voids. These are of two types :
i) Tetrahedral voids - Where one spherical particle in the second layer is placed
above three spherical particles of the first layer, the vacant space formed among four
spherical particles in contact with each other is known as tetrahedral void.
Number of tetrahedral void = 2N
N = number of close packed spheres
ii) Octahedral void : When six spherical particles are placed in two layers (three in
each layer alternatively) then the vacant space present in between the six spherical par-
ticles is known as octahedral void. The size of the octahedral void = 0.414 r
The size of tetrahedral void = 0.225 r where r = radius of the sphere / Lattice
points. So size of octahedral void  2  size of tetrahedral void. The number of octa-
hedral void = N = no. of lattice points or spheres.
25. Ionic Crystal Metallic crystal
i) Ionic solid are strongly held by electro- i) Electrostatic force of altraction among
static force of attraction between op- valence electrons and atomic kernels
positely charged ions. Bonds are non- held by non-directional bonds.
directional.
ii) Here the ions are not free to move hence ii) Due to presence of free delocalised e (s)
non-conducting in solid state. they are good conductors in solid state.
iii) Ionic bonds are strong due to strong iii) Here the strength depends on the num-
force of attraction between oppositely ber of valence electrons and size of the
charged ions. atomic kernels.
iv) Ionic crystals are hard but brittle iv) These are hard, malleable and ductile
26. Rock salt type structure.
Features :
i) It has fcc / ccp arrangement in which Cl– ions occupy the corners and face cen-
tres of a cube & while Na+ ions are present at the body centre and edge centre / occu-
pying the octahedral voids.
ii) This structure has 6 : 6 co-ordination.
iii) A unit cell of NaCl consists of four Na+ ions and 4 Cl– ions.
 1  1
8 Cl– are present on the corners and 6 Cl– ions on the faces i.e.  8     6    4
 8  2
–
Cl ions.
12 Na+ ions are present on the edges and one Na+ ions at the body centre per unit cell
 1
=  12    1  4 Na+ ions.
 4
Examples : (a) Alkali metal halide except CsCl, NH4Cl
(b) Oxides and sulfides of alkaline earth metals (except BeS)
(c) halides of silver (except Ag I)
27. M = mass of atom  6.02  1023
400
=  6.02 1023 = 50.18 g / mole
48  1023
for fcc crystal, Z = 4

[ 153 ]
 mass of the uit cell Z  50.18

density = volume of unit cell 6.02  1023  200 3  10 30
 
 200 pm = 200  1012 m
= 41.67 g/cm3 = 200  10 10 cm
Unit - II
Mol mass
28. Equivalent mass of oxidant / reductant = change in O.N

12
Cr2 O 72   14 H   6e 
 6
2Cr 3  7 H 2O
Mol mass
Equivalent mass of K2Cr2O7 =
6
i.e. 1 mole = 6 gram equivalent.
[ or ]
 K 2SO 4  Cr2  SO 4 3  4H 2O  3  O 
K 2Cr2O 7  4H 2SO 4 
1 Mole 3 16
1 mole of K 2 Cr2 O 7  48 parts of Oxygen
1
By definition 8 part of oxygen  mole of K2Cr2O7.
6
29. Vapour pressure is the pressure exerted by the vapours on the surface of its liquid
(state) when both vapour & liquid are in a state of equilibrium at a given temperature.
 Vapour..
Liquid 
30. (i) Nature of the liquid : Less is the inter molecular force of attraction greater is the
extent of escaping from the surface i.e. more vapourisation & hence more vapour
pressure. e.g. V.P. (ether) > V.p. (water)
(ii) Temperature. Temperature weakens the force of attraction i.e., higher is
temperature greater is the vapourisation and vapour pressure.
V.P.  T
31. Solution of known strength is called standard solution,it hleps to standardise other.
e.g. potassium permangante (aq) is standardised by oxilic acid of known strength
i.e. standard oxalic-acid solution. Such solution of which the strrength (molarity / normality)
remains constant i.e. it forms a stable solution never decomposes nor loses / gains water
on exposure-nor sticks to weighing bottle. Here oxalic acid is called primery standard
and potassium paramangnet is called secondary stanard solution.
32. Stronger is the inter molecular force of attraction less is the vapour pressure. Alcohol
molecules are polar and held by stronger dipole-dipole force called H-bond while the
ether molecules are less polar & held by weaker force (London dispersion force). Higher
is the v.p. less is the boiling point. That is why ether has lower b.p. than alcohol.
H-O H-O H-O
R R R
(H- bonded alcohols, less extent of vapourisation less is the v.p., higher is the b.p)

[ 154 ]
33. At higher external pressure the extent of vaporisation (surface phenomenon) reduces
reducing the v.p. much less than the atmospheric pressure. The boiling point increases as
boiling point is the temperature at which v.p. of the liquid equals to atmospheric pressusre.
Less is the v.p. higher is boiling point i.e. why b.p. increases in the pressure cooker
reducing the cooking time.
However, at high attitude, pressure is less on the surface of liquid increasing the extent
of vapourisation and hence the v.p. Higher the vapour pressure, less is the boiling point.
This is reason why it’s difficult to cook on the hill top e.g. Rice, potatoo etc never boil as
the boiling point of water is reduced (Less than 1000C)
34. (i) Nature of solute : On the principle of like dissolves like ionic compounds are
soluble is polar solvents e.g NaCl in water and covalent solid dissolves in non-
polar solvent. e.g. Iodine in CCl4.
(ii) Temperature : For the solute where heat of solution  soln H  is endothermic, the
solubility increases with rise of temperature e.g. sodium chloride, sugar solubility
increases with rise of temperature.
35. Tf (Depresion in freezing point) = Kf m
Kf = molant depression constant
m = molality of solution.
W2 1000
Tf  K f .  W2 = weight of solute
M 2 W1

K f W2
M2   1000 W1 = weight of solvent
Tf W1
M2 = Mol.mass of solute.
36. Due to tetrahedral symmetry CCl4 is non-polar. Hence it’s insoluble in water which is
polar in natue due to its bent structure. Thus, these two liquids are imiscible.
37. A liquid starts boiling when its vapour pressure (vp) becomes equal to atmospheric
pressure. v.p increases with rise of temperatur.

1. atm
v.p

b.p
Temperature

38. Vaporisation of solvent takes place from the surface only. In a solution the % of solvent
particle on the surface decreases due to presence of non-volatile solute particles and
hence escaping tendency of solvent particles or extent of vaporisation decreases. Thus
V.P. (solution) < v.p (pure solvent).
39. 10 (wt%) urea  weight of urea = 10 gram, mol. mass of urea = 60
weight of water = 90 gram

[ 155 ]
 W2 1000 10 100
Molality = M  W  60  90  1.85 m.
2 1

40. Let us take a solution of two volatile liquids (1 & 2) As per Raoult’s law -
P1  X1 P10 P1 = partial pressure of component –1 in vapour phase.
X1 = mole fraction of component 1 in solution
P2  X 2 P20 P10 = v.p. of component-1 (Pure).

Total pressure, P = p1 + p2 = X1 P10  X 2 P20

= 1  X 2  P10  X 2 P20

= P10  X 2 P10  X 2 P10

P  P10  X 2  P20  P10 

This is an equation to a straight line where P is linearly related to X2, the mole fraction of
solute with slope  P20  P10  , the difference of vapour pressure of two miscible, liquids
(1 and 2) in pure forms.
41. P1  P10 .X1 1 = CHCl3 2 = CH2Cl2

P2 = P20 .X 2

25.5 /119.5 0.213 0.213

X1     0.312
25.5 40 0.213  0.47 0.683

119.5 85
X2 = 1 – 0.312 = 0.688

P =  200  0.312    415  0.688 

= 62.4 + 285.52
= 347.92 mm (total pressure)
415  0.688 285.52
42. pCH 2Cl2 / Ptotal  y1 =   0.82
347.92 347.92

PCHCl3 0.312  200 62.4

Molefraction of CHCl3 =    0.18
Ptotal 347.9 347.1
43. Greater is the mole fraction of a component in vapour phase greater is the volatility.
X CH 2Cl2  X CHCl3 (in vapour phase)
So CH2Cl2 is more volatile than CHCl3.
44. Acetone and chloroform, due to greater inter molecular force of attraction causes a
non-ideal solution and vapour of the solution is less than expected (Negative deviation).
The mole fraction at which it has minimum vapour pressure, it shows maximum b.p.

[ 156 ]
 Such a solution is called maximum boiling azeotrope.
45. TB  K f m

18 1000
= 0.52   0.052, boiling point water at 1.013 bar = 100. 150C
180 100
Boiling point with glucose = 100.2020C.
1 1000
46. Tf  K f .m  0.40 = 5.12  
M2 50

5.12  K.Kg mol1  1000 gram / kg

 M2   256g / mol
0.40(R)  50 g
47. The direction of osmosis (migration of solvent molecules from low concentration to high
concentration being separated by semipermeable membrane) can be reversed if a pressure
larger of than the osmotic pressure is applied to the solution side. Now the pure solvent
flow out of the solution through spm. This reverse migration of solvent from high
concentration to low concentration (fresh solvent) in called reverse osmosis.
48. P0 = 23.8 mm
50
50 gram of urea = mole X2 = Molefraction of solute
60
850 50 / 60 0.83
850 gr of water = mole = 
18 50 850 0.83  47.2

60 18

0.83
=  0.017
48.03
P0  P
 X 2 (Raoult’s law)
P0
23.8  p
  0.017
23.8
 23.8  p  23.8  0.017
P = 23.8 – (23.8  0.017)
= 23.8  0.4046  23.3954 mm of Hg.
= vapour pressure of the solution.
23.8  23.954
Relative lowering of v.p =  0.017
23.8
49.   2.57  103 bar , v = 200 cc = 0.2 litre
T = 300 K R = 0.082 L.atm mol–1 K–1
  CRT
n W RT
=  RT  
V M V

[ 157 ]
 W RT 126g  0.082 L atm mol1 K 1  200 K
M  
 V 2.57 103 atm  0.2 L

1.26  0.082  300

= 3
g mol1
2.57  10  0.2

30.996
=  60303.5g / mol
0.000514

W RT
50.  
M V

1gram  0.082 L  atm.mol1 K 1  310 K

= .(atm)
185000 g mol1  0.450 L

1 0.082  310 25.42

=  atm  0.0003atm = 30.94 Pa
18500  0.45 83250
R = 8.314 m3.Pa, K–1 mol–1
1 atm = 101325 Pa.
51. Application of Henry’s law :
i) In the production of carbonated beverages : To increase the solubility of CO2 in
soft drinks, soda water, beer or champagne, the bottled are sealed under pressure.
On opening the bottle, effervescence of CO2 takes place on reduction of pressure.
ii) In deep sea diving (Scuba diving) the divers breathed compressed air from the
tank. The nitrogen present in it dissolved in blood and other body fluids under
pressure in the deeper sea water. When the diver comes to the surface the dissolved
nitrogen comes out due to reduced pressure causing the disease “bends”
These show the extent of dissolution of gas in liquid increases with rise of pressure.
52. 0.195 m i.e. 0.195 m of H2S dissolved in 1 Kg of water.
1000
moles of H2S = 0.195, moles of water =  55.55
18
1000
moels of water =  55.55
18
0.195 0.195
mole fraction of H2S =   0.0035
55.55  0.195 55.745
Pressure = 1. bar
P  KH X2 X2 = mole fraction of solute (H2S)
1
KH  bar = 285.7 bar
0.0035
53. According to Raoult’s law, relative lowering of vapour pressure is equal to mole fraction
of solute.
P0  Ps n2 n1  moles of solvent
 X2 
P0 n1  n 2 n 2  moles of solute

[ 158 ]
 So it depends on quantity of solute particles present in the solution. Hence it’s a colligative
property, not depending on nature of the particles.
54. When ethyl alcohol and cyclohexane are mixed, the solution formed shows positive
deviation from Raoult’s law. In this case V.P. of the solution is more than expected for
the solution behaving to be ideal. The addition of cyclohexane will tend to break some
of the H-bond as a result the intermolecular force of attraction decreases, increasing the
extent of vaporisation of alcohol and the v.p. increases.
PA  PA0 .X A , the solution will show positive deviation from Raoult;s law..
55. (i) Vapour pressure of solution is less than that of pure solvent. Less is the vapour
pressure greater is the depression in freezing point.
(ii) a. For Non-electrolyte- non volatile solute :
Tf  K f m
Kf is the molal depression (Cryoscopic) constant.
Tf  m

As it’s proportional to molality of the solution, it is a colligative property. Tf

changes with no moles of solute per Kg of solvent. More is the solute more is the
depression is freezing point.
b. For solute undergoing dissociation or association in a given solvent.
Tf  i K f m where ‘i’ is the van’t Hoff factor. i > 1 for electrolyte
undergoing dissociation and i < 1 for electrolyte (solute) undergoing association. solute
undergoing dissociation cause greater lowering of freezing point as no. of particles
increases. e.g. saline water freezes at lower temperature. The V.P. also gets reduced.
56. Solutes may be of there types :
(i) non electrolytes (i = 1)
(ii) electrolytes under going dissociation e.g.. NaCl in water . (i > 1)
(iii) electrolytes undergoing association e.g benzoic acid in benzene solvent (i<1)
For particles undergoing dissociation, the particles increases inceasing the colligative
property and decreases the molecular mass as colligative property is reciprocal of
moelcular mass.
e.g. the elevation of b.p. of one molar NaCl (i = 2) is double to that of 1 molar urea (i =
1). So molecular mass of NaCl if measured by elevation of b.p. i.e. ebullioscopy is
found to be halved (i.e. 29.25 instead of 58.5)
In case of association the number of particles decreases and hence molecular
mass increases.
57. Significance KH (Henry’s law constant)
i) Nature of gas : Different gases have different values of KH. Thus KH is a function
of nature gas. Higher the KH value at a particular temperature, lower is the solubility of
the gas in the liquid as p = KH.x, p = partial pressure of the gas in vapour phase.
x = mole fraction of the gas in solution
Exampe. KH (CO2) < KH (N2)
i.e. CO2 is more soluble in water than N2

[ 159 ]
 ii) Temperature : KH value increases with increase of temperature, indicating that
the solubility of gases decreases with rise of temperature.
e.g. KH (O2 at 293) = 34.86 kbar
KH (O2 at 303) = 49.82 kbar
PCO 2
58. Henry’s law: Mole fraction of CO2 = K CO
H  2

1.67  108
8
K H  1.67  10 Pa  atm  1.648  103 atm
101325
2.5 atm
X CO2   1.52  103
1.648  103 atm
500
n H 2 O  moles of water    27.78 mol  500m  500 g 
18
n CO2 n CO2 n CO2
X CO2     n CO 2 in water is neglected
n CO2  n H2O n H2 O 27.78

n CO2 = moles of CO2 = 27.98  1.52  10 3

= 0.0422 mole
Mass CO2 dissolved = 0.0422 mole  44 gram mol1
= 1.857 gram
59. (i) Ideal solution :
(a) A solution which obeys Raoult’s law over the entire range of concentration
p  p X 
1
0
1 1

(b) Here solute solvent intraction = solute - soute interaction = solvent - solvent
intraction.
(c)  soln H  0
(d)  soln V  0
(ii) A zeotrope : The solutions or liquid mixtures which boil at constant temperature and
can distill unchanged in composition are called azeotropes. i.e. composition in solution =
composition in vapour state. In such case the components cannot be separated by
fractional distillation.
These are of two types : (i) minimum boiling azeotrope
(Solution with positive deviation from Raoult’s law) e.g. ethanol at 95%)
(solution with negative deviation, p1  p10 x1 )
e.g. Nitric acid – water. (68%)
(iii) Osmotic pressure : The excess pressure which must be applied to a solution to prevent
the passage of solvent into it through a semipermeable membrane at a given temperature.
Mathematically =  = CRT
n W RT
=RT =
V M V
W = weight of solute in gram
M = Mol. masses g / mol

[ 160 ]
 R = 0.0821  . atm - mol–1 K–1
T in K and V is litre,  is atm.
60. The freezing point of water is 00C. If temperature of the region falls below zero water
turns to solid ice causing road blockage preventing transporation, vehicular movement.
It needs road clearance by cutting and removing the ice blocks. Such difficulties can be
avoided on sprinkling strong electrolytes like salt (NaCl). It reduces the freezing point as
a result the water does not freeze at the reduced surrounding temperature.
61. Match the following :
(a) Solubility of gas (ii) Henry’s law
(b) Liquid - Liquid solution (iii) Raoult’s law
(c) Positive deviation (i) Non-ideal solution
(d) Desalination (v) Reverse osmosis
62. Vapour pressure of pure water at 373 K  PA0   760 mm Hg
Vapour pressure of aq. solution at 373 K (P) = 750 mm Hg
According to Raoult’s law  P  X1 P 0 (Solvent)
p. 750
X1    0.987
p10 760
X2 (solute) = 0.013. (Mole fraction of solute)
n2 n  W M 1000 
X2   2  2  1 
n1  n 2 n1  M 2 W1 1000 

M1
 X2  m
1000
W2 1000
Molality of solution : m  M  W
2 1

18 0.013  1000
0.013  m  m
1000 18
= 0.72 m

Unit - III Electro chemical cell

63. Electrolytic cell i. It is a device where redox reaction
i. It is a device which converts is carried indirectly & the decease
electrical energy to chemical in free energy appears as electrical
energy. Chemical decomposition energy.
on passage of electricity. ii. The redox reaction is spontaneous.
ii. The redox reaction is non-
spontaneous & takes place on iii. Two electrodes are set up in
supply of electrical energy. different vessels with different
iii. Both electrodes are immersed in electrolytes connected through salt
single electrolyte. bridge or porous partition.
iv. Only one electrolyte is taken. iv. Two electrolytes. The salt bridge
also contain another electrolyte.

[ 161 ]
 v. In this cell anode is +ve and v. In electro-chemical cell anode is –
cathode is –ve. ve and cathode is +ve.
vi. The electrons are supplied from vi. Electrons generated in cell move
external battery enter at cathode from anode (–) to cathode (+) in
move through electrolyte and external circuit.
comes out at anode.
64. Cell potential = Electrode potential of cathode –
Electrode potential of anode.
= Sum of the electrode potentials
= Oxidation potential of anode + reduction potential of cathode.
In standard state : E 0Cell  E Cathode
0 0
 E anode .
2 2
Example for Daniell cell, Zn Zn 1M  Cu 1M  Cu

E0Cell  E0Cu 2 Cu  E0An 2 Zn  0.34   0.76   1.10V

65. Electro chemical series is the arrangement of electrodes in order of increasing electrode
(reduction) potential values. A redox reaction is feasible only when the substance
undergoes reduction must have higher reduction potential.
1 0
 Cu  NO3 2  2 A g
Cu  2 Ag NO3 

E0Ag  Ag  E 0Cu 2 Cu
 0.80V 0.34 V
In the above equation / reaction Ag undergoes reduction, Ag+ + e  Ag. hence
feasible
66. Function of salt bridge :
(i) Salt bridge completes the innner cell circuit by migration of ions as it connects two
electrolytes.
(ii) A salt bridge prevents transference of electrolyte from one half cell to other. The
agar-agar gel does not allow transfer of electrolyte from one electrode vessel to
another.
(iii) Salt bridge maintains electrical neutrality of the electrolytes in the two half cells.
(iv) It eliminates liquid junction potential (Ej)

67.

[ 162 ]
 In this case copper sulfate solution is taken in a copper vessel (cathode). ZnSO4 solution
is taken inside porous pot in which zinc rod is dipped (anode). This porous pot is placed
in the copper sulfate solution.
Anode Zn  Zn 2   2e (oxidation)
Cathode Cu 2   2e  Cu (reduction)
68. Let us take a general cell of the types
 cC Aq   dD  Aq 
aA (Aq)  bB Aq  
Considering the free energy change
c d

G  G 0
 RT ln
 C  D 
h
 A  B
= G 0  RT ln Q Q = reaction quotient.
At equilibrium G  0
 0   G 0  RT ln K (K = equilibrium constant)
Thus – G 0  RT ln K
= 2.303 RT log K

 nFE 0  2.303 RT log K

nFE 0
log K 
2.303 RT

2.303 RT log K
E0 
nF

69. (i) E Fe3 Fe  E 0Fe3 Fe 

2.303 RT
log
 Fe
nF  Fe3 

0 2.303 RT
= E Fe3 Fe  log C1   Fe3   C1  Fe  s    1
nF
(ii) Zn  2Ag   C1  
 Zn 2  C2   2Ag

0 2.303RT  Zn 2  
Ecell  E cell  log 2
2F  Ag  

2
2.303RT C 0 2.303RT C
= E 0
 log 2 2 = Ecell  E cell  log 1
cell 2F C2
2F  C1 
70.  m  AlCl3   130 ohm 1 cm 2 mol1

130 Mol mass

eqv.   43.3ohm1cm eqv1 Eq. mass of AlCl3 
3 3

[ 163 ]
71. Strong electrolyte Weak electrolyte
i. It ionises completely (100%) i. It ionises partially (in the order 1–10%)
ii. It consists of ions ii. It consists of ions and undisociated
molecules.
 H   A1   
HA1 
0 c c  H   aq   A   aq 
HA  Aq  
C O O
C 1    C C

iii.  m   m0  b C iii.  0m  n   0m   n   0m 
C = molar concn of the solution. n  = no. of cation, n_ – = no of anion.
 m    m0
iv. HIgher conductivity iv. Less conductivity
(Very good conductor) i.e. weakly conduct electricity.
v. Graphically- v.

c
 value rises rapidly with decrease of
 of strong electrolyte rises linearly with concentration.
decrease of concentration and when
C  0 (infinite dilution)  has a
limiting value i.e.,  0 which is constant
for a given electrolyte at a given
temperature.
72. See text.
73. i) NaCl  fused   Na   Cl 

At anode : Na   e 
 Na

 1
 Cl 2  g 
At anode : Cl 
2
ii) NaCl  Aq 

At cathode :  H   OH 
H 2 O 

1
H   e   H2
2
1
H 2O  e    H 2  OH 
2

1
At anode : Cl  
 Cl2  e 
2
[ 164 ]
  2
iii)  Cu 2Aq
CuSO 4  Aq     SO 4  Aq 

 H   OH 
H 2 O 

At cathode (–) Cu 2  2e  
 Cu  s  , E 0Cu 2 Cu  E 0  1
H H2
2

At anode (+) 4 OH  
 O 2  2H 2 O  4e 
iv) CuSO4 (Aq) taking copper electrode :
At cathode - Cu 2   2e  
 Cu
(deposited)

At anode - Cu  SO 24 
 CuSO 4  2e 
(Copper anode dissolves)
v) Ag NO3 (Aq) taking Ag electrode
At cathode - Ag   e   Ag (Cathode gains weight)
At anode - Ag + NO3 
 AgNO 3  e  (Ag anode loses wt.)
vi) AgNO3 using Pt-electrodes.
At cathode - 4 Ag   4e  4Ag
At anode - 4OH  
 O 2  2H 2 O  4e 
vii)  H   OH 
H 2 O 
At cathode 4 H   4e  
 2H 2
At anode 4OH  
 O 2  2H 2 O  4e
Hydrogen (g) and oxygen (g) in the ratio 2 : 1 by volume.
74. Chemical equivalent is the mass discharged on passage of 1F (=96500C) of
electricity or charge.
e.g. 1F discharges 108 gram Ag from AgNO3 (aq.) It is also called the equivalent
mass of silver.
Electrochemical equivalent (ECE or Z) i.e. the mass discharges on passage of 1
coloumb of eelctricity. Unit of Z = gram / coulomb
e.g. ECE of silver = 0.001119 g/C
Relationship : 1 C discharges Z gram
96500   1F  discharges 96500  Z  E (eqvt. mass)

E1 Z1
So, E = ZF (or) E  Z (or) E  Z
2 2

75. (i) E0Cu 2 Cu  E Fe

0
2
Fe i.e. Copper ions undergo reduction.

CuSO 4  Fe 
 FeSO 4  Cu

[ 165 ]
 2
CuSO 4  Aq  is blue due to  Cu  H 2 O  4  , but on reduction with Fe it
CuSO4(Aq) gets discharged.
(ii) NaCl is a salt of strong acid (HCl) and strong base (NaOH). Its aq. solution
does not undergo hydrolysis & pH = 7 (neutral). On electrolysis [OH] inceases as H+
gets discharged liberating H2(g), hence the solution becomes alkaline  pH  7 

 Nc  Aq   Cl  Aq 
Na Cl  Aq  

1
At cathode. H 2 O  e  
 H 2  OH 
2

1
At anode Cl 
 Cl2  e 
2
2 2 0
76. (i) 2F
H 2 O 2  O   H 2O  O 2

H 2 O 2  O 2  2H   2e 

(ii)  Fe 2O3 1F / mole  ,

2FeO  O  2FeO  H 2 O  Fe 2 O 3  2H   2e 

77. (i)  Cu  NO3  2  2 Ag

Cu  2Ag NO3 

E 0Ag  |Ag  E Cu
0
2
|Cu

Ag+ undergoes reduction forming Ag and Cu oxidises forming Cu(NO3)2 i.e. it goes into
solution. Hole will be formed in copper vessel hence can’t be stored.
(ii) CuSO 4  Zn 
 ZnSO 4  Cu

E 0Cu 2 |Cu  E 0Zn 2 |Zn

 No reaction (Not feasible)

Cu  Zn SO 4 
i.e. ZnSO4 can be stored in a copper vessel.
78. Electrode potential is the tendency of the electrode to lose or gain electron.
Cell potential is the sum of electrode potentials
i.e. oxidation potential of anode + reduction potential of the cathode.

e.g. E Daniell cell  E Zn|Zn 2  E Cu 2 |Cu

79. Electroplating : It is a process by which a metal gets deposited over another (conducting
surface) in presence of a metal salt. The metal to be electroplated is chosen as cathode;
the metal deposits on it on reduction of metal ion of the electrolyte.
Objective i) Resistance to corrosion.
ii) To improve hardness and physical appearance of article
iii) To increase the decorative and commercial value of the article.

[ 166 ]
80. EMF Potential difference
i) EMF is the maxium potential i) P.D. is the difference of potential
difference between the two between any two points in a
electrodes of the cell. When no closed circuit.
current is drawn from the cell.
ii) Its value is measured by volt meter.
ii) It is measured by a potentionster.
iii) It is proportional to the resistance
iii) It is independent of the resistance between two given points.
of the circuit.

81. L et us take the example of Zn-CuSO4 cell.

 
Zn Zn 2  Aq  Cu 2  Aq  Cu
Cell notation.
Saltbridge
Anode (Oxidation) Cathode (reduction)
82. A reference (RE) eectrode is an electrode with stable and known electrode potential
value. It is used as a half cell to calculate the electrode potential of an unknown electrode
using a potentiometer.
Saturated calomel electrode, Hg Hg2Cl2(s), KCl (Satd.) = +0.241 V at 298 K. Standard
hydrogen electrode . SHE Pt, H2(gas -1atm-298K), H+(1M) = 0.0 V
Calomel electrode is preferred as SHE is difficult to prepare Ag, AgCl(s), KCl also can
be used as reference electrode.
(Potentiometer)

R.E. –– Salt bridge –– Unknown electrode

Potentiometer (cell potential) = Electrode potential of RE + Electrode potential of

unknown.
Thus, unknown electrode potential can be known. Two electrodes are arranged to
have positive cell potetial.
electricity 1
83. H 2 O   H2  O2
2
To produce 1 mole. H2 it needs 2 F.
2H   2e  
 H2
Q  I t
2  96500C  2  t  sec 
t  96500 sec
= 26 hours 48 minutes and 20 seconds. = 26.81 hour.
84. Nernst equation :
Nernst equation gave a relationship between reduction potential of an electrode and
concentration ions at a given temperature. If standard potential in known electrode
potential at any concentration and temperature can be calculated.

[ 167 ]
 Let us take a general electrode:
M naq   ne 
 M  S
As per Nernst equation –

0
E Mn  |M  E M 
2.302 RT
log
 M
n
|M
nF  M n  

Taking [M] = 1
2.303 RT
log  M n  
E M n  |M  E 0M n  |M 
nF
–1 –1
Taking R = 8.31 J K mol
T = 298 K
n = no. of e  s  involved
F = 96500 C
2.303 RT 0.0591
Then 
nF n
0.0591
Thus
0
E Mn  |M  E M n
|M
  M n  
n
Applications :
(a) Calculation of cell potential :
e.g. Zn-CuSO4 cell
Zn Zn 2   C1  Cu 2   C 2  Cu

Cell equation : Zn  Cu 2 
 Zn 2  Cu
Applying Nernst equation :

2.303RT  Zn 2  
E  E 0Cell  log  2  
Cell 2F  Cu 

By convention  Zn    Cu   1

2.303RT C
= E 0Cell  log 2
2F C1

E 0Cell  E 0Cu 2 |Cu  E 0Zn 2 |Zn

= 0.34   0.76 
= 1.1 volt.
Substiting the T.value, concentration of two connecting solutions emf of the cell can be
calculated.

At 298 K :

[ 168 ]
 0.0591 C
E cell  1.1  log 2
2 C1
(b) Determination of equilibrium constant :
Zn 2 
KC for the above system =  C2  
 u 

0 2.303RT
E cell  E cell  log K C  0 (at equilibrium)
2F
2.303RT
E0Cell  log K C
2F

nF E 0Cell
log K C 
2.303 RT (in general)
(c) Calculation of concentration and pH of the solution of a half cell :
On application of Nernst equation concention of one electrode vessel is known other
can be calculated considering other data. Knowing [H+], pH can be calculated. Cell
designed to know pH :
Pt, H2(1 atm) H+ (C, unknown) || KCl (Satd), Hg2Cl2(s), Hg.
SCE (saturated calomel electroode)
= 0.2422 volt.
 1
Reduction potential LHE : H  c   e  H2
2
1

 0
2.303 RT  H 2
log 2
2.303 RT
Applyinf Nernst equation, E H 1 H  = pH
2
2 F
 H  F
85. A dry cell is a type of electric battery, commonly used for portable electrical devices.
It is a modification of wet Laclanche cell.
Construction : Anode - zinc container
Cathode. Graphite rod surrounded by MnO2+C. The space between
the electrodes is filled by moist paste of NH4Cl and ZnCl2.
Functioning :  Zn 2   2e 
Anode : Zn 
4 3
Cathode : Mn O 2  NH 4  e   Mn O  OH   NH3
2
Zn 2  4NH 3 
  Zn  NH3  4 
2
Pressure due to evolution of NH3 is subsided due to formation  Zn  NH3  4  complex.
Potential of the cell = 1.5 V
86. Zn 2   2e  
 Zn
2.303RT 1
E Zn 2 |Zn  E 0Zn 2 | Zn  log
2F  Zn 2 

[ 169 ]
 0.0591 1
= 0.76  log 3
2 10
0.0591
= 0.76  3.log .10
2
= 0.76  0.0885
= 0.8485 V
1000
87.   k
C

1000 cm3 / L
= 2.4  102 ohm 1 cm 1 
0.12gm eqvt / L

2.4 102  103

= ohm–1 cm2 gram eqvt–1.
0.12
   200 ohm–1 cm2 gm eqvt–1
1.307
88. 1.307 gram of Ag = gram eqvt.
108
1.307
i.e. gram eqvt. of Cu will be discharged = 0.012 gramqvt.
108
Equivalent mass of CuSO4.5H2O = 124.5
10
10 gram blue vitriol =  0.08 gram eqvt .
124.5
= 0.08 gram eqvt of Cu++
gram eqvt left in 500 ml = 0.08 – 0.012 = 0.068 gram eqvt.
500 ml contains 0.068 gram eqvt.
1 L contains 0.068  2  0.136 gm eqvt / L
= concn of Cu  after electrolysis .

90
89. Current efficiency 90% = 1.7   1.5amp.
100
300  0.16
No. of moles ZnSO4 =  0.048
1000

Mol.mass
ZnSO 4  Zn 2   SO 42  Eq. mass =
2
2+
1 mole of ZnSO4 = 2 gram eqvt. No of moles Zn = 0.048 moles = 0.096 gram
eqvt.
No of Faraday passed = No. of grameqvt discharged
1.5  230
 F  0.00358 F = 0.00358 gram eqvt of Zn2+ gets discharged
96500

[ 170 ]
 No of residual Zn2+ = 0.096 – 0.00358
= 0.09242 gram eqvt
Now 300 ml solution 0.09242 gram eqvt
0.09242
So normality (gram eqv/L) =  1000  0.31
300
i.e. Normlity of ZnSO4 Solution = 0.31 N
= 0.155 M 1M = 2N

 Ni 2   2e 
Ni 
90.
2H   2e    H2

Ni  2H   Ni 2   H 2
E 0cell  0   0.236 
 0.236

2
0.0591  Ni 
E Cell  E 0
Cell  log  2  N 2    1M
2  H  

0.0591 2
0  0.236  log  H  
2
0.0591
= 0.236   2 log  H   pH   log  H  
2
0 = 0.236 – 0.0591 pH
0.0591 pH = 0.236
0.236
pH   3.99
0.0591
100  0.01
91. no. of moles of Cu2+ =  0.001mole
1000
Cu 2   2e  
 Cu
1 mole needs 2F, So electricity needed = 0.002 F
92. 2  Fe3  3e  
 Fe  G 0  3F  0.036  0.108 F J

( As G 0  nFE 0 )
Fe 2  2e  
 Fe, G 0  2F  0.44  0.88 F J

(i) 2Fe3  6e  
 2Fe, 0.216F J

(ii) 3Fe 2  6e  
 3 Fe, 2.64 F J
(iii  3Fe 2  6e   2.64 FJ
3Fe 
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Adding (i) & (iii) Fe + 2Fe3+ 
 2Fe2+

[ 171 ]
 G 0  0.216F  2.64F
= 2.424  96500
= – 233916 J  233.916 kJ

 Fe 2  2e 
Fe 

93. Cell equation : 2H   2e   H2


Fe  2H   Fe2   H 2
Applying Nernst equation –
2
0.0591  Fe 
ECell  E 0
Cell  log  2
2  H  

0.0591
= 0.44  log103
2
0.0591
= 0.44  3
2
= 0.44  0.08865  0.52865V
94. G 0  nFE 0  2.303RT log K C

nF E 0  2.303RT 
log K C    0.059 
2.303RT  F 

n E0
log K C 
0.059

NiO 2  4H   2e  
 Ni 2  2H 2 O
2Cl 
 Cl2  2e n=1

2E 0 2  0.320
Now log K C    10.829
0.059 0.0591
*
95. Cell constant, G = Spcific conductance
Conductance

0.146 10-3 ohm 1 cm 1

= 1 ohm 1
1500
= 1500  0.146  103 cm 1  0.219cm 1

Conductivity  1000
Molar conductance =
Molarity

0.146  103  103

= 3
 0.146 103 ohm–1 cm2 mol–1
10
= 146 ohm–1 cm2 mol–1

[ 172 ]
96. The electrode to be coupled with SHE (or a reference electrode of known emf). The
cell potential is measured by means of potentiometer.
Cell rotation : Mg Mg 2 H  1M  , 1 H 2 1atm  , Pt
2
0 0
Now E Cell  ESHE  E Mg 2 |Mg

E 0Mg 2 Mg  0  E 0Cell

1000 4.95 105 1000

97. m     48.15 ohm3 cm2 mol1
M 0.001028
 m 48.15
   0.1233
 0m 390.5

1 2
C 2 0.001028mol L   0.1233
Ka  
1  1  0.1233
= 1.78  105 mol L1
98. Products on electrolysis of dil H2SO4 taking Pt - electrodes.
(i) Electrolysis of very dil. H2SO4 liberated H2(g) at cathode and O2(g) at anode on
discharge of H+(Aq) and OH–(Aq) respectively.
(ii) Electrolysis dil H 2SO 4  50%  , strong

 2H   SO 42 
H 2SO 4 

At cathode 2H   2e 
 H2  s 

At anode SO 24  
 S2 O82  2e 

S2 O82   2H  
 H 2S2 O 8 (Per disulfuric acid)
Which on hydrolysis gives hydrogen peroxide.

O O
|| ||
H – O – S – O –O– S –OH + H 2 O 
 H–O–O–H + 2H2SO4
|| ||
O O
99. Copper sulfate (Aq) is acidic in nature due to hydrolysis as it’s a salt of strong and
acid and weak base. But on electrolysis the pH increasingly decreases i.e. becomes
more acidic. (taking Pt-electrodes).
 Cu 2   SO 42  , H 2 O 
CuSO 4   H   OH 

At cathode, Cu 2   2e  
 Cu

At anode,  2H 2 O  O 2  4e 
4  OH  
Discharge of OH– increases H+ ions concentration. pH value decreases.

[ 173 ]
100. Cell notation : Zn Zn 2  Ag 1 Ag

E 0  0.76 V , E 0  0.80V
Zn 2 |Zn Ag  |Ag

E 0Cell  E Cathode
0
 E Anode

= 0.80   0.76   1.56 V

101. Pt, H 2 H  Cu 2  Cu , E 0C ell  E 0C u 2

|C u
 SHE

= +ve i.e. cell is spontaneous.

0
i.e. E Cu 2 |Cu   ve value .
An electrode is assigned +ve (reduction) electrode potential if undergoes reduction on
being coupled with SHE. Similarly –

Zn Zn 2  SHE E 0Cell  SHE   0.0   E 0Zn 2 |Zn

E 0Zn 2 |Zn must be with –ve value to have E 0Cell positive and G 0 negative.

 G 0
 nFE 0 
Thus, an electrode undergoing oxidation on being coupled with SHE should have
negative electrode potential value.
10
102. 10 gram of iodine = gram eqv. (Eq. mass of iodine = 127)
127
10 10
quantity of electricity = Faraday =  96500 C
127 127
10  96500
Current strength = amp./ sec
127
= 7598.4 amp/sec.
W = Z it
E
= it
96500
(or) Atomic wt of Zn = 65]
E it
W  Z it, z = ECE
96500
W  96500 10  96500 965000
i = = 
Et 32.5  2  3600 234000
96500
=  4.12 amp/sec
2340
W1 W2 W3
103. E  E  E
1 2 3

[ 174 ]
 1.45 WZn W
   Cu
108 32.5 31.75
1.45  32.5
WZn   0.436 gram of zinc
108
1.45  31.75
WCu   0.426 gram of copper
108
According to first law, = WAg  Z Ag I.t

WAg 108
t Now ZAg  gram / C
Z.I 96500
1.45  96500
So, t =  864 s
108 1.5
104. Conductivity = Cell constant  conductance
Cell constant = Condictivity  resistance
= 1.29 ohm–1 cm–1  100 ohm
= 129 cm–1
Cell constant 129cm 1
 Conductivity    0.248ohm1 cm1
resistance 520ohm
0.02 M KCl
Conductivity  k  1000
 Molar conductivity =
Molarity

0.248ohm 1 cm 1  1000cm 3 / L
=
0.02 mol / L
248
= ohm 1 cm 2 mol1
0.02
m = 12400 ohm–1 cm2 mol–1
105. SHE : It consists of Pt wire sealed in a gas tube & has a platinum foil attached to it. The
foil is covered finaly divided platinum (colloidal platinum).
It is dipped inside 1M HCl i.e. [H+] = 1M, Pure & dry H2(g) at 298 K and 1 atm.
pressure is bubbled into the solution. The surface of the foil (adsorbent) acts as a site for
the cell.
Notation of the electrode (Anode) Pt.H 2 |H  1M 
( 1 atm 298 K)
1
Electrode reaction (oxidation)  H   e
H 2 
2
Under such` condition E0SHE  0.0 V  E 01  E0  1
H 2 |H  H H2
2 2

Measurement of standard electrode potential . E Cell  oxidation potential of LHE +

reduction potential of RHE. Choosing SHE = Zero, other can be calculated.

[ 175 ]
Unit - IV
0.693
106. t 0.5  20 days =
k
0.693 2.303 100
k day 1  log X % left
20 30 X
100 0.693  30
log   0.4514
X 2.303  20
log100  log X  0.4514
log X  2  0.4514
= 1.5486
X = Antilog 1.5486
= 35.37%
107. Factors affecting rate of reaction :
dc
(i) Concentration of the reactant :   kC n
dt
n = order of the reaction.
(ii) Presence of catalyst : e.g. +ve catalyst initiates the reaction in forward direction.
(iii) Temperature : Increase of temperature increases the rate constant i.e. the rate
increases.

k2 E a  T2  T1 
log   
k1 2.303R  T1 T2 

k1 = rate constant at temperature, T1

k2 = rate constant at temperature, T2
Ea = Activation energy.
R = gas constant = 8.314 J mol–1 K–1
(iv) Surface area : Greater is the surface area higher is the rate of reaction.
1 Fast
(v) Nature of reactant. e.g. NO g   O 2g   NO 2  g 
2
1 Slow
CO g   O 2  g    CO2  g 
2
Different reactants do n’t proceed in the same speed.
(vi) Exposure to radiation :
h
e.g. H 2 g   Cl2  g  
sun light
2HCl  g 
108. Threshold energy is the energy possessed by the activated complex where old bond
breaks and new bond forms leading to formation of product i.e. energy to have effective
collisions.

[ 176 ]
 This highly unstable state is with energy greater than normal energy of the reactants
(Er) and activation energy (Ea). Relationship with Ea :
Eth = Er + Ea .

HH HH
e.g.  Ea

     Energy 2 HI
II I    I
Activated complex
( Transition state)

k2 Ea  T2  T1 
109. log k  2.303R  T T 
1  1 2 
Ea  20 
log 4 
2.303  8.314  300  320 
2  0.301 2.303  8.314  300  320
Ea  J
20
 Ea  55.328 kJ
2.303 a
110. Rate constant k  log
t' a
4
2.303
= 2.log 2
t'
2.303
We know, t 0.5  log 2
k

Now t ' , the time required to complete 3 4 times

2.303
t'  2.log 2
k
t '  2.t 0.5
111. According to Arrheniues equation :
k  A e  Ea / RT . This equation tells the dependance of temperature on rate constant
of a reaction

[ 177 ]
 ln k  ln A  Ea RT

At temp T1, ln k1  ln A  Ea RT1 ,

At temperature T2 , lnk2  lnA  Ea

RT2

k2 Ea Ea Ea  T2  T1 
Now ln k2 – ln k1 = ln     
k1 RT2 RT1 R  T1 T2 

k2 Ea  T2  T1 
i.e. log   
k1 2.303R  T1 T2 

2.303 100
112. For first order reaction k  log
15 80
2.303
= log10  3log 2 
15
2.303
= 1  0.903
15
2.303
= 0.097
15
k = 0.015 min–1
2.303 100
 t log = 153. 5 min.
0.015 10
0.693
113. t 0.5   involves no concentration term 
k
2.303 a
k log ax  a2
t ax
2.303 a
t 0.5  log
k a
2
2.303  0.301 0.693
t 0.5  
k k

2.303  A 0
114. t  log  A0 = initial concentration
k A
= 0.5 mole/L
2.303 5  101 [A] = 0.05 mol/L
t log
6 min 1 5  102

t  0.38min .  log 10  1

[ 178 ]
 1 d  A 1 d  B
115.  
2 dt 4 dt
1 1
i.e. (rate of disappearance of (A) = ( rate of appearance / formation of B)
2 4
1 5 103
= 
4 10
1
rate of disappearce [A] =  5 10 4  2.5 104 mol 1 L1 s 1
2

5 103
rate of appearance B = mol L1 s1 = 5 104 mol L1 s 1
10
116. Depending on the rate of reactions these are of three types :
(i) Fast / instantaneous reaction. e.g. ionic reactions
(ii) Reaction of moderate rate (rate can be measured) suitably. e.g. acidic hydrolysis
of ester.
(iii) Slow reactions. e.g. Rusting, of iron.
117. (i) Positive catalyst accelerates the rate of reaction while negative catalyst slows down
the rate.
e.g. fluorination CH4 is moderated by cobalt catalyst.
(ii) Catalyst lowers the activation energy, accelerating the rate of reaction.
(iii) Catalyst does not take part in the chemical process so it remains unchanged.
MnO2  C 
e.g. KClO3g    KCl g   3 O 2g 
2
(iv) A catalyst doesnot alter Gibbs energy, G of the reaction. It catalyses spontaneous
reactions.
118. By affecting the activation energy it activates the reacting colliding molecules to surpass
the barrier i.e. it influences the rate constant, of forward (kf) and backward (kb) reaction

identically i.e.K the equilibrium constants, kf k  K , does not change

b

The decrease in activation energy (+ve catalyst) from forward decreation is same in
backward direction.

Progress of reaction

From the plot it’s clear that  E 2  E1    E12  E1 

So the extent of increase in forward rate is same backward rate.

[ 179 ]
119. All collisions do n’t lead to formation of product(s). The collisions in which molecules
collide with sufficient kinetic nergy (i.e. threshold every) and proper orientiation so as
facilitate breaking of bonds between reacting species and formation of new bonds to
form products are called effective collisions.
Considering effective collision,
Rate = PZAB e Ea / RT
ZAB = collision frequency of reactants A, B.
P = Probability or Sterric factor.
120. For general reaction, R   P , at time t1 the reactant concentration R1 and 't 2 ' , the
concentration of reactant is R2. Similarly P1 and P2 are product concentrations at timing
t1, t2. Now rate of disappearance of R :

 R 2   R 1  R 

t 2  t1 t
is equal to rate of appearance of ‘P’

 P2   P1     P
i.e.
t 2  t1 t
Thus, rav (average rate of reaction)
R    P  changein concentration of 'R 'or 'P '
=   = changein time
t t
But to express the rate at a particular moment of time is called instantaneous rate i.e.
when t tends to zero. A tangent is drawn at a particular time to the c vs t plot. Thus,

d  R  d  P 
rinst.  
dt dt

R P
i.e. t 0 
t t  0 t

121. 2 N 2O5  g  
 2N 2O 4  g   O 2  g 
Initial (t = 0) 0.5 atm 0 0
(0.5 – 2x) 2x atm x atm
Pt  p N 2O5  p N2O4  p O2
= (0.5 – 2x) + 2x + x = (0.5 + x)
x = pt – 0.5
p N2O5  0.5  2x

= 0.5  2  Pt  0.5  1.5  2Pt

at 100s, Pt = 0.512 atm.

[ 180 ]
 PN 2O5  1.5  2  0.512
= 1.5  1025  0.476 atm.
Now for 1st order reaction,
2.303 p
k log i
t  100s p100S

2.303 0.5
= log
100 0.476
2.303
=  0.0216  4.98  10 4 s 1 .
100
2.303 100 2.303  0.097
122. . k = 10 min log 80 =
10
= 0.0223 min 1 [ log 10 - log 8 = 1-3 log 2=1-0.903=0.97]
2.303 100
. t = log
0.0223 25
2.303
=  2  0.301  62.2 min.
0.0223
0.693
123. k =  0.01 min 1
69.3
2.303 100 2.303  0.699
t =  log =  160.97 min .
0.01 20 0.01
1
124. We know that t 1 
2 a n 1

for n =1, t 1 is constant.

2

As data are constant, independent of initial concentration, the said reaction is first order.
d R 
125. For zero order reaction,  k and the integral form is kt = [R]0 – [R].
dt
R  .
Here t 1 
2 2k

(a) (b) (c)

[ 181 ]
126. CH 3COOC 2 H5  NaOH  CH 3COONa  C2 H 5OH

rate = k  CH 3COOC2H 5  NaOH  , rate depends on concentrations of both, hence

HCl
second order CH 3COOC 2 H 5  H 2O  CH 3COOH  C 2H 5OH
In HCl (aq) the rate depends on only conc. of ethylacetate. It is first order with respect
to ethylacetate and zero order with respect to H3O+.
127. rate of the reaction = K [A]x [B]y
Thus, 0.005 = k (0.01)x (0.01)y --------- I
.020 = k (0.02)x (0.01)y --------- II
.060 = k (0.02)x (0.03)y ----------III
x
I 0.005  0.01 
  
II 0.020  0.02 
x
1 1
   i.e. x = 2,
4 2
second order with respect to ‘A’.
y
II .020  0.01 
  
III 0.060  0.03 
y
1 1
   , y = 1, first order with respect yo ‘B’.
3  3
Thus, order reaction = x + y = 3.
128. Rate of reaction Specific reaction rate
i) It is the speed with which the i) It is the proportionality constant in the
reactants are converted to product. rate low.
d  A
  k A
dt

d  A  / dt
k
A
ii) It is change in concentration of ii) It is the change in concentration of
reactant or product per unit time reactant / product per unit time and unit
e.g. A 
B concentration of the reactant or product.
dt = 1 sec, [A] = 1 mol/L
d  A d  B k = d[A] change in concentration.
 
dt dt – ve for reactant & +ve for
formation of product.
iii) It depends on initial concentration iii) It is independent of initial concentration.
of the reactants

[ 182 ]
 iv) Unit : mol L–1 time–1 iv) Its unit depends on order of reaction
e.g. for 1st order reaction it’s time–1.

129. Order of reaction :

(i) It is the sum of the powers of the concentration terms in the rate law expression.
(ii) It is determined experimentally.
(iii) Its value never exceeds there.
(iv) It need not be whole number, it may be fraction or even zero.
130. R 
P

dR
For first order reaction ,   k R 
dt
d R 
   R   kdt

on integration :  ln R  kt  I
when t = 0, i.e. initially  ln R 0  I (integration constant)
substituting in the above equation :
 ln R  kt  ln R 0
 kt   ln R 0  ln R

ln
 R   kt
  R 0
 R   e kt
Antilog of this - i.e.  R    R 0 e  kt .
 R 0
2.303 100
131. 40   t   log
k 20
2.303
k 0.699
40
0.693 0.693  40
t1    17.22 min.
2 k 2.303  0.699
132. (i) The activation energy for combustion of fuel is very high at room temperature
therefore they don’t burn by themselves.
(ii) Though the reacting molecules may be having energy more than Eth, yet they may
not be effective due to lack of proper orientation. Energy barrier and orientation
barrier must to be satisfied to have the reaction leading to product.
133. 2NH3  N 2  3H 2
Rate expression :
1 d  NH 3  d  N 2  1 d  H 2 
   ,
2 dt dt 3 dt

[ 183 ]
 0
rate of reaction = k   NH 3   2.5  104 M s 1

d  N2 
 2.5  104 M s1
dt
d H2 
 7.5 104 M s 1
dt
Unit - V
134. When a strong convergent beam of light is passed through a colloidal solution and the
path of rays is viewed at right angle to the direction of propagation of light, a bright cone
of scattered light is observed. The cone is called Tyndal cone and the effect of scattering
light is called Tyndal effect.
Condition : i) The wavelength of light must greater than the diameter of the particles
constituting dispersed phase.
ii) The difference in value of refractive indices of the dispersed phase and dispersion
medium must be appreciable.
True solution particles fail to scatter the light because of smaller size than size of colloidal
particles.
135. Colloidal particles of dispersed phase are equally charged either positive or negative.
The particles repel each other & this is the reason as to why they do not coalesce to
form larger particle. This causes Brownian motion and gives stability to the colloidal
solution.
Reason for charge on colloidal particle :
(i) Due to frictional electrification:
Rubbing of dispersed phase particle with those of dispersion medium result in
some charge on the colloidal particle.
(ii) Due to association of surface molecules :
eg.  C15 H 31 COO   Na 
C15 H 31 COONa 
Sodium palmitate (soap)
The anions aggregate by weak attractive force to have a colloidal sized particles (associated
colloid) with negative charge.
(iii) Due to preferential adsorption of ions :
The particles constituting the dispersed phase adsorb only those ions preferentially
which are common with their own lattice.
e.g. Fe(OH)3 precipitate converts to Fe (OH)3 colloidal sol adding FeCl3 (Aq).
 Fe3  3Cl
Fe Cl3 

Fe  OH 3  Fe3 
 Fe  OH 3 .Fe3 sol
Cl–1 ions are taken up by the dispersion medium.
136. Electrophoresis / Cataphoresis : The movement of colloidal particles (dispersion
phase) not the medium under the influence of an electric field is called electrophoresis.
e.g.  Fe  OH 3 .Fe3  sol on application of electric field move towards cathode (–)
and coagulate on being discharged.

[ 184 ]
 Applications : i) To findout nature of change on colloidal particle.
ii) Dust precipitator :- In inductrial chimney dust can be precipitated
by electro phoresis leaving pure air. The soots are negatively charged and stick to the
+vely charged plates during electrophoreois.
iii) Sewage disposal : Colloidal particles of dirt, mud etc. carry
electrical charge (–ve). Sewage water (a negative sol) passed through the plates kept at
high potential, the dirt particles coagulate leaving water (medium) due to electrophoresis.
137. There are three types of solutions on the basis of particle size of the solute / dispersed
phase particles.
i) True solution which is homogeneous one where solute particles are of size normally
less than 1. nm.
e.g. solution of crystalloids (salt, sugar, urea etc.)
ii) Colloidal solution. It is a heterogeneous solution where the dispersed particles are
of size 1–1000 nm (diameter).
iii) Suspension : It is a heterogeneous mixture containing large insoluble particles. e.g.
muddy water.
138. Lyophilic (liqid loving) colloid / Intrinsic colloid.
There is a loving tendency between phase and medium, hence
i) Easily prepared by simply mixing.
ii) These are stable and not easily coagulated.
iii) Reversible in nature
iv) Viscosity of the sol is greater than the solvent.
v) Surface tension is less than the medium.
139. Factors affecting adsorpttion of gas on solid.
i) Nature if the adsorbent - More is the surface area more is the extent of adsorption
e.g. catalysts are choosen in powdered form.
ii) Nature of the gas (adsorbate) easily liquifable gas i.e. exhibiting greater vander
Waals force of attraction.
iii) Heat of adsorption : More negative  adp H more is the extent of adsorption.
iv) Temperature. As its exothermic the adosrption is favourable at lower temperature.
Higher is the TC greater is the extent of adsorption.

x
v) Pressure : Extent of adsorption   increases with rise in pressure at a constant
m
temperature.
x 1
 K p n (Freundlich’s adsorption isotherm)
m
n = whole number
140. Detergent is a surafce active agent or surfactant which lowers the surface tension of the
medium facilitating cleansing action. e.g. R SO 3 Na 
(Sodium alkylbenzene sulfonate)

[ 185 ]
 It also fucntions as an emulsifier reducing inerfacial tension between fat and water thus
removing fat along with dirt from fabric.
141. Colloidal solution True solution
i) Hetergeneous i) Homogeneous (a single phase)
ii) Particle size 1–1000 nm ii) Particle size less than 1 nm.
iii) Opaque iii) transperent
iv) Coagulate iv) never settle
v) Shows Tyndal effect v) Does not show
vi) Undergo electrophoresis vi) If the solute is an electrolyte, true solution
undergoes electrolysis.
142. Colloidal solution shows small value of colligative properties due to bigger size, the
number of particles is small in comparision to true solution. Colligative properties depend
on number of particles.
143. River water is muddy and carries colloidal dust particles which are charged. Sea water
contains a large number of electrolytes. When river comes in contact with the sea water,
colloidal particles get discharged by oppositely charged ion of the electrolyte present in
sea water and are coagulated (settled). Over the time a hard solid deposit of delta in
formed.
144. Homogeneous catalysis Heterogeneous catalysis
 Catalyst fucntions in the same phase – Here Catalysts are in different
as that of reactants. phases (generally solid state)
 It proceeds through different steps – It proceeds through adsorption
with approved mechanism theory.
NO g  
Ni s
2SO 2  O 2  g    2SO3  g  H 2 g   CH 2  CH 2  g    CH 3  CH 3  g 

Mechanism. Reaction takes place on the catalytic

surafce
 HNO 3  3H 
2H 2  NO 

2HNO 3  2SO 2 
 2SO 3  NO  NO 2  H 2O
Berzelius mechanism :
2NO  O 2 
 2NO 2

SO 2  NO 2 
 SO 3  NO
NO reappeared.
In solution :

H
CH 3COOC 2 H 5   CH3COOH  C 2 H 5OH
– Catalyst is involved in chemical reaction. Catalyst adsorbs the reactants &
new chemical bond is formed.
 Faster  slower

[ 186 ]
145. Selectivity of catalyt : It is the ability of the catalyst to direct a reaction to give
specific product.
Selectivity of different catalysts for the same reactants is different.
e.g. CO and H2 (water gas) with different catalyst gives different product.
Cu / ZnO Cr2O3
(i) CO g   2H 2g    CH3OH  g 

Ni
(ii) CO g   3H 2 g    CH 4  g   H 2O  g 

Cu
(iii) CO  H 2  g    HCHO  g 
146. Hardy – Schultze rule According to it
(i) The ions carrying charge opposite to that on sol particles are effective in causing
the coagulation of the sol. These are called active ions.
e.g. Negative sol (A2 S3) can be cogulated in the decreasing order of the charge of
cation i.e.

Al3  Mg 2  Na 
The flocculation value increases in the order : Al3+ < Mg2+ < Na+
(ii) The coagulating power of an electrolyte is directly proportional to valency of the
active ion.
e.g. To coagulate +ve sol e.g. Fe (OH)3. Fe3+
4
 Fe  CN 6   PO34  SO 42  Cl
More is the coagulating power smaller is the flocculation value of an electrolyte.
(iii) Not only electrolytes, when equimolar proportions of two oppositely charged sols
are mixed they mutually neutralise their charge and both gets coagulated.
147. Colloid is the state of substance as it depends on particle size (1–1000 nm), if the
particle size falls less than it changes to crystalline state.
148. A catalyst may be defined as the substance which when present in the chemical reaction
accelerate (in case of +ve catalyst) the speed and recovered unchanged in amount and
chemical character when reaction is over. The chemical process involving the catalyst is
called catalysis.
Characteristics :
(a) It can’t initiate the reaction but accelerate the rate of reaction i.e. it can catalyse the
spontaneous reaction with negative G.
(b) Small amount of catalyst is sufficient to catalyse a particular reaction.
(c) Its quantity (mass), chemical property remain unchanged after the reaction. It may
however, undergo certain physical changes such as state, colour, structure etc.
(d) A particular catalyst is not in a position to catalyse all reaction. It is specific in
nature.
(e) It is more effective in finely powdered form / colloidal form due to increase of
surface area.
(f) Catalyst lowers down the activation energy accelerating both forward and backward
rate equally as a result equilibrium constant (K) remains unchanged but equilibrium
is reached quickly.

[ 187 ]
149. Modern Adsorption theory :
The mechanism follows five steps such as :
(i) Diffusion of reactants to the surface of the catalyst (adsorbent).
(ii) Some association (adhering) of reactants to the surface of the catalyst (adsorption)
(iii) Occurrence of chemical reaction on the catalyst’s surface through formation of
intermediate.
(iv) Desorption of product from the catalyst surface and there by making the surface
available again for more reaction to occur.
(v) Diffusion of reaction products away from the surface of the catalyst. The surface of
the catalyst has free valencies which provide the seat for chemical forces of
attraction.
Merit & limitations. This theory explains why the catalyst remains unchanged in mass
and chemical composition at the end of the reaction and effective even in small quantities.
– It fails to explain the action of catalytic promoters and catalytic poisons.

150. According to Gibbs-Helmholtz equation, G  H  TS. On being adsorbed the

disorderdness decreases i.e. S   ve, Now, G the free energy change must also
be negative incase adsorption to take place. As (– TS ) is positive at a given temperature,
H must be negative to have adsrption spontaneous, G   ve . Thus, the adsorption
process is exothermic nature.
G  H  T S
(ve) (  ve)
 Further, adsorption arises because of attraction between particles or molecules of
adsorbent and adsorbate. This follows decrease of energy in the system i.e. exothermic
in nature.
boil
151. Boiling washing soda, Na 2 CO 3  H 2 O  2NaOH  CO2 sodium hydroxide
formed on hydrolysis react with fat (triglyceride) to form soap and glycerol by
saponification reaction. Fats get disposed in water by emulsification (soap- emulsifying
agent) and helps in cleaning, the pan.

CH 2COOR CH 2  OH
| |
CH COOR  3 NaOH 
 3 RCOONa  CH  OH
| Soap |
CH 2COOR CH 2  OH
Fat glycerol

[ 188 ]
152. Blood is a colloidal system consisting of the positively charged particle, haemoglobins
(Hb). When it (blood) comes in contact with an electrolyte, the charge gets discharged
by– vely charged part of the electrolyte and blood clots on coagulation.
153. The charge on the colloidal particles depend on preferntial adsorption of the ions from
the electrolyte that are common with their own lattice ions. When silver nitrate solutin is
added with excess KI aqueous, I– adsorbs on the surface of yellow AgI precipitate and
makes it a –ve sol.

AgI  KI 
  AgI I  K
(fixed part) diffused part
When KI (aq) is added to Ag NO3, positively charged Ag+ ions are adsorbed from the
electrolyte & colloidal particles acquire +ve charge i.e. a positive sol is formed.

 AgI Ag   NO3
AgI  AgNO3 
fixed part diffused part .
154. Colloidal solutions are generally coloured on account of scattering of light by the particles
of the dispersed phase. i.e. colloidal particles. Since the particles in different colloidal
solution differ in sizes, they impart specific colours to these solutions on passing light.
e.g. colour of gold sol is red, on increasing the particle size the solution colour changes
to purple, blue & finally becomes golden yellow. As the particle size changes the
wavelength of scattered light also changes resulting in different colours.
155. The Fe(OH)3 solution prepared by the hydrolysis of FeCl3 has a positive charge because
it preferentially adsorbs Fe3+ ions on its surface from solution.
 Fe3  3Cl
FeCl3 

Fe  OH 3  Fe3 
 Fe  OH 3 .Fe3  sol  .
Cl– ions are taken up by the dispersion medium. Fe3+ acts as peptising agent.
156. When H2S gas is passed through an aqueous soluton of SO2, colloidal sulfur is formed
on oxidation of H2S or S2–
 2H 2O  3S  Colloid 
2H 2S  SO 2 
The sol looks yellow due to dispersion of sulfur.
157. Example Phase Medium System
(i) Smoke C-particles air (gas) Aerosol of solid.
(ii) FOG liquid air (gas) Aerosol of liquid.
(iii) cheese liquid solid Gel
(iv) milk liquid liquid emulson (oil/water)
(v) cream liquid liquid W/O
(vi) Soaplather gas liquid Foam
158. Adsorption (Physical) of a gas on surface of solid is exothermic in nature.
 Gas adsorbed  heat
Solid  gas 
When temperature inceases, the equilibrium shifted in the backward direction to cancel
the effect of increase of temperatuare as per Le-chatelier’s principle. Consequently,
physisorption decreases with rise of temperature. It is favoured at low temperature &
high pressure.

[ 189 ]
159. Lyophobic colloids :
(i) It is formed by special methods.
e.g. metal sols are formed by Bredig’s arc method.
(ii) It is irreversible.
(iii) As unstable easily gets coagulated.
(iv) Viscosity is same as that of dispersion medium.
(v) It exhibits Tyndal effect.
160. Multi molecular colloids Macromolecular colloids
(i) The particle size is less than colloidal (i) The particle size falls in colloidal
range range (1 nm) (1–1000 nm)
(ii) They exist as aggregate of smaller (ii) These are already macromoelcular
(Polymeric) particles in nature.
(iii) Mostly lyophobic colloids (iii) These are mostly lyophilic colloids.
e.g. gold sol, sulfur sol (S8) etc. e.g. starch, cellolose, proteins, nylon
(iv) Molecular masses are not high (iv) Molecular masses are high.
161. Associated colloids : Characteristics :
(i) Micelles are formed in dispersed phase.
(ii) These behave as strong electrolyte at low concentration but colloidal at higher
concentration i.e. above a particular concentration called CMC (critical micelle
concentration) and above a particular temperature called Kraft temperature, TK.
(iii) It lowers surface tension and raises the visocity of water.
(iv) Their molecules contain both lyophilic and lyophobic groups e.g. C15 H31 COO–
Na+.
(v) vander Waals force increases with increase of concentration.
162. Enzymes are nitrogeneous compounds / proteins produced by living system and catalyse
certain biological reaction. Hence these are called biocatalysts.
 Without these living process would be too slow to sustain life.
 Like other catalysts these are species and highly efficient. e.g. (a) one molecule of
carbonic anhydrase enzyme in RBC can catalyse the decomposition of about 36
million molecules of carbonic acid in one minute.

carbonicanhydrase
H 2 CO3  
 CO 2  H 2O
Invertase
(b) C12 H 22O11  Sucrose     glucose  fructose

163. i) Haber’s process (e) Finely divided Fe-Mo (promoter)

ii) Ostwald process (c) Pt- at 573 K
iii) Contact process (a) V2 O5 (s)
iv) Deacon’s process to manufacture (b) CuCl2 at 773 K
chlorine.
v) Bosch process to manufacture H2 (f) ferric oxide – Cr2O3 (promoter)
from water gas
vi) Hydrogenation of oil to ghee (d) Finely divided Ni

[ 190 ]
Unit - VI
164. (i) Ore is a mineral of the metal from which metal can be extracted / isolated easily
and economically. Mineral is the compound of the metal.
e.g. FeS and FeSO4 are minerals of iron where FeS mineral is an ore. Thus, all ores are
minerals but all minerals are not ores.
(ii) An alloy is a solid - solid solution of more than one Metal. This is homogneous. e.g.
Brass (Cu + Zn). Amalgam is an alloy if mercury in one of the components e.g. Zn-
Hg (Zinc amalgam)
(iii) Flux is a substance added during smelting to remove the impurities. If impurity is
acidic basic flux is added and vice versa. It results formation of fusible slag drained
out first leaving the molten metal as slag has lower density.
P2 O5  3CaO  Ca 3  PO4  2

impurity(acidic) (Basic flux) Slag
(iv) Roasting – Smelting :
Roasting is a process of heating the concentrated ore in excess of air in reverberatory
furnace at a temperature insufficient to melt it. (below the m.p. of the metal)
2FeS  3O2 
 2FeO  2SO2 
iron pyrite
Smelting : It is a process to extract the metal reducing the oxide of the metal with
suitable reducing agent (say-carbon) in presence of flux which combine with impurities,
removed as fusible slag from the lower part of the blast furnace.
165. Matching: Sodium –––––– Rock salt
Magnesium –––––– Epsom
Aluminium –––––– Cryolite
Iron –––––– Limonite
166. (i) Mercury ––––––– Liquation
(ii) Nickel ––––––– Mond’s process
(iii) Titanium ––––––– van Arkel process
(iv) Aluminium ––––––– Hall and Heroult electrolytic process.
167. Magnetic separation process :
Here ore particles or gangue is magnetic in nature. e.g. (i) ores of iron haematte, (Fe2O3),
magnetite (Fe3O4), siderite (Fe CO3) subjected to rotating magnet – wheel / roller, the
ore are concentrated on being attracted to the magnetic wheel while the nonmagnetic
impurity will be repelled to another point.
(ii) Concentration of casseterite (SnO2) ore is non-magnetic while gangue
particles Fe(CrO2), (Chromite) are magnetic.
168. Leaching is a process of concentration of the ore where ore gets dissolved in the leaching
agent but not the gangues.
(i) Baeyer’s process : Ore is digested with custic soda at 1500–1700C.
 2 NaAlO 2  H 2 O
Red Bauxite, Al2O3. 2H2O + 2NaOH 
solution
 Al  OH 3  NaOH + gangue(s), (iron oxide)
NaAlO 2  2H 2O 

[ 191 ]
 (ii) White bauxite (One containing silicon oxide) , Serpeck’s process.

ore  N 2  Carbon   AlN  CO

 Al  OH 3  NH 3
AlN  3H 2 O 
Aluminium nitride is water soluble.
169 Aluminothermy : Cr2 O3  s   2Al  s  
 Al2O3  s   2Cr(s) G 0  431 kJ
The reaction is feasible, but does not proceed at room temperature as reactants and
products are solids, At elevated temperature when chromium starts melting the reaction
becomes feasible. (From Elingham diagram it can better be explained.)
170. The sulfide ore contains - copper pyrites (CuFeS2), galene (PbS), Zinc blende (ZnS)
etc. In the froth floatation the ore particles are wetted by oil (pine oil) and frothed out to
the surface.
Collector - pine oil. Froth stabiliser - aniline, cresols. Depressant - NaCN.
Role of depressant : The reagent that depresses the formation of froth. e.g. ZnS and PbS
can be separated from each other adding NaCN as depressant. As NaCN forms a
soluble complex with ZnS never getting wet with oil but with water, while PbS getting
frothed and surfaced out.
 Na 2  Zn  CN 4   Na 2S
4 NaCN  ZnS 
water soluble complex
0 0
171. E Cu  |Cu  0.34 V  E Zn 2 |Zn   0.76 V
2
The reduction potential value shows that Cu  Aq  easily be reduced to Cu, but not Zn 2
to Zn. Thus, Zn can reduce Cu2+(Aq) to Cu
KCN Zn
Cu 2S  one    K Cu  CN  2    Cu

In order to reduce Zn 2    Zn more electro +ve metals like Ca, Mg or Al, stronger
reducing agent (i.e. lower E0 value) needed, but these metals react with water to liberate
hydrogen and hence can’t be used.
172. Sulfide ore of copper (Cu2S) cannot be directly reduced by either coke (C) or hydrogen
because  f G 0 of Cu2S more negative than those of CS2 and H2S

Thus,  CS2  4 Cu, G   ve , not feasible.

2 Cu 2S  C 

 r G   f G  CS2   2  f G  Cu 2S 

Cu 2S  H 2 
 Cu  H 2S
more negative less negative , G   ve, not feasible.

while 2Cu 2O  C 

feasible
 4Cu  CO 2
From Elinghan diagran : At temperature > 1500 K :
 1  0
 2Cu  s   2 O 2 g   Cu 2 O s   G   300 kJ(say) (i)

[ 192 ]
 1
C s   O 2 g  
 CO g  G 0  700 kJ  say  .............. (ii)
2
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Noe (ii) – (i) will be –

C s   Cu 2 Os   CO g   2Cu G 0   ve , (–700 kJ + 300 kJ)

(feasible)
173. Anode mud contains metal like Ag, Au, Pt etc which are less reactive than Cu. Actually,
they are not in a position to lose e , though they constitute the electrode (anode). Cu gets
oxidised at anode but other (Ag, Au, Pt) fails due to their higher reduction potential.

 E 0   0.34 V E 0 3  1.40V, E 0   0.80 V 

 Cu |Cu Au |Au Ag |Ag 
Copper due to less reduction potential, it undergoes oxidation preferably & others remain
in metal form.
 Cu 2  Aq.  2 e
Cu  s  
174. Reactions in different zones of blast furnace during extraction of iron :
A mixture of calcined ore (8 - parts) + coke (4 parts) + lime (1-part) is charged from the
top of the furance and blast of hot air is blown upwards. Coke serves as fuel as well as

 
reducing agent. Lime stone Ca CO3  s   
 CaO s  acts as flux to remove the
impurities as slag.
The following reactions take place in the furnace :
(i) Combustion zone : It is at the base of the furnace where coke burns attaining a
temperature of about 1775 K.
 CO 2  g  H  393.4 kJ .
C s   O 2 g  
(ii) Fusion zone (1475 – 1575 K)
CO 2 g   C s  
 2 CO H  163.2 kJ
The temperature of the system is reduced. Reduction of iron oxide take place.
Fe 2 O3  s   3C s 
 2Fe  3CO  heat
(iii) Slag formation zone (1075 – 1275 K)
This is the middle portion of the furance. Lime stone decomposes here forming lime,
CaO, used as flux.
CaCO 3 
 CaO  CO 2

CaO  SiO 2 
 Ca SiO3
(Cal.silicate  slag)
Being lighter the slag floats on the molten layer of the metal. Slag is removed.
(iv) Reduction Zone (500 – 800 K).
The temperature near the top of the furnace is 875 K. The oxide of iron gets reduced by
carbon monoxide.

[ 193 ]
 Fe 2 O3  2CO 
 2 FeO  CO 2

FeO  CO 
 Fe  CO 2

Fe3O 4  4 CO 
 2 Fe  4 CO 2
The spongy iron produced in the upper reduction zone moves down slowly and melts in
the upper reduction zone moves down slowly and melts in the fusion zone. The melt is
removed from the lower part of the furance through the tapping hole from time to time.
The iron, thus obtained is called cast iron or pig iron.
175. In the metallurgy of aluminium, the metal to be isolated from alumina (Al2O3) by carrying
out electrolytic reduction. The melting point of alumina is 2323 K. It is there mixed with
cryolite, Na3 Al F6 which reduces the m.p. to 1173 K. Further, Cryolite also increases
the electrical conductivity of the melt.
Na 3 Al F6 
 3 NaF  Al F3

 Al3  3F
AlF3 

At cathode (graphite) : Al3  3e 

 Al s 

At anode : F  F  e 

(iron vessel) 2Al 2 O3  12F 

 4 AlF3  3O 2
176. Refining of Germanium : Zone refining based on fractional crystallisation principle : Here
the impurities are more soluble in the melt than in the solid (crystallised) state.
A circular mobile heater is fixd at one end of a rod of impure metal. The molten
zone moves along with the heater which moves forward. As the heater moves forward
the pure metal crystallises out of the melt & the impurities passed on to the adjacent
molten zone. The same process is repeated several times & the heater is moved in the
same direction, the impurities concentrated at one end which is finally cut off.
This process is useful for producing semiconductor and other metals of very high
purity e.g. Ge, Si, B, Ga and ln.

177. Mond’s process for refining of nickel :

Nickel is heated in a stream of CO forming a volatile complex, nickel tetracarbonyl.
330  350 K
Ni  4CO   Ni  CO  4
The complex is subjected to higher temperature so that it’s decomposed giving pure
nickel.

[ 194 ]
 450  470K
Ni  CO 4   Ni  4 CO
This is vapour phase refining process.
178. Leaching of low grade copper ores :
Copper is leached out from low grade copper by using acid in presence air, where
copper goes into the solution as Cu2+ ions.
1
 Cu 2   aq   H 2O   
Cu  s   2H   aq   O 2  g  
2
The solution containing Cu2+ ions is treated with scarp iron or H2(g) to get copper metal.
Cu 2  aq   Fe  s  
 Cu  s   Fe 2  aq 

Cu 2  aq   H 2  g  
 Cu  s   2H   aq 
179. (a) S2– ions due to bigger size can more easily be polarised than smaller oxide ion. Ag+,
Hg2+, Zn2+ and Pb2+ have high polarising power due to presence of d-subshell. Thus
the sulfides ore more stable than oxides.
(b) Metal sulfides are insoluble in water and occur mostly in rocks but halides are
highly soluble and get dissolved in rain water and carried to lakes and seas.
180. Calcination : It is a process of heating the ore strongly either in a limited supply of air or
in the absence of air During the process –
(i) moisture is removed
(ii) volatile impurities are removed.
(iii) the ore becomes porous
(iv) water from hydrated oxide removed.
Al 2 O3 .2H 2O   Al2 O 3 +2H 2 O
(v) Carbonates decompose to oxide.
Zn CO 3 
 ZnO+CO 2
Roasting : It is the process of heating the ore strongly in the presence of excess of air at
a temperature below the melting point of the metal. It is mainly employed in case of
sulfide ores. During the process :
(i) S, As and P are removed as their volatile oxides, SO2, As2O3, P2O5
respectively.
(ii) Ores of the metal are converted to their oxides e.g. sulfide ores on roasting
give metal oxide and sulfurdioxide.
2 ZnS+3O 2 
 2 ZnO+2SO 2
Both calcination and roasting generally done in the reverberatory furnace. In roasting the
air holes are kept opened, while in calcination these are half opened or closed.
181. (i) Lime stone as flux to remove impurities as slag.

Ca CO 3   CaO + CO 2

CaO  lime   SiO 2  impurity  

 CaSiO3  slag 
(ii) To act as reducing agent in blast furnace.
Fusion zone : CO 2 +C  Coke  
 2 CO
Reduction zone : Fe 2 O 3 +2 CO 
 2 FeO + CO 2
FeO + CO 
 Fe + CO 2

[ 195 ]
Unit - VII
182. Bi : 6s2 6p3 (valence shell configuration)
   
The three unpair e (s) easily take part in bonding giving +3 O.S. Due to strong ‘inert
pair effect’ the 6-s (paired) electron are quite reluctant (inert) in forming bond.
183. P15 : 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p3 3d0. 3s electrons on being unpaired take part in bonding favouring
penta-covalency e.g. PCl5.
    
(sp3d-hybridisation)
2 2 3
N ( Z = 7) 1s 2s 2p (does not have d-orbitals). The available three unpair electrons
take part in bonding exhibiting covalency state three.
   
e.g. NCl3 (sp3- hybridized) ‘N’ has maximum valency state four where its N+ (iso electronic
with C) e.g.

184. Aquaregia is a mixture of conc. HNO3 and conc. HCl in the ratio (1:3). The liberated
(nascent chlorine) oxidizes Pt and dissolves forming PtCl4.
HNO3  3HCl 
 NOCl  2H 2 O  2Cl
nitrosylchloride
Pt  4Cl 
 PtCl 4
 H 2  PtCl 4  , chloroplatinic acid
PtCl 4  2HCl 
With gold: Au+3Cl  AuCl3
AuCl3 + HCl  H AuCl4, Chloroauric acid.
185. NN

N(2s2 2p3) being of smaller size can for P  P bond and hence can form multiple bond.
It is a discrete molecule held by weak vanderWaals force, exhibits in gaseous state.
P(3s23p3), being of bigger in size fails to form multiple (  -) bond, but form stronger
covalent bond. They exhibit in polymeric form P4 units.
Because of nature of bonding molecular nitrogen is a gas which the molecular form of
other members (P4, As4 and Sb4 are solids.)

[ 196 ]
186. Nitrogen gas is diatomic : N  N : with electronic configuration as per MOT

1s2 *1s2 2s2 *
2s2 2px2 2py2 2pz 2 and the bond order is three.
On the other hand ‘P’ is tetra atomic due to bigger size fails to for  -bond; but can form
 -bond and represented as P4.
(Due to higher bond dissociation energy of N  N (946 kJ / mol.), bond cleavage is not
so easy and behaves all most as inactive gas.
187. Anomalous behaviour of nitrogen:
Basis of non-identical behaviour.
i) Smaller size
ii) high electronegativity (3.0) and high i H
iii) non-availabitity of d-orbitals (2s22p3)
iv) tendency to form P  P bond i.e. multiple bond.
The aoimat(oos-behaviour is supported by following characteristics.
(a) Nitrogen is a gas but others are solids.
(b) Nitrogen is diatomic, but others are tetra-atomic
(c) Hydrogen bond is exhibited by NH3
(d) Except NF3 other tri halides’ of ‘N’ are unstable due to longer bond length,
N–I > N–Br > N– Cl.
(e) Due to small size and high electronegativity nitrogen forms nitride ion N3–, P to
some extent also forms phosphide ion.
(f) Nitrogen fails to form penta valency due to absence of d-orbitals.
(g) It fails to form d   p  bond (due to absence of d-orbitals).
Therefore compounds of the type R3N = O and R3N = CH2 are not possible however,
phosphours and other members can be involved in the multiple bonding due to availability
of d-orbitals.
(h) Nitrogen is chemically inert under normal conditions because of high bond dissociation
energy (N  N), other molecules are reactive  \/ P  P\/  due to in ability to forms
multiple bond and there present more fissionable single bond.
188. The atomic size in the order I > Br > Cl.

The lone pair effect in the tetrahedral geometry of PCl3, PBr3 and Pl3 in dominated by
steric factor where due to bigger size of I, the bond angle, < I PI in bigger as follows in
the order Pl3 > PBr3 > PCl3 with decrease of steric factor.
189. NH3(107.80),PH3(93.60),AsH3(91.80),SbH3(91.30),BiH3(90°).
The difference in bond angles is based on the electronegativity and size of the central
atom. For example ‘N’ is smallest in size with maximum electronegativity (3.0). The
electron density is very high around nitrogen causing greater repulsion between the bond
pairs, on moving down the group the electronegativity decrease and size increases. As a
result there is gradual decrease in the force of repulsion among the shared electron pairs
on the central atoms resulting decrease in bond angle.

[ 197 ]
190. Basic strength of hydrides of group-15 : These hydrides are Lewis bases due to presence
of lone electron pairs on the central atom. The basic strength decrease in the order
NH3 > PH3 > AsH3 > SbH3 > BiH3. Nitrogen atom has smallest size and NH3 is less
voluminous and having greater electron density i.e- tendency to release electron & better
base. On the other hand higher e(–) density also has greater tendency to accept proton,
: NH 3  H    NH 4 . The tendency gradually decreases on moving down group with
increase of size, volume of the hydrides EH3 decreasing the density.
191. Boiling point: NH3 PH3 AsH3 SbH3 BiH3
238.5 185.5 210.6 256.6 290

B.P. depends or intermolecular force’of attraction arising out of

i) H-bonding ii) Vander walls force
The boiling point of NH3 is greater than that of PH3 as there present stronger H-bonding
between NH3 molecule because of smaller size and high electro negativity of N(3.0).
The boiling point suddenly decreases and increases form PH3 to BiH3 due to increase of
size. Greater is the size greater is the vander walls force. With increase of vander Walls
force the b.p. increases from PH3 to BiH3.
192. (a) Temperature: As the reaction is exothermic, low temperature on 700 K (optimum)
is needed to keep the reaction in progress
(b) Pressure : n  2 . Increase of pressure helps the reaction to proceed in a direction
of decrease of volume i.e.
External pressure favours better yield. In Haber’s pressure about 200 atm. is applied.
(c) Catalyst: Finely divided iron in presence of traces of H2O or Al2O3 or Mo as
promoter.
193. Metals like Al, Ni, Cr, Fe and Co become inreactive passive in presence of cone. HNO3
as it’s an oxyacid. Pure conc. HNO3 on reacting with these metals forms protective
coating of their oxides on the surface of the metal which prevents the metals reaction with
the reagent coming in contact. This is called passivity of the metal. The proctetive layer
formed on surface of iron is Fe3O4 (Fe3O + Fe2O3).
194. Resonating structure of NO3 :

[ 198 ]
195. Though H2SO4 conc), CaCl2 and P2O5 are dehydrating agents, fail to dehydrate NH3,
as these chemically react with ammonia.
  NH 4 2 SO4
. 2NH 3  H 2SO4 
. 8NH3  CaCl2 
 CaCl2 .8NH 3 (addition compound)
. P4 O10  6H 2 O 
 4H 3 PO 4
  NH 4 3 PO 4
. 3NH 3  H 3PO 4 
196. Mercury never stick to the surface of the glass. However mercurous oxide (Hg2O) forms
as result of the reaction with Ozone starts sticking to the glass surface. It is known as
tailing of mercury.
O3  2Hg  Hg 2 O  O 2
197. The high viscosity and high b.p. can be accounted for the existence of intermolecular H-
bonding in the molecules.

198. Reducing agent HI > HBr > HCl.

H2SO4 is not only an acid, but an oxidant (mild). It can oxidize better reducing agents like
HI and HBr but not HCl. So the hydra-acid formed subsequently gets oxidized liberating
halogen (Br2/l2).
NaCl(s)  H 2SO 4  conc    NaHSO 4  HCl  (not oxidized further by H2SO4)
NaBr(s)  H 2SO 4 (conc) 
 NaHSO 4  HBr(g)
H 2SO 4 
 H 2 O  SO 2  O
 Br2  g   H 2O  l 
2HBr(g)  O 
Instead of colourless HBr, reddish brown coloured (Br2 - gas) is obtained.
199. X (ns2p6) colourless due to non-availability of unpair (e–), but the colour of the halogens
–

(X2) deepens on moving down the group.

F2 (light yellow), Cl2, (greenish yellow) Br2 (reddish brown), Iodine (deep violet).
The cause of colour is due to absorption of energy from the visible light by the molecules
   
for the excitation of outer non-bonded electrons to higher energy levels. : X  X :
   
The excitation energy depends upon the size of the atom. Fluorine has the smallest size
and the force of attraction between the nucleus and electron is very large. As a result, it
requires very large excitation energy and thus, absorps radiation corresponding to violet
& transmits light yellow (complementary colour) Iodine due to large size, needs very less
excition energy and absorbs radiations corresponding to yellow light of visible spectra
and transmits violet colour (complementary). That is why Iodine is violet in colour.
200. H–F(l)

H–F = 95 pm covalent bond

H-------F (H-bond) = 155 pm

[ 199 ]
 HF(l) also consists of chains of HF molecules but the chains are shorter, consisting of
only five or six molecule on average.
HCl, HBr and HI fails to exhibit H-bonding, hence exhibit in gaseous state
experiencing vanderWaals force.
201. This depends on the bond dissociation energy which depends on bond length. Longer is
the bond length lower in the bond dissociation energy. (BDE).
Eq. H  F  .........  H  I
574 kJ 200 kJ
Thus, HI is a better reducing agent as it has greater tendency to lose H, 2HI  I2
+2(H). Thus the reducing nature increases from HF to HI i.e. HF < HCl < HBr < HI.
Acidic nature: In gaseous state, HX(g) are covalent in nature but becomes ionic in aq
solution & behaves as acids. The acidic strength follows in the order:
HI > HBr > HCl > HF
This trend follows with the trend of increasing (BDE). HF is the weakest halogen acid
due to:
i) high B.D.E ii) Intermolecular H-bonding
202. The acidic strength can be explained on the basis of unprotonated ‘O’,

In spite of change in O.S. H3PO2, H3PO3 and H3PO4 with varying basicity, these have
identical number of unprotonated 0 atoms. The greater electrio-vity influences -I effect
which is same for all these molecules and hence almost have identical strength.
203. Nitrogen has maximum O.N. +5, As O.N. can decrease in it undergoes reduction and
acts as oxidizing agent.
5 4
e.q. 2HN O3  conc. 
 H 2O  2 NO2   O 
5 5
H N O3 H N O2
On the other hand N- exhibits + 3 O.S. in HNO2, that can increase as well as decrease
so it can act as reducing and oxidizing agent.
HNO2 behaving as oxidizing agent i.e. ‘N’ undergoes decrease in O.N.
3 2
 H 2O  2 N O   O 
2H N O2 
HNO2 as reducing agent i.e. ‘N’ changes its O.N. form +3 to +5.
Oxidation : HNO 2  O 
 HNO 3 [ Addition of ‘O’]
(or) NO 2  H 2 O 
 NO 3  2H   e  [Removal of e ]
 N 2 O5  4  H 
(or) 2HNO 2  H 2 O  [ Removal of H ]
204. NH4NO2 never sublimes rather decomposes gives N2(g).
NH 4 NO 2  s  
 N 2(g)  2H 2 O(l)
205. The bond between P—F is stronger due shorter bond length as ‘F’ size is smaller. So ‘P’
fails to bond with ‘O’ of H 2O, on the other hand PCl3 gets hydrolysed,

[ 200 ]
 PCl3 + 3H2O   H3PO3 +3HCl
206. Both NF3 and NH3 are sp3-hybridised and of pyramidal shape. But due to high
electronegativity of F,.the unshared pair of e– in sp3 hybrid orbital of N are strongly
pulled towards F-atoms in the pyramidal NF3 resulting low dipole moment    0.2 D 
hence less polar. In NH3 , N(3.0) is more electro -ve than H (2.1), as shown the lone
pair effect is aligned with the dipolement of N–H bond in pyramidal geometry.

207. On passage of SO2 through lime water first milkiness appears then disappears on excess
passage of SO2.
i) Ca(OH)2 + SO2   CaSO3 + H2O milkiness and CaSO3 is insoluble in water
ii) With excess of SO2, soluble Ca(HSO3)2 is formed removing the milkiness.
 Ca  HSO3  2 soluble
CaSO3  H 2O  SO 2 
208. O = O, (O2) diatomic. (S8) Octa - Atomic

Puckered ring structure (shape)

Oxygen is a small sized atom (1s2 2s2 2p4). Oxygen is diatomic i.e. when two oxygen
atoms come closer to each other, they don’t encounter much repulsion from the e– in
inner core . On coming close there exists  -bond  P P  between two smaller ‘O’
atoms where sidewise overlapping of p-orbital is possible,  -bond is not possible in
bigger ‘S’ atoms where there exists repulsion between core e– (s) S = 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2
3p4. However, there present stronger  -bond between -S-S- i.e 2  -bonds per atom
to form puckered ring structure of eight atoms.
Thus, (O = O) molecules are discrete and held by, vander waals forces, hence gas. On
the other hand polymeric ‘S’ (catenated) exist in solid form.
209. Fluorine has high positive reduction potential (+2.87V) and acts as a more powerful
oxidizing agent than oxygen.
It oxidizes oxygen making O positive (OF2, O2F2) and itself gets reduced to F– (fluoride).
E 0O2 / H2 O  1.23 V  E 01  2.87 V
F2 / F
2

210. Anomalous behaviour of oxygen is due to

(a) It has smaller size high electro negativity (3.5).
(b) Non availability of d. orbitals (1s2 2s2 2p4).
- affect of smaller size. Due to small size and high and high electro negativity it has
tendency to form H-bond for which H2O is a liquid but H2S is a gas.
- Absence of d-orbitals : It can maximizes its covalency to four where other can
expand valency state maximizes to six.
- Physical state oxygen is a gas but others are solids.
- Due to smaller size ‘O’ forms multiple (  ) bond but other can’t.

[ 201 ]
211. Water is liquid due to presence of inter molecular H–bonding

H2S (bigger size) held by vander Waals force, hence in gaseous state.
212. H2O2 is a reducing agent and can react with KMnO4 (Oxidising agent).
On reduction the purple colour gets discharged.
 O 2  2H   2e    5
 H 2 O 2 

 MnO 4  8H   5e  
 Mn 2   4H 2O   2

bond length = 128 pm in ozone, Bond length O = O is 122 pm.

Larger in the bond length less is stability i.e. O3 has tendency to lose oxygen, [O]. Hence
a powerful oxidizing agent.
 O2  O
O3 
Ion – electron process:
2H   O 3  2e  
 O2  H 2O
213. Without Ozone layer, no life could exist on earth, as it prevents harmful ultraviolet radiations
from reaching our planet. UV radiation harmful to animal life on earth. Ozone depleting
substance (ODs) are being released in atmosphere by high flying jets and rockets. These
are converting Ozone to Oxygen. (ODs)s are CFC, nitrogen oxides, chlorine, carbon
tetrachloride etc.
NO 2  O 3 
 NO  2O 2
The concentration in the stratospheric Ozone decrease leading to the formation of Ozone
hole, through which U.V rays are in a position to pass through the Ozone layer and have
a direct access to our planet. Such U.V. impact can cause skin cancer, loss of sight and
affect the immune system.
0 0
214. E 1 F2 / F  2.87 V, E 1 Cl2 / Cl  1.36 V
2 2

Greater is the reduction potential greater is tendency to be reduced  F(g)  e 

 F 
& more powerful as oxidizing agent this the reason why ‘F’ is a better oxidizing agent
than ‘Cl’.
Even it can oxidize oxygen and noble gases.
O(g)  F2(g) 
 OF2(g)

Xe(g)  F2(g) 
 XeF2(s)

 2HCl   O 
215. Cl 2  H 2 O 
air  O 2 
Coloured matter + [O]  colourless / bleached   Further bleached.

 SO 3  2  H 
SO 2  H 2 O 
atm.
Coloured matter + [H]  Bleached (colourless) 
oxygen
 colour reappears

[ 202 ]
 Thus, chlorine water bleaches by oxidation while SO2 bleaches in aqueous condition by
reduction. As surrounding atmosphere is a mild oxidant the bleached matter on coming in
contact with atmospheric oxygen may regain its colour.
Thus, bleaching by ‘Cl2’ is permanent while by ‘SO2’ is temporary.
216. Inter halogen compounds of general formula AXn (n = 3, 5, 7) are more reactive than A2
and X2. This is due to fact that (a) A–X is much polar due t o difference in
electronegativity, while A-A and X-X are non-polar, (b) Weakness of covalent bond
between dis-similar atoms. (A-X bond is weaker than A-A or X-X bond.
217. Br(III)

AB3 L2 – type 2- lone pair, 3 - bond pair.

Lone pair placed at an angular distance of 120° to minimize repulsion.

As L-L repulsion is greater than b-b repulsion it’s slightly bent T-shaped
218. The m.p and b.b. of noble gases are very low.
This is due to noble gases (atoms) are held together only by weak vander waals forces of
attraction both in solid and liquid state. However this increases on moving down the
group with increase of atomic size. Greater in the size greater in the extent of vander
walls forces.
219. Group 18 elements are called aerogens (generated from air) as these are isolated form
liquid air by fractional evaporations. These gases have no unpair e– in its valence shell
having s2p6 configuration except He (1s2) for this. These are ‘zero
valent having very less combining capacity, under exceptional conditioin some of these
(e.q. Kr, Xe) form oxyfluorides, oxides and fluorides. This is due to low ionisation energy
 iH  of Kr and Xe and high reduction potential of F and O.
220. Heat of solution of sulfuric acid is highly exothermic and temperature suddenly rises
causing bumping of acid, where acid is thrown upward. Therefore, reverse process is
followed i.e. acid in added slowly to water to avoid bumping accident. Acid has high
affinity for water.
221. Sulfur present in group 16 or VI with six e– (s) in valence shell. Its maximum O.N = + 6
& minimum is –2. In SO3 sulfur exhibits maximum O.N. + 6 which can decrease but
can’t increase further i.e. SO3 can be reduced but can’t be oxidized. As it is reduced, can
act as oxidizing agent.
SO3 
 SO 2  O
2HBr  O   H 2 O  Br2
On the other hand, in SO2 sulfur has + 4. O.N. which can increase and decrease behaving
both as reducing and oxidizing agent.

[ 203 ]
 SO 2 (as oxidant). SO 2  S  2  O 
SO 2 (as reductant) 2H 2S  2  O   2S  2H 2O

222. iH  O 2   1166 kJ / mol

iH  Xe   1170 kJ / mol

The data shows the ionization enthalpies of O2 and Xe are comparable: Dioxygen (O2)

forms compound with PtF6, i.e. O 2  PtF6  , So Bartlell (1962) thought Xe with
comparable i H value should forms compound with PtF6(g)

 Xe  PtF6 
Xe(g)  PtF6(g) 
Here Pt Fc is very powered oxidizing agent oxidizing O2 to O 2 and Xe to Xe+
223. (a) HCl(g) is a covalent compound which fails to conduct electricity while on hydration
it ionizes and conducts electricity. A HCl(aq) is an electrolyte.
 H3O  aq   Cl  aq 
HCl(g)  H 2O  l  
(ii) Iodine, a covalent nonpolar moleucle less affinity for water, slightly soluble. It
dissolves in 40% aq. solution of KI due o formation of KI3.
224. Anomalous behavior of fluorine:
Reason :  Its size in small
 It has high electronegative value (4.0)
 9 F 1s 2 2s 2 p5  does not have d-orbitals.
 Bond dissociation enthopy is less due to L-L repulsion in spite of small
bond length. : F :  : F :

E0  2.87 V
 High reduction potential. 1 F2 / F
2

Points of difference:
(a) F has ore O.S. i.e. -1 (mostly), but other can have O.S. -1 to +7. in both having the
+ve and -ve O.S.
(b) ‘F’ is most reactive non-metal due to its low bond dissociation enthalpy of F2 and
high electronegativity.
(c) H-F is a liquid due to presence of inter molecular H-bonding but other hydrogen
halides are gases.
(d) HF acid generally exists in dimeric form H2F2 but others are as monomer.
(e) F due to absence of d-orbitals fails to form polyfluoride ion others can form
Cl3 , Br3 , I 3 , I5 etc.
3 3 
(f) F acts as better ligand  AlF6  ,  FeF6  ,  AgF2  etc.
.
Unit - VIII
225. A transition metal exhibits higher oxidation , states in oxides and fluorides because oxygen
and fluorine are of small size and high electronegativity, high reduction potential and
hence can readily oxidise the metals. For example, OsF6, V2O5

[ 204 ]
226. (a) They form complex compounds.
(b) They act as good catalysts.
(c) They are paramagnetic in nature.
(d) They show variable oxidation state.
(e) The elements and their salts are coloured.
227. Lanthanides show limited number of oxidation states, such as +2, +3 and +4 (+3 is the
principal oxidation state). This is because of large -energy gap between 5d and 4f
subshells. On the other hand, actinides also show principal oxidation state of +3 but
show a number of other oxidation states also.
For example, uranium (Z = 92) exhibits oxidation states of +3, +4, +5, +6, and +7 and
neptunium (Z = 94) shows oxidation states of+3, +4, +5, +6 and +7. This is because of
small energy difference between 5f and 6d orbitals.
228. Most of transition metal ions are coloured both in the solid state and in aqueous solutions.
The colour of these ions is attributed to the presence of incomplete (n - 1) d-subshell.
The electrons in these metal ions can be easily promoted from one energy level to another
in the same d-subshell. The amount of energy required to excite the electrons to higher
energy states within the same d-subshell corresponds to energy of certain colours of
visible light. Therefore, when white light falls on a transition metal compound, some of its
energy corresponding to a certain colour, is absorbed causing promotion of d-electrons.
This is known as d- d transitions. The remaining colours of white light are transmitted
and the compound appears coloured.
229. Some transition metals and their compounds act as good catalysts for various reactions.
This is due to their ability to show multiple oxidation states. The common examples are
Fe, Co, Ni, V, Cr, Mn, Pt, etc.
The transition metals form reaction intermediates with the substrate by using empty
d-orbitals. These intermediates give reaction paths of lower activation energy and
therefore, increase the rate of reaction. For example, during the conversion of SO2 to
SO3, V2O5 is used as a catalyst. Solid V2O5 absorbs a molecule of on the surface
forming V2O4 and the oxygen is given to SO2 to form SO3. The divanadium tetraoxide
then converted to V2O5 by reaction with oxygen :
V2 O5  SO 2 
 SO 3  V2 O 4
Catalyst Divanadium
tetraoxide
2V2 O 4  O 2 
 2V2 O 5
230. (i) 6Fe 2   CrO 72  14H  
 6Fe3  2Cr 3  7H 2O
(ii) 2CrO 24  2H  
 Cr2 O 27   H 2 O
(iii) MnO 4  8H   5e  
 Mn 2   4H 2 O
5Fe 2  
 5Fe3  5e 
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
231. E values of Cr3+/Cr2+ is negative while for Mn3+/Mn2+, it is positive [E0Cr3+/Cr2+)
0

= –0.41V and E0 (Mn3+/Mn2+) = +1.37 V]. Thus, Cr2+ can undergo oxidation to Cr3+
readily and is a reducing agent while Mn3+ can undergo reduction and hence is an oxidizing
agent.

[ 205 ]
232. (i) Complex formation :
(a) Small size of the atoms or ions of transition metal.
(b) high nuclear charge.
(c) availability of vacant d-orbitals of suitable energy to accept lone pairs of e  s 
donated by ligands.
(ii) Most of the compounds of transition elements are paramagnetic in nature i.e. attracted
by the magnetic field. Partial filling d-orbitals ranges from d1 to d9 electronic
configuration with d0 (Sc3+) and d10 (Zn2+) are diamagnetic with zero effective
magnetic moment,  f .
In addition to this (paramagnetic or diamagnetic) few substances such as iron metal,
iron oxide which are highly magnetic. These are call ferromagnetic.
233. 21 Sc, 3d1 4s 2 , Sc3  3d 0  is isoelectronic with Ar  Z  18  so its compounds are dia-
magnetic and colourless, however, this is included in the d-block as (i) it exhibits variable
valency due to involvement 3d as well as 4s e  s  , Sc 2  , Sc3

(ii) General electronic configuration  3d114 4s 0  confirms its existence in d-block

(or)1

S C  3d1 4s 2  . (iii) It forms no colour compounds due to non-availability of

e  3d.  3d 0 

234. Oxoanion of metals have highest O.S. e.g. +7 in MnO4 . This is because high
electronegative ‘O’ i.e. oxidising the metal bonded. Deelectronation increases O.S.
235. 30 Zn, 3d10 4s2 , (i) it does not have partially filled d-orbials (ii) forms colourless salt,
(iii) Zn 2 is diamagnetic.
However, this is included in 3d-series as
(a) it responds to general electronic configuration of transition elements.
(b) Complex formation tendency like other transition metals.
2
e.g.  Zn  NH3 4 
236. (i) These are held by strong inter-atomic forces & have high enthalpies of atomisation.
These are maximum at about middle of each series indicating that one unpair e
per d-orbital is particularly favourable for strong inter atomic attraction.
(ii) Hydration of ion depends on (1) smaller size of cation. (2) higher charge of the
cation (3) presence of vacant orbitals to co-ordinate with water molecule. Cu 2  .
due to its smaller size and higher charge can form aqua complex as well as
experience greater ion-diople force of attraction.
2
e.g. Cu  H 2O 4  , Cu  NH3 4  2+ stable complexes. Disproportionation of Cu+.

2Cu   water 
 Cu 2   Cu  water
Hydration energy Cu2+ is greater than Cu+. Cu2+ more soluble in water.

237. Ag  4d 10
5s1  Ag  4d10 
i) electronic configuration corresponds to general electronic configuration.
ii) high heat of atomisation

[ 206 ]
 (iii) Ag+ can form complex e.g.  Ag  NH3 2  Cl
238. The oxidation potential of a metal depends on following factors as explained in the
cycle.

 M   aq 
M  s  

subl.H  hyd.H
i H
M  g   M g

i) Heat of sublimation / atomisation (+ve)

ii) i H is the ionisation enthalpy (+ve)
iii) enthalpy  hyd.H = hydranation enthalpy..
If M (s)   M   Aq  is the oxidation potential. If it’s –ve (exothermic), the oxidation
is favouravle. To make at –ve,
sub H   i H   hyd. H  H
Smaller the value of H greater is the tendency to be oxidised in aq. solution &
greater is stability in that oxidation state  Cu .
2
E 0Cu / Cu 2 Aq   0.34V.

E 0Zn|Zn 2  Aq   0.76 V .
The high value of atomisation (+339 kJ) and low hydration energy (–2121 kJ/mol)
may account for low value of oxidation potential.
239.  eff  n  n  2  , n is the number of unpair e

C 20   3d 7  i.e. n = 3, Fe3  3d 5  i.e. n = 5.

240. High hydration energy due to smaller cationic size and higher charge.
241. Mn  z  25  has e -configuration 3d5 4s2 . Because of small energy difference between
3d & 4s subshell all the seven e   s  participate in bonding for which highest oxidation
state is +7. Mn2 O7 (other oxidies are MnO, Mn3O4, Mn2O3, MnO2, MnO3)
Oxygen is a better oxidising agent due to its higher reduction potential E 0O |H O  1.23V
2 2

and deelectronate Mn changing the O.S. +2 to +7.

242. The process where same element undergoing oxidation and reduction is called dispro-
portionation.
5 6
3 C r O 34   8H   
 2 C r O 42   C r 3   4 H 2 O
5 6
3Cr O34  8H  
 2Cr O 42   Cr 3  4 H 2 O
243. High is the positive O.S. greater is the electron accepting tendency and electron ac-
ceptors are acids (Lewis)
244. Ref. text (for configuration)
stability of transition metal ion : stability of metal ion is directly proportional to the
unpair electron.The exactly half filled (d5) and completely filled d-orbitals (d10) are
extra-stable.
[ 207 ]
 n
In aq. transitional metal ion exist as complex ion, M  H 2 O 6  . Since H2O is a weak
field ligand 0  CFSE  is less and e  s  keep them unpaired as far as possible e.g.
Cr 3  H 2 O  , t 32g e0g (half filled t2g level), hence more stable.
245.  Cu(2+) 3d9 Zn (2+) 3d10
n=1 n=0
 Paramagnetic diamagnetic
 Coloured Colourless (no unpair d electron)
Low frequency (Orange zone)
absorbed   0 less  emitting colour
complimentary to it (high frequency),
Blue zone.
Unit - IX
246. The compounds where metal atoms or ions are bonded to a number of ligands, anion or
neutral molecule with excess pair of electron to form co-ordinate covalent (or) dative
bond (non-ionisable)
3
 Fe  H 2 O  6 
 
3  
Fe , Central metal ion,  Fe  H 2 O  6 
3
complex ion,  2 :  Ligand
H O
 
6 (six) co-ordination number
247. Refer text.

248.  Fe3  3d5            

3d 

4s 4p 4d

  
Outer orbital complex  sp3d 2  hybridisation  six ligands  O H 2  formed
  
co-ordinative covalent bond on donating electron pair   to the six vacants sp3d2 d
hybrid orbitals of Fe3
Shape : octahedral, Nature : Paramagnetic
3
  Fe  CN  6  Inner orbital complex, as CN ligand attack pairs up the d-electron

leaving only one e unpaired.

Fe3           
3d 4s 4p
  


d2 s p3 (six vacant hybrid orbitals to coordinate with six O H 2 molecules with


electron pair donor.

[ 208 ]
 Shape - Octahedral, Nature – paramagnetic withless   eff 
3
249.   Co  H 2 O 6  Co(0) 3d74s2, Co (III) 3d6 4s0

H2O weaker ligand as per spectrochemical series it forms high spin complex as  0  P,
Paramagnetic with configuration t 42g eg2
4
  Fe  CN  6  Fe(O) 3d6 4s2 Fe (II) 3d6 4s0

CN , strong field ligand with higher  0 (CFSE) value as  0  P , it forms low spin
complex with configuration t 62 g , e g0 , dia-magnetic.
AgNO3
250.  Co  NH 3 5 CO 3  Cl   AgCl 

It is an electrolyte forming ions  Co  NH 3 5 CO3  Cl
Name : pentaammine carbonato cobalt (III) chloride.

  Cr  NH 3  4 Cl2   Br 
251. Complex  Cr  NH 3  4 Cl2  Br 
AgNO3
  Ag Br  (pale yellow)

Ag Br + 2NH4 OH (conc.)   Ag  NH 3  2  Br  2H 2O

Soluble
5 1
Cr, (0), 3d 4s
Cr (III) 3d3 d2 sp3

  

3d 4s 4p
d2sp3 paramagnetic (n = 3)
 eff  n  n  2  BM

= 15 BM
252. Ref. Text

253. Ni(0) 3d8 4s2      

3d 4s

 Ni  CO 4              

3d sp3

Pairing occurs in presence of CO    

Shape- Tetrahedral,
eff  zero (diamagnetic)

[ 209 ]
  NiCl4 2 , Ni2  3d8 4s 0

            

sp3

Paramagnetic. eff  n  n  2  BM = 8 BM

254. In the order of field strength CN  H 2 O , thus in presence of CN low spin complexes
occur.
4
 Fe  CN  6 

(VBT) d2sp3 - hybridisation Fe (II) 3d6 i.e. 0  P, t 62g t eg

0
, n=0

 Fe  H 2 O 6  t 42g eg2 (two unpair e i.e. n = 2)

sp3 d2 - hybridisation (VBT)   eg

   t 2g (n = 4)
High spin complex, Due to pesence of different number of unpair e , these have
different colours. Different values  0 also support this.
2
255.  Ni  CN  4  Ni (0) 3d8 4s2

Ni (II) 3d8 4s0     

2
 Ni  CN  4         
Inner orbital complex dsp2 hybridisation
n = 0 (no unpair e ) diamagnetic
As there is absence of unpair  e  it is colourless.
2
 Ni  H 2 O 6  Inpresence of H2O, pairing does not occur and an outer orbital complex
is formed with sp3d2 hybridisation. Thus, the complex undegoes d-d transition absorbing
t 6
2g eg 2  low frequency (red light) and emitting its complementary colour, green.

256. Ref text (Page - 392)

[ The electronic configuration of e(s) in t2g and eg depends on  0 value .
If 0  P (P = the energy required for e pairing in a single orbital) high spin
complexes (paramagnetic) are obtained. Low energy difference between t2g and eg)
absorbes less frequency in the visible zone emitting high frequency corresponding to its
complementary colour.
257 Refer text (Page - 392)

[ 210 ]
 4 2 2
258.  Ni  NO 2 6  ,  Ni  NH 3 6  ,  Ni  CH 2 6 

As per spectrochemical series. NO 2  NH 3 > H2O

4 2 2
Energy absorption :  Ni  NO 2  6    Ni  CH 3  6    Ni  H 2O 6 

hc
Since E = , wavelength of energy absorbed will be in the order

2 2
Ni  H 2 O 6   Ni  NH3 6  <  Ni  H 2 O  6 

259. (a)  Co  NH 3  4  H 2O  2   SO 4 3
2

(b)  Cr  en 3  PO 4

(c) K 2  Pt  CN 6 

(d) Na 3  Fe  C 2 O 4 3 

Unit - X
B (a) Account for the following :
: Cl
1.

Chlorobenzene
* C is sp2 hybridised
* Due to greater s-character (33.3%) releases less e towards ‘Cl’ and C-Cl bond
becomes less polar.
* C-Cl bond developes double bond character due to delocalisation of lone pair in
‘Cl’.
* C–Cl bond length is less (due to greater ‘s’ character) dipolemoment = charge 
distance. Less dipolemoment makes the bond less polar.

Cl

Chlorocyclohexane
* sp3- hybridised.
* s-character 25%. partial (–ve) charge on ‘Cl’ is more getting the bond (C–Cl)
polar.
* No. resonating structures
* C-Cl bond length is more and hence greater dipolemoment and C–Cl bond is
more polar.

[ 211 ]
2. Chlorobenzene is extremely less reactive and fails to undergo nucleophilic substitution
reaction generally.
Because –
(i) Resonance effect developes  -character in C–Cl bond.

:Cl: Cl

..............

(ii) Difference in hybridisation reduces the bond length

e.g. C–Cl bond length in chlorobenzene 168 pm (sp2) while C–Cl bond length in
chlorocyclohexane is about 177 pm due greater ‘p’ character out of sp3
hybridisation.
Shorter in the bond length, greater is the bond dissociation energy and less is the reactivity.
(iii) Instability of phenyl cation.
(iv) The ring in chlorobenzene is e -rich and hence not attacked by nucleophiles ( e
rich species)
3. Alkyl halides are polar & held by dipole force. On the otherhand water moelcles are
held by stronger H-bonding. When alkyl halides are added to water the new forces of
attraction (solute-solvent) between water and alkyl halide molecules is less than water-
water molecules (solvent-solvent interaction). As halogen fails to form H-bond, the halides
are not soluble (immiscible) in water.
4. Grignards reagents are very reactive and react with moisture forming alkane. So it must
be prepared in anhydrous condition.
dry ether
RMgX  HOH  moisture   RH  Mg(OH)X

CH 3  CH 2  C H 2 (10 ) less stable.
5. CH 3  CH  CH 2  H  
Ad E


CH 3  C H  CH 3 (20  more stable) greater

 CH3–CHBr – CH3
CH 3  C H  CH 3  Br  
2–Bromoprane major product.
Markownikoff’s rule :
The negative part of the addendum (Br– here) goes to C atom of the C  C containing
less number of H–atoms.
6. Free radical oddition reaction.
C6H5 CO–O O–CO–C6H5   C6H5  + CO2
 2 C6H5CO.O. 


 C6H6 + Br (chain initiation)
C6H5. + HBr 

CH3  CH  CH 2  (10 )
|
Br
CH3 – CH=CH2 +  Br –––––

CH3  C H  CH 2 Br (2 0 )

more stable with better yield.

[ 212 ]
 Propagation :
CH 3   CH  CH 2 Br  HBr 
 CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 Br  Br 
(20) free radical 1-Bromopropane (major product)
Thus, when HBr adds to propene (unsymmetrical alkene) 1-Bromopropane is formed
as peroxide effect or Kharasch effect.
7. (i) HCl fails to form Cl. (free radical) as (smaller bond length)
H–Cl has greater bond strength to undergo bond fission.
(ii) In case H–I termination step predominates over propagation liberating iodine.
i.e. C6 H5 COO   HI 
 C6 H 5COOH  I

Propagation : CH 3  CH  CH 2  I 
 CH 3  C H  CH 2 I

Termination : I   I  I2

8. Iodination of alkanes being reversible and endothermic reaction, it’s carried out is presence
of oxidising agent like HIO3 / HNO3. The product HI gets oxidised liberating I2 (reactant).
The reactant concentration increases to favour better yield or the reaction proceeds in
forward direction as per Le-Chatelier’s principle.
 RI  HI
RH  I 2 

5HI  HIO 3 
 3I 2  3H 2 O

2 HI  2HNO 3 
 I 2  2NO 2  2H 2 O

2IO3  12H   10e 

 I2  6H 2O
 2HI  I2  2H   2e    5


2IO 3  2H   10HI 
 6I 2  6H 2 O

i.e. HIO3  5HI 

 3I 2  3H2O
9. Alkyl halide with KCN gives alkyl cyanide. Cyanide ion is a resonance hybrid of following
structures:
2      
C  : N : 
 
C   N  
 :C:  : N : = CN
    

It is clear that cyanide can attack nucleophilic site through ‘C’ as well as N. Hence it’s an
ambident nucleophile.

  
KCN in an electrovalent compound  KCN   K   C N  with C N nucleophile
 
and the attack mostly occurs through ‘C’ atom of the cyanide group as C–C bond is
stronger than C–N bond.

NC + C X N C C +X

[ 213 ]
10. AgCN is predominately covalent. Therefore, in this case only N-atom is free to donate
the e pair and the nucleophilic attack mostly occur through the N-atom of the cyanide
group forming isocyanide as major product.
 
RX  Ag  C  N : 
 R  N  C :  AgX
11. C and N can form multiple bond. In CN bond can be made through ‘C’ to form cyanide
and through ‘N’ to form isocyanide. Similarly ‘N’ and ‘O’ also can form multiple bond.
‘N’ of the group –NO2 bonded to C. It’s nitrocompound while ‘O’ of –NO2 bonded to

‘C’, C –O–N=O organic nitrite is formed. Group with more than one attacking site
is called ambident nucleophile.

12. KNO2 is an ionic compound giving nitrite ion, O  N  O . Here the linkage through
oxygen takes place giving alkyl nitrite.

 R  O  N  O  X .
RX  O  N  O 
On the other hand AgNO2 is mainly a covalent compound and attack can take place
through nitrogen atom which has a lone pair of e   s  ,


O
Ag - O - N = O + C 2 H5 Br 
 C2 H5  N  AgBr
O
Nitroethane

13. Alkyl halide can be prepared from alcohol breaking C OH bond where C– is sp3 –
hybridised. Due to greater p-character (75%), the bond length is tending more towards
fissionability and substitutive nature.
ZnCl 2  Anh.
e.g. ROH + HCl   RCl + H2O

ZnCl2 (Anhy) is a Lewis acid its e – attracting tendency makes the C–O bond weaker
favouring formation of carbo-cation. This results the reactivity of alcohols follows in the
order 30 > 20 > 10 (ZnCl2 even not necessary in case of 30 alcohol). In case of 30-
alcohol the 30-carbocation better stabilised by +I effect and hyperconjugation.
On the other hand in phenol due to resonance, there developes – C = O,
   character  , making stronger bond between C & O and substitution by –X is not
possible.

:O-H O-H


  .............


Further protonation of phenol is not possible, as ‘O’ already acquired (+) charge due to
delocalisation of its lone pair of e .

[ 214 ]
14. 30– alcohol is preferred for protonation as 30–carbocation is more stable due to (i) +I
effect (ii) hyperconjugation effect.

H
 CH3 3 C  OH 
H O
 2
CH3 C CH3
CH3
(+I effect)


CH 3
H  CH 2  C  CH 3  H+
 CH 2  C  Nine hyper conjugative

| CH 3
CH 3
structure.
15. NaBr  H 2SO 4 
 NaHSO 4  HBr

ROH  HBr 
 RBr  H 2O
But HI is a better reducing agent (HI > HBr > HCl) due to bigger size and longer
H–I bond length.
So HI (not HBr and HCl) can easily be oxidised by H2SO4.
H 2SO 4 
 H 2 O  SO 2  O

2HI  O 
 H 2O  I2
Due to absence of HI, alcohol fails to give RI in presence of conc. H2SO4.
16. Conc. H2SO4 used to prepare HX (NaX + H2SO4) caused dehydration of 30 and 20
alcohols forming alkene as the by - products. The order of dehydration of alcohol :
30 > 20 > 10.

CH3 CH2
CH3 CH3 |
| | ||
H
 CH3  C
 H2O deprotonation

CH3  C  OH  CH 3 - C - OH 2   CH3  C
Pr otonation H
| | | |
CH3 CH3 CH 3 CH 3

17. H3PO4 is an acid but not an oxidant like H2SO4. HI is obtained when H3PO4 acid
reacts with KI
KI  H 3 PO 4 
 KH 2 PO 4  HI

CH 3CH 2 OH  HI 
 CH 3  CH 2 I  H 2 O
18. Cyanide is an ambident nucleophile as it can bond through ‘C’ foming cyanide (nitrile)
and through ‘N’ forming isocyanide. (Two different bonding sites).
acetoneor CH 3OH
19. CH 3  CH 2   Cl / Br   NaI  
 CH 3  CH 2  I  Na  Cl / Br 
Such preparation of alkyl iodide from alkyl chloride or bromide in presence of acetone
or methyl alcohol is called Finkelstein reaction. Both NaCl & NaBr are very little soluble
in acetone or CH3OH. They get precipitated living alkyl iodide and reaction proceed in
forward direction with better yield of iodoalkane (RI).

[ 215 ]
20. Isomers of Bromobutane :
CH 3
CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 Br, CH  CH  CH  CH , |
3 2 3 CH 3  CBr  CH 3
|
CH 3  CH  CH 2 Br Br
|
CH 3
(10) (20) (30)
B.P. : CH 3   CH 2 2  CH 2 Br  CH 5CHBr  C2 H5   CH3 2 CHCH2 Br   CH3 3 C Br

CH3
|
CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 Br  CH 3  CH  CH 2  CH3  CH 3  CH  CH 2 Br  CH3  C Br
| | |
Br CH 3 CH3
The b.p. decreases with decrease of vanderWaals force which depends on size and
volume of the moelcule.
21. Due to sterric effect in 30 – alkyl halide the back side approach of the nucleophile
becomes hindered as a result 30alkyl halide becomes less reactive.
It can proced through SN –1 mechanism where a carbocation intermediate is formed.
Due to planarity (sp2) of the intermediate the nucleophile can approach from either side
resulting (optically inactive) racemic mixture e.g.
CH3
CH 3
| C
I. H  C  Br 
Slow
 
 H + Br–
C2H5
|
C 2 Br ( sp hybridisation)
2

CH 3
CH3 CH3 |
 
OH OH
II. HO C H     H  C  OH
C |
C2H5
(+) H C2H5 C2 H5
Carbocation ( )
As slow step (rate determining) involves only alkyl halide it’s a first order reaction.
rate = k [alkylhalide]
The second step is fast (ionic reaction)
22. 2–Bromo propane with sodium ethoxide undergoes substitution as the smaller ethoxide
acts as a nucleophilie (weaker base)
H H
| |
CH 3 - CH 2O - + CH3 - C - Br SN  2 CH CH O  C  CH 3
|   3 2
|
CH 3 CH 3

23. Ease of Hydrolysis of chlorobenzene.

i) When chlorobenzene is heated with aq. NaOH solution at a temperature of 623 K
and a pressure of 300 atm., phenol is formed. (Dow’s process)

[ 216 ]
 Cl ONa OH
NaOH (aq) dil HCl

623K ,300atm
  

The presence of an electron with drawing –NO2 group at O– and p–position

increases the tendency to be hydrolysed. The EWG increases the nucleophilicity
of ‘C’ joined to –Cl.
Cl OH
(a ) NaOH 443 K

(ii) dil HCl
(ii)
NO2 (NO PRESSURE) NO2

Cl OH
NO2 NO2
(a ) NaOH 360 K
(iii) 
(ii) dil HCl
NO2 NO2

Cl OH
O2N NO2 O2N NO2
Warm with
(iv) 

water
NO2 NO2
(o- and p- substituted)
(v) No effect if electron withdrawing –NO2 is substituted at m-position.)
The condition shows that the conversion of –Cl to –OH increases with substitution
of –NO2 group at o– and p– position. More is the presence of – NO2 group more
is the ease of SN reaction.
24. (a) Benzene undergoes electrophilic substitution reaction.
In Friedal-Craft’s reaction benzene undergoes alkylation and acylation. The
electrophile is produced in presence of a Lewis acids ( e acceptors) like AlCl3
(Anhy.) or FeCl3 (Anhydrous).


 C H3 (electrophile)   AlCl4 
e.g. CH 3Cl  AlCl3 

CH3
SE
+ CH3   + H+

 Al Cl4   H  
 AlCl3  HCl
(b) In thiol R–S–H the bond dissociation nergy of S–H is less than O–H because ‘S’
is less electronegative and of bigger sizer. i.e. RSH is a stronger acid than ROH.
Stronger is the acid weaker is the conjugate base i.e. RS– is a weaker base.
Due to less electrongativity of ‘S’, –SH is a better nucleophile i.e. having greater
e releasing tendency..

[ 217 ]
25. –Cl is a ring activating reagent & hence -o/p- directing so chlorobenzene on nitration
gives o– and p– nitro chlorobenzene where p– nitro chlorobenzene predominates due
to less steric factor (position effect).

:Cl: :Cl: :Cl: (ERG)


Cu

 Cl2  FeCl3  
  ...............

+
H Cl ClH
In the resonating structure the +ve charge rests on the ‘C’ to which the electron releasing
–Cl is linked and makes it stable i.e. on substitution of ‘Cl’ at p- position gives
stable structure.
26. –NO2 group shows its effect at –o and p– position and not at m-position. So m-
nitrochlorobenzene not easily hydrolysed.
In case of m-mitro chloro benzene, none of the resonating structure bears the negative
charge on the C– atom linking to –NO2 group. Therefore, the presence of –NO2
group at m-position does not stabilise the –ve change (contrary to –NO2 group at
o– and p– position) and no effect on reactivity is observed by the presence of –
NO2 group at m-position.

27. Nitrating agent is a mixture (1:1) of conc. HNO3 and Conc. H2SO4.
As H2SO4 is stronger HNO3 acts as base, the proton acceptor.
  

H HSO 4
H  O  N  O   H O N O 
 ONO  H2O
| Nitronium ion
H O
O

i.e. HNO3  H 2SO4 
 N O2  HSO4  H 2O
electrophile

N O 2 (electrophile) attacks the benzene ring, rich of  ( es ) favouring SE.
28. Chlorobenzene undergoes electrophilic substitution reactions like chlorination, nitration,
sulfonation and Friedel- Crafts reaction. Halogen atom (–Cl) inspite of greater
electronegativity it imparts electron releasing tendency due to presence of lone pair of
e  s  conjugative with  and  bonds. It activates the ring and further substitution
occurs at o– and p– positions with respect to halogen atom .

[ 218 ]
 Thus, chlorobenzene when heated with CH3Cl in presence of FeCl3(Anhy.) o– and p–
chloro toluene are formed. Due to –I effect of -Cl, the ring gets some what deactivated
as compared to benzene & hence SE reaction in halo-arenes –occur slowly and require
more drastic condition as compared to those in benzene. Thus, alkylation of
chlorobenzene is slower than alkylation of benzene.
Cl Cl Cl

CH 3Cl

FeCl 3
 +
CH3
CH3

CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
| | 
| 
HBr
29. CH 3  C  CH 2OH   CH  C  CH OH  H 2O
2 
Methylshift
 CH 3  C  CH 2 
 H  3
|
2
|
|
CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
Neo-pentylalcohol 10  Lessstable 

Br
|
 
Br
 CH 3  C  CH 2  CH3
CH 3  C  CH 2  CH 3 |
| CH3
CH 3
(30  carbocation more stable) tertpentyl bromide

30. C6H5CH2Cl (Benzyl chloride) is a primary alkyl chloride while (C6H5)2CH Cl is a

secondary one. The hydrolysis of both these compounds with aq. KOH (Polar) is likely
to proceed by SN –1 mechanism due to ___
(i) by ionisation the carbocation in both the cases & are resonance stabilised.
(ii) In water, a polar solvent the ionisation is favoured leading to SN1 mechanism

CH2


C6 H 5CH 2 Cl  
 Slow step   + Cl–
10-Carbocation


C6 H 5  CH  C6 H 5  
 Slow step  

| CH + Cl–
Cl
20-Carbocation (more stable)
The secondary carbocation is more stable as the +ve charge dispersed/ delocalised
on two phenyl groups. Thus C6H5 CHCl–C6H5 is more easily hydrolysed by KOH
(aq.) as compared to C6H5CH2Cl.
SN
31. R  Cl  KOH  aq    ROH  KCl
Here OH  is the nucleophilie and alkylchloride undergoes nucleophilic substitution
reaction.

[ 219 ]
 But in presence of alcoholic KOH, alkyl chloride undergoes elimination reaction forming
alkene.
H
KOH
C2H5O C C   C=C + C2H5OH + X 
 C2 H5 O

This is a biomolecular  -elimination reaction, (E2).

Reactivity (E2) : 10 > 20 > 30
Reactivity (E1): Proceeds through carbocation.
30 > 20 > 10

CH3 CH3
CH 3
| C2H 5O |
Slow step
CH 3  C  X   CH3 C CH 3  C + C2H5OH
Fast ||
|
CH 2 H CH 2
H2 C H
32. Hexachlorobenzene : ( Perchlorobenzene)
It is prepared by chlorination of benzene at 150 – 2000C with FeCl3 catalyst. It undergoes
electrophilic substitution reaction.
FeCl3
C6 H 5  6 Cl2 
 C6 Cl6  6HCl ,
Use : Used as pesticide to protect seeds of onion, wheat etc. against fungus. It has been
Cl
Cl Cl
banned for agriculture purposes since 1981.
Cl Cl
Cl
Benzene hexachloride (BHC), (Lindane)
Actually it’s gamma – hexachloro cyclohexane. (C6H6Cl6)
h
C6 H 6  3Cl2 

 C6 H 6 Cl6
It is out of free radical addition reaction
h
Cl2 

 2Cl

Cl
Cl Cl Cl Cl
+ Cl.
 Cl 2
 + .Cl 

. Cl Cl
Cl
Cl
It is used as insecticide under the name gammaxane.
(It is not an aromatic compound)
33. Ammonolysis of alkyl halide :

In ammonia, N H 2 acts as a nucleophile. On subsequent ammonolysis it forms a mixture
amines along with quarternary salt. So particular amine can’t be obtained in pure form.

[ 220 ]
 
RX  HNH 2 
 HX
 RX
RNH 2 
 HX
RX
 R 2 NH 
 HX
RX
 R 3 N   R 4 N X
0 0 0
1 amine 2 3 Tetraalkyl
ammonium halide.

34. (a) CH 3  CH 2  CH 2Cl CH2 = CH – CH2 Cl

n – propylchloride allyl chloride

C Cl sp3 hybridised, C Cl bond length is more and easily

fissionable & can undergo SN(2) reaction


slow
CH 2  CH  CH 2  Cl   CH 2  CH  C H 2  Cl 


 
OH
CH 2  CH  CH 2OH 
 fast  C H 2  CH  CH 2

Allyl chloride shows high reactivity as the carbocation formed is stabilised by

resonance while no such stabilisation of carbocation exists in case of n-propyl
chloride.

(b) CH 3  CH 2  Cl CH2 = CH Cl CH2 = CH Cl

Ethyl chloride more reactive vinyl chloride, less reactive
(sp3-hybridised) (sp2 – hybridised)
+
C – Cl single bond and bigger Between C = Cl,  character
bond length, easily fissioned developes reducing C–Cl bond length
and substitution favoured. and substitution fails to take place.
35. Lower alkyl halide when refluxed with sodium in ether medium higher alkane preferably
containing even number C–atoms is formed. This is called Wurtz reaction. It helps to
enhence C-atoms in chain.
reflux
2RX + 2Na 
ether
 R–R + 2NaX.

 Na+ + e–
Mechanism. Na (highly electropositive one) 

e R X   R. + X–
Free radical is highly reactive due to presence of unpair e .
R    R 
 R  R (higher alkane)
ether
e.g. 2 C2H 5Br  2Na 
reflux
 C2H 5  C2H5  2Na Br
Butane
36. Desired aliphatic compounds can be synthesized by suitable nucleophilic substitution
reaction.

[ 221 ]
 e.g. (a) Preparation of alcohol, R  X  KOH 
 ROH  KX

(b) ether RX + NaOR 

 ROR  NaX
(c) thiol RX + NaHS 
 RSH  NaX
alcohol
(d) amine RX + HNH2   RNH 2  HX

37. Electronegativity of C = 2.5, H = 2.1, Cl = 3.0

Cl Cl

C C
Cl Cl H H
Cl H
(i) sp3 hybridised, tetrahedral
(ii) Symmetrical assymetrical
(iii)   0 (non polar)   0 (polar)

Cl Cl Cl
Cl

38. Cl
Cl (p-) (o-) (m-)
m.p 325 K 256 K 249 K. [p – > o – > m– ]
The structure of para isomer is more symmetrical (Less entropy), the molecules are
more closely packed in solid state than the corresponding o- and m- isomer.
The attractive forces are more resulting in higher melting point compared to o– and m–
dichloro benzene.
The b.p. follows in the order of decreasing vander Waals force.
The b.p.decreases in the order : o– > p– > m– dichlorobenzene.
39. Nature of C – X bond in alkyl and arylhalide.

:Cl: Cl
169 pm
C Cl
.
  ....

177 pm
(i) In alkyl halide ‘C’ is sp3 hybridised has (i) Here in aryl chloride ‘C’ is sp2
C – Cl bond is bigger due to less hybridised.
s-character and higher p-character hence C–Cl bond length is
lessened.
(ii) C–Cl bond is having only  character.. (ii) C–Cl bond acquires partial -  .
Character
i.e. C-Cl bond is stronger than
C–Cl bond of alkyl chloride.

[ 222 ]
 (iii) Polarity - C –Cl bond is more polar (iii) Less polar (1. 73 D)
(2.05 D)
(iv) Reactivity : More reactive. (iv) Less reactive.
higher bond dissociation energy.
(v) Alkyl halide undergoes nucleophilic (v) It fails to give SN reaction ordinarily
substitution reaction. rather undergoes electrophilic
substitution reaction.
Cl ONa OH
NaOH 10% aq  dilHCl
40. 
623K, 200atm
 
 NaCl


Chlorobenzene is less reactive fails to undergo nucleophilic substitution reaction as incase

of alkyl halide / chlorocyclohexane.
( See answer. Q.2 of b(a))
41. Iodination of benzene :
I
HNO3 or HIO3
+ I2 
 
 + HI

Here the reaction is slow and reversible and carried out in presence of an oxidant.
The HI formed is a powerful reducing halogenacid (HI > HBr > HCl > HI), due to
low bond dissociation enthalpy (299 kJ/ mole), greater bond length. On oxidation
with HNO3 or HIO3, the liberated iodine favours the reaction in forward direction.

2HNO 3  2HI   2NO 2  2H 2O  I 2

5 HI  HIO 3   3H 2O  3I 2

K
C6 H5I HI
C6 H6  I2 
Increase of [I2] increases the dr. as K is consant the nr. must have to increase i.e. more
yield of C6H5I also following the oxidation decrease of HI takes place. [HI] decreases
i.e. [C6H5I] increases favouring forward reaction [Lechatelier’s principle].
h
42. C6 H 5CH 3  Cl 2 

 C 6 H 5 CH 2 Cl (Benzyl chloride)
C 6 H 5 CHCl 2 (Benzal chloride)
C 6 H 5 C Cl3 (Benzotrichloride)

Benzyl carbocation, C6 H 5 CH 2 is stabilised by resonance hence undergoes SN–1

reaction easily. Due to more favourable substitution reaction these chain substituted
chloro compounds of toluene acts as intermediate to get many other products.
examples : (a) preparation of benzyl alcohol
h
C6 H 5 CH 3  Cl2   C6 H 5CH 2Cl  HCl

[ 223 ]
 C6H 5 CH 2 Cl  KOH  aq  
 C6H 5  CH 2OH  KCl
(b) Preparation of benzaldehyde
OH
C 6 H 5 CHCl2  2KOH 
 2 KCl
 C 6 H 5  CH  C6H5 CHO

OH
(c) Preparation of benzoic acid :
3KOH
C6H5CCl3 
3KCl
 C6H5  C  OH3 
 H2O
C6H5COOH(or)C6H5COOK
43. SN –1 SN – 2
 Unimolecular nucleophilic substitution  Biomolecular substitution reaction
reaction
 Here rate of reaction depends on  rate depends on concentration of
concentration of the substrate. both substrate and and nucleophile.
  
rate = k[RX] rate = k  RX   Nu 
 Proceeds through two steps of which  It is a single step process.
first one is slow and second step is fast.
(CH3)3CBr + OH– 


I. slow
 CH3 3 C Br    CH3 3 C   Br 

II.  CH3 3 C  OH  

Fast
 CH3 3 C OH
Slow step is the rate determining step.
 It proceeds through formation  It proceeds through an unstable transition
of an intermediate i.e. carbocation. state where bond breaking and bond
making take place simultaneously.
The ease of reaction depends on
stability of the carbocation. Therefore
  
R 3 C  R 2 C H  R C H2 OH+ C X HO C X
30 20 10
T.S.

 HO - C
  X

The reactivity follows in the order :

10 > 20 > 30
10 is more feasible due to less crowding effect
favouring attack of the nucleophile from the
back opposite to the side of Br
 Racemic mixture (optically inactive) is  Inversion of configuration takes place
formed as the intermediate carbocation is
planar where nucleophilic attack can occur
from front and back in almost equal ease.

[ 224 ]
44. Due to bigger size of Iodide, bond fission takes place easily hence the substitution
follows in the order R  I  R  Br  RCl .
Any alkyl halide in presence of KI and dry acetone forms RI increasing the reactivity
towards, substitution reaction.
acetone
RX(X  Cl or Br)  KI   R  I  KX . (Filkenstein reaction)
Thus, with KI, the reactivity of alkyl halide (Cl– Br–) increases.
45. Alkyl halides (polar) are used as solvent for relatively non-polar compounds. Among
the halide the better industrial solvent is chloride rather than bromide an iodide because
chlorides have less boiling point (Less vander Waals force due to smaller size) and are
more volatile.
46. ROH + SOCl2 (thionyl chloride)  RCl( )  SO2  HCl 
Here SO2(g) and HCl(g) left the system as gas leaving RCl in situ. Thus it gets easily
purified.
47. Carbon-iodine bond is quit weaker due to bigger bond length. The bond dissociation
energy falls in the order C–Cl > C–Br > C–I. Therefore, when iodoform (CHI3) is
heated with AgNO3 solution C–I bond gets cleaved easily producing AgI (yellow)
precipitate, the C–Cl bond does not get cleaved.

B(b). Word Problem :

CH2 CH2Br KOH(aq) CH2 CH2 OH

(i) C8 H9Br,

Alc. KOH 2-Phenylethanol-1

C8H10O
CH = CH2 Polymersis
HC CH2

Styrene
n
(Phenyl ethene)
Polystyrene
(Polymer)

C8 H10 O (1) C6H 5CH 2  CH 2  OH

(alcohol)

(2) C6H5  O  CH 2  CH 3 (ethoxy benzene)

(ether)

CH2CH 3

(3)
4-ethyl phenol
OH
(Phenol)

[ 225 ]
 CH3

(4) (alcoholic) (4-methyl phenyl)

CH2OH Methanol

CH3

(5) (Phenol) OH 2, 5-dimethyl phenol

CH3
Out these functional isomers (3) and (5) are phenols, changing blue litmus to red due
to their acidic nature.
(ii) CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  Br CH3  CH  CH 3
(Mol.mass  123) |
Br
1-Bromo propane 2-Bromo propane
alc. KOH alc. KOH
CH3  CH  CH 2
(Pr opene)

KCN Na / alc
CH3  CH 2  CH 2 Br   CH 3  CH 2  CH 2CN 
 4H   CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 CH 2 NH 2
Butanamine
KCN
CH 3  CH  CH3   CH 3  CH  CH 3 
4H
 CH 3  CH  CH 3
Br | |
CN CH 2  NH 2
2-Methyl propan-1-amine
 RH (g)  Mg  OH  Br
(iii) RMgBr  H 2 O 
1.4 L at NTP weigh 1 gram
22.4
22.4 L at NTP weigh 
1.4
   16gram  1mole
i.e. the alkane is CH4 (methane)
RBr = CH3Br & Grignard’s reagent is CH3MgBr.
CH3
AlCl3  Anhy.
+ CH3Br   + HBr

The last reaction, methylation of benzene to toluene is called Friedel Craft’s

reaction.
(iv) 2 CH3  CH 3  2Br2 
 2 CH3  CH 2 Br  2 HBr
2  30 218

[ 226 ]
 2 CH3  CH 2Br  2Na 
 CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 3  2NaBr
(2  109)  218g 58 g
58 gram needs 218 gram bromoethane = 60 gram of ethane
60
55 gram of n-butane from  55  56.8gram (ethane)
58
30 gram of ethane (1 mole) occupies 22.4 L at NTP
22.4  56.8
56.8 of ethane will occupy = 42.5 L
30

(v) C4H9Br, CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 Br 10 

(A) CH 3  CH  CH 2 Br (10 )
| (1  Bromo  2  methyl propane
CH 3
 alc.KOH

Br
|
HBr
(B) CH 3  C  CH 2    CH 3  C  CH 3
| |
CH 3 CH 3 (C) isomer of (A)

CH 3  CH  CH 2 Br 
Na / dryether CH 3  CH  CH 2  CH 2  CH  CH3 (D)
| 
| |
CH 3 CH3 CH3
2,5-dimethyl hexane

B(c) Name Reactions :

(i) Balz - Schiemann reaction

The preparation of fluorobenzene form aniline is called Balz-Schiemann reaction.
+
NH2 N2Cl N N BF4 F
NaNO2 HBF4 
     
 N 2  BF3

HCl (0 50 C)
fluoroboric
Diazotisation acid Benzene diazonium
fluoroborate
(ii) Gattermann reaction :
When benzene dizonium chloride is heated with a mixture of copper power and
halogen acid (HCl or HBr) halo (–Cl or – Br) arene is formed.
+ Cl
N2Cl
Cu / HCl
 + N2

[ 227 ]
 + Br
N2Cl
Cu / HBr

+ N2 +Cl–

(iii) Sandmeyer reaction :

Preparation chloro, Bromo and cyano benzene (Benzonitrile) from benzene
diazonium chloride is called Sandmeyer’s reaction.
+ Cl
N N Cl
CuCl / HCl
  + N2

+
N N Cl Br
CuBr  HBr

Solution
 + N2 + CuCl

+
N N Cl C N
CuCN  KCN
  + N2 + Cl–

+
N2 X X
Cu X
In general : 
60 1000 C

R R


 X = – CN, –Br, –Cl, –SO3H


 with catalyst Cu(I), e.g. Cu 2 Cl2 etc.


 Without catalyst Sandmeyer type reaction takes place with thiols, water
and KI.

SR
N2 RSH + N2

H2O
Warm OH + N2

KI I
+ N2

This is an aromatic transformation reaction, where substition reaction takes place which
are not achievable by direct substitution.
(iv) Wurtz reaction involves the combination of haloalkane (RX) molecules only.
dryether
2RX  2Na 
reflux
R  R  2 NaX

[ 228 ]
(v) Fittig reaction (haloarene only)
When chloro benzene is refluxed with sodium in anhydrous ether diphenyl is formed.

dryether
2 Cl + 2Na 
reflux
+ 2NaCl
Diphenyl
(vi) Wurtz - Fittig reaction (haloalkane + halo arene)
dry ether
CH3Br + Br + 2 Na 
reflux
CH3 + 2NaBr

Toluene
(vii) Fridel-Craft’s reaction (Electrophilic aromatic substitution reaction)
R
FeCl3  Anhy 
 alkylation : + RX  
  + HX

COR
FeCl3  Anhy  (or)
 Acylation : + RCOCl 
AlCl 3 (anhy) + HCl

 Benzene ring substituted with electron with drawing deactivating groups.

(eg. nitrobenzene, benzaldehyde etc fails to undego Friedel–Crafts reaction.
 Friedel-Crafts acylation is preferred to alkylation in case of acylation an
oxygen with double bond along with –R,  C  0  which leads to decrease
 | 
 R 
 
in the density of the e (better electrophile)
NH2

 , never undergo F.C. reaction inspite of presence of activating

NH2 group (Lewis base) which predomilately reacts with Lewis acid, AlCl3
 
/ FeCl3 as a result formation electrophile C H 3 , R C O gets hindered.

 
C6 H 5  N H 2  AlCl3  C 6 H5  H 2 N :  AlCl3
(Base) (acid)


 C H3   AlCl4 
CH3Cl + Al Cl3 (anhy.) 
(viii) Finkelstein reaction :
Formation of iodoalkane : As formation of iodoalkane by direct iodination is not
favourable it’s slow and reversible, the formation of RI is carried out fom RCl and
RBr on treating with NaI or KI in presence of acetone.
acetone
RX  X  Cl or Br   NaI   RI  NaX

[ 229 ]
 (ix) Hunsdiecker reaction :
When silver salt of a monocarboxylic acid is refluxed with bromine in presence of
CCl4 (solvent) alkyl bromide is formed with loss of one C. atom.
CCl 4
CH 3  CH 2 COOAg  Br2 
reflux
 CH 3  CH 2 Br  CO 2  + AgBr 
CH3 CH 2 Br is isolateted easily..
(x) Swarts reaction : (Preparation of fluoroalkane from alkyl chloride or bromide)
RX  X  Clor Br   AgF  or Hg 2 F2 , C O F2 or SbF3 
 RF + AgCl

This method is preferred as fluorination of alkane with F2 is explosive.
i.e. CH3Br + AgF  CH3F + AgBr
(xi) Frankland reaction : (Replacement of zinc is place of Na in Wurtz reaction)
C 2 H 5 Br  Zn  C 2 H 5 Br
 C 2 H 5 Zn Br   C2 H5 2 Zn  ZnBr2
2 C 2 H 5 Zn Br 
 C 2 H 5 C 2 H 5  Zn Br2
butane
(xii) Corey - house Reaction (Preparation of unsymmetrical alkane)
Li CuI
CH 3I   CH 3Li   CH3 2 Cu Li
CH I
 CH3 2 Cu Li  2
 CH3  C2 H5  LiI  CH3 Cu
5

In general RX  R / X 
 R  R/
Note : R / must be CH3X or a primary alkyl halide, R  CH 2  X .
(xiii) Bibaum - Simonin reaction
When siver salt monocarboxylic acid heated with iodine, an ester is formed.
2CH 3 COOAg  I 2  CH 3COOCH 3  CO 2  2AgI

C2H5COO Ag I
C 2 H 5 COO2 CH 5  CO 2   2 Ag I
+ 

C2H5COO Ag I ethylpropanoate
(xiv) Hofmann ammonolysis reaction :
When haloalkanes are heated with ethanolic ammonia in a sealed tube mixture of
amines is formed.
ethanol
RX  HNH 2   RNH 2  HX
RNH 2  RX 
 R 2 NH  HX
R 2 NH  RX 
 R 3 N  HX

Statement  01 mark
B(d) What happens when : Equation  01mark
(i) When HBr adds to propene 2-bromopropane appears as major product as per
Markownikoff’s rule.
Ad E
CH 3  CH  CH 2  HBr   CH3  CH  CH3
|
Br

[ 230 ]
 But in presence of organic peroxide (benzoyl peroxide) 1-Bromo propane is formed
due to peroxide effect or Kharasch effect. This is free radical addition reaction.
Benzoyl
CH 3  CH  CH 2  HBr 
Peroxide
CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 Br
(Major product)
(ii) When ethyl alcohol is treated with PCl3, ethylchloride is formed.

PCl3  3C2H5OH 
 3C2 H 5Cl  H 3PO3
Phosphorus acid .

with PCl5 : C2 H 5OH  PCl5 

 C 2 H 5 Cl  POCl3  HCl
(iii) Here PI3 is produced in situ which refluxed with ethyl alcohol to form ethyliodide.

P4  6I 2   4PI 3
CH 3  CH 2 OH  PI 3   3CH 3 CH 2 OH  H 3 PO 3
(iv) Alkylhalide is reduced in presence of LiAlH4 or
Zn–Cu couple &ethanol, alkane is formed.
 RH  HX .
RX  2H 
(v) When ethylchloride is treated with silver salt of acetic acid (CH3COOAg) ester,
ethyl acetate is formed.
CH 3  CH 2 Cl  CH 3COOAg   CH3COOC 2 H 5  AgCl
(ester)
(vi) Formation of ether : When ethyl bromide is heated with dry silver oxide ethoxy
ethane is formed.
2C 2 H5 Br  Ag 2 O 
 C 2 H5 OC 2 H5  2Ag Br
diethylether
(vii) Ethyliodide with aqueous silver oxide ethyl alcohol is formed.
2C2 H5 I  Ag 2O  H2O 
 2C2 H 5OH  2AgI
(yellow)
(viii) Ethyl iodide with aqueous or alcoholic KCN, ethyl cyanide is formed with increases
of one C-atom in chain.
SN
C 2 H 5 I  KCN   CH 3  CH 2  CN  KI
Iodoethane Pr opanenitrile
But with silver cyanide (alcoholic) it forms ethyisocyanide as –CN is an ambident
nucleophile.
 CH3  CH 2 NC  Ag I  s 
C2H 5 I  Ag CN 
(ix) Ethybromide with alcoholic KNO2 forms alkyl nitrite

C 2 H 5 Br  K.O  N  O(alc)   C 2 H 5  O  N  O  KBr
But with Ag NO2 (alc) it produces nitroalkane.
O O
 

C2 H 5 Br  Ag  N  O   C 2 H 5  N  O + Ag Br
nitroethane
[ 231 ]
(x) Ethyl alcohol with iodine in presence of sodium hydroxide, separates yellow mass
of iodoform.
CH 3  CH 2 OH  I 2 
 CH 3CHO  2HI
CH 3CHO  3I 2 
 CI 3 CHO  3HI
CI 3CHO  NaOH 
 CHI3  HCOONa
(xi) Chlorobenzene on nitration with a mixture of conc. HNO3 and conc. H2SO4 forms
–o and p– chloro nitro benzene

Cl Cl Cl
NO2
HNO3  H 2SO 4

  +
N O2

NO2 1-chlon-2-nitrobenzene
(major) (major)

(xii) Chlorobenzene reacts with ammonia (aq.) at 2000C and 60 atm. presure in presence
of cuprous oxide to form aniline.
2C6 H 5  Cl  2NH 3  Cu 2 O 
 2 C6 H 5  NH 2  Cu 2Cl 2  H 2O
Further, chlorobenzene with sodamide (NaNH2) in NH3(l) gives aniline by the
process of elimination - addition reaction via benzyne (intermediate) formation.

(xiii) Chlorobenzene with fuming sulfuric acid gives 4-chlorobenzene sulfonic acid as
major product.

Cl Cl O
Cl
SO 2 S - OH

 H 2SO4
 +
O
SO3H
(major product)

[ 232 ]
 Cl Cl Cl
CH3Cl KMnO4
(xiv) 
AlCl3  Anhy. 
 
KOH

CH3 COOH
4-chlorobenzene carboxylic acid.

(xv) Benzene hexachloride is formed as an addition product.

Cl
Cl Cl
U.V.
+ 3 Cl2 

Cl Cl
Cl
B(e). Conversions / How can you prepare :
Cl CN COOH
Cl2 /  
CuCN H 3O
(i) 
h
 
 


HC  CNa
(ii) CH 3  CH 2  OH SOCl2
  CH3  CH 2 Cl 
SN
,

CH  C  CH 2  CH 3
HBr
(iii) CH 3  CH  CH 2 
Benzoyl peroxide
 CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 Br
AgNO 2

 Alc   CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  NO 2

CH3 CH2Cl CH2OH

CH 3Cl Cl2 / h  
KOH Aq
(iv) 
AlCl3  anhy. 1:1
 
 KCl


(v) HBr
CH2  CH  CH2  CH3    CH3  CH  CH2  CH3 KOH (alc.)
 
|
Br
CH 3  CH  CH  CH3
Cl2 Fittig reaction
(vi) C6 H 6  
FeCl3  Anhy 
 C6 H 5 Cl 
Na / dryether
 C 6 H5  C6 H 5
alc.KOH
(vii) CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 Br   CH 3  CH  CH 2
HBr

Markownikoff
 CH3  CHBr  CH3

Br
Br
HNO3  H 2SO 4
(viii)
Br2
  
 
Fe Br3 N O2

NO2

[ 233 ]
 CH2OH CH2Cl CH2-CN CH2COOH
SOCl 2  
KCN Aq H3 O
(ix)     



ConcH2SO4 Br2 alc.KOH

(x) CH3  CH2  OH 
CH2  CH2 
CCl4
 CH2 Br  CH2Br  
HCN
H  C  CH   CH 2  CH  CN (Propene nitrile)
HCl KCN
(xi) CH 3  CH 2  OH 
ZnCl2  Anhy 
 CH 3  CH 2 Cl   CH 3  CH 2  CN
Propane nitrile

H3 O


 CH3CH2COOH

KCN  aq  H 3O
(xii) CH 3  CH 2  Cl   CH 3  CH 2  CN 
 CH 3  CH 2 COOH
(xiii) HBr
CH 3  CH 2  CH  CH 2 
Peroxide
CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 Br NaI
acetone
 CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 I

NO2 NH2 N2Cl Cl

Sn / HCl NaNO2  HCl CuCl
(xiv)  

0.50 C
  
HCl


OH
Cl
Cl
HNO3  H 2SO 4 aq.NaOH
(xv)   
433K

NO2
NO2

CH 3 CH 2 CH 2 Br
| || |
HBr
alc.KOH
(xvi) CH 3  C  Br   CH 3  C 
Peroxide
CH 3  CH
| | |
CH 3 CH 3 CH3
isobutylbromide

H
|
AgCN Na  alcohol
(xvii) CH 3 Br   CH 3 NC  4H  
CH 3  N  CH3
dimethylamine
KCN SnCl 2  HCl
(xviii) CH 3 Br   CH 3  CN 
 NH3
 CH3  CHO (Stephen 's)

Br CN CONH2

CuCN (Pyridine) H 2 O 2 / OH
(xix)    

CH3  CH  CH3 CH 3
|
Cl
|
(xx) Cl 
Na / ether (reflux )
CH
|
CH 3

[ 234 ]
 alc.KOH HBr
(xxi) CH 3  CH  CH 3   CH 3  CH  CH 2 
Peroxide
|
Cl
KOH(aq )
CH3  CH2  CH2Br   CH3  CH 2  CH 2 OH
NaOH
I2 I2   CHI3
(xxii) CH 3  CH  CH 3   CH 3COCH 3   CI3 COCH3 
  CH3COONa 
|
OH
alc.KOH i) Br2 / CCl 4 Na  NH 3 
(xxiii) CH 3  CH 2Br   CH 2  CH 2 
ii) alc.KOH
 HC  CH  
CH 3Br
Na C  C Na 
excess
 CH 3  C  C  CH3

Unit - XI
B(a) Word problem :
1. Organic compound = C2H5OH
 C 2 H 5 OH  I 2 
 CH 3CHO  2HI

CH 3CHO  3I 2 
 CI3 CHO  3HI

CI3 CHO  NaOH 

 CHI3  H COONa
iodoform (yellow)

A  CHI3

 HCI3  6Ag  I3CH 

 HC  CH  6AgI
(B)

 HgSO 4
HC  CH  H 2 O  CH 3CHO
H 2SO 4 600 C
ethanal (C)
Ni
 CH 3 CHO  H 2 

 CH 3 CH 2 OH (Original compound)

2. CH 2  CH 2  H 3O  
 CH 3CH 2 OH (A)

CH 3CH 2OH  PI3 

 CH 3CH 2 I 
(B)

CH 3CH 2 I  Ag NO 2 
 CH 3 CH 2 NO 2
HONO NaOH
CH3  CH 2  NO 2 
Nitroacid
 CH 3  C  NO2   Blood red colour..
||
N  OH
Pseudonitrol

3. A  C 2 H 5  OH B  C 2 H 5 Cl

[ 235 ]
 O
Zn dust
C  CH 2  CH 2 CH 2  CH 2  O3  CH2 CH2 
H O
 HCHO
2

O O
OH
OH OH COOCH3
COONa H 3O  COOH CH3OH
4. A  C6H5OH  phenol, 
 
H 2SO4
Methylsalicylate

5.  2 C 2 H 5I  H 2O ,
C2H5  O  C2 H5  2HI 
(A) (B)
dryether
C 2 H 5 I  Na 
 Wurtz  C 4 H10  n  butane 

1
6.  C 2 H5 O Na  H 2  g 
C 2 H5 OH  Na 
2
(B)
Conc.H 2SO 4 HI
2C2 H 5 OH 
413K
, C 2 H 5O C 2 H 5   C 2 H5 I  E 
(D)

C 2 H 5 ONa  C 2 H 5I 
 C 2 H5O  C2 H 5  NaI
(B) (E) (D)
B(b) Account for the following :
H  
1. CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 OH 
Pr otonation
 CH 3  CH 2  C H 2  C H 2  H 2 O

Hydride shift


CH 3  CH  CH  CH3  H
 
deprotonation
 CH 3  CH  C H  CH 3
20  carbocation (Morestable)

CH 3 CH 3
| H 
| 
2. CH3  C  CH  CH 3 
 H2 O
 CH3  C  CH  CH 3
| | |
CH 3 OH CH 3 (20 )

CH 3 ion shift

CH 3 CH 3
| |
 H
CH 3C  C  CH 3   CH 5  C  CH  CH3
|  |
CH 3 CH 3
2,3  dim ethyl but  2  ene 30  carbocation morestable

[ 236 ]
 

 H2O
H
3. CH3  CH 2  O  H   CH3  CH 2  O  H  
|
H

 
CH3 CH2 
 CH 3  CH 2  O  H H
 CH3  CH2  O  CH2  CH3
|
CH3 CH2 O H CH 2  CH 3
2 moles of alcohol gives one mole of ether.
Conc.H 2SO 4
2CH3  CH 2 OH 
413K
CH 3  CH 2  O  CH 2  CH 3
4. Victor Meyer’s test :
Reagents 10 alcohol 20-alcohol 30 alcohol
i) I2/red P R CH2 OH R2 CHOH R3COH
I2/red P
R CH2 I R2 CHI R3 C I
ii) Ag NO2
R CH2–NO2 R2 CHNO2 R3 C–NO2
iii) NaNO 2  HCl HONO HONO HONO
 HONO
R  C  NO 2
|| R NO2
N  OH C No reaction
(Nitrolic acid) R N=O

NaoH (or) KOH KOH (dil)

iv) NaOH NaOH (Aq) Blue colour colourless

Blood red colour.

5. Reagents CH3OH CH3–CH2OH

I2/KOH Does not respond When ethyl alcohol is warmed with
alkaline iodine yellow mass of
iodoform results.
CH3–CH2OH + I2  CH3CHO + 2HI
CH3CHO + 3I2  CI3CHO + 3HI
CI3CHO + KOH   CHOOK
 CHI3 (s)
yellow
6. Estrification follows fission of – O H bond, with increase of alkyl group +I effect
increases increasing electrodensity around ‘O’-atom. consequently the bond
cleavage in O–H bond becomes difficult i.e. alkyl group decreases the polarity of
the O–H bond. This adversely affect the reactivity of alcohol. So the reactivity
during esterification following in the order –CH3 > 10 > 20 > 30.

[ 237 ]
 O +
O H OH

Mechanism : R C 
H

 R C  R
 C
OH OH OH
+ ROH

O OH
O-H OH
R C + R C


H 

R C - OH2 H  shift OH
OR 
 R  H2O
C 
  O
(Ester) OR OR H R
18
This can further be confirmed by isotopic 1-labelling taking R  O  H

RCOOH  RO18  H 
 RCOO18R  H 2O, H 2O18 is not formed.
7. The polar – OH group forms inter molecular H–bond with water. The solute (alcohol)
solvent (water) attraction releases energy that favours the dissolution process. With
increase of non-polar alkyl group the polarity decreases & the solubility decreas e.g.
n-heptyl alcohol is almost insoluble. Thus, the solubility decreases in the homologous
series. Among the different trops of alcohols the solubility decreases in the order 10 >
20 > 30.
     
H–bonding : H O H O H O HO
| | | |
H R H R

8. Among the isomeric alcohols, the boiling point decreases with increase of branching
due to decease of vander Waals forces of attraction
e.g. Butan-1-ol (10) > Butan–2–ol (20) > 2-methyl propan-2-ol (30)
9. Acidic hydrolysis of alkene (e.g. propene)
H
 O 
H
CH 3  CH  CH 2 

 CH 3  C H  CH 3 H H
 

CH 3  CH  CH 3
|
OH

10.

[ 238 ]
  Intramolecular H-bondng Intermolecular H-bonding
 Moelcules are held by weak Here these molecules are held by
vander Waals force and hence volatile. stronger H-bonding & having higher
b.p
11. C6 H5 – O – H (phenol) C6H5 – CH3 (Toluene)
3.1 2.1
 has polar O  H group  –CH3 group is non-polar
Electronegativity of 0, 3.1 and that of  Molecules are held by weaker
H = 2.1. vander Waals force.
 Molecules are much associated by  Molecules are held by weaker
stronger H-bonding (inter molecular) vander Waals force.
 Greater molecular association accounts
for higher b.p.

O H C OH
12. 2
sp sp3
   1.54D   1.71D
 Less polar more polar
 C-OH shorter bond length (sp2 hybridised) C – OH longer bond length
(sp3-hybridised)
 less solute - solvent attraction  more dipole-dipole attraction
and less soluble. (H–bonding)
i.e. alcohol is more soluble in
water.

13.

Resonating structure of phenol :

less stable resonating structure of phenol as
(i) positive charge rests on more electronegative ‘O’ atom.
(ii) Charge separation involves expense of energy.

[ 239 ]
 Thus, phenol is less stable, However, phenoxide or phenate ion is morestable as :
(i) all the forms contribute to the resonance hybrid.
(ii) These do n’t involve charge separation rather charge delocalisation.
Therefore the equibilibrium shifts more towards right favouring ionisation

 
increasing more of  H   or  H 3 O  and hence more acidic.
 


In alcohol : ROH  RO  H 
eqbm. 


alkoxide

The alkoxide ion R  O is unstable due to +I effect and the equilibrium is more
towards left reducing the  H   and hence less acidic / neutral.
14. Acids are e acceptors (Lewis concept), the electron accepting tendency increases with
the presence of electron withdrawing group –NO2 group is an ewg as N & O are both
more electronegative. This is the reason why nitrophenols are more acidic than phenols.
Further more is the stability of conjugate base more is the acidic nature. Here p-nitro
phenoxide has more resonating structures hence more stable the phenoxide itself. At p-
position greater dispersal of (–) charge on ‘O’ takes place than –NO2 group at o–
position.
That is the reason why p-nitrophenol is more acidic than phenol i.e. p- > o – > m – nitro
phenol

15. Phenols with neutral FeCl3 generally give violet colouration or even red depending on
the structure due to formation a complex salt.

[ 240 ]
  Alcohols generally do not produce such deep coloration when treated with ferric
chloride soliution.

OH OH OH OH
Br Br
Br
2 
Br2 Br Aq
16. + 
CS2 or CCl4 

Br Br

In aqueous medium, phenol ionises to give phenate / phenoxide ion. The presence of
negative charge on the oxygen atom activates the ring to a large extent towards electrophilic
substitution resulting in trisubstitution
O O O
H Br
+ Br Br 
 Br + Br 
 + HBr

However in non-polar solvent, phenate ion is not formed. This means that the activation
of the ring gets suppressed since the oxygen has no –ve charge on it (as no ionisation
takes, place in non-polar solvents like CCl4 or CS2). As a result –OH group donates the
e  pair to the ring only to a small extent and mono substitution (o– or p–) takes place.
17. Mechanism. It is an example of electrophilic substitution byt the electrophile is
dichlorocarbene (:CCl2)

18. Phenol turns pink in colour on exposure to air due to slow oxidation. It oxidises to
quinone & quinone combines with phenol to give an addition product, phenoquinone
which is pink in colour.

OH + O2  O O + H2O ,
quinone

[ 241 ]
 OH + O O+ OH


 OH O O HO
dipheno.quinone pink / red colour.
19. Propanol with polar alcoholic (–OH) group exhibits inter molecular H–bonding Due to
stronger interaction it shows higher b.p. while the butane(g) is non-polar &-experience
weaker vander Waals force with lower b.p.
OH OH OH
| | |
C3H7 C3 H 7 C3 H 7
OH O-H
NO2 OCH3
20.
-I effect +I effect

– NO2 electronwithdrawing group (EWG) while  O CH 3 e -releasing group.


EWG (–NO2) group decreases the e -density on “O”-atom as a result proton release
becomes easier i.e. more acidic. Further o-nitrophenoxide ion is more stable due to
greater dispersal of –ve charge on ‘O’. More is the stability of conjugate base more is
the acidic nature.

OH O O
NO2 N O

 +H
+

(Less stable)
(More stable)
Equilibrium shifts towards right.
The reverse is the case for o–methoxyphenol.
21. Phenol –OH group is an electron releasing i.e. activating group. It activates o– and | p–
position of the benzene ring due to conjugation or +R effect. E+ attacks more at p–
position and a mixture of isomeric products obtained on halogenation, nitration and
sulfonation i.e. electrophilic substitution, SE reaction.
Reaction of phenol is favourable in alkaline / aqueous medium as phenoxide is
more reactive than phenol itself.
* The resonating structures show greater e -density (–ve) at o– and p-position to be

favourably attacked by electrophile, E+, ( Cl+, N O 2 etc.)

CH 3 H CH 3
| | Pr otonation
|
22. H 3C  C  C  CH3   CH 3  CH  CH  CH 3
| |
H  
 H2 O
H OH (20  carbocation)

Hydride shift

[ 242 ]
 CH3
| CH 3
CH 3  C  CH 2  CH 3 |
| Br 
CH 3  C  CH 2  CH 3
 
Br 0
2  Bromo  2  methylbutane 3  carbocation(stable)

23. Alcohol as acid : acids are proton donor which can be possible on fission of –O
H bond. It liberates H2(g) on treatment with active metals like Al, Na etc.
1
ROH  Na   RONa  H 2 
2
Strength : CH3OH > 10 > 20 > 30.
Alcohol as base : Base is defined as proton acceptor (Bronsted-Lowry) (or) e , donor
(Lewis concept)
  

R  O  H  H 
 R OH

|
H (Pr otonated alcohol)
It is a very weak base with pH value 7.33.
Alcohol cann’t be defined as acidic or alkaline rather designed as amphiprotic because
the nature of bond between C–OH is non-ionic but slightly polar in nature.
Aliphatic alcohol acts as a weak acid in presence of strong base. Aromatic alcohols
(Phenols) behaves as weakly acidic due to resonance stabilisation of conjugate base.

24. H3C- CH - HC = CH2 H3 O



 +
H3C - CH - CH - CH3
0
(2 )

3-phenyl but-1-ene
H shift

OH H- O- H
|  H   |
CH 3 - C - CH 2 - CH 3  H 2O:
CH 3 - C - CH 2 - CH3 H3C- C - CH2 - CH3
(More stable
due to resonance)
2-phenyl butan-2-ol 2-phenyl butan-2-ol

CH 3 - C - CH 2 - CH 3

 .....
dispersal of +ve charge
25. n-butylalcohol easily oxidises to aldehyde (further to acid) but tertiary alcohol undergoes
drastic oxidation to ketone with less number of C-atom. Thus n-butyl alcohol is a better
reductant to decolorise KMnO4.

[ 243 ]
 2   MnO 4  e 
 MnO 42 

 C3H 7CHO  2H   2e

C3H7  CH 2OH 
Butanal

or with acidified KMnO4 : MnO 4  8H   5e  

 Mn 2   4H 2 O

26. Tertiary butylalcohol with, Lucas reagent follows fission C OH bond and in the
0 0 0
order 3 > 2 > 1 . The alkyl groups are electron releasing group and influence + I
effect. This polarised C–O bond and stabilised the 30-carbocation which readily gives
turbidity with Cl– (HCl - ZnCl2).

CH 3 CH 3 CH 3
| |

CH 3  C  OH  H
|
 CH3  C  H 2O 
Cl   CH3 3 C Cl.
 CH3 C OH 2  (Less soluble)
| | |
CH 3 CH3 CH 3

27. Ethyl alcohol is polar and exhibits dipole-dipole interaction i.e. H–bond. Due to much
association or greater intermolecular force of attraction it exhibits in liquid form.
CH3–O–CH3, ether is non-polar, molecular association is less stronger due to weaker
vander Walls force dimethyl ether exhibits in gaseous state.

OH OH

28. [Ref. Q. 20]

NO2 (EWG) CH3 (ERG)
-I effect +I effect

OH
NO2
29. Two electron withdrawing –NO2 groups at o– and p– position make the
NO2
phenol more acidic due less e density at ‘O’ favouring release of H+. Further o-p dinitro-
phenoxide is more stable due to greater extent of dispersal of –ve change on ‘O’. (more
canonical structures)
Due to greater acidic nature it gets soluble in sodium carbonate solution. (alkaline)

+
OH O Na
NO2 NO2
2. + Na 2 CO3 
 2. + CO2 + H2O

NO2 NO2
Sodium 2, 4-dinitrophenoxide (Water soluble)

[ 244 ]
30. Due to resonance : (i) C–O bond developes  -charate
(ii) O– acquire +ve charge
(iii) C–O bond length decreases increasing bond strength.
By Such substitution is denied.
Resonating structures of phenol;
Fig : Ref. question no. 13.
31. Dehydration of alcohol is an elimination reaction via formation of carbocation. But
with HCl alcohol it gives alkylchloride (R–Cl)
HNO3 is a better oxidising agent, it may oxidise alcohol to carboxylic acid via aldehyde,
further nitroester may be formed.
On the other hand conc. H2SO4 is a better dehydrating agent.
H H
O 2 O
sp sp
3

32. 

 Phenoxide ion the conjugatebase is stabilised by resonance.

33. For reactivity i.e. attack of electrophile the ring must be rich in e(s) i.e. electron releasing
group like –OH, –CH3 activates the ring and favours attack of electrophile (E+).
Chlorobenzene is least reactive as Cl (3.0) is more electronegative than H (2.1), thus it
has tendency to act as EWG, reducing e density of the ring making chlorobenzene least
ractive.
On the other hand the hydroxyl group in phenol can delocalise one of the lone pairs
on ‘O’ atom into the ring activating the ring favouring SE. Thus, phenol > Toluene >
benzene > chlorobenzene.
34. Acidic nature : CF3 CH2OH > CH3 – CH2 OH
– I effect (F = 4.0) increases the acidic nature as it reduces the e density ‘O’
atom of the alcohol favouring release of proton.

35. O H
sp2
The lone pair on ‘O’ is used for delocalisation in the benzene ring of phenol developing
a  - character between C–OH bond & +ve charge on ‘O’ as well for which is less
polar.
 Dipole moment,   1.54 D
 Benzene ring shows e with drawing effect.
 
CH3  O H
sp3
Here in methanol C–OH bond is longer as C is sp3 hybridised. Here C is partially +vely
charged     & ‘O’ is partially negatively charged     is ‘O’ (3.5) has higher
electronegativily than C(2.5). Hence methanol is much polar.
Dipolemoment,   1.71D
 – CH3 group shows electron releasing effect.

[ 245 ]
36. R OH
Alkyl group (–R) is electron releasing & increases e  density on ‘O’–atom favouring
protonation.

ROH  H  
 R  O  H (Protonated alcohol)
|
H

O H

Electron with drawing effect of ring decreases e -dnsity on ‘O’, hence can’t be
protonated.
37. Phenol is a weaker acid. It is weaker than carbonic acid (H2CO3) and hence fails to
liberate CO2 from sodium bicarbonate. Had it been stronger one,
HCO 3   H   
 CO 2  H 2 O

38. Ether  C2 H 5O C2H 5  does not have replaceable hydrogen. Hence ether can be dried
by sodium whereas alcohol can’t be dried by sodium metal as it reacts to liberate hydrogen
(g).
1
 RONa  H 2  g 
ROH  Na 
2
39. Anhydrous calcium chloride with ethanol / alcohol forms addition compounds, i.e.
alcoholates, for which it’s not used to dry alcohol.
e.g. CaCl2  4 C2 H 5 OH 
 CaCl 2 .4 C 2H 5OH
No removal of water molecule Addition compound
No removal of water moelcule.
40. Reimer - Tiemann reaction :
When phenol react with alkaline carbon tetrachloride forms salicyclic acid.

O H Cl
OH O OH Cl Cl
Cl C
OH  C Cl Cl

 H 2O
 Cl C Cl Cl


Cl

OH O-H OH
COOH C OH
H 2O
  OH

B(c) Name reactions :

(For these refer text book)

[ 246 ]
Group- B (d) Answer the following :
1. Alcohols : Phenols
a. Alcohols don’t have any action on a. Phenols turn blue litmus red as these
litmus. behave acidic
b. Don’t react with NaOH/KOH b. Phenols are neutralised by NaOH to
c. Alcohols don’t respond dye test. form sodium phenoxide (salt)
d. Liberman’s test : Don’t respond. c. Phenols form coloured dye (azodye)
d. When phenol is treated with NaNO2
dissolved in conc. H2SO4 a red colour
appears which turns blue on treating
with NaOH(Aq.)
2. (i) Phenol (ii) p-nitrophenol (iii) Phenol
3. * Victor Meyer’s test Refer Group-B(b). Q. No. 4
* Lucas Test :
Reagent 10 alcohol 20 alcohol 30 alcohol
Conc HCl When Lucas reagent is Turbidity appears When Lucas reagent
0
Anhy. ZnCl2 added to 1 alcohol after five minutes is added to 30-
turbdity appears alcohol turbidity appears instantly.
on heating.
RCH 2OH  HCl
R 3C(OH)  HCl
ZnCl 2

 RCH 2Cl  H 2O
  R 3C Cl  H 2 O
4. Alcohols (R–OH) Ethers (ROR)
i) Alcohols are readily soluble in water (i) Except dimethyl ether the rest
due to intermoelcular H-bonding are not miscible with water.
ii) H2 (g) is liberated out when alcohols (ii) Ethers don’t react.
reacts with active metals like Na.
1
ROH  Na   RONa  H 2 
2
iii) Alcohols readily combine with PCl5 to (iii) Ethers react with PCl5 at high
giver alkyl chloride. temperature ROR + PCl5
ROH  PCl5 
 RCl  POCl3  HCl
  2RCl  POCl3
iv) Alcohols are readily oxidised to aldehyde (iv) Ethers are resistant to
or ketone depending on the nature oxidation.
of alcohol.
5. During destructive distillation of wood the condensate(l) collected over wood tar is
called pyroligneous acid. In addition to water it contains methyl alcohol (2–4%), acetone
(0.5%) acetic acid (10%)
6. Ethyl alcohol is commercially prepared from starchy grains, such as potatoes, barley,
rice, wheat etc. by fermantation which is a process of slow decomposition of complex
organic compounds into simpler compounds by catalytic action of enzymes. The whole
synthetic process involved (i) Saccharification (ii) alcoholic fermentation (iii) distillation

[ 247 ]

“p

‘
 diastase
2  C6 H10O5  n  nH 2O   n C12 H 22 O11
paste of starch materials Maltose
(Mash)
Fermentation:
Maltase
C12 H 22 O11  H 2O 
Pr esent in east
 2 C 6 H12 O 6
Maltose (glucose)
Zymese
C6 H12 O6  H 2 O 
(In yeast )
 2 C 2 H 5 OH  2CO2 
HI AgNO3
7. ROCH3   CH3I   AgI s
From weight of AgI the no. of –OCH3 in the given compound can be calculated
quantitatively.
2.68 gram of compound (A) gives 14.08 gram of AgI
14.08
134 gram (1 mole) of ‘A’ gives  134 = 704 gram AgI
2.68
704
704 gram AgI = moles = 3 moles (mol. mass AgI = 235 g.mol–1)
235
 The number of –OCH3 group in A = 3.
8. Preparation of acetaldehyde from ethylalcohol :
(i) Oxidation : Primary alcohol upon oxidation with  MnO 4  H   or  Cr2 O 72  H   .
Aldehyde formed by this process is to be removed by distillation from reaction mixture
as soon as it’s formed in order to avoid further oxidation to carboxylic acid. Aldehyde
is fractionated first as it has less b.p. than alcohol
Cr2 O 72   14H   6e  
 2 Cr 3  7H 2 O
R CH 2 OH  RCHO  2H   2  e 

Mild oxidising agent like Collin’s agent (CrO3.2C5H5N) or PCC, pyridinium chloro
chromate,
CrO3. C5H5N.HCl can be choosen as selective oxidising agent which converts 10 alcohol
to aldehyde prefearably.
(ii) Catalytic dehydrogenation : When 10 alcohol is heated with copper at 573 K
H
| Cu
aldehydeis formed on removal of H2(g) . R  C  OH 
573K
 RCHO + H2(g
|
H
9. Alcoholysis of acid & its derivatives :
When acid or its derivatives are allowed to react with alcohol ester is formed.
H 2SO4 (conc.)
CH 3  CH 2 OH  CH 3COOH   CH 3COO C 2 H 5  H 2O
Ethylethanoate
CH 3  CH 2 OH  CH 3COCl 
 CH 3 COO C 2 H 5  HCl

[ 248 ]
 CH3 CO H OCH3
O 
 2CH 3COO CH 3  H 2 O
CH3 CO H OCH3
(Anhydride)
CH 3  CH 2OH  CH 3CO NH 2 
 CH 3CO C 2 H 5  NH 3
ethylethanoate
Ease of esterification : 10 alcohol > 20 > 30
and among the acid derivates : acid chloride > > acid anhydride > ester > amide.
O 18 O
|| || 18
Mechanism : R C + H O-R   R  C  O R  H 2O
H
OH
18
This shows that in RO H, O H bond fission occurs not C OH of alcohol. so
it depeds on acidic nature of alcohol, so the ease of esferification is
CH3OH  CH3CH 2OH   CH3  2 CH OH   CH3 3 COH
(This is also order of their acidic nature)
Thus, esterification involves –OH of acid and –H of alcohol. This process is called
isotopic labelling.
Refer Q.No. - 6 [ Group B (B) ]

O O CH3 O CH
CH3-C + H O CH 3 
 CH 3 C O   CH3 C O
3

 Cl
Cl Cl H H
O

||
H
  CH3  C  O  CH 3

O O
|| ||
H
CH 3  C  Cl  C 2 H 5  OH   CH 3  C  OC 2 H 5  HCl
Ethylacetate
10. Cold ethanol is taken as the reaction is exothermic.
Sample-I. Methanol : Sample is heated with salicylic acid and conc. sulfuric acid, a
chatacteristic smell of oil of wintergreen (amritanjan smell)
Sample II Ethanol. If the sample responds to iodoform test it’s to be labelled sample-II
. i.e. ethanol with alkaline iodine is warmed to form yellow mass of iodoform.
Sample III If the sample does not respond to above two tests, it’s to be labelled Sample-
III.
0
170
11.  CH 3  CH 2OH  conc.H 2SO4    CH 2  CH 2  B 
0
100 C
  CH5  CH 2 HSO 4  C 
Ethyl hydrogen sulfate

[ 249 ]
 Excess of C2H5 OH
  C2 H 5 O  C 2 H 5  D 
1400
Diethylether
12. Ceric ammonium nitrate test :
When a few drops of alcohol (–OH group) is added to the aqueous solution of
ceric ammonium nitrate, the orange colour changes to red.
 NH 4 2 Ce  NO3 6  2 ROH 
 Ce  NO3 4  ROH 2  2NH 4 NO3
(orange) (red)
13. (i) Diethylether on acidic hydrolysis gives ethyl alcohol.
dil H 2SO 4 , 
C 2 H 5 OC 2 H 5  H 2 O 
pressure
 2 C 2 H 5  OH
(ii) With cold conc H2SO4 it forms oxonium ion, but on heating cleavage of C–O
bond takes place to form alcohol and – hydrogen sulfate
H HSO 4
C2H 5 O C2 H 5 

 C 2 H 5 OH  C 2 H 5 H SO 4
(iii) With acetylacting agents : (i) CH3COCl (ii) (CH3CO)2O
anhydrous
C 2 H5 O  C 2 H 5  CH 3COCl 
Zn Cl 2 
 C 2 H5Cl  CH 3COOC 2H 5
(ester)

C2H 5  O  C2 H 5   CH3CO  2 O 
 2CH 3COOC2 H 5
(iv) Diethyl ether reacts differently with Chlorine in dark and in presence of light (with
excess chlorine)
Cl2 / dark
CH3  CH2  O  CH 2  CH 3   CH3CHCl  O  CH 2CH 3
  chlorodiethylether
Cl 2 / dark
  CH 3CHCl  O  CHCl CH 3
,   ' dichloroethyl ether
CH 3  CH 2 O  CH 2 CH3 +
h
10Cl2   CCl3 CCl2  O  CCl2 CCl3  10 HCl
excess
14. (i) CH 3  CH 2 Br  CH 3 CH 2 ONa 
 CH 3  CH 2  O  CH 2CH 3  NaBr
Bromoethane Sod. ethoxide
(ii) CH3  CH2 Br  C6 H 5ONa  CH 3  CH 2  O  C6 H5  NaBr

Bromoethane Sod. phenoxide

(iii) CH3Br  C2 H 5ONa   CH 3  O  C2 H 5  NaBr

(Least crowding effect for SN  2 reactoon)

(iv) CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 Br + Na O  CH 2  CH 2  CH 3
1  Bromo propane Sod.propoxide

 CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  O  CH 2  CH 2  CH3


[ 250 ]
15. (i) When anisole is treated with a mixture of conc. HNO3 and conc. H2SO4 a mixture
of ortho and para-nitroanisole is formed where p-nitroanisole appears as major
product.

HNO3  H 2SO 4 
 N O2  HSO 4  H 2O
electrophile

OCH3 OCH3 OCH3

NO2
 NO2

SE
 +

NO2

Here –OCH3 is an electron releasing group that activates the ring facilitating attack of

N O 2 (electrophile) at o  and p  positions.
(ii) Bromination of anisole in presence of ethanoic acid and Bromine even in absence
of Fe3+ bromide catalyst p-isomer is obtained in 90% yield due to less steric factor.

OCH3 OCH3 OCH3

Br2 
Br

CH3COOH
 +

Br (Minor)
(Major)

16. (i) CH3  CH2  CH  CH2  OCH3  HI SN

2 CH 3 I  CH 3  CH  CH 2  CH 2 OH
| |
CH3 CH 3

I– is a good nucleophile. Due to steric hindrances it attacks the smaller alkyl group
following SN–2 mechanism.

CH 3 CH 3
| |
(ii) CH 3  C  CH 2 CH3 + HI
 CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 OH + CH 3  C  CH 2  CH 3
| |
O  CH 2  CH 2CH 3 I

(iii) CH2 – O + HI 
 CH2 –I + OH

 CH 3 I  CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  OH
(iv) CH 3  O  CH 2  CH 2  CH3  HI 

CH3 CH3
| |
(v) SN 1
CH 3  C  O C 2 H 5  HI  CH 3  C  I + C2 H5 – OH
| |
CH 3 CH 3

[ 251 ]
 OH
O C2H5
(vi) + HI 
 CH3–CH2I +

(vii) C6 H5 O C6 H 5  HI 
 No reaction
SN1
(viii) C6 H 5 CH 2 O C2 H 5  HI   C6 H 5 CH 2 I  C2 H 5 OH
SN1
(ix) C6H5CH2 – O – CH3 + HI   C6 H 5CH 2 I  CH3OH

S
(x) C6 H 5  CH 2  O  C  CH 3 3  HI 
N1
C6 H 5  CH 2 OH   CH 3 3 CI


[  CH 3 3 C is more stable than C6 H 5  C H 2

In former +I effect as well as hyperconjugative effect.]

O C2H5
O C2H5 O C2H5

17. + 2 N O2
conc.HNO3  H 2SO4 conc.
 + NO2 + 2H+
SE

NO2

p-nitrophenetole
(major product)
18. Strength halogen hydra acids follows in HI > HBr > HCl in order of bond length and
ease of cleavage. Thus, the nucleophilicity of halide ions follow in the ordr I– > Br– > Cl.
As HCl is a weak acid, ease of formation Cl– is difficult and Cl– is not a better nucleophile
( e releasing species) Hence no cleavage of O–C bond with conc. HCl.
19. Phenol is first sulphonated with conc. H2SO4 at 373 K to form isomeric (o– and p–)
hydroxybenzene sulfonic acid. This is followed by nitration with conc HNO3 where
simultaneously replacement of –SO3H groups by –NO2 group takes place. The prsence
of –SO3H group in the ring checks its oxidation to a great extent during nitration (with
HNO3)
20. (i) K2Cr2O7 + H2SO4
(ii) PCC (or) Jone’s reagent
(iii) Bromine water
(iv) Br2 / CS2
(v) alkaline KMnO4
(vi) LiAlH4 or NaBH4

[ 252 ]
B(e) Identify the missing compounds / reagent (s) in the following steps of reactions :
Missing compounds :
1. CH3  CH 2 Cl, CH 3 CH 2 CN 
 CH 3COOH 
 CH 4
PCC   O NH 3 
2. C2 H 5OH   CH 3CHO  CH 3COOH   CH 3COONH 4   CH3CO NH 2
Na  alcohol HONO
  CH 3  CH 2  NH 2   CH3  CH 2 OH

O - OH
CH3-CH-CH3 CH3-C-CH3 OH
  CH 2  CH  CH 3 O2
3. CH  CH 

Fe tube

AlCl3  Anhy.
 
1300 C
 H2O
 

+ CH3–CO–CH3

NO2 NH2 N2Cl OH

NaNO 2  HCl 
Sn / HCl H 3O Zn dust
4.  

00 C
 
warm
 


CHO CH3- HC(OH)

CH 2OH
(i) CH 3MgBr
5. PCC
  
(ii) H O 

2 3

O = C - CH3 COOK
KMnO4

H 2 SO 4
Br2 / KOH
  CHBr3 

OH OH
OH OH OH
Alkaline COOH Br2
Br
Sodalime
6. 
CCl4 
 
CS2 +

Br

7. CH  CH 
 HC  C Na 
 HC  C  CH2  CH3 
CH2  CH  CH2  CH3


 HOCH 2  CH 2 CH 2  CH 3

SO3 Na ONa OH OH
NaOH CO2
COOH
Soda  lim e
8. 
fuse
 
H
  

CH 3 CH 2Cl CH 2CN CH 2 COOH


H 3O
9. 
 
 KCN  
  

[ 253 ]
B(f) Conversions :
KCN  aq  NaBH NaNO s 
SOCl 2
 CH 3  CN  CH 3  CH 2 NH 
4 2
i) CH 3OH  CH 3Cl 4  H  2 dil HCl

CH3CH2OH

 PCC
(i) CH3 Mg Br
HCHO 
(ii ) H3O
 CH 3  CH 2 OH

O
Conc.H 2SO 4 O3
CH2 CH2 H 2O
ii) CH3  CH 2 OH 
1700 C CH 2  CH 2   
 Zinc dust  
O O
LiAlH 4
HCHO 
2 H 
 CH 3OH

CH3
K2Cr2O7
|
CH3 MgBr H2 O
(iii) CH3  CH  CH3
H2SO4
 CH3  C  CH
3  CH3  C  CH3
H

| || |
OH O OMgBr

CH3
|
CH3  C  CH3
|
HO

Conc.H 2SO 4
(iv) CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  OH  
CH3–CH=CH2
HBr
   CH 3  CH  CH 3 
aq.KOH
CH 3  CH  OH  CH3
|
Br


(v) CH 3  CH  CH 2  H CH 3  CH  CH 3 
H 2O
 CH 3  CH  CH 3
0
(stable 2 ) |
OH
O OH OH
|| |  |
KMnO4 HCN H 3O

H  CH 3  C  CH 3
  CH 3  C  CH 3 
 CH 3  C  CH3
| |
CN COOH

(2-Hydroxy-2-methyl propanoic acid)

CH3 COOH COOH
CH 3Cl  
O HNO3 
(vi) 
AlCl 3 (Anhy.)
 
KMnO 4  KOH
 
H 2SO 4
NO2
Cl Cl ONa OH

Cl 2 / FeCl3 NO2 NaOH dil
(vii)   
HNO3  H2SO4
 
 ,pressure
 
HCl

NO2 NO2 NO2

[ 254 ]
 NO2 NH2 N2Cl

NaNO2
Sn / HCl   2 
H PO Aq
(viii)   HCl, 50 C 
3


OH OH OH OH

C6 H 5 N 2 Cl  H 3 PO 2  H 2 O  C6 H 6  N 2  H 3 PO 3  HCl
PCC
(ix) CH 3  CH 2 OH   CH 3  CHO

OH OH
| *
|
HCN CH 3  C  H 
H3 O
CH 3  C  H
  | 

 | (Lactic acid)
CN COOH
K 2 Cr2 O7 MnO
(x) 2CH 3 CH 2 OH  H
 2CH 3 COOH 

 CH3 CO CH 3 + CO 2  H 2 O

 CaCO3
(CH3 COO)2 Ca 

 CH3COCH3  Ca CO3 

O O H
CH3 CH CH3 CH3 C CH3 OH
CH3  CH  CH 2 O2 H2O
(xi)  H
   
 CH3COCH3


NO2 NO2 NO2

HNO3
 
NH 4 HS
(xii) 
H 2SO 4
 N O2
  

NO2 NH2
NO2 NO2
NaNO 2 H2 O

HCl
 
Warm

(Low temperature) N2Cl OH

UNIT - XII
B(a) Account for the following:

 O  R
1. Both aldehydes   R C  and ketones C = O have C = O (carbonyl)
 H 
R
group. So they have almost identical properties, it undergoes nucleophilic addition (adN)
reaction as ‘C’ in carbonyl group has less e - density due to higher electronegativity of
‘O’ atom (3.5).
O

e.g. > C = O + CN 
 C

( sp )
2
Nucleopile ( sp3)

[ 255 ]
2. Carboxylic acid exhibits as a dimer having higher boiling point. Two molecules of
carboxylic acids get inked by H-bond. The size increases increasing vander Waals
force as a result b.p. increases.

H O H O H O
R R R
Dimer ( Inter molecular H-bonding in alcohol)
e.g. propan-1-ol (mol. mass 60), CH3COOH (mol. mass=60)
B.P. 37 K. B.P. 391 K.
3. H–COOH CH3COOH
– CH3 group is an electron releasing group which experiences +I effect. By such the e
density on the oxygen atom increases decreasing its e -accepting tendency and H+
(proton) release (donating tendency) decreases resulting decrease of acids character.
Acids are better proton donor (Bronsted - Lowry) and e -acceptor (Lewis)
HCOOH never experiences +I effect.
 The e - releasing group` also destablilises – COO– (anion) Less stable is the
conjugate base less is the acidic nature.

4. –I effect i.e. electron withdrawing effect decreases e density on

oxygen atom resulting easy release of H+. Thus, chloroacetic acid is stronger than acetic
acid.
5. –NO2 group is electron withdrawing group (EWG). It decreases the e density an
benzoacteion. This results easy loss of proton, and more acidic. Further the nitro benzoate
ion becomes more stable than benzoate ion (the conjugate base) The stabilty favours
release of H+ and more acidic. The acidic strengthening effect is more prominent when
substitution takes place at p-position than at m-position thus, the sequence of acidic
strength o– > p– > m - > benzene.
Figure : refer text.
– I effect and resonating effect to be considered for acidic strength of benzoic acid.

HO O
HO O C
C
6.

CH3

+I effect.
Sequence order of acidic strength.
o-toluic acid > benzoic acid > p-toluic acid.
– CH3 group is an ERG influencing +I effect decreasing acidic strength. Further, he
electron releasing substituent intensifies the –ve charge of the carboxylate anion &
destabilises and deceases the acidic nature.

[ 256 ]
 Hence, p-toluic acid is less acidic than benzoic acid.
The ortho-isomer of every substituted benzoic acid is strongest acid due to ortho effect.
O O
7. CH3 C  CH3 C
 + H+
OH O
–
The conjugate base CH3COO is stabilised by resonance and the equilibrium shifts
towards right. The proton donating tendency increases and becomes acidic.

O O O
CH3 C  CH3 C
  CH3 C
O O O

 RO   H 
In alcohol – R  OH 
RO– is unstable due to +I effect. Equilibrium shifts towards left and less acidic.
8. Resonance effect. In carboxylate (more stable conj. base) the –ve charge dispersed
between two electronegative o-atom.
9. Here the carbonyl groups gets protonated and gets stabilised by resonance. So a base.
O
||
 
10. Decarboxylation takes place, CH3  C  O 
 C H3  CO2 .

11. Decarboxylation. RCOO. 

 .R  CO 2 , R  Br2 
 RBr  Br.

12.  CO 2  H 2O. As oxidises easily acts as reducing agent.

HCOOH  O 
13. Formic acid (reductant) responds test with Fehling solution, mercuric chloride.
HCOOH  2HgCl 2 
 CO 2  Hg 2Cl 2  2HCl
14. Due to resonance.
15. – COOH is an EWG. de-activating group and m-directing
B(b) For name reactions refer text.
B(c) For distinctions refer text.
B(d) Conversion :
Cl2 red P KCN 
H 3O
1. CH 3COOH 
controlled
 Cl  CH 2COOH   CN  CH 2COOH 

HOOC  CH 2  COOH (propane-1, 3-dioicacid)

Ca  OH  HCOO   CH COO  Ca
2. HCOOH 
2
HCOO Ca 2 
3

2 Tollen 's
 CH 3CHO 
reagent
CH3COOH
LiAlH 4 Conc.H 2SO4 KMnO 4
3. CH3COOH   CH3  CH 2OH  
CH2  CH2 
H 2SO 4
HCOOH
Cl 2 NH 3 (alc.)
4. CH 3COOH 
red P
 Cl  CH 2 COOH   NH 2  CH 2 COOH

LiAlH 4 SOCl2
5. CH 3COOH   CH 3  CH 2 OH   CH 3CH 2Cl

KCN H 3O
  CH 3  CH 2  CN 
 CH 3  CH 2 COOH

[ 257 ]
 CO - C 6 H5
C6 H 5COCl
6. CH  CH 
 quartz tube 
AlCl3  Anh.


i) CH3 Mg Br
7. H  C  O 
ii) H3 O 
K 2Cr2O 7
 CH3 – CH2OH   CH3COOH
H
|
H

8. H  C  O  PCC
 CH3CH2OH   CH3CHO
|
H

LiAlH4 Conc.H 2SO 4 i) O3

9. CH3  CHO  CH3  CH2OH  
CH 2  CH 2 
ii) H 2 O / Zn
 HCHO

  O Ca  OH 

10. CH 3  CHO  CH 3COOH 
2
  CH 3COO  2 Ca   CH 3COCH 3

B(e) Complete the missing links :

2
dilH 2SO4 CH3 MgBr Cr2 O7
(i) CH  CH H 2
 CH 3CHO 
H O
 CH 3  CH(OH)  CH3 H
 CH 3COCH3
g 3

I 2 / NaOH Ag
(ii) CH 3COCH 3  
 CHI3 

 CH  CH
Sodamide CH3 I
  NaC  CNa 
excess
 CH 3C  C  CH3

HCN
(iii)  CH3 2 CO   CH3  C  OH  CN   CH3

H 3O H 2SO 4

 CH 3C  OH  CH 3   COOH  
 CH 2  C  CH3   COOH

Ag 2 O PCl5
(iv) CH 3CHO 

 CH 3COOH   CH 3COCl
H2 C2 H5 MgBr

Pd  BaSO 4
 CH 3  CHO H O
 CH 3C  OH  H  C 2 H 5 
3

  KOH alc Br2

(v) CH3CH2  CH2 Br   CH2  CH  CH3   CH 2 Br  CHBr  CH3

KOH dilH 2 H 2SO 4


 alc   CH  C  CH 3 Hg 2
CH 3  CO  CH 3

LiAlH4 Conc.H2SO4
(vi) CH3COOH   CH3  CH 2  OH 
1400 C
CH 2  CH 2

HI Na / dryether


 CH 3  CH 2  I  CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 3

[ 258 ]
Unit - XIII

B(a) Answer the following :

1. Refer text.
2. Refer text
3. Refer text
4. (i) When nitroethane is treated with LiAlH4 in presence of ether it’s reduced
to ethanamine.
LiAH 4
CH 3  CH 2 NO 2  6  H  
ether
 CH 3  CH 2  NH 2  2H 2O
(ii) BDC couples with phenol in weekly alkaline medium (pH=9-10) orange dye of
parahydroxy azobenzene is formed

OH
C6 H5 + –OH   –N=N– –OH
5. Vapourphase nitrition : Lower members of alkanes can be nitrated by vapourphase
nitration i.e. by heating a gaseous mixture of hydrocarbon and nitric acid vapoors at 673
– 773 K
HONO 2
e.g. CH 3  CH 2  CH 3 

CH 5  CH 2  CH 2 NO 2 + CH 3  CH  CH 3
|
NO 2

 CH 5  CH 2 NO 2  CH 3 NO 2
(a mixture of nitroalkanes)
6. Base is e donor, in aromatic case the lone pair on N-gets declocalised reducing the
basic nature on resonance. Aliphatic amine more basic due to +I effect.
Resonating structures : (See text)
NH2 N2Cl
2 
NaNO S
7.   H 3PO 2  H 2 O
  , deamination

HCl 00 C

OH

Zn


 , Redox reaction

COOH
NaOH

CaO / 
 , decarboxylation

8. Refer text. (Sulfanilic acid is formed)

9. Methylamine responds to carbylamine test.
10. (a) (CH3)3N (g) > (CH3)2NH > CH3NH2 > NH3
(b) More is the +I effect more is basic nature in gaseous phase.
11. 10-amine is formed. RNCO  2KOH   RNH 2  K 2CO 3
12. Hinsberg test. (30 amine fails to react with Hinsberg reagent, C6H5SO2Cl.)
13. Greater extent of H-bonding in aliphatic 10-amine. Aniline due to its higher molecular
mass and incease of size of hydrophobic aryl part aromatic amine less soluble. (More
soluble in presence of HCl due to formation of salt, aniline hydrochoride)

[ 259 ]
14. Azodye test is responded by aniline.


FeCl3  aq.
15.  CH 3 N H 3  OH  
CH 3 NH 2  H 2 O   Fe  OH 3 
reddish brown
HONO phenol dilute
16. Refer text. 20 amine   nitrosoamine 
Conc.H 2SO 4 green solution  
NaOH
red colour   deep blue.
NaNO 2
17. C6 H 5 NH 2 
HCl 00 C 
 C6 H 5 N 2 Cl 
warm
 C6 H 5OH
warter

B(b) Missing compounds (ABCD):

i)  CH 3CH 2CN  A  
CH 3  CH 2 I   CH3CONH 2  B  
 CH 3 NH 2

ii) C6 H 5 N 2Cl 
 C6 H 5CN 
 C6 H 5COOH 
 C6 H 5CONH 2
(A) (B) (C)

iii)  CH 3  CH 2CN  A  
CH 3  CH 2 Br   CH3  CH 2  CH 2 NH 2


 CH3  CH 2  CH 2 OH

iv) C6 H 5 NO 2   C6 H 5 N 2Cl  B  
 C6 H 5 NH 2 (A)   C 6 H 5OH  C 

v) C H5 NO2  C6 H5 NH 2  A   C6 H5 N 2Cl  B   C6 H5  N  N OH

p-hydroxyazobenzene
B(c) Conversions :
i) NH 3 KOH
i) K 2 Cr2O7
CH3  CH 2 OH   CH 3COOH ii) 
 CH3CONH2 
Br2
 CH3 NH2

H 3O i) NH 3
ii) CH 3   CH 2  4  C  N 
 CH3  CH 2  4  COOH 
ii) 


CH 3  CH 2 4  CONH 2 
KOH  Br2
 CH 3   CH 2 4  NH 2 (Pentan-1-amine)
NaNO 2  s  K 2 Cr2 O7
iii) CH 3  CH 2  NH 2 
HCl
 CH 3  CH 2  OH  H
 CH 3COOH
i) NH 3 KOH
ii) 
 CH 3CONH 2 
Br2
 CH3 NH 2
NaNO2 SOCl2 KCN
iv) CH 3  NH 2 
HCl
 CH 3OH   CH3Cl   CH3CN
LiAlH 4
  CH3  CH 2  NH 2

CH 3
Sn / HCl 2CH3 Br
v)  CH 3 N
CH 3  NO 2  CH 3  NH 2 

CH 3
i) NH3 KOH
vi) CH3  CH 2 COOH 
ii) 
 CH3  CH 2  CONH 2 
Br2
 CH3  CH 2  NH2
HONO K 2 Cr2 O7
  CH 3  CH 2  OH  H
 CH 3COOH

[ 260 ]
 Sn / HCl NaNO 2  HCl CuCN
vii) C6 H 5 NO 2  
 C6 H 5 NH 2 
00 C
 C6H 5 N 2Cl   C6 H 5CN

H3 O


 C6 H 5 COOH

NO2 NO2 NH2

HNO3 Sn / HCl
viii) C6 H 6 
H 2 SO 4
 
Br2 / FeBr3
 
Br Br
N2Cl OH
NaNO 2 water

HCl 00 C
 
warm

Br Br
B(d) Name reactions :
(Refer text)

UNIT - XV
1. The preparation is a multistage process beginning with heating of phenol and formaldehyde
in presence of catalyst such as HCl, ZnCl2 or NH3 base. This a condensation,
Co-polymerisation.
Uses : (i) adhesive binding agent (ii) protective purposes
(iii) making utensils
It is a thermosetting plastic as upon heating gets hardened and cann’t soften again as it
contains cross links or heavily branched polymer.
2. Refer text.
3. Chain growth polymerisation : Addition polymer e.g. Teflon
Step-growth polymerisation : Step wise mechanism achieving high molecular mass e.g.
polyster, polyamides (condensation polymer)
4. Homo polymer (polythene)
Co-polymer : polyster is co-polymer of ethylene glycol and terepththolic acid.
5. Ref. text
6. Decron (polyester - thermoplastic linear polymer used as fibres for clothing.)
7. Refer text
8. Refer text
9. It must be carried out as anionic polymerisation as carbanion intermediate is formedd,
getting stablished by electron withdrawing (–CN) group.

   CH 2  CH  
 H 2 N  CH 2  C H K   
K NH 2  CH 2  CH  | 
| |  CN 
 n
CN CN PAN

10. Refer text

[ 261 ]
UNIT - XVI
1. Refer text.
2. Refer text.
3. Refer text.
4. Antihistamine are drugs which prevent allergy and release of lesser amount of acid.
Antacid neutralises excess acid in the stomach. Use of antacid may trigger the production
of more acid. Now a days antihistamine drugs like ramitidine, terfenadine, are in use.
5. Non-biodegradability is due to branched hydrocarbon chain as aresult bacteria cann’t
act on them. These are one of the sources of pollution. e.g. cetylmethyl ammonium
bromide.
Soaps are sodium / potassium salt of long chain fatty acid which can be degraded.
6. A B
(a) Ofloxacin ––––––––––––––– bactericidal
(b) furacine –––––––––––––––– antiseptic
(c) chlorine –––––––––––––––– disinfectant
(d) Veronal –––––––––––––––– tranquilizer
(e) sodium lauryl sulfate (SLS) –––––– detergent
(f) sodium rosinate –––––––––––––– laundry soap
7. Side effects of drug :
– It may bind to more than one type of receptor.
– Side effect if the drug interacts with histamine.
– The degraded product of drug which is biologically active may interact with some
other receptor.
– One desease is cured giving path way to another disease.
8. Refer text.
9. Refer text.
10. Difference between soaps and detergents.
11. Refer text
12. Refer text
13. Bathing soap : K-salt of long chain fatty acid. These are soft and free from unused alkali.
Washing soap . Sodium salt of long chain fatty acid.
Usually hard also contain some residual alkali.
14. i) It is toxic to liver.
ii) Due to hydrolysis salicylic acid is formed affecting badly the stomach wall. Thus
acts as gastric irritant producing ulcer in long run.



[ 262 ]
 GROUP - C
LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS

Long Questions : (Seven Mark Each)

1. Explain the following :
(a) Crystalline solids are anisotropic.
(b) ZnO on heating becomes yellow.
(c) NaCl on heating in sodium vapour becomes yellow.
(d) Sodium chloride (s) behaves as a non-conductor.
[1 +2 x 3]
2. Derive an expression to calculate the edgelength of a unit cell.
A metal crystallises into two cubic faces i..e, fcc and bcc whose unit cell edge
lengths are 3.50 A , 3.0 0A respectively. Densities of fcc and bcc are in the ratio ––.
[ 4 + 3]
3. Write notes : –
(a) Stochiometric defect
(b)Amorphous solids [4 + 3]
4. (a) Classify the solids on the basis of bonding with example.
(b) Three dimensional lattice
5. (a) State and explain Raoult’s law. How is it related to Henry’s law ?
(b) What are ideal and non-ideal solutions.
6. What are colligative properties ? Show that relative lowering of vapour pressure is a
colligative property.
The vapour pressure of pure benzene at certain temperature is 0.850 bar. A non
volatile- non electrolyte solute of 0.5 g added to 39.0 gram of benzene (78 g/mol)
lowers the vapour pressure of the solution to 0.845 bar. Calculate the molar mass of
solute.
7. (a) Show that molecular mass of a non volatile, non-electrolyte can be calculated
from the measurement of elevation of boiling point of a solution containing the non-
electrolyte.
(b) The boiling point of a solution containing 50 g of a non volatile solute in 1 Kg of
solvent in 0.50 higher than that of pure solvent. Determine the molecular mass of solute.
Given that molecular mass of solvent = 78 gm/mol and Kb of the solvent = 2.53 Km–1.
8. What is molalcryoscopic constant ? How depression in freezing point related to molecular
mass of the solute.
Ethylene glycol is a common automobile antifreeze. Calculate the freezing point of a
solution containing 12.4 g of this substance in 100 gram of water. Kf = 1.86 K.kg
mol-1
9. What is osmotic pressure ? Discuss the laws involving it. Osmotic pressure is a colligative
property - explain. Calculate the osmotic pressure of 5% solution of cane sugar (mol.
mass = 342 gram / mol) at 170C.

[ 263 ]
10. Explain the following :
(i) Molecular mass of NaCl determined by colligative property method is found
abnormal.
(ii) Sea water can be desalinated to get potable water.
(iii) It is difficult to cook on hill top.
(iv) Determination of molecular mass of a solute is preferably done by osmotic pressure
method.
11. What do you mean by molality of a solution. How is it related to elevation of boiling
point ? Calculate the molality of 1 liter solution of 93% H2SO4 (Weight / volume). The
density of solution is 1.84 g/ml.
12. Explain the following :
(i) Doctor advises to gurgle saline water
(ii) Sea water never quenches thirst.
(iii) During packaging of fish, salt is added to ice.
(iv) At the time of boiling eggs salt is added to water.
13. Write notes on :
(i) Galvanic cell
(ii) Standard hydrogen electrode. [4 + 3]
14. Explain Nernst equation. How can you calculate equilibrium constant of a cell
reaction.
Calculate the cell potential of a Daniell cell –
Zn | Zn 2 (0.01M) || Cu 2  0.1M | Cu , given E 0Cell  1.1V
15. Define and explain equivalent conductance and specific conductance. Find a relation
between them.
0.1N solution has a specific conductance 0.0011g ohm–1 cm–1.
Find out its equivalent conductance. [2 + 2 + 2]
16. State and explain Kohlraush law of independent migration of ions. How can you
determine the dissociation constant of CH3COOH ?
The conductivity of 0.001028 molar acetic acid is 4.95  105 ohm 1 cm 1 . Calculate
the dissociation constant if  0m values of NaCl, HCl and NaAc are 126.4, 425.9 and
091.0 ohm–1 cm2 mol–1 respecively.
17. Write notes on :-
(i) Electrochemical series (ii) Dry cell
18. State and explain Faraday’s laws of electrolysis. How many grams of Aluminium can
be produced by electrolysis of molten alumina with a current of 3 ampres for 10 mts ?
19. Discuss the terms :
(i) Rate of reaction and specific reaction rate
(ii) Order of reaction and molecularity. [ 3 + 4]
20. (i) Discuss the factors affecting rate of reaction.
(ii) What is a pseudo unimolecular reaction. [ 4 + 3]

[ 264 ]
21. Discuss the kinetics of zero order reaction with one example. Show that the half life
period of the reaction is directly propertional to initial concentration.
Determine the order with respect to the reaction A + B   P from the following
data.
Expt. [A] [B] Initial rate
1 0.1 1.0 2.1  10–3 mol L–1 s–1
2 0.2 1.0 8.4  10–3 mol L–1 s–1
3. 0.3 2.0 8.4  10–3 mol L–1 s–1

22. Derive an expression for the rate constant of first order reaction. Show that its half
life period is independent of initial concentration.
A first order reaction takes 69 g minutes for 50% completion. How long will it
take for 80% completion.
23. How does rate constant change with temperature ?
What is activation energy ? How can you find it out ?
The rate of a reaction doubles for change in temperature from 298 K to 308
K. Calculate the activation energy for the reaction. [2 + 1 + 2
+ 2]
24. (a) Discuss collision theory of chemical reaction. [5]
(b) How does catalyst affect activation energy ? [2]
25. What is adsorption ? How does physical adsorption differ from chemisorption ?
Discuss the factors affecting adsorption of gases on solids. [1 + 3 + 3]
26. Name the catalyst for the following reactions :
(i) CO2 + 2H2 
 CH3OH(g)

(ii) CO + 3H2 
 CH4(g) + H2O(g)

(iii) CO + H2(g) 
 HCHO

(iv) C12H22O11(aq) + H2O(l) 

 C6H12O6 + C6H12O6
glucose fructose
(v) C6H12O6(aq) 
 2 C2H5OH + 2CO2

(vi) 2(C6H10O5) aq + 4 H2O 

 n C12 H22 O11 (aq)
Starch maltose
(vii) Maltose 
 glucose

(viii) NH2 CONH2(aq) + H2O 

 2NH3(g) + CO2(g)

(ix) Protein 
 peptide

(x) Protein 
 amino acid

(xi) Milk 
 Curd

[ 265 ]
 1
(xii) H2 + O 
 H2O
2 2

(xiii) 2SO 2(g)  O 2(g) 

 2SO3 (Homogeneous)

(xiv) 4 NH3 + 5O2(g) 

 4NO(g) + 6 H2O(g) (heterogeneous)
[7]
27. What are colloids ? Classify them. [2 + 5]
28. Explain the following :
(a) Brownian movement provides stability to colloidal solution.
(b) Tyndal effect is the optical property of colloids.
(c) Arsenic sulfide sol undergoes electrophoresis
29. What happens when –
(i) Oil is added to water in presence of soap ?
(ii) An electrolyte, NaCl is added to Ferric oxide sol ?
(iii) FeCl3 is added to excess of hot water or NaOH is added to FeCl3 solution.
(iv) AgNO3 solution is added to KI solution and vice vesra ?
30. (a) How does nitrogen differ from other elements of the group ?
(b) Discuss the properties of hydrides of group-15.
31. (a) How can you prepare dinitrogen in the laboratory ? A solid mass is formed on
action of air with magnesium. What happens when the mass is hydrolysed ?
[3 + 4]
(b) Discuss the favourable condition for better yield of NH3 by Haber’s process.
32. Lab - methods of preparing NH3, and SO2. Explain the reducing action of NH3 &
SO 2 [3+2+2
33. Discuss the principle of synthesis of
(i) Nitric acid by Ostwald process
(ii) Sulfuric acid by contact procesws. [3 + 4]
34. Discuss Siemen’s ozoniser to synthesis pure ozone. How does ozone react with
(i) KI (aq) (ii) Potassium ferrocyamide
35. Explain the following :
(i) Bleaching by SO2 is temporary
(ii) Oxygen differs from other elements of the group 16.
(iii) SO3 is an oxidant but SO2 behaves both as oxidant and reductant.
(iv) O–O Bond lengths in ozone are identical.
36. (a) Discuss the properties of hydrides of gr. 17.
(b) Fluorine is the most reactive nonmetal- explain.
37. Write notes on –
(a) Inner halogen compounds
(b)Fluorides of Xenon.

[ 266 ]
38. What are transition elements ? Describe any four important properties of transition
elements.
39. (a) State and explain Werner’s cordination theory. [4
(b) Discuss any three structural isomers of co-ordination compounds. [3
40. Discuss valence bond theory. What are inner and outer orbital complexes. Show the
magnetic behaviour of [Fe (CN)6]3–, [Ni(CO)4] [3 + 2 + 2]
41. Discuss the crystal field theory. How does it differ from VBT. Explain the fact that
[CoF6]3– is paramagnetic where as [Co(NH3)6]3+ is diamagnetic although both
are octhedral. [ 5 + 2]
42. How can you prepare ethyl bromide from ethyl alcohol and ethene ? What happens
when it reacts with (i) Ag CN (ii) KNO2 (iii) KOH (alc.) ?
43. Write notes on :
(a) Wurtz reaction, (b) Sandmeyer’s reaction.
44. How can you prepare chlorobenzene ? Cl is a deactivating group but undergoes O-P-
substitution – explain. Prepare phenol and picrylchloride from it. [2 + 2 + 3]
45. How can you prepare ethylalcohol from
(i) ethanamine (ii) suitable ester (iii) methanol. Discuss its reaction with
(i) conc. H2SO4 (ii) Cl2 red P. [7]
46. Name the alcohols with general formula C4H10O. Distinguish them from one another in
the laboratoty. Discuss their reactions with heated copper. [2+2+3]
47. Notes on :
(a) Acidic nature of phenol -
(b) Reimer Tieman reaction
(c) Williamson’s synthesis.
48. How can you prepare phenol from benzene, aniline and cumene. Mention method to
1 1
prepare salicylic acid from phenol. What is its oxidation product ? [ 4  1  1]
2 2
49. How can you prepare ether from alcohol ? State its reaction with (i) HI (ii) PCl5
(iii) CH3COCl.
50. How can you prepare acetaldehyde from
(i) ethanol (ii) acetylchloride (iii) acetylene
What happens when it reacts with
(i) dil NaOH (ii) hydroxyl amine [3 + 4]
51. (a) Give the reagent(s) to preparate
i) CH3CHO from CH3CN
ii) CH3–CH=CH–CH2CHO from CH3–CH=CH–CH2–CN
iii) Pentanol from ethylpentanoate (ester)
iv) p-bromophenol from phenol
v) CH3COOH from CH3–CH2OH
vi) 2, 4, 6 – tri bromophenol from phenol [3

[ 267 ]
 (b) How can you prepare acetone from
(i) acetic acid (ii) acetylene (iii) acetyl chloride ? (iv) CH 3C  N [4
52. Write notes on :
(a) Aldol condensation
(b)Cannizzaro’s reaction
(c) Iodoform (Haloform) reaction
53. How can you prepare benzoic acid by carboxylation and from toluene and
benzamide. What happens when it reacts with (i) NaHCO3 (ii) PCl5
54. How can you prepare acetic acid from (i) alcohol. (ii) alkyl halide (iii) ester. Mention
a test to distinguish it from formic acid. Convert acetic acid to formic acid.
55. Explain i) Effect of substituents on acidic nature of carboxylic acid.
ii) Hoffman’s bromamide reaction
iii) HVZ - reaction
56. An organic compound with molecular mass 86 doesnot reduce Tollen’s reagent but
forms an addition compound with NaHSO3 and responds to iodoform test. On vigorous
oxidation it gives ethanoic acid and propanoic acid. Write the structure of the compound
with equation is each state. Calculate the % of C in it.
57. An organic compound with molecular formula C7H7ON, on treatment with alkaline
bromine gives a compound which undergoes diazotisation with sodium nitrite (s) and
dil HCl but on reduction of (A) with LiAH4 gives another compound (C) which fails to
produce diazominum salt but with same reagent gives another cmpound (D).
The compound (A) on heating with P2O5 gives compound (E) which on boiling with dil
HCl gives compound (F), the ammonium salt (G) of which on heating gives back (A).
Identify the compounds A to G. [7
58. How can you prepare amines by (i) ammonolysis (ii) Reduction. Discuss its reaction
with benzoyl chloride. Why are aliphatic amines more reactive than aromatic amines ?
[4 + 1 + 2]
59. Write notes on
(i) Gabriel phthalimide synthesis.
(ii) Carbylamine reaction
(iii) Basic nature of aliphatic amines. [ 2 + 2 + 3]

60. Name the amines with formula C3H9N. Distinguish one from another. Show that amines
are more basic than amides. [ 2 + 3 + 2]
61. How is benzene diazonium chloride prepared ? Write down two reaction favouring
displacement of N2 and one reaction retaining diazo group. [2+4+1]
62. Write notes on :-
(i) Schmidt reaction
(ii) Mendius reaction
(iii) Hofmann’s reaction

[ 268 ]
 (iv) Protection –NH2 group in aniline
(v) Bromination and sulfonation of aniline
63. Explain the action of nitrous acid (HONO) on primary, secondary and tertiary amines.
How aniline differs from methyl amine in its reaction with nitrous acid.
64. What are polymers ? How are they classified on the basis of (i) structure (ii) synthesis
(ii) molecula forces involved, (iv) microorganism degradable polymer, Give example
in each case.
65. Write notes on - (i) Vulcanisation of rubber
(ii) Free radical addition polymerisation
66. Write notes on
(i) Antibiotics
(ii) Antiseptic
(iii) Analgesic
67. What are soaps and detergents ? Discuss their cleansing action.



[ 269 ]
 ANSWERS
GROUP - C (LONG ANSWER TYPE )
1. (a) Due to definite three dimensional geometric arrangement the physical property if
studied through a crystal its value resolved in to three components. e.g. if
velocity of light (v) studied in a crystal, V2 = vx2 + vy2 + vz2 , Vx = velocity
along x-direction ....... .
 1
(b) ZnO   Zn 2   O2  2e 
2
This is a metal excess defect. The excess Zn2+ ions move to interstitial sites & the
e– (s) to neighbouring interstices.
(c) Na + Cl– 
 NaCl + e–
Electron occupies the anion (Cl–) vacancy site. This is called F– centre. The
colour results by excitation of these e–(s) on exposure of visible light.
(d) Due to inter ionic force of attraction ions fail to move on application of electric
field.
Z.M
2. 
N A .a 3

4 M
 fcc 
N A  (3.5A 0 ) 3

2 M
 bcc 
N A  (3.0  0 A)3
3
fcc 4  3 
  d
bcc 2  3.5 
3. (a) (i) Vacancy defect
(ii) Interstitial defect
(iii) Schoottky defect
(b) Refer Text.
4. Refer Text (Bravais lattices)
5. Raoult’s law as a special case of Henry’s law.
Raoult’s law : PA  X A .PA0
Vapour pressure of the volatile component in directly proportional to the mole fraction
that component in solution.
Henry’s law  PA = KH. XA
Gas is the solute and liquid is the solvent. Here the partial pressure of the volatile
ecomponent (gas) is proportional to the mole fraction of that component (gas) in the
solution.
The two laws are identcal, except the proportionality constants.
PA0 in case of Raoult’s law.
KH is the case of Henry’s law.

[ 270 ]
 PA0  Ps nB W M 
6. 0
  B  a  A = solvent, B = solute
PA n A  n B  M B Wa 
........ For dilute solution PS = v.p. of solution.

PA0 n
0
 1 A
PA  PS nB

PA0 nA
1 =
PA0  PS nB

PA0  PA0  PS n A
 
PA0  PS nB

PA0  PS n B WB M A
  
 PS n A M B WA o

Problems :
0.850  0.845 0.5 78
All types of solution, dilute or concentrated.  
0.845 M B 39 ro
MB can be calculated.
7. Tb  K b .m b

WB 1000
= kb  M  W
B A

2
MR  Tf0 
8. Kf =
1000  fus H
Kf = molal cryoscopic constant.
M = Molar mass of solvent in gram/mole.
Tf0 = freezing point of solvent
R = gas constant
fus H = molar latent heat of fusion of solvent.
* Tf  k f .m
9. Boyle - van’t Hoff law   C , at constant temperature. C = mol/L (molar concentration)
van’t Hoff equation : V  nRT
n
 RT i.e., CRT
T
V
WB RT
  
MB V
WB .R.T
MB  R = 0.0821 L. atm. mol–1 K–1.
.V
[ 271 ]
10. (i) NaCl is an electrolyte for which i = 2 i.e, with higher colligative properties and
hence molecular mass is reduced.
(ii) See text.
(iii) Due to lower surrounding pressure vapour pressure of water increases reducing
the boiling point of water. As a result food material becomes difficult to boil.
(iv) The osmotic pressure of the solution can be recorded suitable while
Tf , Tb , p / p 0 measurements are not better noticiable.

no.of moles of solute wt of solute  93gram

11. Molality (m) = mass of solvent in kg wt of solution 100  1.84  184 gram

It is independent of temperature. wt of solvent  184  93  91gram

w 1000 93 1000
Molality    
M w/ 98 91
12. (i) Saline water has higher osmotic pressure than the the fluid of infected cell of the
mouth.
(ii) Sea water has higher osmotic pressure as a result water from cell moves to high
osmotic pressure.
Thus, the cell gets dehydrated to feel more thirsty.
(iii) Lower of freezing point.
(iv) Elevation of boiling point to reduce time. [2 x 3 + 1]

13. (i) It is a device where the decrease in free energy  G  is converted to electrical
work (energy) i.e., G  nFE
Cell notation - Cell equation- Cell potential.
1 E 1
(ii) H+ + e–  H 2 , H H 2 (1atm), Pt = 0.0 V
2 (1M) 2
14.  aA + bB 
ne
 cC + dD
0 RT
E cell  E Cell  ln Q [ Q is the reaction quotient)
nF
0 RT
= E cell  E Cell  ln Q , G 0  nFE 0  RT ln K
nF
2.303
 E 0Cell  log K C
nF
1000
15.   K.V  K
C
(V is the volume of solution containing 1 gram eqvt. of the electrolyte.
C - the nomality of solution)

[ 272 ]
 Problem :   0.0019  1000
0.1
= 19 ohm–1 cm2 gran eqvt–1.
16. Statement, Explanation –
Expl. 0KCl   0NaCl   0NaBr   0KNO3   0NaNO3

=  0k  0Na   23.41ohm 1cm 2 mol1

It indicates Cl–, Br– or nitrate have definite contribution towards the equivalent
conductance of respective electrolyte irrespective of their association with differ anions
such as Cl–, Br– or NO3–.
Similarly (keeping cation fixed)  0KBr   0KCl =  0LiBr   0LiCl   0NaBr   0NaCl

=  0Br   0Cl = 2.06 ohm–1 cm2 mol–1.

It show that irrespective of association with different anions (Br– or Cl–), the cation K+,
Li+ or Na+ has fixed conductance at infinite dilution and at a given temperature.
Problem : 0CH3COOH  4250 g  91.0  126.4  390.5ohm1 cm2 mol1

m 1000
 0
and  m  k 
m C

5 1000
= 4.95  10 
0.001028
= 48.15 ohm cm2 mol–1
–1

48.15
  0.1233
390.15
2
C 2 0.001028   0.1233
Ka  
1  1  0.1233
17. (i) Series of arrangement of electrodes arranged in order of their standard reduction
potential on hydrogen scale. Applications of electro chemical series.
(ii) Dry cell (Leclanche cell)
Graphite carbon cathode in zinc container (anode) with a paste of NH4Cl, Zn
Cl2. The graphit rod is surrounded by MnO2 & C.
Anode - Zn  Zn 2   2e

cathode. MnO 2  NH 4  2e  MnO  OH   NH 3  g 

Pressure due to NH3(g) is reduced by formation of [Zn(NH3)4]2+
Cell potential = 1.5 V
18. First law :
W = ZQ, Z = electrochemical equivalent of the substance, gram / coulomb.
W1 E1 Z1
2nd law - W  E  Z
2 2 2

[ 273 ]
 problem - Q   3 10  60   1800 C.
1F = 96500 C discharges 9 gram of Al
9
1800 C discharges 1800  0.17 gram
96500
19. –dc/dt i.e, moles/litre/sec
Instantaneous and average rate of reaction. Specific reaction rate i..e., k

A 
B

d A  d B
   k A
dt dt

d A
k=– [A] = 1 mole
dt
A
dt = 1 sec
i..e, k is the change in concentration of the 1 mole reactant under going reaction for 1
sec. Higher is the k value faster the reaction rate.
20. (i) Factor : (a) Nature of reactant (b) Effect of concentration (c) presence of catalyst
(d) Effect of temperature (e) Surface area of the reactant (f) effect of radiations.
(ii) Pseudounimolecular reaction. Molecularity = 2, order of reaction = 1
e.g. Hydrolysis of ester. The reaction is first order with respect to ester but zero order
with respect to water.
Ester + water 
 acid + alcohol
rate = k [ester] [ water]0
21. Discuss the kinetics of zero order reaction with one example. Show that the half life
period of the reaction is directly propertional to initial concentration.
Determine the order with respect to the reaction A + B 
 P from the following data.
Expt. [A] [B] Initial rate
1 0.1 1.0 2.1  10–3 mol L–1 s–1
2 0.2 1.0 8.4  10–3 mol L–1 s–1
3. 0.3 2.0 8.4  10–3 mol L–1 s–1
[Ro]
K = Slope
[R]

time
* Variation in the concentration vs time plot for a zero order reaction.
* Variation of concentration with rate in zero order reaction
Rate = k [A]x [B]y

[ 274 ]
 x y
8 : 4  10 3 = k (0.2) (1.0)
x y
8 : 4  10 3 = k (0.2) (2.0)
Dividing one by another.
y
x
1
1 = k(1) .   i..e, y = 0
 2
x y
2.1  10 3  k  0.1  1.0 
x y
8.4  10 3  k  0.2   1.0 
Dividing one by another.
x
1 1
 
4 2
2 x
1 1
      i..e, x = 2
 2  2
Rate = k[A]2[B]0
i..e, The reactioin is second order with respect to A & zero order with respect to B.
The overal order of reaction = 2 (second order)
Example (zero order reaction)
h Pt
H 2(g)  Cl2(g)   2HCl(g) , 2N2O(g) 

 2N 2(g)  O2(g)

1  R 0
22. log [R]0 k= ln
[R] k t R
Slope =
2.303

Time

Problem : t 1 = 0.693 So k 
0.693 2.303
 log
100
2 k 69.3 t 20

Ea
Slope = - k E a  T2  T1 
R log 2 
23. ln k Intercept = ln A  
k1 2.303R  T1T2 

1/T

Ea 308  298
Problem : log 2 = 
2.303  8.134 308  298
24. (a) ZAB = collision frequency,
Considering the probability or steric factor –
rate = P. ZAB e–Ea/RT

[ 275 ]
 (b) Positive catalyst lower the activation energy
MnO 2
e.g., 2KClO 3   2KCl  3O 2
25. Factors affecting adsorption.
(i) Nature of the gas (adsorbate)
(ii) Nature of the solid (adsorbent)
(iii) Surface area
(iv) Temperature

x
x m
m
t
Temp. (Physical adsorption) (chemisorption)

(v) Effect of pressure –

x
m

Ps - saturation pressure
Ps
Adsorption isotherm

x 1
K p n
m

x 1
log  log K  log P
m n
Freundlich’s adsorption isotherm :

x 1 1
log ( lies between 0 and 1)
m Slope = n n
Intercept = log K
log P

26. (i) Cu / ZnO – Cr3O3 (ii) Ni

(iii) Cu (iv) Invertase
(v) Zymase (enzyme) (vi) Diastase

[ 276 ]
 (vii) Maltase (viii) urease
(ix) Pepsin (stomach) (x) Trypsin
(xi) Lacto bacilli (xii) Pt
(xiii) NO (Lead chamber process) (xiv) Pt(s)
27. Colloidal solution is a heterogeneous solution containing particles (colloids) between 1.
nm and 100 nm in dispersed phase. On the basic of affinity of dispersed phase for
dispersion medium colloidal solution is of two types –
(i) Lyophilic colloids
(ii) Lyophobic colloids.
On the basic of Molecular size colloids are of three types
(i) Multimolecular colloids
(ii) Macromolecular colloids
(iii) Micelles or Associated colloids.
28. (a) Continuous Zig-zag motion of colloids is called Brownian movement when such
motion stops phase, medium separate & the solution is not a colloidal solution i.e.,
coagulation occurs. Thus so long as such motion continues a stable colloidal solution
is seen.
(b) This property is viewed when converged light is allowed to pass through colloidal
solution. The path of the beam is illuminated by bluish light as colloidial particles
scatter the hight in all direction (in space). This scattering of light illuminates the
path of beam in colloidal dispersion.
Reason :
(i) the diameter of the dispersed particles is not much smaller the wavelength of light
used.
(ii) The refractive indices of the dispersed phase and dispersion medium differ greatly
in magnitude.
(c) As2S3 is –ve sol. when subjected to electric potential the –vely charged particle of
the dispersed phase migrates towards anode.
29. (i) Emulsification. Soap is an emulsifying agent.
(ii) Coagulation
(iii) A positively charged sol of hydrated ferric oxide is formed due to preferntial
adsorption of Fe3+.
Fe 2 O3 .xH 2 O / Fe3 , Fe2O3. x H2O | OH–
Positively charged Negatively charged (adsorption of OH– ions)
(iv) AgI | I–K+ , AgI | Ag+ I–
–ve sol. +ve sol.
30. (a) (i) Small size and high electronegativity value (3.0)
(ii) Non availability of d-orbitals. 7N 1s22s2 sp3
(iii) N is diatomic (N2), phosphorous is polyatomic (P4)
(iv) N – N is weaker due to repulsion between non-bonding e–(s) hence is not
catenating, ‘P’ unable to form  -bonding but can form strager p-p  -bond,
hence catenating as in red ‘P’

[ 277 ]
 (v) ‘N’ has maximum covalency- four, but other can expand their valency state
upto six due to presence of d-orbital.[PCl6]– ‘P’ can form d   p bond
with transition metals, R 3 P  O  d   p  bond  .
(b) Hydride of Nitrogen family :
NH3, PH3, AsH3, BiH3, SbH3 (stibine)
 Basic character decreases as the e– density decreases with increase of molecular
volume.
 Bond angle decreases due to greater lane-bond pair repulsion.
 Boiling point BiH3 > SbH3 > NH3 > PH3 > AsH3 NH3 has higher boiling point
than PH3 and As Hg due to formation of ntemolecular H-bonding. BiH3, SbH3
have higher b.p. due to stronger vander waals force arising out of bigger molecular
size.
 Reducing character NH3 < PH3 < As H3 < BiH3 < SbH3 is attributed to their
E – H bond dissociation energy. (E = element of group-15)
31(a). NH4Cl (aq) + NaNO2 (aq) 
 N2  + 2H2O + NaCl (aq)
Impurities : NO and HNO3. The compuities can be removed by passing through aq.
sulfuric acid containing pot. dichromate
(b) Favourable conditions for better yield of NH3
Condition for better yield of NH3 by Haber’s process.
(i) Optimum temperature of 5000C
(ii) High pressure of 200– 900 atom.
(iii) Finely divided iron as catalyst with Mo as prmotor
(iv) High concentration of pure and dry N2 and H2.
32.  2NH4Cl + CaO 

 2NH 3  CaCl2  H 2 O
NH3 is to be dried by quick lime tower.
Collection : Down ward displacement of air.

 Cu + 2H2SO4   CuSO4 + SO2 + 2H2O

4H   SO 4 2  2e 
 SO 2  2H 2 O

Cu 
 Cu 2   2e 
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Dried on passing through conc. H2SO4.
Collection : upward displacement of air.
 Reducing action of SO2
SO2 on passing through acidfied K2Cr2O7 solution turns green, Cr2(SO4)3

Cr2 O 7  14H  6e  
 Cr 3  7H 2 O

 SO 42  4H   2e
SO 2  2H 2 O 
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

[ 278 ]
 
 Reducing action of NH3. 3CuO  2NH 3 (g)   3Cu  N 2  3H 2 O
Pt
33. (i) 4NH 3  5O 2 
8000 C
 4NO  6H 2O

2NO  O 2 
 2NO 2

4NO 2  2H 2 O  O 2 
 4HNO 3

(ii) 
V2O5
2SO2  O2  
 2SO3  45.2 K cal

SO3  H 2SO 4 
 H 2S2 O 7
( Oleum or fuming sulfuric acid)
Conditions for better yield : (It obeys Le-chatelier’s principle)
(i) Excess of dry oxygen and air
(ii) high pressure (~ 2 atm. pressure)
(iii) Optimum temperature of 450 – 5000C.
As the process is exothermic high temperature to be avoided.
silent
34. Principle. 3O 2 
electricdischarge
 2O3
The product is ozonised oxygen (O3+O2).
90 K (oxygen)
liquidair fractional
O3  O 2  condensed to deep blue liquid  evaporation
161.1 K
evaporation
 (Less volatile O3)  pure ozone.

(i) O3  H 2 O  2e  
 2OH   O 2

2I  
 I 2  2e 
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
O3  2I   H 2 O 
 I 2  2OH   O 2
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
4 3
(ii)  Fe  CN 6    Fe  CN 6   e


35. (i) SO2 + H2O 

 SO3 + 2(H)
H  air
Coloured matter   coloueless 
oxidn
 regains colour..
Bleaching by reduction
(ii) (a) Small size and high electronegativity (3.5)
(b) Absence of d-orbital, hence maximum valence state is three (even four) other
can expand upto six.
(c) O- exhibit H-bonding e.g. H2O(l) but H2S(g)
(d) Physical state- O2 is a gas but others are solids
(e) Multiplicity of bond. Due to smaller size oxygen can form  -bond.

[ 279 ]
 6 4
(iii) SO3 , SO2 . In SO2, + 4 state can increase to +6 also reduces, hence both can
behave as oxidant and reductant. But in SO3, sulfur has maximum valence state
+6, it can decrease only.
(iv) Ozone is not paramagnetic, all e–(s) in paired state. Three atoms are at the apices

of an equilateral triangle. It has got sp2 hybridisation with bond angle

116.50 and bond length 1.28 0A.
It is resonance hybrid of
+ +

36. (a) Hydrides are HF, HCl, HBr, HI

Acidic nature / reducing nature HI > HBr > HCl > HF
Thermal stability Bond dissoctation enthalpy. HI < HBr < HCl < HF
Physical state. HF is a liquid due to inter molecular
H-bonding, others are gases.
(b) (i) Small size, high electronegaivity value (4.0), having O.S. –1 (others ranges
from –1 to +7)
(ii) Low bond dissociation enthalpy due to electronic repulsion between lone
pair of e– (s) (non-bonding pairs,
O
(iii) High value of reduction potential, E F2 F
 2.87 V, powerful oxidant.
37. (a) The possible compounds are XY, XY3, XY5 and XY7 prepared by directly
combination of halogens (X & Y) under specific conditions.
437K
e.g. Cl 2  F2   2 ClF
573K
Cl2  3F2   2 ClF3

Br2  5F2 
 2 BrF5
Compounds hybridisation Type Shape
Cl F3 sp3d2 AB3L2 T-shape
3 2
Br F5 sp d A B5L Square pyramide
3 3
I F7 sp d AB7 Pentagonal bipyramidal
 As the molecules are polar, these compounds are more reactive than non-polar
respective halogens.
(b) These compounds are possible due to
(i) low i H value of Xe
(ii) very high electronegativity of F.
Under suitable conditions Xe and F2 react forming XeF2, XeF4 and XeF6 with variation
in O.S. +2, +4 and +6.

O.S.= +2,     

[ 280 ]
 F
Xe F2 sp3d hybridisation AB2 L3 Xe Linear

F
XeF4 sp3d2 hybridisation AB4 L2 square planar
XeF6 sp3d3 hybridisation AB6 L distorted octahedral
Nickel vesel
Xe  F2 673K
 XeF2
Electronicdisch arge
Xe  2F2 
193 K, Pr essure
 XeF4
Ni, 573K
Xe  3F2 
50 atm. pressure
 xeF6
38. Transition elements are d-block elements with general electronic configuration (n-1) s2
p6 d1–10 ns1 or 2 where n = 4 to 7.Thus there are four rows (3d, 4d, 5d, 6d series)
each of 10 transition elements. Their properties transit between more electro
positive s-block and more electro -ve p-block of elements.
Properties : (a) variable oxidation states
(b) Formation of coloured compounds
(due to d – d transition)
(c) Formation of complex compound
(i) Small size of highly charged cation
(ii) Vacant d-orbitals
(iii) High effective nuclear change in cation
(iv) Magnetic behaviour  eff  n(n  2) B.M.
Where n = no. of unpair e .
Fe, Co, Ni are ferromagnetic metals.
39. (a)  Postulates of Werner’s co-ordination theory with explanation.
 Limitations
(b) (i) Ionisation isomers [Co(NH3)5SO4]Br red
[Co(NH3)5 Br] SO4 purple
(ii) Linkage : CNS– or : SCN–
: CN– or : NC–
: C  O, C  O :
: NO2, ONO:
(iii) Co-ordination isomerism [Co(NH3)6] [Cr(CN)6]
[Cr (NH3)6] [Co(CN)6]
40. Postulates-

[Fe F6]4– Fe2+ 3d6     

3d 4s 4p 4d


sp3d2
Outer orbital complex - paramagnetic.

[ 281 ]
 [Fe(CN)6]4–   

d2sp3, inner orbital complex, diamagnetic
[Fe(CN)6]3–   


d2sp3- paramagnetic, n = 1

    
 Ni(CO)4  


3d 4s 4p (sp3 ) n = 0, diamagnetic

41. VBT CFT

i) Metal - ligand bonds arised by donation i) Metal ligand bond considered to be
e– pair to metal from ligands forming ionic arising out of purely electrostatic
covalent bonds. interaction.
ii) Ligands are considered to be e– pair ii) Ligands are treated as point of –ve
donor, Lewis bases. charges and approach the metal to
minimise repulsion.
iii) Suitable number of d-orbitals is to be iii) Splitting of d-orbitals takes place.
made vacant to accomodate the e– pair
from ligands through dative bond.
Depending on the C.N. and nature of
ligand hybridisation takes place.
e.g. CN = 4, sp3 or dsp2
CN = 6 sp3d2 (or) d2sp3
iv) No satisfactory explanation to colour of iv) Explains absorption spectra providing
the complexes / absorption the colour of the complexes.
spectra. While NH3 - strong field.
–
F weaker field 3
* Co  NH3  6 
3
*  Co  F6   Co3  3d 6 – –
    0 is more.

 0   

   t 62 g

0 is less. n = 0 (diamagnetic)

t 42 g eg
2

n = 1 (paramagnetic)

[ 282 ]
42. Preparation :
(i) 3 C2H5OH + PBr3  3 C2H5Br + H3PO3
C2H5OH + PBr5  C2H5Br + POBr3 + HBr
C2H5OH + SOBr2  C2H5Br + SO2 + HBr
(ii) CH2 = CH2 + HBr 
 CH3 – CH2 Br
Properties :
C2H5Br + AgCN 
 C2H5NC + AgBr 

C2H5Br + KNO2 
 C2H5ONO + KBr

C2H5Br + KOH (alc.) 

 CH2 = CH2 + KBr + H2O
43. (i) Statement -
(ii) Merits -
(i) To prepare higher alkane
(ii) To ascend C. atom in chain.
e.g., C2H5OH to butane
SOCl2 Na / dry
C2H5OH   C2 H 5 Cl  ether C4 H10
(iii) To prepare alkyl benzene (Wurtz - Fittig reaction)
Na / dryether
CH3Br + C6H5Br  
C6H5CH3
(iv) To prepare bicyclo compound.
Br

Na / ether

reflex

Br
1, 3-dibromocyclo butane bicyclobutane
(iii) Limitations :
i) Methane can’t be prepared.
ii) Difficult get alkane with odd no. of C- atom in pure form.
Na / dryether
CH3Br + C2H5Br reflux
 CH3–CH3 + C2H5–C2H5 + C2H5CH3
ethane butane propane
(iv) Mechanism
(b) SandMeyer’s reaction
Br N2Cl Cl
CuBr  HBr CuCl  HCl
   

 CuCN +KCN
CN

[ 283 ]
 Cl
Anh. FeCl3
44. (i) + Cl2   + HCl


  FeCl 4   Cl 
Cl  Cl  FeCl3 

Benzene undergoes SE.

Electron pair on Cl is in conjugation and undergoes resonating effect dominating over
–I effect (deactivating effect).

:Cl: + Cl + Cl

................

o/p - position susceptible to electrophilic attack.

CuCl 2
(ii) Raschig process : 2 C6H6 + 2HCl + O2 
 2C 6 H5 Cl  2H 2 O
0 dil HCl
300 C
 i) C6H5Cl + NaOH 
Pressure
C6H5ONa 
 NaCl
 C6H5OH

Cl Cl Cl
 NO2 NO2
ii) HNO3  H 2SO 4
  NO2
 


NO 2
NO2 NO2

2, 4, 6 - trinitrochlorobenzene
NaNO 2 (s)
45.  C2H5NH2 + HONO 
dil.HCl
 C2H5OH + N2 + H2O

H
 CH3COOC2H5 
H2 O
 CH3COOH + C2H5OH

SOCl2 KCN
 CH3OH   CH3Cl   CH3CN

LiAlH 4 HNO 2
  CH3–CH2NH2 
NaNO 2  dil HCl
 CH3–CH2OH



H 
H
 CH3 – CH2OH 
 H2 O
 CH5 CH 2   CH2 = CH2
Cl2 / red P
 CH5CH2OH   CH3–CH2Cl

3Cl2  2P 
 2 PCl3

3C 2 H 5 OH  PCl3 
 3C 2 H 5Cl  H 3 PO 3

[ 284 ]
 10 alcohol CH3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 OH
Bu tan  1  ol
CH3  CH  CH 2 OH
|
CH 3 2  methyl propan  1  ol

46. C4H10O 20 alcohol CH3  CH  CH 2  CH 3

| Butan  2  ol
OH
CH 3
|
30 alcohol CH3  C  CH 3 2  methyl propan  2  ol
|
OH

Lucas test

Reagent 10 alcohol 20 alcohol 30 alcohol

conc.HCl Turbidityappears Turbidity appears
after some time. Turbidityappears
on boiling with
& CH3CH(OH)C2H5  HCl instantaseouly
conc.and ZnCl2 .
ZnCl2 (Anhy.) CH3CH2  CH2 on addition of
  CH3  CH  C2H5
ZnCl2
reagent
CH2OH  HCl  
 | (CH3 )3 C(OH)  HCl
CH3  CH2  CH2 Cl
 (CH3 )3 CCl  H2O
CH2Cl  H2O  H 2 O

Action Cu at 3000C (Dehydrogenation)

10 alcohol, butan-ol on heating with Cu at 3000C, gives butanal.
0
Cu / 300 C
CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 OH   CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 CHO  H 2
20 alcohol give ketone. butanal

O
||
CH 3  CH  CH 2  CH 3 
Cu/300 C0
 CH 3  C  CH 2  CH 3  H 2
|
OH butanone
30 alcohol under the same condition gives alkene on dehydration.

CH 3 CH 2
| ||
Cu/3000 C
CH 3  C  OH   CH 3  C  H 2 O
| |
CH3 CH 3
2-methyl propene

[ 285 ]
47. (a) (i) Resonance showing more stability of pheroxide than phenol itself.
(ii) Electron with drawing group – (-NO2 group) increases the acidic nature.
However cresols are less acidic due to +I effect.
OH OH
CHcl3
CHO
(b) 
 NaOH
o-isomer predominated due to intramolecular

H-bonding).
(c) Williamson’s synthesis (Preparation of ether)
Phenol to anisole
Na CH 3 I
C6 H 5 OH   C 6 H 5ONa   C 6 H 5OCH 3

RX  RONa 
 ROR  NaX
ether
This is a SN2 reaction, however in case of 20 & 30 alkyl halide alkene results
where alkoxide ion acts as base favouring elimination reaction.
CH 3  CH 2 Br   CH 3 3 CONa 
 CH 3  CH 2 O C(CH 3 )3

CH 2 CH 2
| ||
CH 3  C  Br + C2H5ONa 
 CH 3  C
| |
CH 3 CH 3

SO3H ONa OH
SO3 NaOH dil HCl
48.  
H 2SO 4
 
3000 C
  

NH2 N2Cl OH
NaNO 2 Water

HCl 0 0 C
 
Warm

3

O-O-H
CH3- CH - CH3
CH3- C - CH3 OH
O2 

1300 C
 H3 O
  + CH3COCH3
Cumene Cumene hydroperoxide

Carboxylation phenol
OH OH
CCl 4 COOH
 (i) 
NaOH
 (Reimer Tiemann reaction)

[ 286 ]
 (ii) Kolbe’s reaction :
OH
OH O
COOH
 (i ) CO2
OH
  
(ii) H 

Salicylic acid
 Phenol on oxidation with acidified sodium dichromate gives benzoquinone.
O
OH
2
Cr2 O7
H

O
ROH Conc H 2SO4
49. 
1400 C
R–O–R + H2O
ROH
is excess
H
|
ROH  H  
 RO  H


H
R O + R O  H2O de protonation
H   R O R   R–O–R+H+
H
H
The order of dehydration of alcohol forming ether follows in the order 10 > 20 > 30
20 and 30 prefer to form alkene
CH 3 CH 3
| CH3
|
CH 3  C  OH Conc.H 2SO 4
|

1400 C
CH 3 C  CH 3  C
+ H2O   H
CH 3 H-C-H ||
CH 2
H
Demerit :
This method is not suitable for preparation of unsymmetrical ether.
ROH  R 'OH  ROR ' ROR  R 'OR '
 Hydro Iodination :
I H SN 2
CH3 O  CH 2  CH 3  HI   CH 3 I  CH 3  CH 2OH

CH 3
|
CH3  O SN1
C  CH 3 + HI  CH3OH   CH3 3 CI,
|
CH 3
(CH3)3 C+ is more stable.

[ 287 ]
 CH3 O – C6H5 + HI 
 CH3I + C6H5–OH

CH3  O CH2 – + HI 
 C6H5CH2I + CH3OH


C6 H 5 C H 2 (Benzyl) carbocation is more stable to undergo SN–1 reaction.

 ROR ' PCl 5 

 RCl  POCl 3  R 'Cl
 ROR ' CH 3COCl 
 CH 3COOR  R 'Cl

50.  CH 3  CH 2OH  O  

PCC
 CH 3CHO  H 2O
Pd  BaSO 4
CH 3COCl  H 2 
Rosenmund 's reduction
 CH3 CHO  HCl
H 2SO4
CH  CH  H 2 O 
HgSO , 60 0 C
 CH 3CHO
4

O OH
|| 
|
OH
 CH 3  C  H + HCH2CHO 
Ad N
 CH 3  C  CH 2  CHO
|
H
aldol, 3-hydroxy butanal
 H
CH3  C  O  H2 NOH  CH 3  C  N  OH
| |
H H

acetaldehyde oxime
51. (a) (i) SnCl2 + HCl (ii) DIBAL - H (iii) DIBAL-H/H2O
2 
Cr2 O7  H
(iv) Br2/CS2 (v)  
 (vi) Br2(aq.)
CH 3COOH MnO
(b) (i) 

 CH3COCH3 + CO2 + H2O
CH 3COOH
Ca  OH 2 drydistillation
CH3COOH    CH 3COO 2 Ca 
 CaCO3
 CH3COCH3
(distillate)
NaNH 2 CH 3Br
(ii) CH  CH   CH 3  CNa   HC  C  CH 3
dil H 2SO 4

HgSO4 , 600
 CH3COCH3

 3 2
CH Cd
(iii) 2CH 3 COCl  CH3COCH3
CdCl2

O H2
H2 O H 
(iv) CH 5  C  N  CH 3 MgBr 
 CH 3  C  N Mg Br  
| H OH
CH 3
CH3COCH3 + NH3 + Mg (OH)Br

[ 288 ]
52. (a) Self aldol .
OH
|
OH 
 CH3–CHO + CH3CHO   CH 3  CH  CH 2  CHO
3-hydroxy butanal

OH
 Crossed aldol HC  O  HCH 2CHO   CH 2  OH   CH 2  CHO
| 3  hydroxy propanal
H

O
C
OH 
 Intra molecular aldol H 

CH2-CH2-CHO

O
OH
C
H 
 C H
CHO
CH 2-CH-CHO
(b) Cannizzaro’s reaction (disproportionation)
 Self Cannizzaro’s reaction :
NaOH
C6 H 5 CHO  C 2 H 5 CHO    C6 H 5COONa  C 6 H 5CH 2 OH
 Cross Cannizzaro’s reaction :
NaOH (conc.)
HCHO  C6 H 5CHO   HCOONa  C 6 H 5CH 2 OH
 Intra molecular Cannizzaro’s reaction :

CHO COONa
| NaOH
  |
CHO CH 2 OH
glyoxal Sodium glycolate
(c) Iodoform reaction (Reagent - I2 + KOH)
CH3CO CH3CH(OH)
Compound with   group or   -group when treated
with alkaline iodine provides yellow mass of iodoform. Thus CH3–CH2OH,
O
||
CH 3  CH  R (Alkan-2-ol) CH 3  C  H and CH3 – CO – R (alkan -2-one)
|
OH
responds to this test.

OH 
e.g. CH3  CHO   CH2CHO + H2O

[ 289 ]
 CH2CHO + I - I CH 2 I  CHO  I

CH2I CHO + OH– 

 CHI – CHO + H2O

CHICHO  I  I 
 CHI 2CHO  I

OH
CHI 2CHO 
 I2
 CI3CHO

O O
O
 I3C - C - H 
CI3C H + OH   CI3 + C H
OH OH
O
 CHI3 
 C H
O
formate

53.  O  C  OMgBr
O = C = O + C6H5MgBr 
|
C6 H5

H 3O
  C6H5COOH + Mg(OH)Br

CH3 COOK COOH


KMnO 4  KOH H3 O

  

CONH2 COOH

H 3O

 + NH3

 C6H5COOH + NaHCO3  C6H5COONa + CO2 + H2O (Test for - COOH group)

 C6H5COOH + PCl5  C6H5COCl + POCl3 + HCl
Benzoylchloride
 
MnO 4  H
54.  (i) CH3–CH2OH + O 
 CH3COOH + H2O
KCN 
H 3O
(ii) CH3Br   CH3CN 
 CH3COOH
(i) O  C  O
Mglether
CH3Br   CH3MgBr 
(ii ) H3O  CH3COOH

H
(iii) CH 3COOC 2 H5  H 2 O   CH3COOH + C2H5OH
 HCOOH easily oxidises to CO2, hence as a better reducing agent. On this property it is
distinguished from acetic acid which is not a reducing agent.
It reduces Tollen’s reagent (silver mirror test).

[ 290 ]
 HCOOH +2[Ag(NH3)2]OH 
 CO2 + 2H2O + 2Ag+4 NH3
LiAlH 4
CH3COOH   CH2-CH2OH
Conc.H 2SO 4 
MnO 4  H

1700 C
CH2=CH2   HCOOH


55. (i) RCOOH  H3 O + R C R C  R C
 O
 H 2O O O
(a) –I effect increases acidic nature
(b) +I effect decreases acidic nature.
CH 3COOH is less acidic than HCOOH
(c) Resonance effect : Greater is the stability of conjugate base greater is the acidic
nature.
e.g. Benzoic acid is stronger than acetic acid.
(ii) RCONH2 + 4 KOH + Br2 
 RNH2 + K2CO3 + 2KBr + 2H2O
Significance : (a) Preparation of 10 - amine
(b) Descending C. atom is chian.
(iii) Substitution of halogen at   C. atom of the acid.
red 'P '
e.g CH 3COOH  Cl 2   ClCH2COOH + HCl

OH
|
56.  CH 3  CO   CH 2  2  CH 3  NaHSO3 
 CH3  C   CH 2 2 CH 3
|
SO3 Na

CH3CO(CH2)2CH3 + 3I2 
 CI3CO (CH2)2CH3 + 3HI
dil HCl
CI3 CO(CH2)2CH3 + KOH 
 CHI3 + CH3 – CH2–CH2COOK  

CH 3CH 2  CH 2 COOH

K 2 Cr2 O 7
CH 3CO CH2–CH2CH3 
H 3SO 4 , 
 CH3COOH + CH3CH2COOH

Popoff’s rule
 %C, 86 mass contains 60 mass of C
60
100 mass contains  100  69.77%
86

[ 291 ]
57. A = C6H5CONH2
KOH  Br2 NaNO 2
C6H5CONH2   C6H5NH2(B) 
HCl
 C6H5N2Cl

LiAl H 4 NaNO 2
C6H5CONH2   C6H5CH2NH2 
 HCl
 C6H5CH2OH

(C) (D)
P2O5
C6H5CONH2 
 C6H5CN 
dil HCl
 C6H5COOH

(E) (F)
NH 3
C6H5COOH   C6H5COONH4 

 C6H5CONH2
(A)
Al2 O3
58.  Ammonolysis of (i) alkylhalide (ii) alcohol ROH  HNH 2   RNH 2  H 2O
 Reduction :
H 2 / Ni
(a) RC  N   RCH 2 NH 2
Ni / 
RNC + 2H2   R–NH–CH3 (20-amine)

(b) RCONH 2  4H 
 RCH 2 NH 2  H 2O
Sn / HCl
(c) RNO2 + 6H  RNH2 + 2H2O
H
  C6H5CO N /\
RNH 2  C6 H 5 COCl  + HCl
R
N-alkyl benzene carboxamide
 R  NH 2 , more basic due to +I effect.

NH2 +NH2

---------

Electron donating tendency is reduced due to presence of +ve charge on Nitrogen

as lone pair gets delocalised by resonance.

59. i)

[ 292 ]
 It fails to give aromatic amine e.g. aniline R–X can be substituted but not arylhalide
due to double bond character between \/ C  X 

O
C NO
N K + Br  
C reaction

O
(ii) This is a test to distinguish 10 amine from 20 and 30 amines.

RNH2 + CHCl3 + 3KOH   R  N  C + 3KCl + 3H2O
It provides very unpleasant smell.
(iii) The basic strength of amines follows in the order:
20 > 10 > 30 . This can be compared in respect of (a) +I effect (b) Steric effect
(c) solvation effect
In non-aqueous solvents such as benzene and also in vapour phase, relative basic
strength of methyl amine is in the order:
(CH3)3N > (CH3)2NH > CH3NH2
60. 10 amine CH 3  CH 2  CH 2  NH 2 Propan-1-amine
CH 3  CH  CH 3
| Propan-2-amine
NH 2

C2H5
20 amine N-H N-methylethanamine
CH3
0
3 amine (CH3)3N N, N-dimethyl methanamine
Distinction :

Reagent 10 amine 2 0 amine 30 amine

CH3
Hinsberg test C3 H 7 NH 2  C6 H 5SO2 Cl \ NH  C6 H 5SO 2 Cl Due to
C2H5
/
H absence
(i) C6 H 5SO 2 Cl
 C6 H 5SO 2 N /\ CH3 of N  H
(ii) NaOH C3H7
 C6 H5 SO 2 N /\ Hinsberg
N  propyl benzene C2H5
reagent
sulfonamide N- ethyl N-methyl
fails toreact.
solublein NaOH benzenesulfonamide,
insluble in NaOH

 R  NH 2 +I effect increases basic behaviour.

O
O | 
 R  C  N H2
R - C - NH2
\C O
(a) / group is an electron withdrawing group.

[ 293 ]
 (EWG) group. Due to resonance e density at ‘N’ decreases decreasing its e -donating
tendency hence lowering the basic nature.
diazotisation
61.  C6H5NH2 + NaNO2 + 2HCl 
0  50 C C6H5N2Cl + NaCl + 2H2O

 Balz - Schiemann reaction


C6H5N2Cl + HBF4 
 C6H5N2BF4   C6H5F + N2 + BF3

 C6H5N2Cl + H3PO2 + H2O 

 C6H6 + N2 + H3PO3 + HCl
 Coupling reaction.

C6H5N2Cl + H OH 
 N=N OH
P-hydroxyazobenzene (orange dye)
62. (i) RCOOH  HN 3 
 RNH 2  N 2  CO 2
Na  alcohol
(ii) RCN  4H 
LiAl H 4
 RCH 2 NH 2
(iii) Ammonolysis of alkyl halide-

alc.NH 3 RX RX RX
RX  RNH 2  R 2 NH  R 3 N  R4 N X
Tetraalkylamminium halide (which on heating) forms alkene, termed as Hofmann’s
elimination reaction)
NH2 NHCOCH3

(iv) Acylation - + CH3COCl 

For the process of nitration of aniline, to avoid protonation of –NH2 group.

NH2 +
NH3 NH2 NH2 NH2
H 
 NO 
 NO2

CH2SO4  HNO3
 2
  + +
NO2
NO2
To get p-NO2 aniline from aniline protection is necessary.

NH2 NHCOCH3 NHCOCH3

NH2

 CH CO  O HNO3
  H3 O

3 2
H 2SO4 ,  
 CH3COOH


NO2
NO2
NH2
NH2 Br Br
v)  Br2 (Aq)

Br
(2, 4, 6– tribromoaniline)

[ 294 ]
 To prepare only p-bromo aniline protection of –NH2 group (deactivated by
acetylation) necessary.

NH-COCH3 NH2
NH2 NH-COCH3
CH3COCl Br2 / CH3COOH 
H 3O
     
Br Br
Sulfonation :
+
NH2 NH3HSO4 NH.SO3H
SO3  H 2SO 4  H2O
 


+
NH2 NH3


 

SO3H SO3-

Sulfanilicacid (Zwitterion)
Zwitter ion is a dipolar ion where proton transfer takes place with basic group at one
end and acidic group at other.
This is a special type of salt where proton donation by –SO3H and accepted by –NH2
group at other end.
NaNO 2 _ HCl
63. 10 amine : RNH 2  HONO   ROH  N 2  H 2O

20 amine R 2 NH  HONO 
 R2 N  N  O
( insoluble yellow oil)
Libermann’s nitroso reaction :

R 2 N  N  O  Phenol  Conc.H 2SO 4   Brown or red colour
NaOH
  Blue or violet color

30 amine. R3N + HNO2 
 R 3 N H NO 2

(Salt formation)
Reagent
(Diazotisation)
NaNO2 + HCl
CH3NH2
NaNO 2  HCl
CH3NH2   CH3OH
No dye is formed

[ 295 ]
C6H5NH2
Aniline forms diazonium chloride due to greater stability (by resonance) of
benzolicazonium ion while CH3N2+ is unstable
+ + -
N N N N
+

This diazonium salt couples with alkaline solution of  -naphthol to orange/red

colour dye.
64. (i) Linear, branched chain polymer, cross linkaed (Bakelite)
(Nylon) (Polythene)
(ii) Addition polymer (PVC)
Condensation polymer (Nylon 6, 6)
(iii) Elastomer (Rubber) Thermoplastic polymer (Polypropylene, polystyrene)
Fiber (Nylon 6, 6) Thermosetting polymer (Bakelite)
Bio-degradable polymer (posing no threat to environment.
Example : (i) PHPV - copolymer of 3-hydroxybutanoic acid and pentanoic acid
(ii) dextron - co polymer of glycolic acid and lactic acid
(iii) Nylon-2, 6 co-polymer of glycine & 6-aminohexanoic acid.
Non-biodegradable polymer : Not degraded by micro-organisms leading to environmental
pollution.
polythene, PVC, bakelite & other commercially synthesised polymers.
65.  (i) The procss of heating natural rubber with sulfur & important additive like ZnO at
373 to 415 K to improve the properties is called vulcanisation.
Properties :
(a) excellent elasticity
(b) low water absorbing tendency
(c) Resistant to action of organic solvents, oxiding agents
Quality of rubber (natural rubber) changes with % of sulfur.
 (ii) Initiation - Benzoylperoxide
O
||
C6 H 5  CO  O O–CO–C6H5 

 2 C6 H 5 C O .

O
||

 C6 H 5 .  CO 2
C6 H5  O  O 

C6 H 5   CH 2  CH 2 
 C 6 H 5 CH 2  CH 2
Propagation.

CH 2   CH 2  C 6 H 5  CH 2  CH 2   C6 H 5  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2  CH 2 

(n 1)CH 2  CH 2
  C6 H 5   CH 2  CH 2  n  CH 2  CH 2

[ 296 ]
 Termination : The growing chain radical diactivates either by combination or by
disproportionation to form a dead polymer.
Disproportionation : C6H5–(CH2–CH2)n–CH2– CH 2  
 C6H5(CH2–CH2)n
–CH=CH2 + C6H5 – (CH2–CH2)n – CH2–CH3
Dead polymers.
Combination : X   X  
X  X
66. Antibiotics refers to substances produced wholly or partly by chemical synthesis, which
in low concentrations inhibits the growth or destroy micro organisms intervening
in their metabolic processes without harming the host.
Antibiotics have either cidal (killing) effect or a static (inhibitory) effect on microbes.
Bactericidal Bacteriostatic
Pencillin Erythomycin
Amingo glycosides Tetracyclin
Offloxacin Chloramphenicol
Antibiotics which kill or inhibit a wide range of bacteria gram positive and gram negative.
or other micro-organisms are said to be broad (e.g. ampicillin and amoxicilline
chloramphenicol ) spectrum antibiotics . Those which are effective for gram positive or
gram negative bacteria are narrow spectrum antibiotic. If effective against a single
organism or disease, the antibiotic is called limited spectrum antibiotic e.g. Pencillin-G.
ii) Antiseptic : Antiseptic and disinfectants are the chemicals which either kill or
prevent the growth of micro organisms.
Antiseptics are applied to the living tissues such as wounds, cuts, ulcers and diseases
skin surfaces. e.g. Dettol, (it’s a mixture of chloro xylenol, soframicine, furacine
tincture iodine, bithionol, 0.2% phenol solution [(0.2%) solution of phenol is
antiseptic whereas 1% solution is disnfectent.]
Analgesic (Pain killers)
Narcotic - Releive pain and produce sleep.
Heavy intaketo be avoided.
Morphine (opiate), Heroin, codemine
Non - narcotic – paracetamol, aspirin (both are antipyretic also prevent platelet
coagulation)
Due to anti blood clotting action aspirin finds use in prevention of heart attacks.
67. Soap - sodium or potassium salts of higher fatty acids (stearic acid, palmitic acid, oleic
acid)
Types of soap -
Synthetic detergents - (functions both in hard and soft water)
Classification :

 Anionic detergent - CH3 – (CH2)111– SO 3 Na  , do decylbenzene sulfonate.

There are ABS (alkyl benzene sulfonate) detergent.

[ 297 ]
  Cationic detergent –

 CH 3 
 | 
 CH3  CH 2   N  CH 3  Br 
15
 | 
 CH3 
 
These have germicided properties and are expensive and of limited use.
 Non-ionic detergents.

CH 3  CH 2 16 CO OH  H O  CH 2  CH 2O  n CH 2  CH 2  OH
Stearic acid Polyethylene glycol

O
||
 H2O
  CH 3   CH 2 16  C  O  O  CH 2  CH 2  O n  CH 2  CH 2  OH
Dishwashing detergents are non-ionic.
Cleansing action
oil R COO Na  water
dust

hydrophobic 
hydrophilic
 part
Emulsification / micelle formation favour cleansing.


[ 298 ]